CATIA Infrastructure Preface What's New?

Basic Tasks Advanced Tasks Workbench Description Customizing Glossary Index

Dassault Systmes 1994-2002. All rights reserved.

Preface
Welcome to Version 5! Version 5 is the first release of the next generation of Dassault Systmes software solutions, and addresses advanced mechanical process centric design requirements. In addition to leading edge feature-based design functions, it includes highly productive capabilities for the design of mechanical assemblies and for drawing generation. Available on both UNIX and Windows environments, Version 5 is built to be totally compliant with Windows presentation standards. In order to integrate to an extended enterprise where CATIA Version 4 designs need to be exchanged and processed, it includes unique two-way interoperability with CATIA Version 4 data. Likewise, Version 5 benefits from the breadth of the CATIA Solutions Version 4 portfolio by offering interoperable applications. As an open solution, it includes interfaces with the most commonly used data exchange industry standards. Using This Guide

Using This Guide

This book is the Version 5 Infrastructure User`s Guide. It contains information about the user interface and basic tools common to all Version 5 applications: starting a session getting help activating application workbenches creating, opening and saving documents laying out documents selecting and manipulating objects printing, viewing and navigating rendering and lighting effects using macros using Version 5 data in OLE-compliant applications customizing toolbars and settings using the Knowledgeware Advisor.

Conventions

Conventions
Certain conventions are used in CATIA, ENOVIA & DELMIA documentation to help you recognize and understand important concepts and specifications. The following text conventions may be used: The titles of CATIA documents appear in this manner throughout the text. File -> New identifies the commands to be used. The use of the mouse differs according to the type of action you need to perform. Use this mouse button, whenever you read Select (menus, commands, geometry in graphics area, ...) Click (icons, dialog box buttons, tabs, selection of a location in the document window, ...) Double-click Shift-click Ctrl-click Check (check boxes) Drag Drag and drop (icons onto objects, objects onto objects) Drag Move Right-click (to select contextual menu)

Graphic conventions are denoted as follows: indicates the estimated time to accomplish a task.

indicates a target of a task. indicates the prerequisites. indicates the scenario of a task. indicates tips

indicates a warning. indicates information. indicates basic concepts. indicates methodological information. indicates reference information. indicates the end of a task. indicates functionalities that are new or enhanced with this Release. Enhancements can also be identified by a blue-colored background in the left-hand margin. indicates functionalities that are P1-specific. indicates functionalities that are P2-specific. indicates functionalities that are P3-specific.

What's New?
Basic Tasks Enhanced: you no longer need to execute environment shells before starting a session on UNIX New: new capture mode New: print detail sheets New: new advanced search attributes New: multiselection when using the New from... command Enhanced: pasting objects using the Paste Special... command Enhanced: selecting objects using the Search command (General and Advanced modes) Enhanced: editing document links Enhanced: preselection navigator Enhanced: Multi-document supports more document types Enhanced: print area for printing multi-documents Enhanced: Capture user interface Enhanced: enhanced user interface for the Tools->Macro->Macros... command, and support of Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) Version 6.0 on Windows

Advanced Tasks New: Feature Dictionary Editor is now in the CATIA Infrastructure Workbench New: the Data Upward Assistant is now documented in the Infrastructure User's Guide New: open reference dictionary using the Feature Dictionary Editor New: catalog reorder New: installation requirements for virtual reality support Enhanced: Virtual Reality support Enhanced: stereoscopic viewing Enhanced: running a multipiped session

Enhanced: head and hand tracking devices New: Activating and Deactivating a Component

Workbench Description New: Feature Dictionary Editor

Customizing - Settings Enhanced: customizing toolbars, icon size and tooltips as well as command properties Enhanced: you can now obtain statistics on time spent using commands New: Linetype settings Enhanced: Tree settings New: the new Macros tab provides access to the Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) development environment installed with the Version 5 software

Basic Tasks
Starting Version 5 Getting Help Editing in Context Within the Product Structure Creating, Opening, and Saving Documents Viewing the Spec Tree and the Geometry Area Selecting Objects Manipulating Objects Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass Dragging and Dropping Icons and Objects Printing Documents Capturing and Managing Images for the Album Viewing Objects Navigating Hiding and Showing Objects Using Rendering Styles Setting Lighting and Depth Effects Using Standard and User-Defined Views Using Layers and Layer Filters Recording, Running, and Editing Macros Using Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant Applications Transferring Version 5 Data Managing Document Links in Version 5

Starting Version 5
Starting a Session on Windows Starting a Session on UNIX Starting a Session Using Document Icons Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on Windows Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on UNIX

Starting a Session on Windows

This task explains how to start the default CATIA Version 5 environment on Windows. Method 1: Using the Desktop 1. On the Windows desktop, double-click the CATIA V5R8 default environment shortcut Method 2: Using the Programs Menu 1. On the taskbar, select the Start->Programs-> CATIA->CATIA environment shortcut. Method 3: Using the Start->Run... Command 1. On the taskbar, select the Start->Run... command, enter the command: cnext or cnext.exe 2. Click OK. This method lets you start a session using the last environment installed. Method 4: From the Command Line 1. Open an MS-DOS window. 2. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product. The default folder is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B08\OS_a\code\bin

where "OS_a" is: intel_a (Windows NT and Windows 2000) win_a (Windows 98). 3. Enter the command: cnext or cnext.exe

Run the following command to get help on the different options: CNEXT -h The options are: -env: specifies the name of the environment with which to start a session (for more information, refer to "Managing Environments"); by default, the default environment is started -direnv: specifies the folder containing the environment -batch: starts a session in batch mode (an interactive session is not displayed) -object: followed by object to load (between " ") when starting CATIA ; for example, the following command runs CATIA and loads a document: cnext -object "e:\users\steve\Part1.CATPart" If the program you want to start requires parameters, you must enclose the program name and the parameters between " ". For example: -object "arg1 arg2" -macro: starts the specified macro -admin: starts a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings -h: displays help. Running Macros Using the CNEXT Command To start a session and run a macro automatically, run the command like this:
cnext -env CATIA.V5R8.B08 -macro E:\tmp\Mymacro.CATScript

or like this:
cnext -env CATIA.V5R8.B08 -macro -batch E:\tmp\Mymacro.CATScript

if you want to run the macro in batch mode. Starting a Session in Administrator Mode To Lock Settings 1. Enter the command:
cnext -env "my_env" -admin

where "my_env" is the name of the environment, if you want to run a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings. This prevents all users of that environment from changing the settings you locked. For more information, refer to "Locking Settings".

Starting a Session on UNIX

This task explains how to start the default CATIAVersion 5 environment on UNIX.

Method 1: Using the Desktop 1. On CDE desktops (AIX, HP-UX and Sun Solaris), open the Application Manager cabinet on the front panel. 2. Open the CATIA directory. 3. Double-click the CATIA V5R8 icon. On IRIX, access the CATIA tab Application Manager in the desktop, then double-click the CATIA.V5R8.B08 icon. You can also double-click document icons in your file manager to start Version 5. Note, however, that this starts a new Version 5 session each time: the document is not added to a Version 5 session which is already running. Method 2: Using Commands The principal command you will use is the catstart command. This command is used to launch other programs for: starting a Version 5 session (for example, CNEXT) running Version 5 environment administration tools (catiaenv, setcatenv, delcatenv, lscatenv, chcatenv, readcatenv) running Version 5 software management tools (CATSoftwareMgt, CATNodelockMgt, CATOptionsMgt and the equivalent batch commands). 1. Log on as either root or end user. 2. Enter the command:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/code/command/catstart -run CNEXT or: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/code/command/catstart

where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a to start a session using the default global environment created at installation.

You can also run the command by changing to the directory:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/code/command/

If you do so, run the command like this:

./catstart -run CNEXT or: ./catstart

Use the "-h" option to get help. The options are: -batch: used with "-object", this argument runs macros in batch mode (an interactive session is not displayed) -direnv: specifies the directory created at installation containing the environment (which may be different from the default $HOME/CATEnv directory) -env: specifies a new environment name (for more information, refer to "Managing Environments"); if you do not specify an environment, the default global environment created at installation is used -object: followed by object to load (between " ") when starting a session; for example, the following command runs a session and loads a document:
./catstart -direnv /CATEnv -env CATIA.V5R8.B08 -object "/tmp/Part1.CATPart"

If the program you want to start requires you to specify options, you must enclose the parameters between " " (for example, -object "arg1 arg2"). For example:
./catstart -run CATSoftwareMgt -object "-L"

-run This option is used to launch other programs for: starting a Version 5 session (for example, CNEXT) running Version 5 environment administration tools (catiaenv, setcatenv, delcatenv, lscatenv, chcatenv, readcatenv) running Version 5 software management tools (CATSoftwareMgt, CATNodelockMgt, CATOptionsMgt and the equivalent batch commands). The "-run" option is followed by the name of the program to start. If this option is not specified, a CATIA session is started by default. These commands also have their own options. If the program you want to start requires you to specify options, you must enclose the program name and the parameters between " ". For example, the following command:

./catstart -direnv /CATEnv -env CATIA.V5R8.B08 -run "CATSoftwareMgt -L"

lists the installed configurations and/or products on your workstation. -s: non-verbose mode -h: displays help -remote: -user: Exporting the runtime variables of the default global environment in the current window Another quick way of running a program also exists: 1. Log on as either root or end user. 2. Enter the command:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/code/command/catstart -run ksh

which exports the runtime variables of the default global environment in the current window. 3. Run the command, for example: CATSoftwareMgt

Method 3: Running Macros Using the catstart Command 1. Log on as either root or end user. 2. Go to the directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/code/command

where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a.

3. Start a Version 5 session and run a macro automatically by running a command like this:
./catstart -run CNEXT -object "-macro /tmp/Mymacro.CATScript" ./catstart -run CNEXT -object "-batch -macro /tmp/Mymacro.CATScript" ./catstart -run CNEXT -batch -macro /tmp/Mymacro.CATScript

if you want to run in administrator mode (using the default environment) for the purpose of locking settings. This prevents all users of that environment from changing the settings you locked. You could also enter the command: ./catstart -run "CNEXT -env my_env -admin" where "my_env" is the name of your environment. For more information, refer to "Locking Settings". Options for the CNEXT Program The program:
CNEXT

also has the following options: -admin: starts a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings -batch: starts a session in batch mode (an interactive session is not displayed) -c: starts a session and activates the workbench you specify -e: starts a session and executes an environment you specify -macro: used with "-object", this argument starts a session and runs the macro whose name you specify -object: followed by object to load (between " ") when starting a session; for example, the following command runs a session and loads a document: ./catstart -run CNEXT -object "/tmp/My.CATPart" Or, followed by arguments between " "; for example, -object "arg1 arg2" -h: displays help.

Starting a Session Using Document Icons

This task explains how to start a session using icons for existing documents. Method 1 1. Locate the document icon using your platform's Explorer (Windows) or File Manager (UNIX). this is a Product Structure document icon: this is a Part Design document icon: this is a Generative Drafting document icon: this a CATIA Version 4 model icon: 2. Double-click on the icon. This will run Version 5, open the document and activate the workbench used to create the document originally. Method 2 1. Drag and drop a document icon onto the CATIA V5R8 environment icon on your desktop (Windows only). Method 3 1. Drag and drop a document icon onto an open Version 5 window. Note that this possibility is not available on IRIX.

Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on Windows

This task explains how to start Version 5 in a language other than English on Windows. Installing Version 5 installs the user interface files for all supported languages: English (default language) French German Japanese Italian. You then simply use the tools on your operating system to choose the language in which you want to start your session. If no language is chosen, your session will be started in English. On Windows 1. On Windows, select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, double-click the Regional Settings control, then click the Regional Settings tab (if it is not displayed by default). The following dialog box appears:

In our example above, English is selected. 2. Select the desired language from the languages available on the list. For example, selecting any of: French (Belgian) French (Canadian) French (Luxembourg) French (Standard) French (Swiss) will start the session in French. The same applies to the other language variants. Note that The Regional Settings tab does not activate your input locale: for example, it does not activate the keyboard map for the language you selected. 3. On Windows NT only, click the Input Locales tab if you want to select the input locale for your language. The Input Locales tab is displayed. 4. Select the appropriate input locale. In our example below, you selected French (Standard).

5. Click OK, then start Version 5.

Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on UNIX

This task explains how to start Version 5 in a language other than English on UNIX. Installing Version 5 directly installs the user interface files (message catalogs) for the following languages: English (default language) French German Japanese. The user interface files for the French, German and Japanese languages are already translated for you. If you install in the default installation directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/

where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a the following default environment is set up:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog (containing the English files) /usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/French /usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/German /usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Japanese /usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Italian

This default environment (/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog) is pointed to by the environment variable: CATMsgCatalogPath.

What about the other languages? Installing the software also sets up in:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog

a subdirectory for each additional language supported (but for which translated user interface files are not provided). The list of languages is: Czech Polish Russian Korean Simplified Chinese For example:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Russian /usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Czech /usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/...

How do I run Version 5 using translated files? Copy the file to be translated from:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog

to:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Russian

and translate the file. When you run a Version 5 session, your translated files will be loaded. What about the fonts for these languages? The installation also sets up in each language directory a file named "Dialog". This file contains all the font declarations for use as is, for the language and locale you want to use (we have chosen the same fonts as used in Version 4 to facilitate the transition to Version 5). If you want to use other fonts, comment out the previous font declarations and declare the new fonts. The file also contains other user interface texts. You then simply use your operating system tools to choose the locale in which you want to start your session. If no locale is chosen, your session will be started in English. 1. Open a shell window.

2. Export the LANG variable for the desired locale before starting a session. For example, for the French language, enter this command on AIX:
export LANG=fr_FR

this command on HP-UX:

export LANG=fr_FR.iso88591

this command on Sun Solaris and IRIX:

export LANG=fr

3. Start Version 5.

Getting Help
Displaying Tooltips and Help Messages Using the What's This? Command Accessing the Online Help Library Searching the Online Help Library Getting Contextual Help Accessing the Dassault Systmes User Galaxy Displaying Copyright Information Accessing Sample Documents

Displaying Tooltips and Help Messages

This task explains how to display tooltips and the corresponding help messages. 1. Point to an icon. The tooltip is displayed in a small box, with the corresponding message in the status bar.

You can switch tooltip display on and off using the Tooltips option of the Options tab in the Tools->Customize... command, or by right-clicking any toolbar and selecting the Customize... command to access the Options tab. But you have to restart a session to take the new settings into account.

Using the What's This? Command

This task explains how to use the What's This? command to get help on toolbar icons. 1. Click the What's This? icon or select the Help->What's This? command.

The cursor takes on the shape of the What's This? icon. 2. Point to an icon, then click the icon. This displays a long help message in a box:

Accessing the Online Help Library

This task explains how to access the online help library. The Version 5 documentation is totally Web oriented, using HTML, GIF and JPEG standard formats, allowing easy access and navigation using a standard Web browser. Navigation aids includes full text searching and a framed layout allowing a direct access from the table of contents to the information. The online help library can be installed either at the same a time as you install the code, or later after the code has been installed. For detailed information about the former, refer to Installing the Online Documentation in Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time, and for the latter, refer to Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code. 1. Select the Help->Contents, Index and Search command. The welcome page of the Version 5 online help library is displayed:

If you installed the online documentation in the default location, the welcome page will be displayed immediately. If you installed the online documentation elsewhere, you must first update the CATDocView variable in your environment to reference the environment containing the online documentation. If you do not reset the CATDocView variable, a dialog box will prompt you to specify the location:

if you installed the online documentation locally on your computer, you can specify a path like this, for example, on Windows:
C:\online_doc_folder

where "online_doc_folder" is the name of the folder in which you installed the online documentation. if you installed it elsewhere on the network, you must first map the appropriate network drive before starting a session, then specify a path as above when prompted. Doc Installation Path In the General tab, accessible via the Tools->Options command. In the General category, select the General tab. The "Doc installation path" field for the CATIA Documentation Location option displays the path of the folder in which the online documentation is installed. The path is the same path you entered when installing the online documentation: the path displays the value of the CATDocView environment variable. When you request help using the Help->Contents, Index and Search command (or press the F1 key for contextual help), the online documentation may not be displayed. This may be because the online documentation may have been physically moved to another location. If the online documentation is not found, the following dialog box appears:

Browse to select the online documentation location. Selecting the location updates the "Doc installation path" field for the CATIA Documentation Location option, in the General tab accessible via the Tools->Options command. Note: You can also type the location in the "Doc installation path" field for the CATIA Documentation Location option option. You must enter the real location; otherwise, the path you enter will be ignored. Note that UNC (Universal Naming Convention) names on Windows is allowed. For example, you can specify the following path type:
\\remote_computer\online_doc_folder

2. Point to the different icons to the left to display the icons for the corresponding online users guides, then click on the icon of your choice to access the documentation. 3. Click the Infrastructure icon to get familiar with Version 5 fundamentals, or the icon for the workbench you need information about. In each case, the information you require is displayed in a framed layout:

4. Select the Home button to return to the home page. The Home page provides access to the following: the full online documentation library the Index button to access the indexes for all the workbench documentation the Search button to perform a full text search throughout the online library: for more information about searching, refer to "Searching the Online Help Library" automation documentation. The Print PDF icon is no longer available. PDFs are no longer installed automatically, but are delivered on a separate CD-ROM.

Searching the Online Help Library

This task explains how to perform full-text searching in the online help library. The online documentation is totally Web oriented, using HTML, GIF and JPEG standard formats, allowing easy access and navigation using a standard Web browser. Navigation aids includes full text searching and a framed layout allowing a direct access from the table of contents to the information.

Performing Simple, Fuzzy Searches

1. Select the Search button to perform a full text search throughout part or all of the online documentation library. Search indexes are loaded the first time you use the Search button: once the indexes have been loaded, searching is faster. The upper part of the window looks like this by default:

The default settings let you perform a basic fuzzy search throughout the entire online library.

2. For example, if you are looking for information about the CATDocView environment variable in the Infrastructure documentation, uncheck the "All Documents" option, select "Infrastructure" from the list, enter the string CATDoc and click the Go button. The search engine searches for the string CATDoc, and all words containing the string CATDoc at the beginning of the word. The search results are displayed in the "Found in" list:

Entering the string CATDocView produces the same results:

The documents containing the string you are searching for are displayed in the "Found in" field. In the search result list, the name of the product user guide in which the string has been found precedes the title of the task containing the search string. In our example, the search for the string "CATDocView" lists documents in the corresponding Infrastructure Users Guide containing the string you entered.

You can restrict your search to the documentation of a specific user's guide or search throughout the entire online documentation library by selecting "All documents" or the name of the user's guide in the "Search in" field. The following special characters are ignored: /\-& The search is not case-sensitive. 3. Double-click an item in the "Found in" list to open the document containing the search string. The page containing the search string is then displayed in a new browser window, so your search query is kept. Finally, use your browser's Find command to find the occurrence (search hits are not highlighted).

Searching Across Solution and/Or Product Documentation

1. Check the "All Documents" and "Solutions" options to search all online documentation for all solutions. This is the default setting. When using these settings, the solutions list is grayed out. 2. Check the "All Documents" and "Products" options to search all online documentation for products. Once again, the products list is grayed out. 3. In either case, uncheck the "All Documents" option to access either individual solution or product documentation, and select the documentation from the list. Click an item in the list to select it, click again to deselect it. Multiple selection is also possible.

Searching for Exact Words 1. Select the Search button. 2. Check the "Match whole word" option. 3. With the Infrastructure solution still selected, enter exact string you are searching for, then click the "Go" button. This time, if you search for the string CATDo, the search engine will not find any matches because the string CATDo is not a whole word. However, the string CATDocView will find matches:

Searching for Exact Phrases

1. Select the Search button. 2. With the Infrastructure solution still selected, in the "Search mode" pulldown list, select the "Exact phrase" option.

3. Enter the exact phrase you want to search for. For example, enter the phrase "running in demo mode", then click the "Go" button:

Only those documents containing exactly the phrase you searched for will be listed.

Searching Using AND and OR Operators You can use operators to search for several words or strings not forming a phrase (AND), or one of a list of words or strings you specify (OR). 1. Select the Search button. 2. With the Infrastructure solution still selected, in the "Search mode" pulldown list, select the "AND" option. 3. Specify the words you want to search for, then click the "Go" button. For example, search for documents containing both the strings "cnext" and "admin":

4. To search for either "cnext" or "admin", select "OR" in the "Search mode" pulldown list, enter the words "cnext" and "admin", then click the "Go" button.

Getting Contextual Help

This task explains how to get contextual help on the current command. 1. Select the Help-> CATIA V5 Help command, or press the F1 key. For example, if you are using the Edge Fillet command, the online help library is displayed in HTML format in a Web browser window, at the topic explaining how to use the Edge Fillet command:

Pressing the F1 key also lets you access the Companion, provided that the Computer-Based Training module and the Companion have been previously installed.

Accessing the Dassault Systmes User Galaxy

This task explains how to connect to the Dassault Systmes user galaxy. 1. Select the Help->User Galaxy command. A Web browser appears displaying the User Galaxy, a full online information package helping you to find all the general information you expect to find about existing and upcoming products, partners, training, hardware, R&D, services, and much more. You can also click the CATIA P2 Solutions logo in the bottom right corner of the main window to access the User Galaxy.

Displaying Copyright Information

This task explains how to get background information about the product you are using. 1. Select the Help->About CATIA V5 command. A dialog box appears providing you with copyright information about the product, version and release number, build date, etc.

Accessing Sample Documents

This task explains how to access sample documents. Sample documents (installed along with the online help library) are provided in many (but not all) cases, to support the topic scenario explaining how a specific command works. 1. Access the online help library using any of the usual methods. 2. Locate a help topic containing a prerequisite step prompting you to open a sample document. For example, the topic "Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer" looks like this:

The step highlighted in red prompts you to open the document "Select.CATPart". The name of the document is a hypertext link. 3. Click the link. If your default browser is Internet Explorer, the browser then prompts you to choose whether to save the file to disk or open it from its current location:

If your default browser is Netscape, the browser then prompts you to choose whether to save

4. Check the option "Open this file from its current location" if you using Internet Explorer, then click OK. Simply click OK if you are using Netscape because the "Open it" option is already checked. Your session is opened and the sample document is loaded:

The online documentation is installed by default on Windows in:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B08doc

The sample documents are installed in user guide-specific sample folders. In the online documentation filetree, there is one samples folder for each users guide, in the following location:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B08doc\online\xxxug_C2\samples

where "xxx" represents the three-letter code for the product. For example, the folder:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B08doc\online\prtug_C2\samples

contains the sample documents for the Part Design Users Guide. Wherever you install the documentation, if you attempt to activate the sample documents from within the online documentation without first installing the code, the samples will not work: the Version 5 document extensions must be registered on a computer where the code is installed. The registering of extensions is performed automatically on the computer during the installation of the code. However, users of Netscape in a UNIX environment who want to open sample documents (for instance .CATProduct documents containing .CATPart documents, .model documents, .CATDrawing documents, and so on) need to register these extensions by setting MIMEtypes using Netscape preferences as follows: 1. Select Edit->Preferences. 2. Click Navigator->Applications in the Category frame of the window that appears. 3. Click the New... button. This displays the Netscape: Application window:

4. Start declaring the MIMEtypes (begin with CATPart) by entering the following information: CATPart in the Description field, "application/catia" in the MIMEType field CATPart in the Suffixes field. 5. Click the Application button in the Handled By frame. If you check the option "Save to Disk" instead of "Application", the sample document will be saved on your workstation and will not open directly in a Version 5 session. 6. Enter the application path in the field. 7. Click OK when done. 8. Repeat these steps for each type of data your sample documents may contain.

Editing in Context Within the Product Structure

What Is the Product Structure? Accessing the Navigation Tools Creating a New Workbench Document in the Product Structure Activating a Different Workbench in the Product Structure Creating a New Document for a Different Workbench

What Is the Product Structure?

Every industrial product can be organized in as a logical structure comprising a large number of assemblies, sub-assemblies and parts: for example, a car (the product) has a bodywork sub-assembly (roof, doors,...), a wheel sub-assembly (comprising four wheels), and a large number of other parts. The Version 5 infrastructure provides you with a set of product structure management and navigation tools designed to help you structure and organize your products logically, and navigate within your product structure: the Product Structure workbench. If the configuration you are using provides access to the Product Structure workbench, when you open a Version 5 session, you will automatically be placed in a product structure context, and an empty product structure document (a .CATProduct document) like this will be opened by default:

The added value of this approach is not simply the possibility to structure and organize your products logically. You can also work exclusively on one type of the document, the Product Structure document. Inside this document, you can navigate from one sub-assembly or part to another, and edit them using the workbench used to create them, directly inside the product structure. This is referred to as "editing in context". Saving the product structure document also saves all the data inside the product structure. However, data created using the Part Design, Analysis and Generative Drafting workbenches is created and saved in separate documents outside the product structure. What Is the Product Structure Workbench?

The Product Structure workbench is activated by default, and the product structure icon is displayed as the current workbench. An Assembly toolbar is also displayed (beneath the Select icon):

The Product Structure workbench also provides commands on the Edit and Insert menus. These commands are also available when you activate the CATIA - Assembly Design workbench. They allow you to organize, structure and manipulate your product by: inserting new and existing components inserting new parts moving parts and components establishing context-specific representations, or hierarchical designs of assemblies in specific contexts (engineering, manufacturing, etc.) For more information about these commands, refer to the CATIA - Product Structure Version 5 Users Guide.

Accessing the Navigation Tools

Understanding the Navigation Assistant The product structure contains a specification tree. The easiest way to navigate in the tree is by simply clicking on a branch. Double-click an object in the tree to activate the object-specific workbench. The navigation assistant manages transitions between different workbenches. Three situations are possible when navigating from one workbench to another. Depending on: which workbench you come from to which workbench you want to go and what you selected before navigating the navigation assistant will: create a new workbench document in the current product structure activate a different workbench in the product structure or create a new document for a different workbench. The navigation assistant will always privilege the creation of a new document in the current product structure. Note that activating the Analysis or Generative Drafting workbenches creates new documents in a new window, not in the Product Structure. 1. You can navigate from one workbench to another using the "Welcome to CATIA V5" dialog box, which appears when you start a session or when you click the icon representing the current workbench. This contains the icons for the workbenches belonging to the configurations and/or products you installed. In our example, the workbenches illustrated are the result from installing the Mechanical Design configuration. If you do not want to display this dialog box at the start of each session, uncheck the appropriate option "Do not show this dialog at startup". 2. You can also access the workbench icons by right-clicking the current workbench icon:

3. Select the Start menu to access the same icons: the workbench names and the associated icons are displayed at the top of the menu the second area in the menu contains the list of the solutions containing the configurations/products you installed. These entries in turn provide yet another means of accessing the same product workbenches a check list lets you switch between document windows the User Galaxy lets you access the Dassault Systemes Galaxy online information package accessible via html browser (refer to "Accessing the Dassault Systmes User Galaxy" for more information). Note that, on SGI workstations, the icons do not appear next to the names on the Start menu. When the user exits the Start menu, the display area is redrawn, but on the SGI platform, a special technique has been implemented to improve display redraw performance. The use of this technique prevents icons from appearing on the menu. If you want the icons to be visible, export the following variable before starting a session: SGI_NO_OVL=YES Keep in mind, however, that if you are displaying a large model, this will degrade display performance when exiting the menu. 4. To customize the list of workbench icons available, right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the Customize... dialog box, or select the Tools->Customize... command. The Favorites list contains the workbenches available on the Start menu, the Welcome dialog box and by right-clicking the current workbench icon. To remove icons from these locations, drag the icon name from the "Favorites" list and drop it on the "Available" list,

or select the icon and click the <---- arrow. To add icons, do the reverse: drag them from the "Available" list and drop them onto the "Favorites" list, or select the icon and click the ----> arrow.

Then click the Close button to confirm. Note that the "Available" list remains the same because it contains all available workbenches. The list varies according to the configurations and/or products installed.

Creating a New Workbench Document in the Product Structure

This task explains how to create a new document inside the current product structure document, and activate the workbench for the new document. 1. Double-click the Product document in the specification tree to activate the product structure workbench and select it. Selecting it indicates your intention to create a new document inside the product structure. 2. Select the workbench using the Start menu, the "Welcome" dialog box or from the list accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon. For example, if you select Part Design, a Part Design component is added to the product structure, and the Part Design workbench is activated. Note that the symbol next to "Part1" is a product structure symbol. 3. Expand the tree (by clicking the "+" symbol) to see the Part document itself:

Activating a Different Workbench in the Product Structure

This task explains the how to activate a different workbench inside the same product structure document. 1. Identify the current workbench. For example, in this product structure document, the product structure workbench is active:

and the product structure document is active: To activate the Part Design workbench, for example, double-click the Part document, or select the Part document and access the Part Design workbench. You can use the Start menu, the "Welcome" dialog box or the list accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon.

The Part Design workbench is activated in the same product structure window:

Creating a New Document for a Different Workbench

This task explains how to create a new document and activate the corresponding workbench.

1. Click the Product document in the specification tree to activate the product structure workbench. Note that the document color is blue in the tree. 2. Select the workbench using the Start menu, the "Welcome" dialog box or from the list accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon. For example, if you select the Part Design workbench,a new Part Design document will be created in a separate window, and thePart Design workbench will be activated:

Creating, Opening, and Saving Documents

Creating New Documents Opening Existing Documents About Data Sharing Between Windows and UNIX About Filenames Creating a New Document from an Existing One Opening Most Recently Used Documents Closing Documents Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name Saving Existing Documents Saving Documents In Other Formats Saving All Documents Managing Document Save

Creating New Documents

This task shows you how to create a new document when Version 5 is already running.

Using the File -> New Command 1. Click the New icon or select the File->New... command.

The new document types you can create are listed. The list contains only the document types for the configurations/products you installed and for which you have a license.

2. In the New dialog box, double-click the document type or select it then click OK. Choose the document type from the following: Part A document like this will appear:

For more information about the Part Design workbench, see the CATIA - Part Design User's Guide. Drawing After selection of the standard to be used, a dialog box like this will appear:

For more information about the Generative Drafting and Interactive Drafting workbenches, see the CATIA Generative Drafting User's Guide and CATIA - Interactive Drafting User's Guide. Product A document like this will appear:

For more information about the Assembly workbench, see the CATIA - Assembly Design User's Guide. Analysis A document like this will appear:

For more information about the Generative Part Analysis workbench, see the CATIA - Generative Part Structural Analysis and the CATIA - Generative Assembly Structural Analysis User's Guides. CatalogDocument A document will appear like this:

Process ProcessLibrary ZipMill For more details about the above three document types, refer to the CATIA Prismatic Machining Users Guide and the CATIA Surface Machinist Users Guide.

Using the New Contextual Command on the Desktop This task shows you how to create a new document whether or not Version 5 is already running. 1. Either on the Desktop area of Windows or in the appropriate directory of Windows NT Explorer (making sure you do not select any items when doing so) right-click once then select the New command.

2. Select the document type you wish to open.

An empty icon indicating the document type is created (see "Starting a Session Using Document Icons"). 3. Click in the name field that appears with the icon just created and replace the default name with a name of your own choosing (for example, replace New CATIA Part.CATPart with MyFile.CATPart). 4. Double-click on the icon that is created. The new document is created. If you do not have a session running, a session is opened.

Opening Existing Documents

This task shows you how to open an existing document when Version 5 is already running. If you wish to access V4 data such as V4 models, PROJECT files and library objects on Windows or UNIX or access CDMA objects on UNIX you can do so provided you purchase the V4 Integration product. V4 models, PROJECT files or library objects residing on UNIX can be accessed from Windows NT using the http protocol. (Make sure beforehand that an http server has been installed on the machine where the V4 data resides. The address to be specified should look something like this: http://UNIXserver: port/V4datalocation You will not be allowed to open a document created using Version 5 if its name contains national characters or forbidden special characters. For a reminder, refer to "About Filenames". Using the File ->Open Command

1. Click the Open icon or select the File->Open... command. The following dialog box appears:

2. In the File Selection box, select the file location. 3. Click the "Files of type" list to display the list of document types which you can open:

Check the "Show Preview" option to display a preview of the selected file (only on Microsoft Windows NT workstations).

4. Select the document type. The list of document types you can open depends on the configurations/products installed and for which you have a license. Note: On UNIX workstations, the File Selection panel now lets you sort your files by date or size. The following list contains all possible document types (classified by order of appearance in the list): All CATIA V5 Files Lets you open V5 documents such as .catalog or .CATAnalysis files, for example. All CATIA V4 Files Lets you open V4 documents such as .model files.

All CATIA CAA Files Lets you browse CAA files such as .CAABsk or .CAADoc files. All Standard Files All Image Files 3dmap act asm V4 Assembly Modeling document; saved as an Assembly Design document i.e. CATProduct. For more information, see the CATIA Assembly Design User's Guide. bmp Lets you browse BMP files from within a session, without having to use another application. brd catalog Refer to "Using Catalogs". CATAnalysis CATDrawing Generative Drawing or Interactive Drafting document. For more information about the Generative Drafting and Interactive Drafting workbenches, see the CATIA - Generative Drafting User's Guide and CATIA - Interactive Drafting User's Guide. CATMaterial Material library. For more information, see the CATIA - Real Time Rendering User's Guide.

CATPart Part Design document. For more information about the Part Design workbench, see the CATIA - Part Design User's Guide. CATProcess Process document. For more information, see the CATIA Prismatic Machining Users Guide. CATProduct Assembly Design document. For more information about the Assembly workbench, see the CATIA - Assembly Design User's Guide. cdd CATIA-CADAM file. cgm

cgr

DenebProcess dbnzip dxf/dwg Autocad DXF and DWG formats. Creates a CATDrawing document. For more information, see "Exporting a CATDrawing into a DXF/DWG File" in the CATIA - Generative Drafting User's Guide. idf igs IGES file, saved as an Part Design document, i.e. CATPart document. For more information, see "Importing an IGES File" in the CATIA - Part Design User's Guide.

jpg Lets you browse JPEG files from within a session, without having to use another application. ldf library model V4 model document. For more information about the V4 Integration workbench, see the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide. picture Lets you browse CATIA Version 4 picture files from within a Version 5 session. rgb sdnf session V4 session document containing several CATIA V4 models. Converted to a CATProduct document. For more information about the V4 Integration workbench, see the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide. step, STEP, stp and STP Creates a CATProduct document. For more information, see "Importing a STEP AP203 Document" in the Version 5 - Data Exchange Interfaces User's Guide. tdg and TDG STRIM/STYLER files. tif Lets you browse TIFF files from within a Version 5 session, without having to use another application. wrl

5. If you are sure you do not intend to modify the document in any way, you may want to open the document in read-only mode. If so, check the box Open as read-only. 6. Click Open. In case an error occurs when opening a file (e.g. unknown document name, non-supported file format, corrupted file, etc.), an Incident Report panel opens. It displays the error history and indicate for each error its type, object and description. This history is maintained throughout the whole session, the errors being classified by degree of severity.

Using the Start->Documents Command on Windows This task shows you how to access an existing document without running a Version 5 session. 1. Before you open a session, click Start and select Documents. 2. Select the document you wish to open. A Version 5 session is opened and your document is displayed.

Using the Windows Explorer or My Computer on (Windows) or the File Manager (UNIX) This task shows you how to open an existing document via a document icon when no Version 5 session is already running. 1. Before you open a session, click My Computer or run the Windows Explorer and find the location of the document you wish to open. 2. Double-click the document icon. A Version 5 session is opened and your document is displayed. On UNIX, you can use the File Manager.

Dragging and Dropping a Document Icon This task shows you how to open an existing document via a document icon when a Version 5 session is already running. 1. If a Version 5 session is already open, drag and drop the icon in your Version 5 application window. Your document is opened for editing. Note that this method is not available on IRIX.

About Data Sharing Between Windows and UNIX

A communication protocol such as ftp, http or NFS is required for sharing data between Windows and UNIX. The ftp and NFS protocols can be used for sharing data between these environments. Several implementations of NFS exist, provided by different vendors. The following products have been tested using different scenarios: HummingBird NFS Maestro Version 6.1 Intergraph DiskAccess Microsoft 2.0.

Limitations Whatever technical solution you choose for sharing your data, make sure you are aware of the system limitations on file names described in "About Filenames".

Data Sharing Scenarios

To illustrate the data sharing possibilities from UNIX to NT , different kinds of scenario have been performed: 1. Transferring data by ftp.exe on a command window. 2. Transferring data using the Hummingbird ftp graphic Interface. 3. Transferring data by TAR, ftp and WinZip command successively. 4. Reading data using NFS Hummingbird. 5. Reading data using DiskAccess Microsoft. Note: all these scenarios are based on exchanges from UNIX to NT for filenames containing National or Special characters and NT forbidden characters.

Transferring Data from UNIX to NT by ftp Protocol

Scenario 1: By ftp.exe on a Cmd.exe Window ftp.exe transfer AB+CD.model on UNIX** AB CD.model on UNIX AB+CD.model on NT AB CD.model on NT Mput *.model KO KO OK OK Put 'real filename'.model KO KO KO OK Get 'real filename'.model KO KO KO OK Mget *.model KO KO OK OK

** (+ ) in the filename corresponds to the Plus/Minus character (0xb1)

Scenario Description

The first two V4 models were transferred from a UNIX login (NT server is inetinfo). The last V4 models were transferred from an NT login by ftp.exe client. Conclusion: Transferring V4 data must be done only from NT . Data exportation from UNIX must be excluded if some special characters ( like 0xb1) have been frequently used on the V4 site.

Scenario 2: By Hummingbird ftp on NT (Graphic Interface) ftp.exe transfer AB+CD.model on NT ftp.exe transfer AB CD.model on NT Mput *.model OK Mput *.model OK Put AB+CD.model OK Put AB CD.model Not done Get AB+CD.model OK Get AB CD.model Not done Mget *.model OK Mget *.model OK

Scenario Description

The V4 models have been transferred from NT login using ftp graphic command provided by Hummingbird. Conclusion: the graphic interface can be useful for a small numbers of transfers. Note: Concerning national character transfer, the ftp configuration must be in mode "NO filename verification" (which is the default).

Scenario 3: Transferring by TAR UNIX IBM 932 / FTP / WINZIP NT ISO1 Model name IBM932 AB'Japanese'CD.model AB+CD.model Model name ISO1 NT OK (Garbaged characters) OK CATIA V5 reads model OK OK

**The characters obtained after transferring Japanese filenames are garbaged because the resulting code page on NT is ISO1.

Scenario Description

The V4 models were created on UNIX IBM932. The first one contains Japanese katakana SBCS characters and the second one the Plus/Minus character. The TAR command is run on UNIX. The FTP.exe command is run on NT for transferring data. The WinZip utility is run on NT to extract the above mentioned data.

Scenario 4: Transferring by TAR UNIX IBM 932 / FTP / WINZIP NT IBM932 Model name IBM932 AB'Japanese'CD.model AB+CD.model Scenario Description The V4 models have been created on UNIX IBM932 . The first one contains Japanese katakana SBCS characters and the second one the Plus/Minus character. The TAR command is run on UNIX. The FTP.exe command is run on Japanese NT for transferring data. The WinZip utility is run on Japanese NT to extract the above mentioned data. Conclusion: mixed environments can lead to unpredictable behavior on the filename. Our recommendation is to use the same code page (ISO 646 subset). Consequently, V4 models have to be read in the same code page where WinZip utility has been performed. Model name IBM932 OK OK CATIA V5 reads model OK OK

Reading UNIX data from NT

Scenario 5: Using HUMMINGBIRD NFS Model name under UNIX AB+CD.model AB>CD.model AB<CD.model AB*CD.model AB?CD.model AB"CD.model AB:CD.model Scenario Description A few V4 models containing NT forbidden characters are read directly using NFS MAESTRO HUMMINGBIRD. Conclusion If the model name contains: national characters ( and especially +- 0xb1) metacharacters * and ? special characters the CATIA V5 File/Open box rejects them. Using NFS Hummingbird 6.1 can be recommended only if the NT_COMPATIBILITY value has been employed in the V4 CATIA declaration file to prevent future data corruption. Scenario 6: Using DISK ACCESS Microsoft Model name read in CATIA V5 NT KO : Strange unicode character KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : Does nothing KO : Does nothing KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : 'AB' result

Model name under UNIX AB+CD.model AB>CD.model AB<CD.model AB*CD.model AB?CD.model AB"CD.model AB:CD.model Scenario Description

Model name read in CATIA V4 NT OK KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : Does nothing KO : Does nothing KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : AB resulting

A few V4 models containing NT forbidden characters are read directly by DiskAccess. Conclusion: Although DiskAccess refused also the forbidden NT characters, it is possible to read National ones ( for instance, Plus/Minus character ). The same scenario has been performed between a Japanese UNIX and a Japanese NT machine: equivalent results were obtained .The Plus/Minus character and Japanese directories containing V4 models can be read directly by DiskAccess. General Recommendations We recommend that, when using these products, you activate the lock mechanism and keep the same case in file names. We also recommend that you evaluate the product within the context and environment of your company before deploying it, in order to check that it meets your needs and is appropriate for your processes.

About Filenames
This section specifies what you need to know about file names. There are a certain number of file naming constraints you need to be aware of. On both Windows and UNIX Firstly, only the ISO-646 subset of characters is authorized (with the limitations described below). ISO-646 provides the subset of characters common to all code pages, and is included in all industry standard code pages such as ISO8859-x, EUC-xxx, etc. The ISO-646 subset contains the principal symbols you characters you may need to use for naming documents: characters A to Z (upper and lower case) numbers 0 to 9 and certain special characters. However, national accented characters are not supported. Furthermore, the following special characters are not supported on Windows: > (greater than) < (less than) * (asterisk) : (colon) " (quotation mark) ? (question mark) \ (backslash) | (vertical bar) and the following special character is not supported on both Windows and UNIX: / (slash). This means that: you cannot use national accented characters or any of the forbidden special characters listed above when creating and saving documents; on UNIX, to enhance document interoperability between the UNIX and Windows platforms, a filter is activated systematically to prevent you from creating documents whose names contain special characters not supported on Windows you cannot read documents created with Version 5, and renamed using your operating system, if they contain national accented characters or forbidden special characters.

What About Version 4 Model Documents? The following table specifies, for each Version 4 data type listed, any problems in reading the data due to forbidden characters in the data name:

UNIX Data from Version 4 On UNIX model (or PRJMODEL) You can read Version 4 model documents containing Example: MY***.model either national accented characters or any of the forbidden special characters.

On Windows Impossible to read. You can read Version 4 model documents containing national accented characters, but you cannot read Version 4 documents containing forbidden special characters. You must rename the model before reading it, so it does not contain special characters. Impossible to read.

*MASTER *LISTFAM PRJ tables using ":"

You can read them.

Creating a New Document from an Existing One

This task shows you how to create a new document based on a copy of an existing one. 1. You may want to create a new document whose basic characteristics are the same as an existing document. To do this, close the document you want to copy if not already closed and select the File->New from... command. The dialog box New document from an existing file appears.

2. Select the existing document from which you want to create a new one and click Open. An exact copy of the existing document is displayed with a default name. The only difference between this document and the already existing one is that the new document is given a new UUID by the File->New from... command. (This distinguishes File->New from... from File->Save As...) The File->New from... commands also supports multi-documents. In that case, the new document will be based on a copy of the multiselection as a whole and not of each document individually. 3. Save the new document giving it a name other than the default. You can give the new document the same name as that of the already existing one if you wish but if you do this you must put the new document in another directory.

Opening Most Recently Used Documents

This task shows you how to open a recently used file. 1. Select the File->Open... command and click, at the bottom of the menu, the name of the file you wish to open.

Closing Documents
This task shows you how to close a document. 1. Select the File->Close command. 2. If changes have been made since the last save, the Close dialog box appears. Specify whether the file is to be saved or not.

Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name

This task shows you how to save a document for the first time or under another name.

1. Select the File->Save As... command.

2. In the Save As dialog box, specify the location of the document to be saved as well as its name and type. As far as STL format files are concerned, they cannot be saved using the Save As... command when using the Wireframe mode. The reason is that STL files are generated from the visualization tesselation and tesselation triangles are not available when switching to the Wireframe mode. The Save_as_new option lets you save an existing document under a new name but this new document will be given a new UUID (Unique Universal IDentifier). 3. Click Save.

If the name you give the file already exists, the following message appears:

You will not be allowed to use national characters or forbidden special characters in the document name. For a reminder, refer to "About Filenames". On Windows NT, documents cannot be stored in a folder for which delete authorization is not set.

Saving Existing Documents

This task shows you how to save an existing document.

1. Click the Save icon

or select the File->Save command.

A message appears in the status bar to confirm that the document is saved.

If the document you are trying to save points to parts, the following panel will be displayed to warn you that these parts will not be saved unless you use the File->Save All command:

If you are trying to save a document that is currently modified and saved by another user, the following panel will appear to warn that your modifications will be lost if you proceed:

When a document is saved, it is stored in the UTF8 Unicode format. This ensures that the data contained in it can be read on both Windows and UNIX whatever the session code page used. You can choose to set an automatic save for your file using the General tab of the Tools->Options... command. For more information, see "Customizing General Settings".

If you save an existing file in another directory without changing the file name you will only be able to open one of these files at any given time. If one of them is already open you will not be able to open the other. This is because both files have the same UUID. To avoid this happening each file must have its own UUID. This can be done by means of the File->New from... command. See Creating New Documents from Existing Documents.

Saving Documents In Other Formats

This task shows you how to save a document in another format. 1. Select the File->Save As... command. 2. In the Save As dialog box, select the location of the document to be saved. 3. Click the Save as type: list. 4. Select the document type from the list displayed. For example, you may wish to save: a Part Design or Assembly document as a STEP AP203 document (.stp): see "Exporting CATPart or CATProduct Data to a STEP AP203 File" in your CATIA Version 5 Interfaces Users Guide. a Drawing document as a DXF document (.dxf): see "Exporting a CATDrawing into a DXF/DWG File" in your CATIA Version 5 Interfaces Users Guide. a Drawing document as a CGM document (.cgm). see "Exporting a CGM File" in your CATIA Version 5 Interfaces Users Guide. a 3D document as a VRML document (.wrl). see "Exporting 3D Documents to VRML" in your CATIA Version 5 Interfaces Users Guide. As far as STL format files are concerned, they cannot be saved using the Save As... command when using the Wireframe mode. The reason is that STL files are generated from the visualization tesselation and tesselation triangles are not available when switching to the Wireframe mode.

Saving All Documents

These tasks show you how to save some or all of the documents you opened and how to control their names and locations. In addition to this, the Save All command lets you save very easily all modified or read only documents.

1. Select the File->Save All command. If all the documents modified in the session can be saved, they are saved automatically. Otherwise, the following dialog box will appear when some of the documents are new or read-only:

If you have made no changes to any of the documents you want to save or if these documents are read-only files, this dialog box will not appear. 2. Click OK to open the Save All dialog box:

3. Click the Save As... button to specify a name for each read only or new document. The number of unsaved files is indicated at the bottom of the dialog box and a preview is displayed on the right.. 4. Click OK to confirm.

If symbolic links exist between files, for example if a Drafting document has been created from a Part document, the names of each of these files will also appear and will be saved if the Part document is saved. However, if you want to be able to save all files independently regardless of any existing links between files, check the option Enable independent saves at the bottom of the dialog box. Clicking the Save As... button is mandatory if you want to save your document under another name.

Managing Document Save

The "Save Management..." command lets you save all your modified documents under a new name and a new location.

Note: This command is relevant for loaded documents only. In case of unloaded documents, use the File->Send To command. 1. Select the File->Save Management... command. The following dialog box will appear:

The Path column indicates all files that are currently used along with their paths. If a file has been modified or saved since last load, its state is displayed in the State column. The Action column enables you to check the actions you perform on your documents (save, modify, and so on.), the document original state being still displayed in the State column. Here are the various states that may be assigned to a document: New: identifies a newly created document. You have to select a file name in order to save it Opened: identifies a non-modified document open in your session Modified: identifies a document which has been modified in your session Read Only: identifies a modified and read-only document. You have to specify a new name for this document if you want to save it Opened Read Only: identifies a non-modified, read-only document open in your session Save: identifies a document that will be saved Save Auto: identifies a dependent document that will be saved.

2. Select the file you want to save. 3. Click the Save As... button to open the following dialog box:

4. Indicate the name and destination folder of the new created file, respectively in the File name and Save in fields. 5. Click the Save button.

When using the Save As... command for a .CATProduct document containing other modified components, these components will be assigned the Auto Save Pending state and will be saved when clicking OK.

Once you have saved a product in a new directory, you can use the Propagate directory button to save the files linked to this product into the same directory. Be careful to check that the linked files you wish to save appear in the same workbench as the product, otherwise you will not be able to run this command. For instance, in case of a .CATAnalysis or .CATProduct document, the Propagate directory... command will save any part or product associated to this document.

To go back the document original state, select the document then click the Reset button.

6. Click OK to confirm.

The Save Management... command will automatically save impacted files as well. If there are still unsaved files left when you click OK , the following message will be displayed:

Viewing the Specification Tree and Geometry Area

About the Specification Tree and Geometry Area Setting Document Window Layout Preferences Using the Full Screen Using Document Windows Using the Specification Tree Overview Using the Geometry Overview Expanding and Collapsing the Specification Tree

About the Specification Tree and Geometry Area

Version 5 provides a unique specification-driven and generative modeling approach, which captures and reuses process specifications, ultimately accelerating the design process. Version 5 offers a specification modeler which lets you concentrate the design effort on establishing the proper design specifications, while leaving it to the system to compute or update the resulting geometry when required. This approach is implemented as a generalized mechanism for all Version 5 applications, for instance feature-based part design, assembly design and drawing generation. Version 5 model, part, drawing and assembly documents consequently allow you to view and edit data either in the specification tree, the geometry area, or in both at the same time.

Setting Document Window Layout Preferences

This task explains how to set document window layout preferences. 1. Select the View->Specifications command. This is the default layout option. It displays both the specification tree and the geometry together:

2. Select the View->Specifications command again. This removes the specification tree:

You can also use the F3 key to toggle more quickly.

3. Toggle the View->Geometry command on and off to display and hide the geometry.

Using the Full Screen

This task explains how to make the geometry area fill the whole screen. 1. Select the View->Full Screen command. The geometry area fills the whole area of your screen.

2. To restore the document window to its original size, right-click then uncheck the Full Screen option.

Using Document Windows

This task explains how to use document windows. 1. Select the Window ->New Window command. A new window is opened containing the document you are editing.

The remaining commands on the Window menu let you organize your windows horizontally or vertically with respect to each other, so that they do not overlap, (Window->Tile Horizontally and Window->Tile Vertically) or in a cascading arrangement in which they overlap each other (Window->Cascade). Note that you can switch from one document window to another by selecting the window name at the bottom of the Window menu.

On the Sun Solaris platform, we recommend that you set the following desktop resource to always keep your Version 5 window on top:
Allow primary always on top

Using the Overview on the Specification Tree

This task explains how to use the overview to zoom in or out on the specification tree. 1. With the specification tree visible, select the View->Specifications Overview command (or press the Shift and F2 keys) to display the Overview window containing a view of a portion of the specification tree:

2. Point to the Overview window to display the This drags the overview viewport through which you view part of the specification tree.

cursor, and drag.

While dragging, the cursor changes to: You can zoom the size of the overview viewport by dragging the handles located at the top right and bottom left corners of the viewport.

Only that part of the tree you see inside the overview viewport will be visible in the document window.

Using the Geometry Overview

This task explains how to use the overview to view the geometry. 1. With geometry visible in the geometry area, select the View->Geometry Overview command. The geometry is displayed in the overview window, but not the specification tree:

2. Point to the Overview window to display the

cursor, and drag.

This drags the overview viewport through which you view the geometry. Only that part of the geometry you see inside the overview viewport will be visible in the document window:

Note that you can resize the overview window itself to see the whole of the viewport.

3. Zoom the size of the overview viewport by dragging the handles located at the top right and bottom left corners of the viewport. While you drag, the cursor changes to: . This lets you zoom the geometry in and out in the document window:

Expanding and Collapsing the Specification Tree

This task explains how to expand and collapse the specification tree.

1. Open a any document with geometrical data, for example:

2. Select the View->Tree Expansion->Expand First Level command to see the first level of the tree:

3. Select the View->Tree Expansion->Expand Second Level command to see the second level of the tree:

4. Select the View->Tree Expansion->Collapse All command to collapse the tree.

Selecting Objects
Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer Selecting Using the Traps Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator Selecting Using the Other Selections... Command Selecting Using the Search... Command (General) Selecting Using the Search... Command (Favorites and Advanced) Storing Selections Using Selection Sets

Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer

This task explains basic selection techniques using the pointer. Whenever you are not using an application command, the Select command is active. Using the Select command, you can select any object in your document. All the selection tools are available using this command. Open the document Select.CATProduct.

1. Select the Select icon

to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated.

2. Point to the part of the object you want to select. As you point to objects, different parts of the objects are highlighted, in the geometry area, and the object name is highlighted in the specification tree:

The identity of the preselected element is displayed in the status bar:

Highlighting will only be active if you checked the option "Preselect in geometry view" (active by default) using the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options... command. This option is active by default. You can also set the preselected element linetype using the " Preselected element linetype" option in the Visualization tab. The face on the object opposite, for example, is highlighted in red.

You can also use the same tab to set a variety of useful selection features including selected element color and pre-selected (highlight) linetype. Note that the selection color and pre-selection color are the same.

In the geometry area, you can select the constituent elements of objects, in other words: faces vertices edges planes axes.

Whenever you are using an application command, you can only select objects required as input for the command. For example, when creating a hole in a pad, you are prompted to select a face or a plane: no other elements can be selected. 3. Once the element is highlighted, click on the object to select it. In our example, the selected face now changes color because we changed the selection color:

4. Ctrl-click another face to add it to the initial selection:

Ctrl-clicking can be done in: the geometry area the specification tree lists in dialog boxes. Shift-clicking can be done in: the specification tree lists in dialog boxes.

5. To deselect, click anywhere in the background.

Edges are highlighted as you point them and arrows are displayed to indicate to which element the edge belongs to. This is especially useful in case of overlapped elements as shown in our example:

On certain objects, note that hidden faces and edges are also highlighted as you point at them. Hidden faces and edges are displayed in a different color. Refer to "Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator" for a more powerful method for selecting hidden or coincident elements.

Selecting the Esc key deselects all selected elements.

Selecting Using the Selection Traps

This task explains how to select objects using the selection traps.

Using the Bounding Outline

1. Select the Select icon activated.

to enter selection mode, if it is not already

2. Drag (using the left mouse button). A bounding outline will appear as you drag: 3. Drag the bounding outline until the object(s) you want to select is(are) completely inside the bounding outline. The objects must be completely inside the bounding outline: if not, they will not be selected. 4. Release the mouse. The objects will be highlighted to indicate they have been selected. The Selection Trap Note that you can also use the Selection Trap icon to perform the same function. You access this icon by clicking the Select icon to see the Select toolbar: .

Press and hold down the left mouse key, and slide it to the right to select the icon. The principle is the same: drag (using the left mouse button) to create the trap around the object(s). Furthermore, you can start creating the trap by pointing to an existing object, and then dragging. Note that only those objects located entirely inside the trap will be selected.

The Intersecting Trap The Intersecting Trap icon on the Select toolbar also allows selection using a trap. Any objects intersected by the trap will be selected.

The Polygonal Trap The Polygonal Trap icon works like the other traps, except that the trap you can draw is a closed polygon. Drag to define create the polygon around the object to be selected, then double-click to close the polygon. Paint Stroke Selection The Paint Stroke icon lets you select objects by simply drawing a paint stroke across them. Drag to create the paint stroke. Any object crossed by the paint stroke will be selected.

Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator

This task explains how to use the preselection navigator (or the keyboard arrows) for selecting hidden or coincident elements, or elements located elsewhere in the specification tree. Open the document Select.CATProduct

Displaying the Preselection Navigator

Method 1 1. Click anywhere in the geometry area. 2. Position your pointer over the object you want to select. 3. Press any keyboard arrow. The preselection navigator appears.

Method 2 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. In the General category, select the Display sub-category then the Navigation tab. 2. Check the option "Display the preselection navigator after ... seconds", set the spinner to the time delay, and click OK. The spinner sets the amount of time, in seconds, which elapses before the preselection navigator appears after pointing at an object.

3. Click anywhere in the geometry area using the middle mouse button, dragging slightly the cursor. 4. Point to the part of the object you want to select. 5. Press any keyboard arrow. The selection tool is displayed after the time delay you set:

Using the Preselection Navigator

The following diagram describes graphic selection tool features:

A cross pinpoints the selected location. Four arrows are used for navigating or scrolling through the object you point at. These arrows turn black when you reach an extremity. Two figures above and below the cross indicate the number of remaining elements respectively above and below the pointed object in terms of depth. An invisible area around the selection tool determines selection tool sensitivity. Note that the circle used for selection validation will not appear until you move the mouse. 1. Click the up arrow to navigate "in-depth", in other words, from the front to the back of the object, to highlight hidden or coincident elements. This method is particularly useful for large parts since it lets you select, for example, edges, faces, etc. which are not visible or accessible near the front of the part.

The cursor shape changes according to the type of the preselected element as shown below: point... edge...

or face:

The identity of the preselected element is displayed in the status bar:

Note: the preselection navigator lets you use the contextual menu. You can also navigate between different objects, not just inside single objects. When one object hides another, the preselection navigator will also let you select elements belonging to the hidden object. 2. Click the down arrow to navigate in the opposite direction, towards the front of the object. 3. Click the circle in the center to validate your selection and exit the preselection navigator. You can also press the up and down keys to achieve the same effect, and validate your selection using the ENTER key. Using any of these keys displays the selection tool automatically. The up and down arrows also let you activate the multiple selection. When you reach the end of the selection path using the up and down keys, the preselection navigator automatically goes back to the starting point and you can then re-start navigating.

4. Click the left and right arrows to navigate up and down in the object hierarchy. For example, click the left arrow and look at the specification tree to see each click on the left arrow takes you to the top of the tree, then click the right arrow to navigate downwards.

Similarly, you can also press the left and right keys to achieve the same effect, and validate your selection using the ENTER key or the left mouse button.

A prehighlight of the preselected edge is also provided which is especially useful in case of overlapped elements:

The selection tool disappears, in any case, once a selection has been made, or if you point or click outside the selection activation area around the selection tool. However, the preselection navigator can be deactivated at anytime by pressing the Esc key.

Selecting Using the Other Selection... Command

This task explains how to display an object's structure in a separate window to facilitate alternative selections. Open the document OtherSel.CATProduct

1. Select the Select icon activated.

to enter selection mode, if it is not already

2. Point to the object to highlight the element you want to select. In this example, point to the circular face at the end of the cylindrical part to highlight it:

3. Select the Other Selection... contextual command. The element is selected, and the Other Selections window appears. The window contains the location of the selected element in the specification tree, and describes the path to the top of the tree. The name of the circular face is: "Face".

You can also navigate up and down the tree inside the Other Selections window using the preselection navigator or the keyboard arrows, and select other objects.

4. This time, point to the body of the cylinder to highlight the surface.

5. Select the Other Selection... contextual command. The element is selected, and the Other Selections window appears. Note that, this time, an additional element (highlighted in blue) has been detected: Axis. This is the axis used when the cylindrical part was created. This type of element is a characteristic element.

The Other Selection... command is the only tool that lets you select characteristic elements. 6. Click on Axis to select it.

Selecting Using the Search... Command (General Mode)

This task explains how to use the Edit->Search... command to search for and select objects. You can search for: objects with a specific name, or of a specific type or color visible or hidden objects, or lines with specific linetypes or thicknesses product properties elements through the value of a specific attribute (material name, dimensions, etc.) objects created using a specific workbench, in the current document or throughout the whole document, in the selection list. Note also that you can perform searches on model documents created using CATIA Version 4.

Open the document Search.CATProduct

Performing a Quick Search for a Named Object 1. Select the Edit->Search... command. You can also run the command using the Ctrl+F shortcut.

The Search dialog box appears. 2. Click the General tab:

If the Select command was active before you selected the Edit->Search... command, it remains active. The Search...command does not prevent you from running other commands on the search results (once selected). So you can also work with other commands while the Search dialog box remains open. This means that you can: run commands using the menus and icons and also apply commands in contextual menus to selected search results using the power input field: for example, you can manipulate selected specification tree elements using the "c:center on", "c:center graph", "c:cut" commands.

When the object is selected in the search result list, you can also use the "Center graph" and "Center view" contextual commands.

If you select the Search button now, all items in the specification tree will be found. 3. Enter the name "My Sketch" in the Name field

...then click the Search button. The item "My_Sketch" and the corresponding path are highlighted in the list in the Search dialog box. A query is also generated in the "History" field:

The "Query" field lets you run one of your previous queries (with the same filter) simply by selecting it from the pulldown list.

...and the sketch "My Sketch" is preselected in the geometry area:

4. Click the Select button to select the sketch. The sketch is selected:

5. Click OK to exit search mode. Note that clicking OK has the same effect as clicking both the Select and Close buttons.

You can sort the results alphabetically by Name and Path in the Search dialog box by clicking the corresponding column header.

Searching Using a Combination of Search Criteria

Open the document Search.CATPart.

1. Select the Edit->Search... command. The Search dialog box appears.

2. Click the General tab:

3. Enter the object name in the Name field. This is particularly useful if you renamed objects using the Feature properties tab of the Edit->Properties command, or the Properties contextual command. You can also use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard. For example, entering:
*

and using the default settings for the other options in the Search dialog box will search for and select all objects in the document. Similarly, entering:
Point*

will select all objects whose names begin with the character string "Point". Check the "Case sensitive" option if you want the search to be case sensitive. Note, however, that the other options allow you to filter your searches progressively. The list below the Name field stores the names you entered during previous searches so you can select them. The names are stored only as long as the session is active: closing the session clears the list.

4. Specify the workbench in the Workbench field. By default, "*" appears in the Workbench field. To the right, the list box "Type" also contains "*". This means that the search will be performed on all types of elements created by all workbenches. In the list box, selecting a workbench filters the list of types in the Type field: for example, if you select the workbench "Part", the Type field will be filtered to contain only the element types available in Part documents and if you select the type " ", the corresponding workbench will be displayed . The same principle applies to the other document or workbench types. If the type belongs to several workbenches, a warning message will be displayed. Note: the object type is NOT necessarily the name you see in the specification tree. When you select a new workbench, by default "*" remains in the Type field. Whichever workbench is selected in the "Workbench" list box, you can search for element types belonging to any other workbench by typing the name of the type in the "Type" field. If the element type belongs to only one workbench, the correct workbench name is displayed in the "Workbench" list box.

Note: If several elements with the same name are found, whatever their type, a warning message is displayed.

If you type only the first few characters of an object type, then press ENTER, the system will automatically display the full name of the type. If several types contain the same characters, the first name containing these characters is displayed.

When you choose "From Element" in the Type field then select an element in the geometry are, the system automatically displays the Workbench and Type of the selected element. 5. Specify a color if you want to search for objects in a specific color. By default, "*" appears in the Color field. This means that the search will be performed on elements of any color. Select the desired color, or click More Colors... at the bottom of the color list to access the color chooser to select basic or previously custom colors, or add new custom colors. The option "From Element" lets you use the color of an existing element. To do so, select the element whose color you want to use in your search. The selected color will be displayed in the Color field. Refer to "Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties" for a full description of how to use the color chooser. When you apply basic and custom colors to elements, and search for elements using these colors, a search query is generated. However, the RGB code is used instead of the color name for custom colors. This is useful, for example, if you modify your color palette (for example, by deleting the custom color, or deleting the color settings file in your settings folder) then retrieve a search query. Because the query references the RGB values of the color and not the color name, changes to the color palette will not affect the search: the search will always find elements referencing a color expressed using RGB values. The names of basic colors, however, remain the same.

6. Set the filter option in the "Look:" list box. The filter options are: Everywhere: searches the whole specification tree from top to bottom, to find objects created using all workbenches; if you are performing the search in a product structure document (in design mode), the search will be performed throughout the whole product structure, inside all the documents integrated in the product structure (if these documents are accessible in design mode) In "Element": the search will only locate objects belonging to "Element" , and that can be created using the current workbench, where "Element" is the name of the active object. For example, if you are using a Part document, objects created using the Part Design workbench will be searched, but NOT objects created using the Sketcher workbench. In a further example, let's assume you have a product document which includes several parts. Let's assume the product root name is "Product.1". In this case, the filter will display "In Product.1". Selecting the filter <In Product.1> will enable you to locate only the objects that can be created in the Product Structure workbench and that belong to "Product.1". The search does not reach the lower levels in the tree: the individual elements that make up the different parts will not be searched. From "Element" to bottom: searches the elements in the active "Element", to the bottom of the tree. In the previous example (a product including several parts), selecting the filter <From Product.1 to bottom> will let you locate all the objects contained in "Product.1", to the bottom of the tree, regardless of the workshop used to create them. From current selection: this option will only be available if you already selected objects before selecting the Search... command, and searches inside the selected objects to the bottom of the tree. This is particularly useful when you know the object in which you want to search: you simply select the object, then search inside the object.

For example, to understand how this option works in our document: select "My Sketch" select the Edit->Search... command select the "From current selection" option enter the name of what you are searching for, for example "Point*" to search for all points click the Search button:

Several points are found and preselected in the Name column. The corresponding path is displayed and preselected in the Path column:

click the Select button to select it. From search results: the search is performed on the list of objects preselected in the list at the bottom of the Search dialog box. 7. Click the Search button to start the search. The Search dialog box is resized to include a list containing the search results at the bottom of the dialog box. You can deselect items in the list by clicking on them. If the list is very long, you can search the list of selected objects using the "From search results" option which becomes available once the first search is performed. To do so, respecify a search string in the Name, Type or Color, then click the Search button again.

Click the corresponding column header (i.e. Name or Path) to sort the search results alphabetically.

The Query field displays the search query formulated in the search language. This helps you to become familiar with the search language, which can be used for searching without using the Search... command. For a complete description of the search language, refer to "Using the Search Language". Click the down arrow at the end of the "Query" field to display previous search queries. Simply selecting a search query executes the search. Queries are also stored across sessions, because they are stored with your settings. This enables you to recover queries from one session to the next.

You can also use this language when you are using power input mode. The object found will be directly selected. Note: any information entered in the General tab is reported in the Advanced tab as well as the name of the last workbench on which you performed a search.

More Advanced Searching Using the More... Button

1. Select the Edit->Search... command.

The Search dialog box appears

2. Click the General tab:

3. Click the More... button.

The More... button becomes the Less... button and the Search dialog box now looks like this:

4. In the Visibility field, choose: visible: searches for visible elements hidden: searches for element hidden in the No Show space. For more information about visible and hidden elements, refer to "Hiding and Showing Objects". 5. In the Layer field, select the layer number in which you want to perform the search. 6. Specify the line type in the Dashed list box. 7. Specify the line weight in the Weight list box. The combo boxes of the general graphic properties are identical to those of the Graphic Properties toolbar. For detailed information, refer to Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties. 8. Click the Search button to start the search. 9. Select the Less... button to return to the original Search dialog box.

Selecting Using the Search... Command (Favorites and Advanced Modes)

This task explains how to use the Favorites and Advanced modes of the Edit->Search... command.

Open the document Search.CATProduct

Searching Using the Favorites Mode

The Favorites mode lets you save your favorite queries in order to reuse them as many times as you wish, without having to reenter your search criteria. 1. Select the Edit->Search... command. You can also run the command using the Ctrl+F shortcut.

The Search dialog box appears. 2. Click the General tab:

3. Enter your query in the corresponding fields...

...then click the Search button.

For more information on searching using the General mode, refer to the Selecting Using the Search... command (General Mode) task.

Your query is generated in the History field and the Name and Path of the query are highlighted in the search list.

4. Click the Add to favorites... button. The Create a favorite query... dialog box appears:

5. Key in a name for your query or leave the default name displayed in the Name field. The query syntax is displayed in the Query field and can be modified if necessary. 6. Click OK then Close.

The query is added to your favorites. Favorites are stored across sessions, because they are stored with your settings in the SearchFavoriteQueries.CATSettings file. This enables you to recover your favorite queries from one session to the next. 7. Select the Edit->Search... command then click the Favorites tab. Your query is displayed in the Favorites list.

You can select a query then use one of the three icons displayed to move up delete this query.

, move down

or

A query may be modified directly in the Favorites list by clicking its name or its content under the corresponding column. You can also click the column headers to sort the queries alphabetically.

8. Double-click the query to begin the search. The filter option in the Look list is automatically updated to match your search criteria. The query is also generated in the Generated queries field. The generated query is not editable and is displayed for information only.

Double-clicking a query in the Favorites mode automatically updates the data displayed under the General tab accordingly.

...and the object is preselected in the geometry area. 9. Click the Select button to select the object. The object, My Sketch in our example, is selected. 10. Click OK to exit the search mode.

Searching Using the Advanced Mode The Advanced search mode lets you compose more precise queries using a combination of search criteria as well as the "And", "Or" and "Except" operating signs. Open the document Search.CATPart.

1. Select the Edit->Search... command then click the Advanced tab:

3. Select an attribute for the Attribute field. Each workbench corresponds to a list of types and each type corresponds to a list of attributes, among which: Name: indicate the name of the searched element Color: select a color from the color chooser or use the color of an existing element Set: a selection set indicating a numeric value with the corresponding unit of measure Visibility: indicate if the searched object is hidden or visible Layer: indicate the layer of the searched element. Setting this attribute to "None" means that you will search for any object which is not assigned to a layer. Note that Layer and Visibility attributes are identical to those displayed in the Graphic Properties toolbar. The above mentioned attributes are permanent attributes, i.e. associated to any element type. Depending on the value you select, the corresponding Attribute`s criterium dialog box is displayed. For example, if you select the attribute "Name", you will see:

The Product Structure workbench lets you search for dynamic attributes you defined for a product. To do so, just select "Product Structure" in the Workbench field, "Product" in the Type field and "Revision" in the Attribute field then enter your value in the Attribute`s criterium dialog box.

4. Select the operating sign in the list box then enter a value in the field. You can also use the default value (*) as a wildcard. In our example, we selected the attribute "Name", the "!=" operating sign and the value "line*" in order to search for any element whose name is different from a name starting with "line". The number of operating signs displayed in the list depends on the attribute you chose. Here is an exhaustive list of the available operating signs: = ! = (different) < <= > >= Check the "Case sensitive" option if you want the search to be case sensitive. The attribute name appears then in capital letters in the query.

5. Click OK when you have entered your attribute criteria. 6. Select a Workbench. 7. Select a Type. By default, "*" appears in the Type field. To the right, the list box Workbench also contains "*". This means that the search will be performed on all types of elements created by all workbenches.

When you choose "From Element" in the Type field then select an element in the geometry area, the system automatically displays the Workbench and Type of the selected element.

8. Within a product structure, you can also search for elements in the product structure which possess certain properties. You assign properties to products (and parts in products) by selecting an element from the Product property list box. The properties you can search for (the same as those you assigned to the element) are: Part Number Revision Definition Nomenclature Product Description Component Description. If you type only the first few characters of a property, then press ENTER, the system will automatically display the full name of the property. Once you have chosen the property, type in the value of the property in the "of value" field. For example, if you assigned a description to the element, you must select the "Production Description" property then enter text included in the description.

If you select the Drafting workbench, you can search for dimensions by selecting the "Dimension" value in the Type field then entering your value or scale of value in the Attribute`s criterium dialog box. For example: Drafting.Dimension.Value<=140mm searched for all objects created using the Drafting workbench, of type Dimension with a value lower than 140 millimeters Drafting.Dimension.Value='137mm-138mm' searches for all objects created using the Drafting workbench, of type Dimension with a value between 137 and 138 millimeters. These two values are separated by "-". The Drafting workbench also lets you search for elements of type Geometry such as 2D lines, 2D curves and so on. For more information, refer to the Searching Using a Combination of Search criteria part in the Selecting Using the Search... command (General Mode) task in this guide.

9. Use the And, Or and Except buttons to combine several search criteria and refine your query. The query is displayed in the Generated queries field and can be modified, for example to add brackets and group queries together.

In our example, we are searching for elements created using the Part Design workbench and whose names begin with the character string "line" or "circle": For more information on the search language, refer to the Using the Search Language task in this guide.

10. Set the filter option in the "Look:" list box. 11. Click the Search button to start the search. A list containing the search results is displayed at the bottom of the Search dialog box:

You can add your query to your favorites by clicking the Add to favorites... button. For more information on favorites, refer to the Searching Using the Favorites Mode.

In case you want to delete the query you entered, just click the

button.

12. Click the Select button to select the objects in the geometry area. 13. Click OK to exit the search mode.

Note: when the object is selected in the search result list, you can also use the "Center graph" and "Center view" contextual commands.

Storing Selections Using Selection Sets

This task explains how to group selections and store them in selection sets.

Selection sets are saved with your documents. Open the document SelectionSets.CATProduct 1. Select several objects. For example, select two of the lines:

2. Point to the selected objects, right-click to display the contextual menu, and select the Selection Sets... command. The Selection Sets dialog box is displayed:

The list contains a highlighted item: <Current Selection>. The current selection contains the element you selected before selecting the Selection Sets... command.

3. Click the Create button. A selection set named "Set001", and containing the lines, is created. Each time you create a new selection set, the number is incremented. You can also rename the selection set using the text field at the bottom of the Selection Sets dialog box. Once a selection set has been created, just double-click the corresponding line in the list to reuse it.

4. To add more elements to your selection set, click the selection set name in the list, continue selecting elements, then click the Add button. In our example, add the hole to the selection set and click the Add button:

You can add objects to any selection set, and to the <Current Selection>. If you want to recover your original selection, click <Current Selection> in the list. If you want to delete a selection set, select the selection set and click the Delete button. Note that you cannot delete the <Current Selection>.

5. Click the Close button. You can create a selection set quickly by selecting the objects, then right-clicking to select the Define Selection Set command. You can then use the Selection Sets... command to add objects, rename the selection set, or delete it.

Manipulating Objects
Undoing Actions Redoing and Repeating Actions Cutting and Pasting Objects Copying and Pasting Objects Using the Paste Special... Command Deleting Objects Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties Measuring Objects

Undoing Actions
This task shows you how to reverse the last action. 1. Click the Undo icon or select the Edit->Undo command.

This cancels the last action performed.

2. If you want to undo one or more actions preceding the last one you simply have to repeat step 1. Performing an Undo action may cancel the active object itself. This is indicated by the caption Undo Active Object opposite the Edit->Undo command. If you do remove the active object in this way it can easily be recovered. Some actions cannot be undone. When this is the case, the Undo icon is grayed out.

A maximum of 10 undo actions is possible.

Redoing and Repeating Actions

This task shows you how to recover the last action undone, and repeat actions. 1. Click the Redo icon or select the Edit->Redo command.

2. If you want to repeat the last action more than once, simply repeat step 1 as many times as required. The Redo can only be used to recover what you have canceled by performing an Undo. It cannot be used to perform actions not canceled by an Undo. A redo may recreate an active object. This is indicated by the caption Redo Active Object opposite the Edit->Undo command. Some actions cannot be redone. When this is the case the Redo action is grayed out.

A maximum of 10 undo actions is possible. The Redo command is replaced in certain cases by the Repeat command, enabling you in the right conditions to restart a command that you just used.

Cutting and Pasting Objects

This task shows you how to remove the selection and paste it to the desired location. 1. Select the object you want to cut.

2. To cut, you can either: click the Cut icon select the Edit->Cut command select the Cut command in the contextual menu, or in the geometry area or the specification tree, drag the selection (although not a graphical cut, this is equivalent to the cut operation).

Note: This places what you cut in the clipboard.

3. To paste, you can either: click the Paste icon select the Edit->Paste command select the Paste command in the contextual menu, or in the geometry area or the specification tree, drop what you are dragging (see above).

1. The application workbenches offer a variety of specific cutting and pasting scenarios. 2. Contextual features such as fillets or extracts cannot be pasted if their parent element (edge, face, etc.) has not been previously selected.

Copying and Pasting Objects

This task shows you how to copy the selection and paste it to the desired location.

1. Select the object you want to copy.

2. To copy, you can either: click the Copy icon select the Edit->Copy command select the Copy command in the contextual menu or in the geometry area or the specification tree, press and hold down the Ctrl key and drag the selection.

Note: This places what you copy in the clipboard.

3. To paste, you can either: click the Paste icon select the Edit->Paste command select the Paste command in the contextual menu or in the geometry area or the specification tree, drop what you are dragging (see above). 1. The application workbenches offer a variety of specific copying and pasting scenarios. 2. Contextual features such as fillets or extracts cannot be pasted if their parent element (edge, face, etc.) has not been previously selected.

Using the Paste Special... Command

Copying Solid Objects Using the Specification Tree Copying Surfacic Objects Using the Specification Tree Copying Contextual Features and Surfacic Objects Using the Geometry Area

This task explains how to use the Paste Special... command. This implies the understanding of the type of features you can paste using this command as well as the various formats available for pasting elements.

Open the CCP.CATProduct document:

In our example, the CCP.CATProduct document contains some of the types of features you can paste using the Paste Special... command. Here is the detailed list of the features: PartBody Body.n (provided that it contains a solid feature such as a pad) Pad Sketch OpenBody Points, lines, planes, etc., i.e. surfacic features Constraints.

Then, depending on the type of object you are pasting, you will be able to choose between the following format(s): As Specified in Part Document: the object is copied as well as its design specifications AsResultWithLink: the object is copied without its design specifications and is linked to the original object. In other words, whenever the original object is modified, the copied object may be manually updated to reflect the changes AsResult: the object is copied without its design specification and without any link with the original object. It is considered as an autonomous entity As Specified in Product Structure As Specified in Assembly The following table sums up the relationship between the available formats and the feature to be pasted:

Now let`s go to copying objects!

Copying Solid Objects Using the Specification Tree

This scenario assumes there are two documents: CCP.CATProduct, containing the elements to be copied, and the target document. 1. Select Part Body. 2. Select the Edit->Copy command. 3. Select the Edit->Paste Special... command. The Paste Special panel opens and displays three paste options, detailed hereafter.

if you select the AsResult option, a solid is created under

a body named "Body.n", n being incremented according to the number of existing bodies:

or

under a body named "Result of BodyUserName" in case the original body has been previously renamed via the Edit->Properties->Feature Properties command:

This solid can, in turn, be copied on the condition that it is pasted onto a mechanical body and in the first position in the mechanical body (in case there is no body to paste the solid, a new body will be created). Note that if you had selected a location for the copied element, the result would have been the same.

if you select the As specified in part document option:

The object is copied with its design specifications, each component number being incremented.

if you select the AsResultWithLink option:

The object is copied with its design specifications. The pasted object is identified with one of these two symbols: a blue arrow indicates that the geometry has been copied to the same document and is still linked to the original object. The copied object can be manually updated whenever the original object is modified. This copy is located under a body named "Body.n", n being incremented according to the number of existing bodies. In case the original body has been previously renamed by the user via the Edit->Properties->Feature Properties->Feature Name command, the copy is located under a body named "Result of BodyUserName" a circle indicates that the geometry has been copied from a document different from the document to which it is pasted. For more information on the various referenced geometry symbols, refer to Symbols Used in the Specification Tree.

When opening a document containing a body pasted "As Result with Link", the corresponding symbol displayed in the specification tree will be . This symbol means that the pointed document has been found but not loaded. To correct this, select the object in the tree then the Load contextual command or the Edit -> Links->Load command. The symbol will then change to indicate that the object has been copied from a document different from the document it is pasted to and that it is synchronized with its reference.

Copying Surfacic Objects Using the Specification Tree

This scenario assumes there are two documents: CCP.CATProduct, containing the elements to be copied, and the target document. Open the CCP.CATProduct document. 1. Select Point.1. 2. Select the Edit->Copy command. 3. Select the Edit->Paste Special... command. The Paste Special panel opens and displays three paste options:

Depending on the paste location you select, the result is as follows:

if you select PartBody, the point will be copied under the current body (if suitable), then the first available Open Body if there is one. The number of the copy is incremented, whatever Paste option you choose.

In case no Open Body exists, a new Open Body will be created to paste the point.

if no paste location has been previously selected, the result is identical to the one detailed above, i.e. the point will be copied under the current Open Body (if suitable), then the first available Open Body if there is one, whatever Paste option you choose: the point will be copied under the current body (if suitable), then the first available Open Body if there is one. The number suffixing the name is incremented accordingly or in case no Open Body exists, a new Open Body will be created to paste the point

if you wish to copy the point to a new document using the As specified in Part document option: the point will be copied under the current body (if suitable), then the first available Open Body if there is one. The number suffixing the name is incremented accordingly or under a new Open Body if no Open Body exists

if you intend to copy the point to a new document using the AsResultWithLink option: the point will be copied under a node named "External References" if you select the Part Body, the part itself or no destination at all or under the Open Body if you select an Open Body

In both cases, the pasted element contains a green symbol indicating that it has been copied from a document different from the document it is pasted to and that it is synchronized with its reference.

if you intend to copy the point to a new document using the AsResult option:

the point will be copied under the current body (if suitable), then the first available Open Body if there is one. The object number is incremented.

or

under a new Open Body if no Open Body exists

In both cases, the pasted element contains a red symbol indicating that the pasted element is isolated, i.e. it can no longer be edited.

Copying Contextual Features and Surfacic Objects Using the Geometry Area
This scenario aims at explaining how to paste contextual features and surfacic objects by selecting an object in the geometry area. In our example, we assume there are two documents: CCP.CATProduct, containing the elements to be copied and the target document.

Open the CCP.CATProduct document.

Contextual Features 1. In the CCP.CATProduct document, select EdgeFillet.1. Three results may occur depending on the elements contained in the target document: . if you try to paste the edge fillet onto a part body with no pad, an error occurs since a fillet needs an element of type Pad to be pasted to. The following panel will appear:

b. if you try to paste it to a pad with its sketch and you select one or more edges, the edge fillet is correctly pasted:

c. if you try to paste to a pad with its sketch and did not select any paste location, an error occurs since several edges exist and the following panel displays:

Click Edit then OK to close the Feature Definition Error panel. In the Edge Fillet Definition dialog box opens, select the object(s) to fillet as well as the radius value and the propagation. (Refer to the Part Design documentation for more information on creating an edge fillet) Note that if you selected the Edge.1 line the Edit panel would have appeared instead of the Edge Fillet Definition panel to let you select the element to paste the fillet to. Click OK to validate.

The edge fillet is pasted:

Selecting the Deactivate button results in the deactivation of the edge fillet representation, i.e. it appears in the specification tree only with the following symbol:

Selecting the Delete button amounts to clicking the Close button.

Note: As far as contextual features with multiple entries are concerned, we recommend that you use PowerCopies to copy/paste multiple elements or single elements taking multiple features as entry specifications. For more information on using PowerCopies, refer to Version 5 Generative Shape Design User`s Guide - Managing Power Copies.

Surfacic Objects 1. In the CCP.CATProduct document, select Line.1. 2. Select the Tools->Parent/Children... command:

This panel enables you to display the dependencies between the elements to be copied. 3. Once these dependencies are displayed, you can either select only the necessary elements (using the multi-selection) or select the whole Open Body before pasting them using the Edit->Paste Special... command.

Deleting Objects
This task shows you how to delete an object. 1. Select the object or objects you wish to delete, either in the specification tree or in the geometry tree. The object(s) selected are highlighted in both the geometry area and the specification tree.

2. Select the Edit->Delete command or the Delete... command in the contextual menu. Deleting objects may lead to deleting other objects dependent on the object to be deleted.

When this is the case, a dialog box appears identifying which features are impacted by the deletion, and prompting you to decide whether to delete the impacted features or not.

3. Click the More>> button when necessary for more advanced deletion possibilities:

4. Select OK to confirm.

Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties

This task shows you how to display and edit the graphic properties of a selected object. 1. Select the object. The object to be selected when using the Part Design application is the PartBody item in the specification tree.

2. Select the Edit->Properties command or select the Properties command on the contextual menu. A Properties dialog box similar to the one opposite is displayed:

You can also select the View->Toolbars->Graphic Properties command. The Graphic Properties toolbar is displayed: By default, the Graphic Properties toolbar is hidden.

The graphic properties available in this toolbar are identical to those of the Properties dialog box, the only difference being the availability of the Layer box. For more information on this box, refer to Assigning Objects To Layers in this guide.

The opposite capture illustrates the relation between the displayed boxes and the graphic properties they impact:

The Painter icon lets you apply graphic properties from one object to another. To do so: select the object(s) you want to apply new graphic properties to click the Painter icon select the reference object, i.e. the object from which you will copy the graphic properties 3. Click the Graphic tab to display the graphic properties of the current object:

The graphic properties available for editing are: Fill Color (colors the current object) and transparency Edge Color, Linetype and Weight Line and Curve Color, Linetype and Weight Point Color and Symbol Show and Pick attributes Set as default

4. To set object colors, click the Color combo box for Fill. A list appears containing: a blank color field (No Name) a list of sixteen default colors from the color palette, ready for use the More Colors... option.

In addition to those options, the Graphic Properties toolbar also contains the "Auto" option to make the color standard.

5. Select the desired color. The selected color is now displayed in the field in the combo box. Pointing the cursor over the combo box displays the name of the selected color.

When you apply a color onto an Assembly object, any other element located at a lower level in the specification tree will inherit this color. However, the color modification only impacts display at a rendering level and not graphic properties. This may be useful, for instance, to highlight an object among other without altering its graphic properties. If you want to deactivate inheritage, just click the color combo box.

6. To access more colors, or to create your own colors, click the More Colors... option at the bottom of the list to access the color palette:

In the Basic Colors area, the first sixteen colors (in the top two rows) are the same as those in the previous list. The remaining four rows contain extra colors. The Custom Colors area contains sixteen free boxes in which you can place your custom colors. 7. Click the Define Custom Colors >> option to display the full color palette and color customization tools:

The colored area with the cross represents a color spectrum. Drag the cross inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below the spectrum. The HSL (Hue, Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red, Green and Blue) values vary according to where the cross is located. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields provided to suit your exact color specifications. Move the arrow up or down to vary the brightness of the custom color.

8. Once you are happy with the color, click one of the free boxes in the Custom Colors area, then Click the Add to Custom Colors option to add the custom color.

9. Click on the custom color, then Apply. The color is now displayed in the Color fill field of the Graphic properties tab.

10. Click OK in the Properties dialog box. The color of the selected object is changed:

11. To make the part more or less transparent, drag the Transparency slider to set the appropriate value (between 0 and 255). Note that you can set either of two transparency modes: Screen Door Alpha Blending with the Performance tab using the Tools->Options command. For more information, refer to "Customizing Performance Settings".

If you use the Graphic Properties toolbar, "100%" corresponds to a full visibility and when you are working in a non material mode, only 2 transparency types are available: "0%" (no transparency) and "50%" (semi-transparency). 12. To set color edges on parts, click the Color combo box for Edges and proceed the same way. 13. To set edge line types and weight, use the appropriate combo boxes. 14. If you selected a line or curve, you can set line and curve color, linetype and weight the same way as for parts. 15. If you selected a point, you can set the point color in the same way as for parts. To select the symbol used to represent the point, select the symbol from the Symbol combo box. 16. In the Show, Pick and Layers area, check the Shown check box if you want the object to always be visible, in other words, to always be in Show mode or always hidden (i.e. No Show mode). For more information about the show and no show modes, refer to "Hiding and Showing Objects". 17. Still in the Show, Pick and Layers area, check the Pickable check box if you want the object to always be selectable.

18. The Layer box indicates the number of layers the selected objects are assigned to. Otherwise (when nothing is selected) it indicates the current layer. Use the pulldown list to choose among the list of named layers: None, 0 General, 1-999 (according to the number of layers in the Layer list). For more information, refer to Assigning Objects to Layers. The Layer box also contains the "Other Layers..." command which lets you create your own named layers. Refer to "Creating New Layers" for more details.

19. Click Apply or OK to confirm.

Some applications, Drafting for example, do not display all available tabs in the Edit->Properties dialog box when it is first displayed. Click on the More... button to access any other tabs. The More... button then disappears. In the case shown below, if you now click on the More... button, the Feature Properties tab appears alongside the three already shown.

Measuring Objects
This task introduces the Scale Planes command which lets you measure objects directly on screen with a scale 1 (real size display) or lower/greater according to your needs.

For an optimized accuracy, you should store your screen dimensions (in millimeters) in the two following variables: CATWidthMMOfScreen CATHeightMMOfScreen otherwise, the measured dimensions may vary according to the operating system.

Open the ScalePlanes.CATProduct document.

1. Select the View->Render Style->Perspective or View->Render Style->Parallel to display the object in a perspective or parallel view, respectively:

Note: Perspective is related to the size of the object being viewed and the distance from the object to the observer. 2. In the PowerInput field, key in the following command: c:Scale Planes then press Enter.

The Scale Planes command is also accessible via the Commands tab of the Customize dialog box. For more information on customizing commands, refer to Customizing Command Properties in this guide.

The Scale Planes Properties dialog box opens:

and the scale plane is displayed:

As shown in the picture, the scale plane is represented by a transparent grid which lets you visualize the object displayed behind. This grid is divided into squares, each of them being equal to a tenth of the default Width and Height values indicated in the Scale Plane Properties dialog box.

3. In the Scale Plane Properties dialog box, key in a Scale value, "0.5" for instance. The default value ("1") provides a real size display whereas "0.5" corresponds to a halfsize display. You can thus measure small objects by entering a scale factor greater than 1 as well as big objects by entering a scale factor lower than 1. 4. Set the scale plane Width and Height in millimeters. In our example, we will keep the default values. Note: The "Show the grid" option lets you activate or deactivate the grid display. It is recommended to display the grid when you are working in a conical projection. 5. Click Apply then OK to validate and close the dialog box. 6. Adjust the viewpoint so that the object is correctly snapped on the grid. To do so, follow the instructions below according to the view you selected: if you are working in a parallel view (i.e. cylindrical projection), running the Scale Planes command moves the user viewpoint so that the object is automatically displayed in the selected scale. You just have to translate the viewpoint horizontally or vertically to align the object on the grid:

The zoom mode is locked when running the Scale Planes command in a parallel view.

if you are working in a perspective view (i.e. conical projection), zoom progressively until the object is displayed in front of the grid then translate the object as necessary to align it with the grid and facilitate the measurement:

Let`s take a look at our model which has been correctly positioned. We are now able to measure the hole diameter: 4 squares of 10mm each = 40mm, according to the scale defined in Step 3.

Note: Translating or zooming the object does not affect the grid size since its dimensions are defined in the Scale Plane Properties dialog box. 7. Key in c:Scale Planes once again in the PowerInput field to exit the command.

Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass

About the 3D Compass Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass Manipulating Objects Using the Edit... Command Snapping the Compass to Selected Objects Automatically Locking the Current Compass Orientation Locking the Privileged Plane Parallel to the Screen Swapping the Privileged Plane Making the Privileged Plane the Most Visible

About the 3D Compass

You can use a graphic manipulator referred to as the 3D compass to perform a certain number of manipulations on certain objects created and managed by certain applications (for example, Product Structure, Assembly, FreeStyle Shaper, DMU Navigator, etc.). You can also use the compass to manipulate viewpoint representations ("cameras") used to capture viewpoints and materials (in P2 mode using the Real Time Rendering application). The 3D compass is always active. You can show and hide the compass by toggling the View->Compass command. Note that hiding the compass does not deactivate it.

The compass is displayed by default in the top right corner of the document. The letters X, Y and Z represent the axes. The Z axis is the default orientation. The point close to the Z axis is the free rotation handle used for freely rotating the compass and the document's objects at the same time. The red square is the compass manipulation handle you use to drag the compass and place on objects to be manipulated. You can also rotate objects around this point. The base of the compass, the XY plane, is the privileged plane. This concept is not useful when simply using the Select command. It is only useful when using application commands that use manipulators which require working planes (for example, when creating planar patches or modifying control points using the FreeStyle Shaper).

What Can You Do With the 3D Compass? The 3D compass lets you: manipulate viewpoints using the mouse and compass: this is just another way of panning and rotating all objects in the document at the same time move and rotate non-constrained objects using the mouse and compass Moving objects in this context means physically moving them so as to redefine their spatial coordinates with respect to the absolute axis system in a document. Moving should not be confused with panning an object, which simply modifies the viewpoint from which you look at an object: the position of the object in the document remains the same. move and rotate non-constrained objects using the Edit... contextual command lock the compass orientation snap the compass automatically onto a selected object set the plane in which you move objects parallel to the screen switch the privileged plane to the XZ or YZ planes of the compass use the privileged plane as a working plane in applications such as the FreeStyle Shaper application, for example, when manipulating control point manipulators on planar patches and curves. If you are also using the Assembly application, which provides a number of advanced positioning tools, consider the 3D compass as a preliminary tool for positioning components in space prior to fine positioning of those components within the assembly. If you are using a space mouse, you can also manipulate the 3D compass when it is in the scene, otherwise the space mouse lets you manipulate the viewpoint.

Which Objects Are We Talking About? You can use the 3D compass to manipulate non-constrained objects, in other words, objects not linked together by constraints. However, you can manipulate groups of objects in assemblies which are linked to each other by constraints. About Moving Objects with the Compass When you create a pad, for example, you create it from a sketch which itself is located in a fixed plane, either a reference plane or a plane you create. When you drag and drop the compass onto the pad (refer to "Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass" for more details), a message will inform you that certain elements in the pad are fixed (the plane from which the sketch was created), and therefore you cannot move the pad. If you select the sketch, then select the Parent/Children contextual command, you will see that the parent of the sketch is a fixed plane. You cannot move the pad until you have either isolated the fixed element (using the Isolate contextual command).

Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass

This task explains how to manipulating viewpoints by simply dragging certain parts of the compass using the mouse. This is just another way of panning and rotating all objects in the document at the same time. You can: pan along the direction of any axis (X, Y or Z) of the compass rotate in a plane pan in a plane rotate freely about a point on the compass view the document perpendicular to any of the axes of the compass.

Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct

Note: the 3D compass and the absolute axis at the bottom right of the document are aligned identically by default. 1. Rotate to see how the objects, 3D compass and the absolute axis are rotated together.

2. Point to the compass. The cursor shape changes to: . You will also notice that the following parts of the compass are highlighted as you point to them: compass axes arcs on the planes of the compass and the planes themselves. When you drag any part of the compass, the cursor shape changes to: .

If you checked the option "Display manipulation bounding box" in the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options command, a box will appear around the selected object if it can be manipulated by the compass.

In our example, point to and click on the planar patch to see the bounding box appear. The edges of the bounding box around a selected object always remain aligned with the compass axes.

3. Drag any axis on the compass. The viewpoint is panned along the direction of the axis. For example, dragging the Z axis upwards pans up along the Z axis like this:

4. Drag an arc on the compass. For example, dragging the arc YZ to the right rotates the objects in the plane subtended by the arc YZ like this:

Dragging close to the red square rotates the objects quickly; dragging further away from the red square rotates more slowly. The rotation axis used is the same as that used when rotating using the other rotation tools. 5. Drag a plane on the compass. For example, dragging to the right the plane subtended by the arc ZY moves the objects on the same plane like this:

Select the View->Render Style->Perspective command to perceive the effect more easily. 6. Drag the free rotation handle (the point at the top of the compass) to rotate the objects freely like this:

7. Point to either X, Y or Z to highlight the letter, then click the letter to make that axis perpendicular to your eye-point. Clicking the same letter reverses the point from which you view the objects. For example, clicking the letter Z lets you view the document along the Z axis like this:

Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass

Using the mouse and compass, you can manipulate not only viewpoints but also non-constrained objects recognized by the compass, by moving or rotating them. You do so by dragging and dropping the compass onto the object to be manipulated. Note that object manipulation using the compass is also available for P1 users, except for those working in Part Design and Generative Shape Design workbenches.

Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct. 1. Point to the compass manipulation handle (the red square located on the privileged plane at the base of the compass).

The cursor shape changes to:

whereas its initial shape was :

2. Drag the compass.

As you drag the compass, the , cursor shape changes to: and the compass now looks like this:

The axis is the Z axis by default. The square base represents the current privileged plane. The privileged plane is realigned with one of the planes on the object and is snapped to the object. 3. Release the mouse button to drop the compass onto the object. Dropping the compass onto the object snaps the compass to the object and selects it. The compass changes color; the default color is light green. You set this color using the Handles option in the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options command. In our example, drag and drop the compass onto the part. One possible result could look like this:

Note that, in our example, the compass could also be oriented differently, depending on where you drop the compass. Note that the X axis is now w|x, the Y axis u|y, and the Z axis v|z; an extra letter is added is this way to indicate that the axis in question is no longer oriented the same way as the absolute reference axis in the bottom right corner. Once the compass is snapped to the object, you can begin to manipulate the object. You do so by simply dragging certain parts of the compass, exactly as you do to manipulate viewpoints as explained in "Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass". This time, the object (and not the viewpoints) will be manipulated. 4. In our example, drag the X axis of the compass to move the part to the other side of the block, then drop to reposition the part. While dragging, the compass and a representation of the part are moved. The distance from the origin of the axis (the red square or compass manipulation handle located on the compass base) is displayed in real time as you move the object. The value displayed will be preceded by the "-" sign (negative) if you move the object in the direction opposite to the compass orientation.

The translation increments are preset: you cannot reset the translation increments displayed. When you drop the compass, the pad will now be positioned approximately like this:

You can also: rotate the object in a plane (by dragging one of the compass arcs): the degree of rotation is also displayed in real time move the object in a plane (by dragging one of the compass planes): the distance from the origin to the new location (along both axes in the plane) is displayed in real time rotate freely about a point on the compass (by dragging the free rotation handle at the top of the compass) as explained in "Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass". 5. Drag the compass away from the selected object and drop it. The compass is now disconnected from the object, but maintains its orientation:

6. To reorient the compass the same way as the absolute reference axis, and restore the compass to its original position in the top right corner of the document, drag and drop the compass onto the absolute reference axis. The compass is repositioned at the default position and takes the default orientation:

To achieve the same effect, you can also press and hold down the Shift key, then drag and drop the compass. Release the left mouse button before releasing the Shift key. The View->Reset Compass command also restores the compass to its original position, but does not restore the default orientation. If you checked the option "Display manipulation bounding box" in the Navigation tab via the Tools->Options->General->Display command, a box will appear around the selected object if it can be manipulated by the compass.

In our example, click on an object to see the bounding box appear:

You can then drag any of the edges of the box to move the object in the corresponding direction. Note also that the bounding box remains oriented the same way as the compass. You can also align the compass on objects that the compass cannot manipulate: this technique is useful if you want to detect a direction on the object for manipulating non-constrained objects. In our example, you could drag the compass onto the pad and align it with one of the pad edges like this:

Just click the OK button when warned that you cannot move the pad. You can then select the pad and drag the compass to move the pad in the same direction as the edge of the pad. This is the ideal solution for manipulating several objects at a time. To do so, select the first object, then CTRL-click on other objects to add them to your selection.

Manipulating Objects Using the Edit... Command

This task explains how to manipulate objects precisely, using the Edit... contextual command. You can: reset the position of the compass (and selected object) via its manipulation handle (red square), by specifying its X, Y and Z coordinates and rotation coordinates with respect to the center of the 3D scene translate the object (or just the compass) to a new position in increments along the X, Y and Z axes rotating the object (or just the compass) about the X, Y and Z axes in increments translate over a specified distance in the direction of the privileged plane translate over the distance between two elements (line/edge/plane) you select rotate through an angle you set, or an angle between two elements (line/edge/plane) you select. You can only use the Edit... contextual command with the same objects as those with which you can use the compass (for example, a planar patch). You need access to a CATIA - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct. 1. Drag and drop the compass onto the object, then point to the compass and right-click to display the 3D compass, or double-click the compass to display the contextual menu. In our example, drag and drop the compass onto the planar patch and right-click:

2. Select the Edit... command to display the Compass Manipulation dialog box:

The Compass Manipulation dialog box stays open during manipulation. Note that the current coordinates of the compass manipulation handle (red square), with respect to the center of the 3D scene, are displayed in the corresponding fields for the Position option. In our example, the center of the 3D scene, in this case, is the point of intersection of the 3 planes located on the pad. 3. Reset the compass X, Y and Z coordinates of the compass to zero, using the Position option, then click the "Apply new position" button. In our example, because you dropped the compass onto the planar patch, the compass and the planar patch are moved to the center of the 3D scene as follows:

4. To translate the compass and planar patch by increments along an individual axis (U, V or W) using the Increments option, set the translation values for an axis, then click the "+" button or the "-" button to translate in forward or reverse direction respectively.

5. To translate an object along a vector derived from two objects you select, click the "Measure Distance" button and select the two elements. When you click the "Measure Distance" button, all options and fields in the dialog box are grayed out. You can select any of the following: a point a line or a plane. The value for the detected distance is highlighted in the appropriate fields, expressed in the units of the compass. Note that, depending on the compass orientation, some or all of the X, Y and Z coordinates may be calculated. If the first element is a line or a plane, you can then select a second element or enter a distance. For example, selecting a line implies that you want to translate the object in the direction of the line, and you can enter the distance for the translation in the Distance field. However, if you just select the two elements, the distance between the two is displayed in the Distance field, and the object will be translated over this distance and in the same direction. If the second element is a plane, the direction of translation is normal to the plane. Then, click either the "+" or the "-" button to the right of the "Distance" option to translate the object in the forward or reverse direction.

6. To rotate, set the rotation angle and click the "+" button or the "-" button for the axis about which you want to rotate. For example, with the object still located at the center of the 3D scene, rotating about the U axis produces this result:

7. To rotate the object through the angle between two elements, click the Measure Angle button and select the two elements. You can select a line or a plane. The angle is displayed in the Angle field. Then click the "+" button or the "-" button for the axis about which you want to rotate.

Snapping the Compass to Selected Objects Automatically

This task explains how to snap the compass to a selected object, as an alternative to dragging and dropping the compass onto the object. Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct.

1. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu.

2. Select the command Snap automatically to selected object.

3. Select an object. In our example, select the planar patch:

The compass is snapped automatically only onto non-constrained objects recognized by the compass. The compass keeps its current alignment. As long as the command Snap automatically to selected object remains activated, the compass will be snapped automatically.

Locking the Current Compass Orientation

This task explains how to lock the current compass orientation.

Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct. 1. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu. 2. Select the Lock Current Orientation command. 3. Drag the compass.

Note that as you drag the compass over objects, the compass symbol remains oriented the same. For example, if the default orientation was current before dragging, the symbol will remain like this while you drag:

When you drop the compass onto an object, this orientation will be kept.

4. To reorient the compass, select the Lock Current Orientation command again.

Locking the Privileged Plane Parallel to the Screen

This task explains how to force the privileged plane to be parallel to the screen plane. Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct.

1. In our example, drag and drop the compass onto the part like this:

2. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu.

3. Select the command Lock Privileged Plane Orientation Parallel to Screen. This forces the privileged plane parallel to the screen. This works even if you change viewpoints in the document. The compass is now oriented like this:

4. Manipulate the planar patch as desired. The privileged plane will remain parallel to the screen as you manipulate the object.

Swapping the Privileged Plane

This task explains how to swap to a different privileged plane (XZ or YZ).

This command is not useful when simply using the Select command. It is only useful when using application commands that use manipulators which require working planes, for example, when creating planar patches or modifying control points using the FreeStyle Shaper. You need access to a CATIA - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document Manipulators2.CATProduct.

1. Activate the FreeStyle Shaper workbench. 2. Select the planar patch.

3. Click the Control Points appears.

icon: control points appear on the patch, and the Control Points dialog box

4. Point to a control point on the patch. Manipulators appear:

Note that the manipulators, by default, are oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the compass, in the XY plane. 5. Drag the compass onto the patch and align it in the following direction:

6. Drop the compass onto the patch as follows:

The compass has now detected the orientation of the patch.

7. Drag the compass away from the patch and drop it into empty space (in other words, not on another object). The compass keeps the same orientation:

8. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu. 9. Select the command Make YZ the Privileged Plane. This means that you now want to orient the manipulators in the YZ plane of the compass. The manipulators are now located in the YZ plane:

Do not be confused by the fact that the compass axes do not change: the compass is reoriented to make the YZ the privileged plane, even though the axes on the compass still indicate that the privileged plane is still XY.

Keeping the Privileged Plane the Most Visible during Viewpoint Manipulations
This task explains how to keep the privileged plane visible during viewpoint manipulations.

This command is not useful when simply using the Select command. It is only useful when using application commands that use manipulators which require working planes, for example, when creating planar patches or modifying control points using the FreeStyle Shaper. You need access to a CATIA - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document Manipulators2.CATProduct.

1. Activate the FreeStyle Shaper workbench. 2. Select the planar patch.

3. Click the Control Points

icon.

Control points appear on the patch, and the Control Points dialog box appears. 4. Point to a control point on the patch. Manipulators appear:

Note that the manipulators, by default, are oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the compass, in the XY plane. 5. Drag the compass onto the patch and align it in the following direction:

6. Drop the compass onto the patch as follows:

The compass has now detected the orientation of the patch. Note that the manipulators, by default, are oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the compass.

7. Drag the compass away from the patch and drop it into empty space (in other words, not on another object). The compass keeps the same orientation:

8. Manipulate the viewpoint by, for example, rotating. Because rotating the viewpoint also rotates the compass, the privileged plane may be more or less visible. When you work with commands that use manipulators which require working planes, it may be difficult to work if the privileged plane is not always clearly visible:

9. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu. 10. Select the command Make Privileged Plane Most Visible. This time, the privileged plane is forced to be the most visible: the compass and the manipulators are reoriented accordingly:

11. Continue to rotate. You will notice that, as you rotate, the privileged plane switches, the compass is reoriented accordingly, so that the privileged plane always remains clearly visible. Each time this happens, the manipulators are also repositioned in the new privileged plane. This function is useful for both creation and modification commands.

Dragging and Dropping Icons and Objects

Dragging and Dropping Icons onto Objects Dragging and Dropping Objects Onto Objects

Dragging and Dropping Icons onto Objects

This task explains how to drag and drop icons onto objects to run commands, which is a quicker alternative to selecting commands or icons.

Open the document SelectionSets.CATProduct

1. Select the Select icon

to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated.

2. Drag the Edge Fillet icon from the toolbar onto a face of the pad. As soon as you point at the pad face, the face is highlighted and the pointer changes to this shape :

3. Release the mouse button. This displays the Edge Fillet dialog box, and you can proceed to create the fillet:

The drag and drop method of running commands is not available everywhere: refer to your workbench documentation for more details.

Dragging and Dropping Objects Onto Objects

This task explains how to drag and drop objects onto objects, which is a quick way to copy objects. Open the document DragObject.CATProduct 1. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated.

You will select a fillet and copy it to another location on the same part. 2. Point to the fillet to be copied, so as to highlight it.

3. Press and hold down the Ctrl key and drag the fillet to another edge on the part. As soon as you point at the pad face, the face is highlighted and the pointer changes to this shape:

4. Release the Ctrl key and the mouse button. The fillet is copied to the selected edge:

You can also move the fillet, instead of copying it. To do so, simply drag the fillet to the new location. when you drag the fillet, the following symbol appears: .

In certain cases, an object may be copied without pressing and holding down the Ctrl key before dragging, when you were expecting the object to be moved. In this case, you will be informed that a copy is being symbol. This is typically the case when you performed (and not a move) by the appearance of the attempt to drag an object created in one context (in one workshop) onto an object created in another context (workshop). So, within the same document window, the move is only allowed if the object onto which you drop your object can be edited in the current context (workshop). For example, you cannot drag (move) a part onto a line in a sketch: the part and the sketch were created in different workshops.

The drag and drop method of running commands is not available everywhere: refer to your workbench documentation for more details.

Printing Documents
About Printing, Capturing Images and the Album Printing a Document Quickly without Customizing Print Settings Previewing Documents Prior to Printing Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents Printing To a File Printing Multi-Documents Printing on UNIX

About Printing, Capturing Images and the Album

A certain number of identical functions are available in different parts of the software: you can print documents, capture and print images directly from the Capture toolbar, or print images from the album you can preview documents prior to printing, or preview images in the album you can save images to other formats using the Capture toolbar or the album you can copy images to the clipboard using the Capture toolbar or the album. The fact that these functions are shared make it easy to use the print, capture and album functions together. For more information about capturing images and using the album, refer to "Capturing and Managing Images for the Album".

Printing a Document Quickly without Customizing Print Settings

This task explains how to print a document quickly to the default printer using default print settings. You can only print a document if a default printer has been set up. On Windows, you print using the default printer (declared by your Windows system administrator). However, on UNIX, you will only be able to print once you have set up a printer, as explained in "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX" . 1. Once your document is open, select the Quick Print icon .

The current document is sent to your default printer using the current print settings.

Previewing Documents Prior to Printing

This task explains how to preview documents prior to printing.

Open the document Print.CATProduct 1. Select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box:

2. Select the Preview... option to display the Print Preview window:

You can also use the Fit All In icon window, or select the Quick Print icon

and zooming commands inside the Print Preview to print.

You can also preview the document size in real size by zooming. To zoom, press and hold down the middle mouse button in the Print Preview window, then click the left mouse button and drag (still holding the middle mouse button down). Zoom up or down to increase or decrease the document size; the percentage of the real size is displayed top right as you zoom. For example, if you want to display the document at its real size, zoom to reach 100%.

The Preview window is also available to preview images: via the Print icon in the Tools->Image->Capture... command via the Preview icon in the Tools->Image->Album... command.

Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents

This task explains how to print documents. You can only print a document if a default printer has been set up. On Windows, you print using the default printer declared by your Windows system administrator. However, on UNIX, you can only print a document if a default printer has been set up using the File -> Printer Setup... command, as explained in "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX". Open the document Print.CATProduct.

1. Select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box. The type of printer you choose determines the default settings in the dialog box:

The Print window is also available via the Print icon in the Tools->Image->Capture... command and the Tools->Image->Album... command.

The area to the right is a preview area displaying a shaded rectangle representing the size of the image to be printed, using the default paper format with the default margins. The image size matches the real size of the geometry area in your document window, with respect to the selected paper format. Any changes you make to page orientation, page setup (paper format, paper margins), image scale and position are instantaneously displayed in this area. Resizing the document window resizes the image accordingly. You can also resize the image by dragging the image handles (using the left mouse button). The proportional relationship between image width and height is always maintained. Note that these handles are not available if you check the Fit in Page option (the default setting).

2. Select a printer, or check the Print to file check box and enter the name of a file. Refer to "Printing To a File" for more information. 3. Set the page orientation. The current page setup (page format and page size) set using the Page setup... option is displayed as a reminder. Orientation settings are:

Portrait: sets portrait orientation

Landscape: sets landscape orientation

Best orientation: if you resize the image beyond the page margins (displayed in red in the image to the right), Best orientation keeps the image to be printed at its original size, but automatically changes the page orientation (as displayed in the preview area on the right of the dialog box) to fit the image into the page.

4. Set the image position and size of the image to be printed. This involves changing the position of the image on the selected paper format, and scaling the image. To do so, you need to uncheck the Fit in Page option first (if it is checked) to access the position and size options.

To scale the image, drag the image handles, enter the scale percentage or use the scale spin box. Whichever method you use, the scale field and the image width and height are updated:

You can also use the Fit in Page option which centers the image and scales it up to the largest size so that it fits into the margins. Clicking the Fit in Page option deactivates the other options in the Position and Size area, and the image resize handles are no longer available.

The No Fitting option leaves the document to be printed to its original size, i.e. a scale 1:1. The Fit to option lets you set the Scale the image. You can specify the distance from the Left and Bottom margins as well as the image dimensions in the Width and Height fields (changing Width automatically updates Height, and inversely, in order to keep ratio constant). Note: any modification to the Scale, Width or Height automatically impacts simultaneously these three parameters.

To position the image, you can: click the Center option (to center the image) click the Origin option (to position the image bottom left, at the origin) drag the image to the new position or enter the position of the bottom and left corner of the image, with respect to the paper margins. 5. Click the page setup option to display the Page setup dialog box, and click OK when you have finished. You can: choose a standard paper format reset paper margins or reset printer defaults.

To set the paper format, select the format from the Name list. If you set a new format, the image of the paper format and the image to be printed are resized accordingly. If the format selected is incompatible with the printer currently selected, a message will inform you that the format should not exceed the dimension for the printer. However, this does not prevent

you from setting the paper format. In our example, the first image uses the A4 ISO format, and the second the A3 ISO format: The new paper format and corresponding page size are displayed in the Position and Size option box. To set the paper margins, enter values for the Left, Right, Top and Bottom margins, The example shows how the new margins (represented by dashed lines) affect the position of the image: 6. Select the image orientation: Best Rotation: used in conjunction with the Fit in Page option, scales the image up to the largest size which still fits into the current paper format Rotation: 90 Rotation: 180 Rotation: 270 7. Select the Print Area: Whole Document: print the entire image Display: print the image as seen on screen Selection: prints the area selected using the button. For more information, refer to Capturing Selected Areas of Images part in this guide. The "Selection" option does not apply to .CATDrawing documents. 8. Click the Options... button to access the Options dialog box and set the Color options determining the type of color output.

Set the color type for the image to be printed: Full color: true color image Grayscale: grayscale image (produces a smaller print file) Monochrome. The gamma factor (between 0.1 and 5.0). A gamma factor of 0.1 produces a dark image, whereas a factor of 5.0 produces a lighter image. Check the Print white vectors as black check box if you want to print white vectors as black on the resulting printout.

9. Click the Banner tab and set the banner options: if you want to show a banner on the printed output, use the banner field to print information about the current print job in the banner ; this field contains the $USER, $DATE and $TIME variables which, by default, print your username, and the current date and time in the banner at the bottom of the printed output. This field is editable: you can delete the variables if required and replace them with a text of your choice. Position: setting Position to None removes the banner ; you can also position it Top Horizontal, Bottom Horizontal, Left Vertical or Right Vertical Insert logo: check this check box if you want to insert a graphic logo in the banner, and select the button to navigate in your file system and select the graphic file to be used as the banner.

The banner option is also available when using the Generative Drafting application. 10. Click the Various tab and set the various options.

Set the Rendering Quality factor which determines the quality of printed output: low (screen): the quality of the printed output matches the screen resolution medium highest. The higher the setting, the longer the print time, the larger the print file, the higher the image quality. This option does not impact print previewing.

Set the Line Width Specification: Absolute: original linetype specifications are preserved Scaled: the print image scale is applied to linetypes No thickness and Line Type Specification: Absolute or Scaled.

Set the Line Cap option to choose how line ends are drawn (useful for drafting): Flat Square Round. This option does not impact print previewing. 11. Select OK successively in each dialog box to confirm all your print settings and print the document.

Printing To a File
This task explains how to print to a file. Open the document Print.CATProduct. 1. Select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box. The type of printer you choose determines the default settings in the dialog box.

You can also print to a file via the Print icon in the Tools->Image->Capture... command and the Tools->Image->Album... command. 2. Select a printer name. 3. Check the Print to File check box:

4. Enter a file name, or click the File Name... button to display the Print to File dialog box:

5. Type the file name, then click the Save button to save the file and return to the Print dialog box. The file is saved with the .prn extension (the only extension available). The information in the file depends on the printer you chose in the Print dialog box.

6. Click the Apply or OK button to save the file. 7. To print the file, open an MS-DOS window (on Windows) and use the copy command, for example: copy myfile.prn LPT1 where "LPT1" is the local print port, or if the printer is on a network: copy myfile.prn \\servername\printername where "servername"is the name of the print server, and "printername" is the name of the printer. On UNIX, use the operating system command appropriate for your platform.

Printing Multi-Documents
This task explains how to print one or more sheets inserted in your document. In addition to Drafting documents, this functionality is available for V4 documents (.model) and multipage image formats (such as TIFF, JPEG, BMP, etc.). Open the document PrintMultiDocs.CATDrawing. 1. Select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box. 2. Click the MultiDocuments tab:

3. In the Range area, indicate whether you want to print All Sheets or only the Active Sheet. In case you want to print a given number/range of existing sheets, check the Sheet Numbers radio button before entering the corresponding sheet numbers in the field below.

4. Click the Sheets... button to open the Image Selection dialog box which lets you select the image you wish to print:

The Sheets... button is grayed out only when you select the Sheet Numbers option.

You may check the Clip to Sheet Format option if you want the drawing representation to be clipped to the sheet format.

You may also check the Print Detail Sheet option if you intend to print sheets of type Detail.

5. Select the number of Copies as well as the area to print. 6. Click the Preview... button to display the Print Preview window. For more information about print preview, refer to Previewing Document Prior to Printing in this guide. 7. Click the Options... button to access the Options dialog box and set the Color options determining the type of color output then the Page Setup... button to display the Page setup dialog box. 8. Click the Layout tab to select the required options. 9. Select the Print Area: Whole Document: print the entire image Display: print the image as seen on screen Selection: lets you define on screen a rectangular zone to be printed with respect to the drawing scale. button then drag and drop the mouse to define the clipped zone. For more Click the information, refer to Capturing Selected Areas of Images part in this guide. For detailed information about defining layout, page setup and options refer to Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents in this guide. 10. Click Apply then OK to validate your print settings and print the document.

Printing on UNIX
This task describes how to quickly set up a printer and print a document on UNIX using printer setup defaults. You can only print a document on UNIX if at least one printer has been set up using the File -> Printer Setup... command. Setting up a printer creates a printer configuration file, needed for printing, in $HOME/CATSettings/Printers. For more information and advanced printer setup scenarios, refer to "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX". 1. Select the File->Printer Setup... command to display the Printer Setup dialog box.

Note that the Available printers field is empty the first time you use this command. 2. Click the Add... button to display the Printer Properties dialog box. Note that this dialog box presents a number of default settings. For the purposes of this task, you can use default settings in most cases.

3. In the Printer group box, enter a comment describing the printer name. Use a meaningful comment as printer name, for example, My PostScript Printer. The name you enter will be visible on the list of printers to choose from when using the File ->Print... command. For the purposes of this task, leave the driver set to Post Script, and do not click the Advanced Configuration... button. A PostScript printer is probably the most accessible printer on your network. Use the defaults in the Paper Format group box.

4. In the Submission Scripts group box, click the combo box opposite the Default Queue Name and select a physical printer from the list of printers available on your network:

5. Click the OK button to redisplay the Printer Setup dialog box which now looks like this:

This creates the following printer configuration file: $HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOT0000.plot_cfg. Note that, for upward compatibility reasons, CATIA Version 4 UNIX print drivers are supported. The specific parameter files for these drivers are delivered in the following directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/startup/PrintServices/PrintDriverData

For Versatec drivers, the system searches for the file "prmfil.dat" in this directory. If it exists, the file is used. If not, the system searches the Versatec plot configuration file for the declaration:
export VGSDIR=EXTERNAL

and, if it finds this declaration, uses the variables set in the declaration part of the submission script associated with the plotter. If this declaration does not exist, it searches for a declaration like this:
export VGSDIR=path

where "path" is the path of a directory containing all the Versatec files, and then sets the appropriate variables.

Note that, because you have now set up a printer, the Remove, Configure... and Test option buttons are now available. For more information about these options, refer to "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX". 6. Click the Test button to send a test print job to the printer, or click the Quick Print icon .

7. If you want to set other print settings, or preview the document prior to printing, click the Quit button in the Printer Setup dialog box, then select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box:

Note that the printer name you created previously is displayed in the Printer Name field. 8. Click the OK button to print the document.

Capturing and Managing Images for the Album

Capturing Simple Images Capturing Selected Areas of Images Previewing Images in the Album Renaming Images in the Album Deleting Images from the Album Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only) Saving Images to Other Formats Printing Images from the Album Recording Interactions in Video Format

Capturing Simple Images

This task explains how to capture images. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Capture... command to display the capture toolbar: Note that the command activated by default in the capture toolbar depends on the type of document active when you display the toolbar: when a part (or assembly) document is active, the Pixel command is activated by default. when viewing only the specification tree in a document, the Vector command is activated by default. when a drawing document is activated, the Vector command is activated by default. 2. Click the Options icon to access the Capture Options dialog box.

The General tab lets you set the following options: check the Show Banner option if you want to show a banner on the capture. This lets you access the Banner field containing the $NAME, $DATE and $TIME variables which, by default, print your username, and the current date and time in the banner at the bottom of the capture. This field is editable: you can delete the variables if required and replace them with a text of your choice.

check the White Background option if you want the capture to be taken on a white background. The Various tab lets you set the following options: check the Capture White Vectors as Black option if you want to print white vectors as black on the resulting capture set the Rendering Quality factor which determines the quality of output: low (screen): the quality of the output matches the screen resolution medium highest. The higher the setting, the greater the quality of the capture. Use the Preview icon to compare captures made with different rendering quality factors. 3. Click the Pixel icon vector image. or the Vector icon to choose between a pixel or a

In Shading mode, in which edges are not displayed, capturing vector images is not useful, and produces images that cannot be viewed in the album: you capture only lines and edges in vector mode, not shaded surfaces.

4. Click the Album icon

to capture the image and store it in the album.

A message appears in the status bar informing you that the captured image has been stored in the album, and specifies the image name.

5. Click the Open Album icon or select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album. The album is displayed, listing the current contents of the album.

The contents of the album are stored on your system in a non-editable file in the location defined by the CATTemp environment variable. Deleting this file deletes the contents of the album.

Capturing Selected Areas of Images

This task shows you how to capture selected areas of images. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Capture... command to display the Capture toolbar:

Two capture modes are available: viewer mode and screen mode.

Viewer mode 2. Click the Viewer mode icon activate the selection tool. in the Capture toolbar to

The Capture toolbar now looks like this:

3. Click in the geometry area and drag to create a bounding outline around the area to be captured:

4. Release the mouse button. The bounding outline now displays handles and a symbol in the center to let you: drag the outline by dragging the "x" symbol at the center of the outline or resize it by dragging the handles at each corner, or the sides of the outline.

5. Click the Album icon

to capture the image and store it in the album.

icon or select the 6. Click the Open Album Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album, and double-click the image to preview it. The selected area of the image has been captured.

Screen mode This "multiviewer" capture mode lets you perform an extended selection of images, which is especially useful to capture several windows simultaneously or dialog boxes, for instance. 2. Click the black arrow below the Viewer mode 3. Click the Viewer mode icon then select the Screen mode icon.

icon again to activate the Viewer mode.

4. Click in the geometry area and drag to create a bold bounding outline around the area to be captured. You can select any elements of the screen, not only those displayed in the Version 5 application window. In our example. As you drag, the height and width of the outline you are drawing (expressed as the number of pixels) are displayed:

5. Click the Album icon

to capture the image and store it in the album.

icon or select the 6. Click the Open Album Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album, and double-click the image to preview it. The selected area of the image has been captured.

Previewing Images in the Album

This task explains how to display images in the album. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album contents.

The system automatically assigns names to each image. Images are named "Capture_xxx", where "xxx" is a number from 001 to 999. You can display images in the preview area to the right by selecting them in the list. This allows you to easily identify the image content.

2. Select an image from the list and click the Preview icon the list to display the Print Preview window:

or double-click the image name in

3. Select OK to exit the Print Preview window.

4. This time, select several images in the list. You can perform multiple selections by Ctrl-clicking, Shift-clicking or dragging using the left mouse button. Our example shows that all images in the album have been selected:

5. Click the Preview icon

All selected images are now displayed together in the Print Preview window. Performance and image quality will be determined by the number of images on the preview page.

You can also use the Fit All In icon and zooming commands inside the Print Preview window.

Renaming Images in the Album

This task explains how to rename images in the album. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album contents. The system automatically assigns names to each image. Image names are "Capture_xxx", where "xxx" is a number from 001 to 999.

2. To rename an image, click in the text box and enter the new name, then press the Enter key to confirm. In our example, we want to rename "Capture_004" to "iso_view":

If the new name exceeds the size of the text field, a horizontal scroll bar appears at the bottom of the name list when you press the Enter key to confirm the new name. In our example, we renamed "iso_view" to "iso_view_of_my_new_part." The scroll bar allows you to scroll to read the full name.

Deleting Images from the Album

This task explains how to delete images from the album. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album contents:

2. Select the image(s) to be deleted from the album. In our example, we want to delete "Capture_000".

3. Click the Erase icon to erase the selected image. The image list is updated. In our example, "Capture_000" has been deleted.

Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only)

This task explains how to copy images from the album to the clipboard, for integration into OLE-compliant application documents.

1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album.

2. Select the image(s) to be copied to the clipboard.

3. Click the Copy icon

The selected image is copied to the clipboard, from where it can then be pasted into another application document (for example, a word processing package). 4. Paste the image into the external application. In our example, the selected image has been pasted into Microsoft Word:

You paste data into OLE-compliant documents using either the Paste command or the Paste Special... command: the Paste command simply copies the data into the OLE-compliant application the Paste Special... command offers two modes: you can either paste (embed) the data as normal, or link the copied data to its source. For general information about linking and embedding data from Version 5 documents in OLE-compliant applications, refer to "Using Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant Applications".

There is a quicker alternative: you can also select the Tools->Image->Capture... command and simply click the Copy icon in the Capture toolbar. This captures the image and copies it directly to the clipboard. The image is not stored in the album.

Saving Images to Other Formats

This task explains how to save images in the album to other formats. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album.

2. Select the image(s) to be saved to another format. The formats to which you can save depend on the format (pixel or vector) of the image you selected.

3. Click the Save As... icon .

4. Enter a name for the file.

5. Select a format from the list. The formats you can save to depend on the format (pixel or vector) in which the image was originally saved. For pixel images, the formats are:

HP/RTL (UNIX only) JPEG Fair Quality (*.jpg) JPEG Medium Quality (*.jpg) JPEG High Quality (*.jpg) JPEG Lossless (*.jpg): very few applications (MS Office, MS Photo Editor) recognize the JPEG format without loss of information). TIFF True Color (*.tif) TIFF Indexed Packbit (*.tif) TIFF True Color Packbit (*.tif) TIFF Indexed (*.tif) TIFF Grey Scale Packbit (*.tif) TIFF BW Packbit (*.tif) RGB (SGI Format) Not Compressed (*.rgb) Windows Bitmap (*.bmp) (Windows only) For detailed information about JPG and TIFF format, browse the following Internet sites: http://www.jpeg.org and http://www.ijg.org http://www.partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/TIFF6.pdf

A bitmap is a set of pixels arranged in lines and columns and is fully described by its width and height, its color depth (bits per pixel) and its compression scheme. The format common format is true color (24 bits per pixel). An additional color component, called Alpha component, may be used to define the transparency of each pixel. The bitmap format generally supports compression (either lossless or lossy). Some of these bitmaps are coded on 8 bits and the pixels are indexed on a color table, called the palette. The advantage of bitmap files is that they can reproduce complex scenes (for instance photographic or photo-realistic images) that could not be reproduced using basic geometrical shapes. The following table summarizes information about bitmap files and the various formats you can use to save your images in the album:

1 BMP X

Bit depth 8 16 24 X X X

32 X

None X

Compression RLE JPEG ZLIB X

CCITT

Maximum size in pixels

Comments

2G*2G

JPEG

64K*64K

PNG

2G*2G

RGB

64K*64K

TIFF

2G*2G

Standard bitmap storage on MS-Windows Very few applications support the lossless JPEG mode Successor of the GIF format Supported by very few applications Very popular and general format recognized by most imaging applications

For vector images, the formats are: Windows Metafile (Windows only) PostScript: PostScript is a page description language that supports text, vector graphics and bitmaps. It is device-independent and implements an industry standard for communicating graphic information between applications and hardware devices such as printers. For detailed information about PostScript, browse the following Internet site: http://www.partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/PLRM.pdf EPS: Encapsulated PostScript does not contain page description directives and is designed for portable exchange between applications and platforms. It may also be included in a larger PostScript document PDF: Portable Document Format is a platform-independent page description file format designed for platform exchange. It may contain text, vector graphics and bitmaps. For detailed information about PDF, browse the following Internet site: http://www.partners.adobe.com/sn/developer/acrosdk/DOCS/PDFRef.pdf HP-GL/2-RTL: Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language file format is an instruction set developped for controlling plotters. HP-GL, which as been developped for pen plotters, is now obsolete. HP-GL/2-RTL is an evolution of HP-GL providing more graphic primitives (such as polygons or curves) and a support for bitmaps.

Vector files contain geometrical descriptions of the image elements.These elements may be lines, dots, rectangles, circles, polygons, splines, text with font information or bitmaps (only in metafiles) and are used to reconstruct the final image. Each element has its own attributes specifying its size, its relative position in the whole image, its color and filling type. The advantage of vector files over bitmap files is that image scaling does not affect image appearance. When zooming bitmap files, pixels become visible as shown in the example below:

Vector image

Bitmap image

The following CGM vector formats are supported: CGM ISO CGM CALS CGM ATA.

CGM (Computer Graphics Metafile) is an ANSI/ISO standardized platform-independent format used for the interchange of vector and bitmap data. CATIA Version 5 supports the CGM Version 1 and Version 3 standards. CGM Version 3 adds vector primitives such as Bezier and Nurbs, improved font and text support as well as bitmap compression. The CGM-ATA and CGM-CALS profiles which are specific subsets of the Version 3 standard are also supported. For detailed information about CGM formats, browse the following Internet site: http://www.cgmopen.org The table below summarizes the purposes of the above mentioned formats:
Printing/Plotting Data Exchange

Purpose Format HP-GL/2-RTL PS EPS PDF CGM

X X X X X

6. On UNIX only, and if you save to a vector format, click the Options... button to set further save options associated with saving rasterized images: DPI: resolution in dots per inch (DPI) width height and click OK or Cancel. Note that high quality images require longer computation time.

7. Click the Save button. You do not need to open the album first to save images to other formats. The Save As... icon is also available by selecting the Tools->Image->Capture... command and clicking the Save icon in the Capture toolbar, allowing you to save to a file directly (without saving the image in the album).

Compressing Images
Here are listed the several methods you can use to compress images: RLE Run-length encoding is the easiest and fastest compression method. However, it cannot achieve high compression ratios like those of more sophisticated compression algorithms. The compression ratio mainly depends on the data content. This method is suitable for images with large uniformly colored areas, typically found in computer graphics. Most bitmap files support run-length encoding (such as TIFF, BMP, etc.) JPEG lossy compression This method looses information by removing details the human eyes can hardly perceive. The reconstructed image is not identical to the original one. The loss of visible details may be minimized at the expense of the compression factor. Typically, you can compress images by a factor of 20 without losing the subjective quality. The lossless JPEG compression is also part of the JPEG file format but is supported by very few applications

LZW This method is used for GIF and TIFF files and removes redundancies in the picture. The LZW algorithm and the GIF format are both patented. Note that this method is not available in CATIA. ZLIB This lossless compression method belongs to the same category as the LZW method. It is used for PNG format which is meant to be a non-patented successor of the GIF format. Note that this method is not available in CATIA. CCITT/Fax encoding CCITT Group 3 and CCITT Group 4 are lossless data compression methods for black and white (bi-level) images, which are typically scanned images with a great size. These two methods are mainly used for TIFF files. The table below shows the most appropriate compression method for a specific image type:
Image type Compression Lossy JPEG ZLIB CCITT G4 None X X X X X X 20:1 5:1 15:1 1:1 Computer graphics Photographic Bi-level Typical ratio

You can save images in bitmap format without having to compress them. There is no loss of information but the file size is impacted, since it is bigger.

Printing Images from the Album

This task explains how to print images. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album contents:

2. Select the image(s) to be printed. 3. Click the Print icon to display the Print dialog box:

Images are printed the same way as any other document. Refer to "Printing Documents" for a full description of how to print. You do not need to open the album first to print images. The Print command is also available by selecting the Tools->Image->Capture... command and clicking the Print icon in the Capture toolbar, allowing you to print the file directly (without saving the image in the album).

Recording Interactions in Video Format

You can record sequences of interactions and store them in standard and proprietary video formats, depending on your operating system. Note that no tools are provided for replaying video captures: to do so, use the video replay tools (Windows Media Player, Quicktime, etc.) provided on your system.

1. Select the Tools->Image->Video... command to display the Video Recorder dialog box:

Note that the name of the video file to be generated and the current video format are both indicated. In our example, the video file name is "movie00000.avi" and the video format is "Microsoft AVI". The Video... command is only available if a document is open.

Setting Up the Capture Session

2. Click the Recording button to access the Video Properties dialog box which lets you set up the video capture parameters prior to recording the video:

Choosing the Video File Format and Location

3. Choose the Format of the video file to be recorded.

The video formats supported vary according to your operating system: Microsoft AVI (Windows) AVI Motion JPEG (generated on all platforms, but can only be read on Windows) Still Image Capture: available on all operating systems, this format is not generated by operating system-dependent libraries and provides still, compressed JPG captures SGI Movie (IRIX) Quicktime (IRIX) MPEG (IRIX).

If you install the appropriate CODEC for the MPEG format, you will be able to generate MPEG format files on Windows (you can download video CODECs from the Microsoft Support Internet site).

4. If you want the video file name (and number) to be set automatically, check the Automatic File Name option, which is activated by default. If you do so, the system automatically names the video file starting with the prefix "movie00000" and appends the video extension (avi, jpg, etc.). In our example, the video file name is "movie00000.avi" when you set the video format to "Microsoft AVI". Each time you generate a new video file using the Recording button, the file number will be incremented (movie00001.avi, movie00002.avi, etc.). If you uncheck this option, the Name field becomes editable and the prefix changes to "MOVIE", for example "MOVIE.avi". You can then rename the file in the Name field, along with a drive and folder (or directory) name, like this for example on Windows: c:\Videos\MyMovie.avi You can also click the icon, navigate to the appropriate location and rename the file.

When you first access the dialog box, it specifies the default folder: C:\TEMP\ (Windows) /tmp (UNIX). If you choose another folder or directory, its name is displayed: C:\Videos\ (Windows) /u/users/steve/videos (UNIX).

Specifying which part of the screen to record

5. In the Capture tab, select which part of the screen you want to capture. A preview area opposite the list of options illustrates which part of the screen will be captured. Note that you can zoom and pan the selection in the preview area.

Recording interactions in the current document window

The options are: Document Window: records viewpoint manipulations in the current document window, but does not record interactions in pulldown menus, dialog boxes, etc.

Recording interactions in any window area containing the focus

Window: lets you shift the focus to any window in any application on the screen which accepts the focus, then capture that window. Check the Window option to activate the selection arrow above the preview area.

Then, select the arrow to see your pointer change shape like this:

Then drag (using the left mouse button). Your pointer changes to the shape of a cross: +. As you drag, each part of each application window is highlighted. In the example opposite, dragging the "+" pointer inside the Capture tab highlights the frame of the Capture tab...

...and displays it in the preview area when you release the button. Practice dragging the "+" pointer around your screen to see the different areas that can be highlighted. All interactions are recorded.

Recording interactions in any rectangular area you draw

Area: lets you draw a rectangular area anywhere on the screen, for capturing what happens inside this area only. Check the Area option to activate the selection arrow above the preview area. Then, select the arrow to see your pointer change shape like this: Drag (using the left mouse button). As you drag, you draw a rectangle like this, and the size of the rectangle is displayed:

Release the mouse button to close the rectangle and define the part of the screen to be recorded. The area inside the rectangle is displayed in the preview area. All interactions are recorded.

Recording interactions anywhere on the whole screen

Full Screen: specifies that you want to capture the whole screen. All interactions are recorded.

Right-click to interrupt the selection of the part of the screen to capture.

6. Check the Timer option if required: using the timer will record a frame every "n" milliseconds (you set the value using the editable field or spinner): note that if you set a low value, the system will record a high number of frames, which will consequently impair performance and create a larger video file if you do not check the Timer option, the system will record a frame only each time the viewpoint is updated (by rotating, zooming, etc.).

7. On Windows only, check the Include Cursor option if you want the cursor to be visible in the recorded sequence.

Setting Movie Replay Parameters Using the Movie tab, set the movie playback parameters.

8. Set a value for the option Rate in Frames per Second. This option defines the video replay speed: a high value displays a large number of frames per second, so the recording will be replayed more quickly; a low value displays a smaller number of frames per second, so the recording will be replayed more slowly. 9. Select the Compressor Setup... button to set up your video compression/decompression parameters. Clicking this button will display a dialog box allowing you to choose a CODEC from the list of CODECs installed on your computer, then configure it. The role of the CODEC is to compress your video files. Installing Version 5 does NOT install CODECs on your computer. The list of CODECs differs from one platform to another. For information about how to configure the CODEC, refer to the CODEC supplier's documentation.

On Windows, the Compressor list contains the option: Full Frames (Uncompressed). Selecting this option prior to recording has the following effects: the resulting video file is larger (because it is not compressed) but performance during the recording is enhanced (because each frame is not compressed as soon as it is recorded).

10. Click OK in the Video Properties dialog box to start the recording. Messages in the status bar and the Video Recorder dialog box inform you each time a frame is recorded:

11. Click the Pause

button to pause, or the Stop

button to stop the recording.

Viewing Objects
Activating Viewing Tools Using the Mouse Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area Panning Zooming In Zooming Out Zooming In On An Area Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane Rotating

Activating Viewing Tools Using the Mouse or the Keyboard

You do not have to use the viewing tool commands or icons to perform all viewing operations. For quick access, you can also use just the mouse or the keyboard to activate a certain number of viewing tools, as indicated in the table below:

Mouse
To use the mouse to... Center the display at a specific location Pan Rotate Zoom Do this... Click the middle mouse button. Drag using the middle mouse button. Press and hold down the middle mouse button, then the left (or right) mouse button, and drag (still holding both buttons down). Press and hold down the middle mouse button, then click the left (or right) mouse button and drag (still holding the middle mouse button down).

The following example shows you how to get

this

from this

in three steps:

The SpaceBall or SpaceMouse can be used, in addition to the mouse, to perform graphic viewing manipulations (zoom, pan, rotate, etc.); the requisite drivers are delivered with these devices. Clicking on the corresponding icon runs the corresponding command once only. Using the View->Modify commands or pressing and holding down the middle mouse button activates a permanent viewing mode for each command, until you click to exit. Note: See "Hiding and Showing Objects" for information about showing and hiding, and "Using Rendering Styles" for hidden line rendering.

The 3-button mouse is recommended for usability reasons. On Windows computers: the IntelliMouse (two buttons plus a wheel) is an alternative to the 3-button mouse: pressing and hold down the wheel the same way as the middle mouse button (but rolling the wheel is not supported) a 2-button mouse may alternatively be used (the third button is emulated using a key combination). This key combination using a ... and this key combination on Do this... 2-button mouse ... a 3-button mouse... Press ALT and right button, then drag. Press and hold down middle Pan button, then drag. Then: With ALT and right button held down, Press and hold down the middle press and hold down CTRL or left mouse button, then the left (or button, then drag. right) mouse button, then drag. Then: Release the CTRL or left button. Press and hold down the middle mouse button, then click the left mouse button, then drag (still holding the middle mouse button down). Rotate (3D/zoom/2D)

Zoom

Press and hold down CTRL ALT and Press and hold down CTRL and the right button, then drag. the middle mouse button, then drag.

Zoom

Keyboard
You can use these shortcuts in Examine mode only. This keyboard shortcut ... and this keyboard for 2D objects ... shortcut for 3D objects... Press CTRL and arrows Press CTRL and arrows Then: With Shift and left or right arrow With Shift and up or down arrow With CTRL and Shift and left or right arrow (Auto-repeat when pressing and holding down the keys) Then: Press CTRL and Page Up Press CTRL and Page Down Then: Press the left arrow Press the right arrow Press the up arrow Press the down arrow Move to the left view (2D only) Move to the right view (2D only) Move to the up view (2D only) Move to the down view (2D only) Press CTRL and Page Up Press CTRL and Page Down Do this... Pan Rotate around the Z axis (3D only) Rotate around the X axis (3D only) Rotate around the Y axis (3D only) -

Zoom In Zoom Out

Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area

This task explains how to fit the current document contents into the geometry area. 1. Select the View->Fit All In command, or click the Fit All In icon.

Fit All In zooms the current view out so that all the document contents fit into the space available in the geometry area.

Panning
This task explains how to move the current document contents by panning the camera viewpoint. 1. Select the View->Pan command, or click the Pan icon.

2. Drag the left mouse button to a new location, then release the mouse button.

Zooming In
This task explains how to zoom in by predetermined increments. 1. Select the View->Modify->Zoom In command, or click the Zoom In You zoom in by one increment each time you click on the icon. To zoom up close (as illustrated), click on the icon several times in succession. You can also use the View->Zoom In Out command and drag (left mouse button) to zoom in progressively, not by increments. icon.

Zooming Out
This task explains how to zoom out by predetermined increments. 1. Select the View->Modify->Zoom Out command,or click the Zoom Out icon. You zoom out by one increment each time you click on the icon. To zoom out (as illustrated), click on the icon several times in succession.

You can also use the View->Zoom In Out command and drag (left mouse button) to zoom out progressively, not by increments.

Zooming In On An Area
This task explains how to zoom in on an area. 1. Select the View->Zoom Area command. 2. Drag (left mouse button) to draw the bounding outline containing the area on which you want to zoom in. The area now viewed is the area you captured inside the bounding outline.

Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane

This task explains how to view an object along a perpendicular to a selected plane 1. Select the View->Modify->Normal View command or click the Normal View icon. 2. Select a plane.

The object is projected onto the selected plane so you can now view along a normal to the plane.

Rotating
This task explains how to rotate an object. 1. Select the View->Rotate command, or click the Rotate 2. Press and hold down the left mouse button to see the rotation sphere symbol appear around the object. 3. Still holding the button down, drag to rotate. 4. Click to stop rotation. icon.

Navigating
Navigating in Examine Mode Navigating in Walk Mode Navigating in Fly Mode Changing Views Viewing Objects against the Ground Magnifying Looking At Objects Turning Your Head To View An Object

Navigating in Examine Mode

Navigating in Examine Mode is the default mode. You can examine your document as you would from the outside by moving around the document's perimeter, or as you would from within, turning your head to view or moving closer (zoom in, zoom out) to different objects. For more information, see "Activating Viewing Tools Using the Mouse".

You can also access the Examine mode via the Examine icon toolbar, available when using the beginners walk and fly modes.

in the View

Navigating in Walk Mode

In Walk mode, you can walk forward and backward (backward in advanced mode only) as well as turn right or left as you walk along the horizontal plane.

Two walk modes are available: Beginner's mode Advanced mode for experienced users. Before using the Walk navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (View->Render Style->Perspective). If you attempt to activate Walk mode, you will be prompted to switch to a perspective view.

Beginners Walk Mode

This task shows you how to navigate in beginner's walk mode. Beginner's walk mode commands are single-action commands. Releasing the mouse button means you exit the command. You can only move forward in beginner's walk mode. Open the document Platform.model. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document. 1. Select View->Navigation Mode->Walk. The icons used in the beginner's walk mode appear in the View toolbar: These commands are also available via the View->Modify command in the menu bar. 2. Click the Turn Head icon in the View toolbar then drag (left mouse button) to define your starting position (the direction in which you look at the object). 3. Release at the desired location.

4. Click the Walk

icon, then click the left mouse button to begin to walking.

You begin to walk straight forward in the chosen direction. A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view. The figure below the arrow specifies the speed at which you are walking: The speed at which you first approach the object depends on the initial distance from the object, and is calculated automatically. The speed is optimized so that you reach the point you target in approximately 10 seconds. 5. Still holding the left button down, drag to the right or left, or up or down, to change direction. You walk in the direction in which you drag. The further you drag away from the center of

the view (represented by the circular

symbol), the greater the change in direction.

Dragging to the left lets you view the object as if you had turned your head to the left; dragging to the right produces the same effect in the opposite direction. As you drag, the shape of the arrow changes to reflect the direction in which you are walking: 6. Drag the cursor back towards the center of the view to continue walking straight forward in the new direction. 7. To modify your speed, click the Accelerate or Decelerate icon one or more times, then click the Walk icon again followed by the left mouse button to pursue your walk. 8. To return to the default navigation mode, click the Examine mode toolbar icon in the View

You can also set mouse sensitivity and collision detection using the appropriate options in the Visualization tab, accessed via the Tools->Options command.

Advanced Walk Mode

This task shows you how to navigate through a document in Walk mode. Before using the Walk navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (View->Render Style->Perspective). It is easier to walk through documents in contexts where you would find a virtual ground, i.e. in buildings, planes or ships for example. Open the document Platform.model. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document.

1. Select View->Navigation Mode->Walk. 2. Press and hold down the middle mouse button to define the horizontal view plane. 3. Still holding the button down, drag to the left or to the right to determine the direction in which you wish to walk. In the Walk mode, press and hold down the middle mouse button until you've finished navigating. 4. When in the direction in which you wish to walk, click the left mouse button to begin walking. You begin to walk forward in the chosen direction. A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view, like when using the beginner's walk mode:

5. Still holding the middle button down, drag left or right to change direction: Dragging to the left lets you view the object as if you had turned your head to the left; dragging to the right produces the same effect in the opposite direction. 6. Drag the cursor back towards the center of the view to continue your walk straight forward in the new direction.

Pressing the PageUp and PageDown keys modifies your speed. Speed is indicated in the status bar.

7. Click the left mouse button again to reverse the direction. You begin to walk backward, away from the target. Note: The left and right directions are now defined as if you were walking away from the target with your back towards it.

When a collision is detected, the green arrow turns red, whether you navigate in beginner's or advanced Walk mode:

You can also set mouse sensitivity and collision detection using the appropriate options in the Visualization tab, accessed via the Tools->Options command.

Navigating in Fly Mode

In Fly mode you can move upward or downward on any horizontal view plane as you move forward or backward (backward in advanced mode only). Two fly modes are available: Beginner's mode Advanced mode for experienced users. Before using the Fly navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (View->Render Style->Perspective). If you attempt to activate Fly mode, you will be prompted to switch to a perspective view.

Beginner's Fly Mode

This task shows you how to navigate in beginner's fly mode. Beginner's fly mode commands are single-action commands. Releasing the mouse button means you exit the command. You can only move forward in beginner's fly mode. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document. 1. Click the Fly Mode icon in the View toolbar or select View->Navigation Mode->Fly.

The icons used in the beginner's fly mode appear in the View toolbar:

These commands are also available via the View->Modify command in the menu bar. 2. Click the Turn Head icon in the View toolbar then drag (left mouse button) to define your starting position (the direction in which you look at the object). 3. Release at the desired location.

4. Click the Fly

icon, then click the left mouse button to begin to flying.

You begin to fly forward in the chosen direction. A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view:

The figure below the arrow specifies the speed at which you are flying:

The speed at which you first approach the object depends on the initial distance from the object, and is calculated automatically. The speed is optimized so that you reach the point you target in approximately 10 seconds. 5. Still holding the left button down, drag to the right or left, or up or down, to change direction. You fly in the direction in which you drag. The further you drag away from the center of the view (represented by the

circular

symbol), the greater the change in direction.

As you drag, the shape of the arrow changes to reflect the direction in which you are flying:

6. Drag the cursor back towards the center of the view to continue flying straight forward in the new direction.

7. To modify your speed, click the Accelerate again, then drag to pursue your fly.

or Decelerate

icon one or more times, then click the Fly icon

Each click on the icon increases or decreases the speed by approximately 40%. When you collide with a solid object when flying, you will slide along the object's surface, and you will no longer fly through the object, providing a more realistic effect. This feature is also available in Advanced Fly mode. Pressing the Shift key and dragging lets you bank left or right. You can also mouse sensitivity and collision detection using the appropriate options in the same Visualization tab.

8. To return to the default navigation mode, click the Examine mode

icon in the View toolbar.

Advanced Fly Mode

This task shows you how to navigate through a document in Advanced Fly mode.

Before using the Fly navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (View->Render Style ->Perspective).

Fly is used in exactly the same way as Walk, the only difference being that in Fly mode you can move upward or downward on any horizontal plane as you move forward or backward. Open the document Platform.model. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document.

1. Click the Fly Mode

icon in the View toolbar or select View->Navigation Mode->Fly.

2. Press and hold down the middle mouse button to define the initial horizontal view plane. 3. Still holding the button down, drag to the left or to the right, or up or down, to determine the direction in which you wish to fly. In the Fly mode, press and hold down the middle mouse button until you've finished navigating.

4. When in the direction in which you wish to fly, click the left mouse button to begin flying. You begin to fly straight forward in the chosen direction. A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view, like when using the beginner's fly mode.

The speed at which you first approach the object depends on the initial distance from the object, and is calculated automatically. The speed is optimized so that you reach the point you target in approximately 10 seconds.

5. Still holding the middle button down, drag left or right to change direction. You fly in the direction in which you drag. The further you drag away from the center of the view, the greater the change in direction. 6. Drag the cursor towards the center of the view to continue flying forward in the new direction:

Pressing the PageUp and PageDown keys modifies your speed. Speed is indicated in the status bar. Each press of the key increases or decreases the speed by approximately 40%.

7. Click the left mouse button again to reverse direction: You begin to fly backwards, away from the target. When flying backwards, the up and down are reversed. You can use the option " when navigating" in the Visualization tab, accessed via the Tools->Options command, to fix the X, Y or Z axis during navigation. While turning in Fly mode, this creates the impression that the user viewpoint tilts or banks with respect to the fixed axis, as in a real plane.

You can also set gravitational effects, mouse sensitivity and collision detection using the appropriate options in the same Visualization tab, like when using the beginner's fly mode.

Changing Views
Individual views are created as you navigate through your design in examine, walk and fly modes. Views are stored and can be reviewed. In walk and fly modes, views are created each time you pause during your walkabout or fly around. This task shows you how to change views. Open the document Platform.model. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document. 1. Navigate in Examine mode (zoom, pan, etc.) to create and save several different views. 2. Select the View->Modify->Previous View command. The previous view is displayed in the geometry area. 3. Select the View->Modify->Previous View command again.

4. Select the View->Modify->Next View command. The next saved view is displayed in the geometry area.

Viewing Objects against the Ground

Ground lets you visually insert a plane at the ground level of your document, thus enabling you to recognize when your document is viewed the right way up. When you first access a document, the plane parallel or tangent to the bottom point of your document is considered to be the ground. This task shows you how to show and hide the ground. Open the document Platform.model. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document. 1. Select View->Ground. The ground plane is displayed in the geometry area. To hide the ground, simply repeat the same step.

2. Drag (left mouse button) the ground up or down to a new location, then release the mouse button. The ground is repositioned as defined.

Magnifying
This tasks explains how to obtain a magnified view of your document in a separate window. 1. Select the View->Magnifier... command. The Magnifier window opens containing a magnified section of your document:

The section magnified is defined by the magnifier viewport which appears over the object in your document:

Note that the magnifier viewport has handles:

the "+" symbol lets you move the viewport the handles in the corners let you resize the viewport. 2. Point to the + symbol and drag it to move the viewport and magnify another area of the document:

3. Point to one of the handles and drag it to size the magnified area up and down.

While you drag, the

symbol appears.

All the viewing and manipulations performed in the document window are also reflected in the Magnifier window. For example, rotate the object to see how the object is also rotated in the Magnifier window:

Turning Your Head To View An Object

This tasks explains how to view an object by simulating what happens when you turn your head to look at the scene. 1. Select the View->Modify->Turn Head command, or click the Turn Head icon in the View toolbar. 2. Drag (left mouse button). A navigation symbol appears to help you understand what happens as you drag. 3. Release at the desired location. In our example, dragging to the right lets you view the object as if you had turned your head.

Looking At Objects
This tasks explains how to look at the document in a specific direction by targeting through a user-defined viewport. 1. Select the View->Modify->Look At command. 2. Drag (left mouse button) slowly to display the viewport. As you begin to drag, a rectangle with two diagonals appears and continues to grow as long as you continue to drag. This rectangle represents the viewing window of the future view.

3. Continue dragging to move around, resize and reposition the viewport. The viewport is then shaped like a pyramid: your eyepoint is located at the vertex of the pyramid. You can resize the viewport by dragging the middle mouse button.

4. Release the button. You now see what is targeted inside the viewport. You can also press and hold down both Shift then the middle mouse button for a quicker result.

Hiding and Showing Objects

Hiding Objects Displaying Hidden Objects

Hiding Objects
This task explains how to hide objects by transferring them to the No Show space (they are no longer displayed). 1. Select an object. In our example, select the line.

2. Click the Hide/Show icon, or select the View->Hide/Show->Swap Hide/Show command. The object is no longer displayed: it has been transferred into the No Show space. In our example, the line is no longer displayed. Note also that if you have several document windows open containing the same objects, the object is transferred to the No Show space in each document window. Note: In case you select multiple elements, only the space of the first selected element will be taken into account by the Hide/Show command. For instance, if the first element of the multi-selection is in the No Show space, the Hide/Show command will transfer all the selected elements to the Show space, whatever their original space.

3. Click the Hide/Show

icon again to display the object in the Show space.

After selecting an object, you can also use select the Edit->Properties command, click the Graphic tab, and set the Shown option to achieve the same effect. A component placed in no show in the product structure will appear in low highlighting in the tree.

Displaying Hidden Objects

This task explains how to display objects transferred to the no show area. 1. Display the same geometry as in the preceding example, In our example, a line which was originally displayed is now in the no show area.

2. Click the No Show icon to display the contents of the no show area. In our example, you now see only the line. The geometry area changes color to indicate you are now viewing the No Show space.

Note: In case you select multiple elements, only the space of the first selected element will be taken into account by the Hide/Show command. For instance, if the first element of the multi-selection is in the No Show space, the Hide/Show command will transfer all the selected elements to the Show space, whatever their original space.

3. Click the No Show

icon again to return to the Show space.

You can continue working on objects in the No Show space. You can also select objects and transfer them back to the Show space using the Hide/Show icon.

Using Rendering Styles

Wireframe (NHR) Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD) Shading (SHD) Shading with Edges (SHD+E) Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges Displaying Perspective and Parallel Views Customizing the View Mode

Wireframe (NHR)
This tasks explains how to display objects in wireframe mode. 1. Select the View->Render Style->Wireframe (NHR) command or click the Wireframe icon.

Setting a shaded part to NHR has the following effect:

Before

After

The Version 5 wireframe mode does not correspond to the Version 4 wireframe mode. The full equivalence may be obtained by checking the "Edges_points" and "Outline" options in the Custom View Modes dialog box. For more information on customizing view modes, refer to Customizing the View Mode in this guide.

Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD)

This tasks explains how to display objects in quick hidden line removal mode.

1. Select the View->Render Style->Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD) command or click the Dynamic Hidden Line Removal icon.

Setting a shaded part to HRD has the following effect:

Before

After

Shading (SHD)
This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode. 1. Select the View->Render Style->Shading (SHD) command or click the Shading icon.

Setting a part in NHR mode to SHD mode has the following effect:

Before

After

Shading with Edges (SHD+E)

This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode with edges.

1. Select the View->Render Style->Shading with Edges (SHD+E) command or click the Shading with Edges icon.

Setting a shaded model to SHD+E has the following effect:

Before

After

Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges

This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode with edges, whether they are hidden or not. 1. Select the View->Render Style->Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges command or click the Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges icon.

Setting a shaded model to Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges has the following effect:

Before

After

Displaying Perspective and Parallel Views

This tasks explains how to display objects in perspective or parallel views.

1. Select the Render Style->Perspective command, or the Render Style->Parallel command.

Perspective view

Parallel View

Perspective is related to the size of the object being viewed, and the distance of the object from the observer. Note that, before using the Walk and Fly navigation modes, you must be in a perspective view.

Customizing the View Mode

This tasks explains how to use the customize and apply view parameters. 1. Select the View->Render Style->Apply Customized View command. This dialog box may also be accessed by selecting the View->Render Style->Custom View command. The "Custom View Modes" dialog box appears: If this is the first time you are using the command, the view settings for the current document will be checked in the dialog box. In our example opposite, the Shading parameter is checked: this means that the view mode for the current document is "Shading". 2. Customize your own view parameters by checking or unchecking the appropriate options. In certain cases, checking one option may also activate other options. Each time you check or uncheck an option, the current view is updated dynamically to take your settings into account. 3. Select OK if you want to save your customized view parameters, or Cancel to exit without saving them. If you selected OK, your view parameters will be stored with your settings. If this is the case, you will be able to apply these settings to the current document by selecting: the View->Render Style->Apply Customized View command or, the toolbar. icon in the list of rendering options in the View

Setting Lighting and Depth Effects

Setting Lighting Effects Setting Depth Effects

Setting Lighting Effects

This tasks explains how to vary ambient lighting effects. 1. Select the View->Lighting... command to display the Light Source Editor dialog box. The default light source settings look like this...

... and produce a lighting effect, for example, like this:

is activated by default. The sphere indicates the Note that the Single Light icon current lighting direction. The handle on the sphere indicates the direction from which the light is being projected: by default, the light is coming from the top left. You can drag the handle around (using the left mouse button) to change the lighting direction. The new lighting effect is created instantaneously as you drag the handle. A slider at the bottom of the dialog box lets you adjust light source brightness.

2. Drag the handle down and towards the bottom right: the light is now coming from the bottom right:

3. Click the Two Lights icon

to add another light source.

In our example, using two light sources means that the lighting is now too bright.

4. Drag the brightness slider (the first slider in the list) to the left to reduce the brightness.

5. Now drag the lower handle up towards the top left to change the direction of the corresponding light source.

6. Click the Neon Light icon

to produce a neon light effect.

7. Click the No Light icon

to switch off all light sources.

The bottom two sliders control contrast and specular intensity of light sources respectively.

Using the Color Chooser To Color Light Sources You can also color light sources using the color chooser. 1. Double-click a light source handle. The Color Chooser appears: The colored area with the cross represents a color spectrum.

2. Drag the cross inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below the spectrum. The HSL (Hue, Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red, Green and Blue) values vary according to where the cross is located. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields provided to suit your exact color specifications. Move the arrow up or down to vary the brightness of the custom color.

3. Click Apply or OK to apply the changes.

Setting Depth Effects

This tasks explains how to achieve 3D depth effects, namely, clipping geometry between clipping planes and creating fog effects. 1. Select the View->Depth Effect... command to display the Depth Effect dialog box. The orange sphere completely encompasses the objects in your document. The white cross represents the center of the objects in the geometry area. The color of the area behind the orange sphere is the background color of your document. The vertical lines represent the front (near) and back (far) clipping planes.

By default, depth effects are deactivated: if you zoom in and out, you will see that for the moment the geometry is not clipped.

You can keep the Depth Effect dialog box open and continue working with other commands. You will be able to understand the results obtained by setting depth effects by zooming in and out. 2. Set the Near Limit and Far Limit by checking the Fixed checkbox for each option, entering values and pressing Enter in each case. Note that location of the vertical lines representing the clipping planes has changed.

You can also drag the vertical lines representing the near and far clipping planes to produce the same effect.

The back (far) section of the geometry is clipped. You now only see what is located between the near and far clipping planes. 4. Zoom out to see all the geometry. 5. Click the Foggy option.

The foggy option introduces a foggy effect.

6. Zoom out again. As you zoom out, the fog effect is increased. The fog gets thicker as you continue to zoom out beyond the back clipping plane.

Using Standard and User-Defined Views

Using Standard Views Creating, Modifying and Deleting User-Defined Views

Using Standard Views

This task explains how to use standard views. 1. Select the View->Named Views... command. The Named Views dialog box appears. The list provides a number of standard views you can use to display the document: *front *back *left *right *top *bottom *iso.

2. Double-click the desired view. For example, double-clicking *front obtains the front view:

When you apply standard views, the views are no longer rezoomed. Note also that, if the "Animation during viewpoint modification" option is checked in the Visualization tab, the change of view will be animated.

The other views are:

You can also use the quick access icon bar (accessed via the View toolbar) for applying standard views more quickly. 3. You can modify the standard view properties by selecting a view in the list then clicking the Properties button. The Named Views Properties dialog box is displayed:

4. Select one of the three standard views by clicking the corresponding button: ISO, ANSI or Custom.

If you click the Custom button, the fields are ungrayed to let you select the views you wish to apply from the pulldown lists as shown below:

5. Click OK or Apply.

When pulled away from the View toolbar, the icon bar looks like this:

Creating, Modifying and Deleting User-Defined Views

This task explains how to create, modify and delete user-defined views. Note that user-defined views are stored with the document. Open the document NamedViews.CATProduct. Your license must provide access to the product structure functions to open this document. 1. Select the View->Named Views... command and double-click the desired view. You are now ready to customize the view.

2. Adjust the different view parameters (zoom, rotation, etc.) until you are happy with the result.

3. Select the View->Named Views... command, then click the Add button to add the view to the list. The default name of the view is "Camera 1", and the name is also displayed in an editable field below the list.

4. Rename the view in the editable field as required and press Enter, or click Apply.

5. If you want to set the camera properties (the properties of the view), click the Properties button to access the Camera Properties dialog box.

The settings are as follows: Name: name of your user-defined view (cannot be modified) Type: lets you set a Parallel or Prospective view projection Origin: coordinates of your eye position Target: coordinates of the center of rotation of the camera (the point located at the center of the viewport). You can set the center of rotation by clicking the middle mouse button on the desired point: the coordinated are memorized with the camera.

View angle: sets the vertical angle from the eye position (with respect to the center of the view) to define the direction in which you look at the view (available in perspective views only). A large angle has the effect of zooming out to make the geometry look small; a small angle has the reverse effect. Zoom: zoom factor (available in parallel views only). 6. If you want to modify any customized view you already saved, select it, modify the view parameters again, then click the Modify button to save your changes. You can also delete views by selecting the view from the list and clicking the Delete button. The Reverse button lets you view the object from the reverse angle.

Using Layers and Layer Filters

Assigning Objects To Layers Adding and Naming Layers Using Visualization Filters

Assigning Objects To Layers

This task explains how to assign objects to layers. Once you have assigned objects to layers, you then create visualization filters (refer to "Using Visualization Filters") which allow you to display only those objects located on specific layers referenced by the visualization filter.

Open the document Layers.CATProduct

The document looks like this when you first open it:

1. Click the "+" symbol next to PadandCylinder, then the "+" symbol next to Pad to see the following:

You can now see clearly that the two features are named PadandCylinder and Pad. 2. Select the View->Toolbars->Graphic Properties command to look at the Graphic Properties toolbar:

"None" in the Layer box: indicates that there is no current layer, which guarantees that all the contents of your document are visible. You can assign objects to "None": any object assigned to "None" will always be visible. For the moment, you have not yet assigned any objects onto a layer.

The following layers are always available: None 0 General 1 - 999 (even though they are not visible at first in the Layer list). These layers cannot be deleted. The Layer box also contains the "Other Layers..." command which lets you create your own named layers. Refer to "Creating New Layers" for more details.

3. Select PadandCylinder in the tree, click the arrow on the Layer box, then select "0 General" from the list. PadandCylinder is assigned to the layer "0 General". The Layer box now looks like this: only the number because all layers are identified primarily by their number. . You see

4. Click on the "+" symbol next to PadandCylinder. PadandCylinder is expanded.

5. Select the different features in PadandCylinder (Pad.1, Pad.2). Note that these features are also located on the layer "0". This is because the features inside a part body inherit the part body properties.

6. This time, still in PadandCylinder, select any of the sketches. Note, however, that the sketches from which the features are built remain on the current layer "None".

7. Select Pad in the tree. Pad is still located on the current layer: .

Note the following: If no objects are selected, the current layer is displayed in the Layer box. If an object is selected, the name of the layer on which the object is located is displayed in the box. Consequently, to find out which layer an object is assigned to, select the object and look at the Layer box. You can also create new objects on a specific layer by setting the appropriate layer in the Layer box first. Any new objects will be created on this new current layer. The link between a given feature or object and a given layer is stored with the document. To change the current layer, first make sure no object is selected, then enter the layer number in the box. Opening Existing Documents When opening existing documents (created using either previous releases or Version 5 Release 7), existing geometry will be migrated to the current layer. To prevent the geometry from being assigned to a layer, set the current layer to "None" before opening existing documents. Furthermore, if you open existing documents with a current layer set to a layer other than "None", then close the document without making any changes, you will be prompted to save the document because the geometry was assigned to the current layer when opening the document. When opening Version 4 documents containing layers, all existing layers are preserved as is: the layers are stored in the Version 4 document. Note: Version 5 does not manage Version 4 layers on which dittos are located.

Adding and Naming Layers

This task explains how to add and name your own layers.

Using the Named Layers Dialog Box 1. Select the View->Toolbars->Graphic Properties command to look at the Graphic Properties toolbar. 2. Click the arrow on the Layer icon box, then select the 0ther Layers... command from the list. The Named Layers dialog box appears:

3. Click the New button. The layer "1", is added to the list, and the name "Layer 1" is assigned automatically:

4. Click OK. The layer you just added ("Layer 1") is now the current layer, and it is displayed in the Layer box like this: The list of layers in the Layer box now looks like this: If you select an object before creating the new layer, it will be transferred automatically to the new layer created. If you want to rename a layer when creating it, after clicking the New button, slowly click twice the line containing the layer name to make the field editable. You can also edit the layer number. This enables you to set up named layers to comply with your company's layer conventions. .

Then, enter the new name and click anywhere outside the editable field to confirm the name. In our example, the new layer name is "My_Layer".

Clicking the Num and Name buttons presents the lists in numerical and alphabetical order. The following information is stored with your settings: the list of named layers the current layer the current filter and filter description (refer to "Using Visualization Filters").

Using the Layer Box 1. Click inside the Layer box. 2. Enter a number between 0 and 999. 3. Rename the layer as desired by using the Other Layers... command as described in "Using the Named Layers Dialog Box". Whichever method you use, note that you do not create any new layers as such: the layers 0 - 999 are automatically provided. Adding layers adds them to the list in the Named Layers dialog box, and to the list in the Layers box.

Using Visualization Filters

This task explains how to use visualization filters. A visualization filter is a group of layers. You then apply the filter to visualize (or not) only those objects located on the layers in the filter. Open the document Layers.CATProduct

The document looks like this when you first open it:

1. Select the Tools -> Visualization Filters... command. The Visualization Filters dialog box appears:

The default current filter "All visible" is applied automatically: it lets you see all the contents of the document. This filter cannot be deleted. 2. Click the New button. The Visualization Filter Editor dialog box appears, allowing you to build the filter from the following building blocks: Criterium: this list box contains the operators =, !=, >, <, <= and >=; the default is "=" the list box to the right lists the named layers (you can type any layer number between 0 and 999) And, Or and Not buttons provide you with the corresponding logical functions for combining layers.

The Filter list specifies the final filter syntax. The default filter syntax is: layer = 0 which means that the filter contains layer "0". 3. Click in the Filter: field, delete "0" then type "1" so that the filter syntax now looks like this: layer = 1

4. Click OK. This creates a new filter "Filter001" (with the default filter syntax) in the Visualization Filters dialog box:

5. Select the root object Layers in the tree, then elect the View->Toolbars->GraphicProperties command to look at the Graphic Properties toolbar. 6. Click the Layer box, then type "0". The root object is now assigned to the layer number "0".

7. Select PadandCylinder in the tree, click the arrow on the Layer box, then select "0 General" from the list. PadandCylinder is assigned to the layer "0 General". The Layer box now looks like this: 8. Select Pad in the tree, click inside the Layer box, then type "1". Pad is assigned to the layer "Layer 1". The Layer box now looks like this: . .

9. Select "Filter001" in the Visualization Filters dialog box and click Apply. The objects are no longer displayed, and the filter remains active.

Why are the objects no longer displayed? All the features below the root object in the tree are considered to be on layer "0" if applying the visualization filter makes the objects invisible. This remains the case even if you assign the objects to layers other than layer "0". 10. This time, select the root object Layers in the tree, click the Layer box, then type "1" to assign it to layer "1". The filter is still active, but this time only the object Pad becomes visible:

Why is only one object displayed? Both the root object and the Pad object are both on layer "1", but this time applying the visualization filter has the effect of making objects visible, so the Pad object becomes visible.

To see all the objects again, select the "All visible" filter then click Apply.

Recording, Running, and Editing Macros

Automating Repetitive Tasks Using Macros Recording a Macro Running a Macro Editing a Macro Creating a Macro From Scratch

Automating Repetitive Tasks Using Macros

If you perform a task repeatedly, you can take advantage of a macro to automate it. A macro is a series of functions, written in a scripting language, that you group in a single command to perform the requested task automatically. You can, for example, use a macro to automate: the creation of a series of holes in a part the extraction of bills of materials from an assembly the addition of a standard title block to a series of drawings the printing of a series of documents. You can create macros either by recording an interaction sequence or by editing a file (written in a scripting language) to insert the functions you wish. You can also modify an existing macro, either recorded or created from scratch, to best fit your needs. Once the macro is created, you can run it by selecting Tools->Macro->Macros..., selecting the macro, and clicking Run. Macros can be stored in the current document or in a file in an external library. If a macro is created while a document is current, either by means of recording an interaction sequence or editing a file, and is stored in an external file, a link is kept in the current document to the file containing the macro.

Script Development Tools and Languages You can use the following scripting tools and languages, depending on the platform you are running on. On Windows CATScript: these macros are written in Basic Script, stored in CATScript-type documents, and can be run on both Windows and UNIX Visual Basic Script (VB Script), at minimum level 5.0 , which is part of the operating system: macros written in Visual Basic can be run on both Windows and UNIX. The use of VB Script is recommended for developing Windows/UNIX-compatible macros. Although CATScript macros written in previous releases continue to work, we recommend that you prefer VB Script to CATScript.

Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) Version 6.0: this product is installed with Version 5: macros written using VBA can only be run on Windows. Among the advantages of using VBA, note that: Intellisense editing facilitates editing VBA contains a debugger you can develop graphic user interfaces using VBA (this is not possible with CATScript or VB Script macros). On UNIX Visual Basic Script 3.0 for UNIX (from Mainsoft) (shared libraries are installed when installing Version 5)

Recording a Macro
This task explains how to record a macro from a dialog sequence. You can store the recorded macro in the current document or in a file. Even if you choose to store the macro in a file, if a document was current when you began to record the macro, a link is created in this document to the file storing the macro, and the macro can afterwards be selected and run using this link from the document. If you want to record a macro that is not pointed to by any document, you need to store the macro in a file, and you can either start recording with no current document, or delete the created link from the current document when the macro is recorded. 1. Select the Tools->Macro->Start Recording... command. This displays the Record Macro dialog box:

2. Specify the current macro library or document. This means deciding where the macro is going to be stored: in a macro library: the macro will be stored in a directory (or a VBA project if it exists) in a document: the macro will be stored in the current document. What macro types you can store and where you can store them are summarized in the following table:

Where Stored Language Used CATScript (Basic Script) VB Script (Visual Basic) VBA Editor Default or external Default or external File Extension .CATScript In In Directory Document Yes Yes In VBA Project No

.catvbs

Yes No

Yes No

No Yes

Visual Basic .catvba Editor only

Opening the list for this option displays the following by default:

By default, the only macro library library available is your E: folder. You can also choose to store the macro in the current document (a CATProduct document in our example). 3. Click the Macro libraries... button if you want to add, create or remove macro libraries. The Macro libraries dialog box appears:

Only the E: folder is available because you have not yet created any other macro libraries. 4. Click the Library type field to display the following:

The choices are: All libraries: displays all directories and VBA projects Directories: displays only directories VBA projects: displays only VBA projects.

5. Click the Add existing library... button and navigate to select the library or VBA project, or click the Create new library... button and create the new macro directory of VBA project, and provide names when prompted. You can also select a library from the list then click the Remove selected library button to delete it. 6. Make sure the Language used: option is set to the desired language. 7. Provide a name for the macro. 8. Click Start to begin recording the macro. A Warning box is displayed if the macro already exists. Click Yes to start recording the macro while overriding the existing one. The dialog boxes related to the macro recording disappear and the Stop Recording dialog box appears. 9. Perform the dialog sequence you want to record. 10. When this is complete, click Stop in the Stop Recording dialog box, or select the Tools->Macro->Stop Recording command. Your macro is now ready for replay.

Running a Macro
This task explains the different methods of running a macro. Method 1 1. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros... command to display the Macros dialog box:

In our example, we already created "Macro1.vbs" using VB Script, which is preselected and listed in the available macros list. Use the "Current macro library or document" field or the "Macro libraries" button if you have other macros available. 2. Click the Run button to replay the selected macro. Method 2 1. Explore your file system and locate the .CATScript file. 2. Double-click the .CATScript file, or select the file and select the Open contextual command. A session is started and the macro is executed. Double-clicking a .catvbs macro does not run the macro. Method 3

1. On Windows, run a command like this:

cnext -env CATIA.V5R8.B08 -macro E:\tmp\Mymacro.CATScript

or like this:
cnext -env

CATIA.V5R8.B08

-batch -macro E:\tmp\Mymacro.CATScript

to run the macro in batch mode, where "Mymacro.CATScript" is the name of the macro file. On UNIX, run a command like this:
CNEXT -macro "/tmp/Mymacro.CATScript" CNEXT -batch -macro "/tmp/Mymacro.CATScript"

or like this:
./catstart -d /CATEnv -env CATIA.V5R8.B08 -object "-macro /tmp/Mymacro.CATScript" ./catstart -d /CATEnv -env CATIA.V5R8.B08 -object "-batch -macro /tmp/Mymacro.CATScript"

to run the macro in batch mode, where "Mymacro.CATScript" is the name of the macro file. You can add macros to a toolbar using the Tools->Customize... command. Select the Commands tab, then the Macros category: all the macros will be detected and listed. You can then drag and drop them onto toolbars for convenient access.

Editing a Macro
This task explains you how to edit a macro. 1. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros... command to display the Macros dialog box.

In our example, we already created "Macro1.vbs" using VB Script, which is preselected and listed in the available macros list. Use the "Current macro library or document" field or the "Macro libraries" button if you have other macros available. 2. Click the Edit... button to edit the macro. If the macro is a CATScript document or a VB Script file, the default editor is displayed like this:

You can change the editor for CATScript and VB Script macros by using the Macros tab. For more information, refer to Macros. If the macro is a .catvba project module, the VBA editor is displayed like this:

On UNIX By default the emacs is opened by default. You can always replace it by your favorite editor by exporting the EDITOR variable. Use the Rename... button to rename the selected macro, the Delete button to delete it. Use the Select... button and navigate to select a macro if it is not stored in a macro library. 3. Modify the macro instructions as you want, and save the macro, or cancel the modifications.

Creating a Macro From Scratch

This task explains you how to create a macro from scratch. 1. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros... command to display the Macros dialog box.

2. Set the current macro library or document for storing the macro. 3. Click the Create... button, select the type of macro to create and name it. 4. Click the Edit... button to edit it. Depending on which language you chose, the appropriate editor is displayed.

Using CATIA Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant Applications

About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) Embedding Existing Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications Creating Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications Copying Version 5 Images to OLE-Compliant Applications

About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

Certain applications (e.g. Microsoft Office) support what is known as Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). Such applications, referred to as OLE-compliant or OLE container applications, allow you to retrieve a Version 5 document i.e. a part, a drawing or an assembly (referred to, in an OLE context, as the OLE document server). You can either link or embed the contents of the geometry area of a Version 5 document: Linking the document means that all changes made to it in a Version 5 session are also made to the document inserted in the OLE-compliant application. However, if you move the target file to another directory the link is severed. The graphic representation still exists but can no longer be edited (unless the link is repaired via the Edit-Links menu in the OLE-compliant application. Embedding the document means that a copy of the document is inserted in the document within the OLE-compliant application. As no links are created, any changes made to the document in the Version 5 session are not made to the document in the OLE-compliant application. The linked or embedded document appears as an image (or, if you specify otherwise, as an icon). When the document is double-clicked, a normal Version 5 session is displayed. OLE is available on Windows only. Version 5 documents may be linked or embedded in host container documents. Linking is always allowed. Embedding is forbidden in demo mode. Embedding of CATIA V4 models is also forbidden. Only .CATPart, .CATProduct, .CATDrawing, .CATAnalysis and .model documents implement OLE document server.

Version 5 supports the Microsoft /regserver and /unregserver options for OLE. If you experience problems with OLE features, for example, if double-clicking a document icon does not start a session as expected: 1. Log on as administrator. 2. Open a command prompt window. 3. Go to the folder where Version 5 is installed, typically:
C:\Program Files\DassaultSystemes\B08\intel_a\code\bin)

4. Run the following command once only:

cnext /regserver

If you have installed several levels of Version 5, running this command activates (for OLE purposes) the level of Version 5 installed in the folder in which you run the command.

Embedding Existing Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications

This task shows you how to embed Version 5 data into an OLE-compliant application. Open the document OLE.CATProduct

1. In the OLE-compliant application, place the cursor where you wish to embed the data and select the Insert->Object command. The Object dialog box appears:

2. In the Object dialog box, click on the Create from File tab. 3. Click on Browse... 4. In the Browse dialog box, specify the file location and click on OK to confirm. 5. A frame containing OLE.CATProduct is inserted at the desired location in your OLE-container file:

6. If you want to work on the Version 5 document, double-click on this frame. A normal Version 5 session is displayed. When you have finished making the changes close and save the document. You will see that the changes you have just made are reflected in the OLE-container document. In the Object dialog box, there are two options: Link to file: see "About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)" Display as icon: if you prefer the Version 5 document to appear iconified, select this option.

Creating Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications

This task shows you how to embed Version 5 data into an OLE-compliant application. 1. In the OLE-compliant application, place the cursor where you wish to insert the new data and select the Insert->Object command. The Object dialog box appears:

2. In the Object dialog box, click on the Create New tab. 3. Select the type of document you want to create. The document type CATIA Model is listed but cannot be selected (because it is non-editable). 4. Click on OK to confirm. 5. A gray frame is inserted at the desired location in your OLE-container file and a normal Version 5 session appears:

6. When you have finished working on the new document close and save it. In the Object dialog box, there is the option Display as icon. If you prefer the Version 5 document to appear iconified, select this option.

Copying Version 5 Images to OLE-Compliant Applications

This task shows you how to copy images of Version 5 data to an OLE-compliant application. Open the OLE.CATProduct document. 1. In the Version 5 document, select the Tools->Image->Capture... command to display the Capture toolbar. 2. Use the cursor to draw a rectangle around the part you see in OLE.CATPart.

3. Click the Album icon

to capture the image and store it in the album. .

4. To copy the image to the clipboard click the Copy icon

The selected image is now in the clipboard from where it can be pasted into an OLE-compliant application. 5. Open the OLE-compliant application. 6. Place the cursor where you wish to insert the image and click the Edit->Paste Special... command. 7. Place the cursor where you wish to insert the image and click the Edit-Paste Special... command. 8. Select OK to confirm in the Paste Special dialog box.

The image you selected is pasted at the desired location in the file.

In the Paste Special dialog box, there is the option Link to file. For more information about this option, see "About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)"

Transferring Version 5 Data

Sending Version 5 Data In the Mail Transferring Version 5 Data To Another Directory

Sending Version 5 Data In the Mail (Windows Only)

This task shows you how to send Version 5 data in the mail. (This is available on Windows only.)

All the data, including linked documents, is included in the send, provided it can be found. Any data that can be opened in a Version 5 session, including V4 models, can be sent. 1. Open the Version 5 document you want to copy.

Before doing anything, make sure you have saved all the files you intend to send.

2. Select the File->Send To Mail command. The Send To dialog box appears:

In the upper part of the dialog box you can see a list of all the different documents linked to the document you selected for the send operation. The four columns provide information about the file name, the file type, the location and whether or not the file was found.

3. Click on the icon

between the two lists. The dialog box will then look something like this:

The files have now been sorted. The list in the lower part of the box shows a list of those files that will be sent. In the upper list remain those files that could not be found. This can be remedied by using the Tools->Options->General->Document tab or Edit->Links commands (see "Linked Document Localization" or "Editing Document Links").

If you prefer, you can select the files in the upper list individually and transfer them to the lower list using the icon

If you want to select the files by type, place the cursor inside the list and right-click to display the list of file types and then select the appropriate type. (Selecting by type in this way operates of course in the lower list as well.)

Before sending your documents in the mail, you may want to check the size of the documents to be sent. You will find this in the lower left-hand corner. The OK button may be grayed out. This means that problems shown in the Problem column have not been resolved.

As well as the information provided in the upper list, the lower list also contains a column showing potential problems such as duplicate file names. There are two occurrences of duplicate file names in the case shown above. There are different ways of resolving this. You can: select one of the identically named files and click the icon to be sent rename one of the files using the Rename Target button. to move it to the upper list i.e. not include it in the files

4. If you want to give one of the files a different name in the target directory, select the file and click the Rename Target button in the lower right-hand corner of the dialog box. The dialog box opposite appears specifying the name of the file selected. Enter the new name and click OK.

To cancel the rename, select the new name just entered in the Rename dialog box, delete it and click OK. The old name is restored.

You can of course move all files to the upper list at any time by using the icon 5. Click OK. You will now be prompted to give the name of your e-mail system.

Copying Version 5 Data To a Directory or Diskette

This task shows you how to copy Version 5 data to a directory or diskette.

If the document to be copied is linked to others, those documents will also be copied to the directory (or diskette) you choose, provided they can be found. Any data that can be opened in a Version 5 session, including V4 models, can be copied. Before doing anything, make sure you have saved all the files you intend to include in the copy. Note: you do not need anymore to open the document(s) before sending them to a directory. 1. Select the File->Send To Directory command. The File Selection dialog box appears:

2. Select the Version 5 document you want to copy as shown above. 3. Click the Open button. The Send To Directory dialog box opens:

In the upper part of the dialog box you can see a list of all the different documents linked to the document you selected for the copy operation. The four columns provide information about the file name, the file type, the location and whether or not the file was found.

4. Click on the icon this:

between the two lists. The dialog box will then look something like

The files have now been sorted. The list in the lower part of the box shows a list of those files that will be copied. In the upper list remain those files that could not be found. This can be remedied by using the Tools->Options->General->Document tab or Edit->Links commands (see "Localizing Linked Documents" or "Editing Document Links").

to If you prefer, you can select the files in the upper list individually and use the icon transfer them to the lower list . If you want to select the files by type, place the cursor inside the list and right-click to display the list of file types and then select the appropriate type. (Selecting by type in this way operates of course in the lower list as well.)

5. If you want to keep the same directory structure in the target directory check the Keep Directory Structure box between the two lists. Once checked, this box remains selected when you next use the Send To Mail command.

It might be useful, especially if copying files to a diskette, to know the size of the documents to be copied. You will find this just above the Copy to: field. The OK button may, as in the case shown above, be grayed out. This means that problems shown in the Problem column have not been resolved. As well as the information provided in the upper list, the lower list also contains a column showing potential problems such as duplicate file names. There are two occurrences of duplicate file names in the case shown above. There are different ways of resolving this. You can: select one of the identically named files and click the icon to move it to the upper list i.e. not include it in the files to be copied check the Keep Directory Structure button thus avoiding having files with the same name in the same directory rename one of the files using the Rename Target button.

6. If you want to give one of the files a different name in the target directory, select the file and click the Rename Target button in the lower right-hand corner of the dialog box. The dialog box opposite appears specifying the name of the file selected. Enter the new name and click OK.

To cancel the rename, select the new name just entered in the Rename dialog box, delete it and click OK. The old name is restored.

You can of course move all files to the upper list at any time by using the icon

7. Enter the path of the target directory in the Copy to: field using the Browse button if necessary. and click OK. This field is in fact a list and contains the nine destinations last used.

8. Click OK.

If you copy to an as yet non-existent directory, the following message appears:

If the target directory contains any files with the same name as any copied, the Confirm File Replacement dialog box will be displayed. Click the appropriate button.

A progress box appears as each file is copied:

When the copy has been performed the Files Copied dialog box appears telling you the number, size and type of the files copied.

Managing Document Links in Version 5

Using the FileDesk Workbench Displaying Document Links Editing Document Links

Using the FileDesk Workbench

This task shows you how to view the relationships between different documents and to obtain information about their properties. Open the document NamedViews.CATProduct. The original document looks like this, with a part loaded:

1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. In the General category, select the General tab, uncheck the option "Load referenced documents", then click OK.

3. Close then reopen the same document. The part is no longer loaded (indicated by a special symbol in the specification tree):

4. Select the File -> Desk command. The Desk window appears (the document stays open):

As you can see, the relationships between the document opened and any others are clearly shown. You may to see everything, especially with complex relationships. All types of V5 have to click on the Fit All In icon data and V4 models can be viewed in this way. You can leave the Desk window open when you modify the relationships or add or delete any of the documents in the view. As the view is automatically updated, you can see the changes as you make them.

The relationship in our sample document includes a child document that has not been loaded (see "Load Referenced Documents"). Unloaded documents are shown in reverse video. The colors used to identify the various document types are the following ones: white for loaded documents black (reverse video) for documents that are not loaded in the current session red for documents that have not been found. The example below illustrates a document including a child document that has not been found.

5. In the Desk window, select the document Part1.CATPart, then select the Load contextual command. The specification tree will be updated as a result i.e. the symbol representing the document will change to that of a loaded document: the part is now loaded. Note that you can select the Open contextual command whenever you want to open a document, loaded or not.

6. If you want to see the properties of any loaded or unloaded document, select the document then select the Properties contextual command. The Document Properties dialog box below appears:

7. If you want to open a loaded or unloaded document, select it then select the Open contextual command. The FileDesk workbench also lets you use the following commands: File->Send To->Mail or Directory once you have selected a document in the Desk Edit->Links: once you have selected a document shown in white (i.e. loaded) in the Desk then the Links... contextual command. Note that while using the Links... command, you can select other documents from the Desk to display their related items interactively in the Links dialog box. File->Save All File->Save All As

For more information on these commands, refer to the corresponding task in this guide by clicking one of the above hyperlinks.

Displaying Document Links

This task shows you how to display document links.

Only direct links i.e. external links directly pointed to by the active document can be displayed using the Edit->Links... command. Thus, inactive documents must be activated before displaying the links they point to. Note that you can also select an element from the graph to display its links. Open the document Links.CATProduct. 1. Select the Edit->Links... command. The Links of document dialog box appears:

The file-related information in the bottom left-hand corner of the Links dialog box indicates the Pointed document, i.e. the path and name of the document pointed to in the session. Under the Links tab, several columns are displayed to provide link-related information: "From element": the pointing element "To element": the pointed element "Pointed document": the document containing the pointed element "In Instance": the product instance in which the pointed element has been selected (this column is displayed for products only) "Link type": the type of the link, e.g. Instance, ViewLink, Import, CCP and so on "Owner": the element to which the link belongs to "Status": the status of the link. A link may be assigned one of the following statuses: OK Not synchronized Reference not found Document not found Document not loaded Isolated

2. Use the "Link type filter" and the "Owner Filter" drop-down lists to filter the information to be displayed respectively in the "Link type" and "Owner" columns. By default, these lists contain the value "All" which means that no filter is applied and thus, all links are displayed regardless of their type and owner. 3. Click the Pointed documents tab to display only the documents pointed to by the current object. By default, the document selected in the Links tab is also selected when accessing Pointed documents. As soon as one of the displayed lines is selected, the Open button is activated:

4. Click the Open button. The Links of document dialog box disappears and the file CHC.CATPart, i.e. the file pointing to Links.CATProduct, is displayed.

The Find button is relevant for broken links: clicking it opens the File Selection dialog box to let you browse your file system and find the missing file(s). You can view the links of a specific element (without displaying those of the current document viewed as a whole) just by selecting the desired item in the geometry before running the Edit->Links... command.

Editing Document Links

This task shows you how to edit document links.

Only direct links i.e. external links directly pointed to by the active document can be displayed using the Edit->Links... command. Thus, inactive documents must be activated before displaying the links they point to. Note that you can also select an element from the graph to display its links. Open the document Links.CATProduct. 1. Select the Edit -> Links... command. The Links of document dialog box appears, confirming that two links have been found to the documents CHC.CATPart and Part2.CATPart:

2. Click OK and exit your session. 3. Move the document CHC.CATPart to another folder. 4. Restart your session, then reopen the document Links.CATProduct. The Open dialog box appears, explaining that the document CHC.CATPart could not be found:

Whenever a document is opened and one or more of its links are invalid, the Open dialog box appears along with the document opened and a broken link icon appears in the specification tree.

There are several reasons why a link may no longer work: the files could not be found which means they have been moved, renamed or deleted or the files contain the wrong information which means they still have the same name but a content different from the files originally pointed to. If you click the Close button, you can select the Edit -> Links... command, the dialog box will display the following information in the Pointed documents tab:

Just select the not found element then click the Find button to access the missing file via the File Selection dialog box.

5. Click the Desk button or double-click the file path inside the field in the Open dialog box. You can check link validity at any time using this command. The Desk window appears:

6. Click the document shown in red in the Desk window.

7. Right-click then select the Find menu. The File Selection dialog box opens:

8. Explore your file system to find the file, select it, then click Open. The File Selection dialog box disappears and the file CHC.CATPart, i.e. the file pointed to by Links.CATProduct is now displayed in white.

9. If you want to open the CHC.CATPart from the Desk, just select it then click Open in the contextual menu:

For more information on the Desk, refer to the Using the FileDesk Workbench in this guide. 10. If you now select the Edit->Links... command with the EditLinks.CATDrawing document active, the Links dialog box will indicate that the right file has been found and loaded ("OK" Status).

When clicking a line in the Links of document dialog box, you can also: use the Load button to load parts (and parts only) that are not loaded. The status will change from "Document not loaded" to "Loaded" use the Synchronize button to update the links in your document. In that case, the link Status will change from "Not synchronized" to "OK". However, be careful when replacing elements because not all element types are compatible. For example, a line cannot be replaced by a circle or curve as their specifications are different, and the synchronization will not be allowed use the Activate/Deactivate button to avoid the synchronization of deactivated links during part update. A symbol in the specification tree identifies any element being "activated" ( ) or "deactivated" ( ) use the Isolate button to remove a link. The link Status will then change to "Isolated" to indicate that the link to the pointed element is broken use the Replace button to replace the selected element with another one. This button opens the File Selection dialog to let you navigate to the desired file. Once the element has been replaced, its name is still displayed in the Links dialog box but the status changes to "Isolated". The new element name will be displayed after clicking OK then re-opening the Links dialog box.

Advanced Tasks
Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX Using Power Input Mode Virtual Reality Configurations Using and Customizing Fonts For information about using catalogs with CATIA, refer to Using Catalogs For information about using knowledgeware with CATIA, refer to Using Knowledgeware Capabilities For information about using the Feature Dictionary Editor with CATIA, refer to Using the Feature Dictionary Editor For information about using the Data Upgrade Assistant with CATIA, refer to Using the Data Upward Assistant For information about using conferencing with ENOVIA DMU Navigator, refer to Conferencing

Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX

About Setting Up Printers on UNIX Adding a Printer Removing a Printer Configuring an Existing Printer Testing the Printer

About Setting Up Printers on UNIX

You can only print a document (using either the File->Print... command or the ) if a default printer has been set up. On Windows, you print Quick Print icon using the default printer declared by your Windows system administrator. However, on UNIX, you will only be able to print once you have set up a printer.

If you attempt to print on UNIX before setting up a printer, the following message appears:

The objective of this section is to show you how to set up your environment to get your printer operational, which is performed by creating and customizing a file called a printer configuration file. The role of this file is to declare your printer so it is recognized by Version 5. Once at least one printer has been declared, the above message will no longer appear. We assume that the physical printing device has been installed and connected to the system your system administrator has already declared your printer to your UNIX operating system.

Adding a Printer
This tasks explains how to set up your printer. You can only print a document on UNIX if at least one printer has been set up using the File -> Printer Setup... command.

1. Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box.

Note that the Available Printer field is empty. 2. Click the Add... button to display the Printer Properties dialog box:

3. Click on the Driver button and choose the appropriate driver for the printer. Ask your system administrator which printers require which drivers. The list of available drivers is: PostScript HP-GL/2 RTL CGM ISO Raster Calcomp Gerber Oce Versatec Custom

The following new drivers are supported: the CALS and ATA formats for CGM HP 1000 Series plotter HP-GL and IBM-GL support for pen plotters.

4. Click on the Advanced Configuration... button to configure the driver. Driver configuration options vary from one driver to another. Refer to your plotter documentation for information about the configuration options for each driver. 5. In the Paper Format group box, set the desired paper format options: default and maximum paper size, margins and orientation (portrait or landscape). 6. In the Submission Scripts group box, set the desired options activated when the print job is submitted.

This group box lets you specify: the default output file name: each time you print a document, an output file is created at the location you specify in the text field the default queue name: this field lets you choose which print queue to send the print job to. The Custom buttons let you specify the location of your own submission scripts. 7. Click OK to return to the Printer Setup dialog box. A printer configuration file containing all the settings you set in the Printer Properties dialog box is created in: $HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOT0000.plot_cfg. The numbers of additional printers created are incremented by one, as follows: PLOT0001.plot_cfg, PLOT0002.plot_cfg, etc. The format of Version 4 plot configuration files is not compatible with the Version 5 format.

Removing a Printer
This tasks explains how to delete a printer. At least one printer must have been set up using the File -> Printer Setup... command. 1. Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box.

Note that the name of a printer is displayed in the Available printers combo box list. 2. Select the printer to be deleted from the Available printers combo box list. 3. Click the Remove button to remove the printer. The printer configuration file ($HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOTxxxx.plot_cfg) is deleted.

Configuring an Existing Printer

This tasks explains how to reconfigure an existing printer. At least one printer must have been set up using the File -> Printer Setup... command. 1. Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box.

Note that name of a printer is displayed in the Available printers combo box list. 2. Select the printer to be reconfigured from the Available printers combo box list. 3. Click the Configure...button. The printer is reconfigured printer configuration file ($HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOTxxxx.plot_cfg) is modified.

Testing the Printer

This tasks explains how to test your printer on UNIX. You need to have already set up at least one printer. 1. Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box.

2. Click the Test button.

Using Power Input Mode

About Power Input Mode Entering Data Running Commands Using the Search Language

About Power Input Mode

Power input mode is a user-friendly productivity assistant allowing you to: enter numeric data more easily in editable fields and spinners (but cannot be used in combo lists); as such, it is intended as an alternative to typing values in dialog boxes (dialog boxes are however still available) enter commands directly (by typing the c: followed by the name of the command) entering selection queries using the query language available for the Edit->Search... command. Power input is available in certain (but not all) application commands. To activate power input mode, select the Tools->Options... command, click the General tab, and click the CATIA - P2 option, then restart your session.

The power input field is located in the bottom right corner of the status bar:

Entering Data
This tasks shows you how to enter data more rapidly and more productively. 1. Select a command that allows you to use the power input field for data entry. For example, in the Part Design application, you could select the Chamfer command. In the lower right corner of the window, the power input field is displayed: If we zoom on the lower right corner of the window, note that: the area to the left of the power input field displays the names of the dialog box options for which power input is possible: this is the case only for editable fields and spinners (but not for combo lists) the power input field contains the default values for those options, separated by commas the icon appears to the right of the power input field: when this icon is displayed, you know that the command you are using supports power input. The dialog box remains open by default. 2. Enter the values for all the options in the power input field, making sure that you separate each entry using the separator appropriate for your language environment, then press ENTER to validate your input. Even if the cursor focus is in a document window, you do not need to click in the power input field to transfer the focus to the power input field: any characters you type will be directed to the power input field automatically Use the Tab key to scroll from the power input field in the main application window to the data input fields in application dialog boxes. Select the ESCAPE key to return the focus to the document window. This mechanism is also implemented in drafting documents when you enter text: as soon as you start typing, the focus is transferred automatically to the text editor window.

On Windows, you can set the separator you want to use. To do so, select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, double-click the Regional Settings control, then click the Number tab. Set the separator using the List Separator option. The default is the comma (",") for the English, Japanese, Korean and simplified Chinese environments, and the semi-colon (";") for all other supported environments. On UNIX, you cannot set the separator. The separator is the comma (",") for the English, Japanese, Korean and simplified Chinese environments, and the semi-colon (";") for all other supported environments. The values you enter in the power input field are updated instantaneously in the fields in the dialog box. If the dialog box is still open, click Apply or OK in the dialog box. However, you icon. If the dialog box is no can also remove the dialog box by clicking the longer visible, pressing ENTER validates your input and executes the command (equivalent to Apply and OK). If the color of the text you enter in the power input field changes to red, this means that you have made a mistake: for example, the number of values you enter may exceed the number of options for which power input is possible. Use the up and down keyboard arrow keys if you want to recover any input you previously entered. Finally, if a dialog box provides contextual commands, right-clicking over the power input field also accesses the same commands. Using power input helps you to be more productive because it provides an alternative to using dialog boxes for inputting data. In dialog boxes, you have to click in each editable field, or use the Tab key, to move from field to field. The power input field lets you concentrate on just the data you have you enter, and thereby facilitates data input.

Running Commands

This task explains how to run commands from the power input field. 1. To run a command from the power input field, enter a command like this:
c:command_name

where command_name is the name of the command as it appears in the menus.

For example, enter the following command:

c:New...

or:
c:New

to run the File->New... command.

2. Press the ENTER key to run the command. When pointing at icons, the syntax for running the associated command is displayed to the left of the power input field, to remind you that you can also run the command from the power input field. For example, when you point at the New
c:New

icon, the following message is displayed:

Using the Search Language

This section explains how to use the search language to search for objects. The search language offers almost all of the search functions available with the Edit->Search... command described in "Selecting Using the Search... Command". Searching using this command generates a search query (expressed in the search language) displayed in the "Generated query" field of the Search dialog box. The search language can now be used both in the power input field and in the Advanced tab of the Search dialog box. The search query both searches for the elements and automatically selects them. 1. Enter the search string. 2. Press the ENTER key. The searched objects are sent to the current command. If the current command is the Select command, the objects are selected.

Search Language: Syntax You can search for objects using the same criteria as with the Edit->Search... command. The message catalog KeyboardInput.CATNls sets up the power input search syntax, and search language shortcuts. The localized version of this message catalog determines the exact syntax and shortcuts for each language.

Operating Signs The search language uses the following separators (whose role you will discover in the examples below): : and = (these separators are interchangeable) != (different) <, <=, >, =>

Searching by Name You can search for an object name displayed in the specification tree. This is particularly useful if you renamed objects using the Feature properties tab of the Edit->Properties command, or the Properties contextual command. The name can also contain special characters. To search for an object by its name, enter the following command:
name:object_name

or name=object_name

or a command using an abbreviation referred to as a "shortcut" as follows:

n:object_name

where "object_name" is the name of the object. You can also use the "*" character as a wildcard to replace any number of characters. For example, the command:
name:wheel*

searches for all objects starting with the string "wheel". The message catalog KeyboardInput.CATNls sets up unambiguous default shortcuts. For example, there is no ambiguity between the shortcut "c:" (used in the power input area to enter a command), and "col:" (used for searches on color). In localized versions of the catalog, check that there are no identical shortcuts for two different items.

Searching by Type Use the Type field in the Search dialog box to display a list of types (the types are translated in each language). To search for an object by its type, enter the following command:
type:type

or type=type

or:
t:type

You can also search for types using the "." (period) as follows: For example:
'Part Design'.Pad

searches for all objects of type Pad created using the "Part Design" workbench. The following syntax is also allowed:
workbench.type.name= workbench.type.color=

For example:
'Part Design'.Pad.Color='Sea Green'

searches for all objects of type Pad created using the "Part Design" workbench, and of the color Sea Green. You can also omit certain expressions as follows:
'Part Design'.Pad

and:
.Pad

are equivalent. Similarly:

'Part Design'.Pad.Color='Sea Green'

and:
type=Pad & Color='Sea Green'

are also equivalent.

Here are some more examples using other operators described in Using Operators:
workbench.type.name=point* workbench.type.name!=point* workbench.type.name:point*

and:
workbench.type.color='sea green' workbench.type.color!='sea green' workbench.type.color:'sea green'

The following are also allowed:

col='sea green' color='sea green' name=*1 n=*1 type=hole t=hole

Searching by Color You assign colors to objects using the Color dialog box Graphic tab, when using the Edit->Properties command or the Properties contextual command. For a reminder about color names, refer to "Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties". To search for an object of a specific color, enter the following command:
color:color_name

or:
col:color_name

where "color_name" is the color of the object. If the name of the color contains a blank (which is the case with most of the colors available), you can type the full name as follows:
color:Sea Green

You can also surround the blank or the color name with a single quote (by default) like this:
color:Light' 'Blue

or like this:
color:'Light Blue'

You can also search for colors using their RGB values. For example:
color:'(200,100,100)'

Searching by Product Properties You assign properties to products (and parts in products) by right-clicking an element in the specification tree and selecting the Properties command from the contextual menu, clicking the Product tab in the Properties dialog box, and setting the properties in the Product frame. The properties you can search for (the same as those you assigned to the element) are: Part Number Revision Definition Nomenclature Product Description Component Description. For example, the search queries:
Product Description:completed Product' 'Description:completed 'Product Description':completed 'Product Description'=completed

search for all elements whose Product Description contains the text "completed". The property name is not case sensitive. You can also sue the following queries:
product description:completed product' 'description:completed

You can also search by product attributes, for example:

Drafting.Text.'Text String'='my text'

searches for any element containing the text string "my text".

Searching Objects Belonging to a Selection Set To search for an object belonging to a selection set, enter the following command:
set:selection_set_name

where "selection_set_name" is the name of the selection set. The strings "name", "type", "color" and "set" are appropriate for the English language only. The message catalog KeyboardInput.CATNls determines the exact syntax for your language.

Searching for Visible or Hidden Elements You can search for visible elements, or elements hidden in the No Show space using the following syntax:
visibility:visible vis:visible

and:
visibility:hidden vis:hidden

Searching for Lines by Thickness or Linetype You can also search for lines using specific thicknesses or linetypes like this:
weight: w:

or:
dashed: d:

When searching for lines with a specific weight, you can specify the weight index like this:
weight:6,all

to search for all lines which are 2.0000 mm thick.

Searching Using Favorites You can search for objects using your favorite queries defined via the Favorites mode. To do so: favorite=favorite_query_name but you can also enter: f=favorite_query_name Or f:favorite_query_name Or favorite:favorite_query_name

where "favorite_query_name" is the name of the favorite query. Note that the language is case sensitive. When you press ENTER, the search results are selected in the specification tree. You can use any of the special characters such as "=", "!" or "&" and combine them as you wish. For example, let's use the query defined in Searching Using the Favorites Mode. This query searches for any element named "My Sketch". Suppose you want your search to select all elements whose names are other than "My Sketch", you will just have to type: favorite!=Query_1 or f!=Query_1 In that case, the search filter is not modified. You can modify the search filter, just indicate the new filter after the favorite query name in the power input field: favorite=Query_1, from will search for any element named "My Sketch" From Search to bottom and not Everywhere as originally defined in Query_1. The new filter will supercedes the previous filter.

Use of Special Characters in Searches A name can contain any of the following characters, which also play a special role in the search syntax: : , & + - ( ) " * . = blank ; ! ' < > You must use the character ' (apostrophe by default) to surround strings containing special characters and which are to be interpreted exactly. For example:
name:*'&*'*

searches for all names containing the string &*. The following line in the KeyboardInput.CATNls resource file :
Quote = ';

specifies the default character for surrounding strings. However, you may also want to search for names containing the character ' itself. In this case, enter the character twice and make sure you place the two characters outside any string surrounded by the character '. Note also that the character ' can be used when searching for names, types, colors and selection sets. For example:
name:*''*

searches for all names containing a '. Another example:

name=my' 'favorite' 'part'.'1'

is identical to
name='my favorite part.1'

The above example shows that if a text string does not contain any apostrophe but special characters, it may be surrounded by apostrophes.

Using Operators The supported operators are: &, +, and - (for AND, OR and EXCEPT respectively) and ( ). Blanks are not considered as separators. They may be surrounded by ', but this is not mandatory. The following examples:
name:*wheel'&'door&type:Part name:*wheel'&'door & type:Part name:*'wheel&door' & type:Part name:*'wheel&door'& type:Part name:*wheel'&'door &type:Part

all search for parts whose names end with "wheel&door". The command:
name:*wheel' '

searches for names ending with "wheel". The command:

name:' 'wheel*

searches for names beginning with "wheel ". The command:

name:wheel1

+ name:wheel2

searches for two objects named "wheel1" and "wheel2".

Upper and Lower Case When searching for names, if the value is entered in lower case, the case is ignored. If there is at least one upper case character, the case is taken into account. Priority There is no priority among operators, but there is a priority in their order of appearance (from left to right). For example, the query:
type:Part & name:toto + type:Hole & Color:Black

is interpreted as:
type:Part & (name:toto + (type:Hole & Color:Black) )

and thus searches for elements of type "Part" among the objects in the document that are "black holes" or named "toto". To avoid ambiguity, use parentheses like this:
type:Part & (name:toto + (type:Hole & Color:Black) )

to obtain the same result.

Using Search Filters You can use the same search filters (except In List) as with the Edit->Search... command, by using the context keywords "all", "in", "from" and "sel":

all: searches the whole specification tree from top to bottom, to find objects created using all workbenches. in: the search will locate the appropriate elements in the active object and in the workbench you are currently using from: searches the elements in the active object to the bottom of the tree. For example, in a Part document, both parts and sketches are searched. sel: if you already selected objects before selecting the Search... command, this option searches from the selected objects to the bottom of the tree. The default is "in". Context keywords must always be placed at the end of the search string, and after the separator "," like this:
type:Hole, all

The separator is the comma (",") for the English, Japanese, Korean and simplified Chinese environments, and the semi-colon (";") for all other supported environments.

Virtual Reality Configurations

About Virtual Reality Support in Version 5 Stereoscopic Viewing Running a Multipiped Version 5 Session Using Head and Hand Tracking Devices in Version 5 Navigating in Examine Mode Navigating in Fly Mode Working With the VisionDome Installation Requirements

About Virtual Reality Support in Version 5

What is Virtual Reality? Clicking and dragging your way through a 3D graphics application may be interactive, but it's not virtual reality. It's not Virtual Reality because it's not immersive. "Immersion" (or "presence") is the goal of virtual reality. Immersion refers to your sense of engagement with the virtual model or environment. When you're immersed, you focus directly on your subject and disregard everything else. In virtual reality, an "immersive" application lets you focus on the task at hand, so you don't deal with a mouse, or the UNIX command line, or a GUI, or the fact that you're actually looking at something made from digital bits instead of physical atoms. Virtual reality essentially moves the computer out of your way, so you can interact directly with your data or information. Unlike interactive 3D graphics (which can consist of a series of still images coming off disk), virtual reality lets you intuitively manipulate and navigate through a real-time simulation of an object, or a process, or a place.

Where is Virtual Reality technology useful? Virtual reality adds value to virtually any application where it's vital to experience spatial relationships, and analyze, design, engineer and understand such relationships. Any project in which 3D information must be navigated or closely examined will benefit from virtual reality technology. If you are working in two dimensions (web design, word processing, ...), you don't need virtual reality.

What are the different types of Virtual Reality configurations?

Virtual reality technology can be recognized by the presence of specific I/O devices which can be organized into five categories, each creating a different impression of immersion. These categories are not mutually exclusive: Simulators Simulators use a physical mockup of vehicle with real controls (steering, throttle, pedals, etc.), with which you can navigate through virtual environment, and are ideal for applications such as pilot training, driver training and games. Simulators can also involve multiple participants. Wearable devices Wearable devices provide direct, "body contact" input/output to virtual models or environments through such devices as head-mounted displays, boom-mounted displays, data gloves, data suits, haptic feedback systems, motion platforms. These are ideal for digital prototyping, and provide a highly immersive experience. However, they are limited to single users. Desktop devices The traditional monitor serves as a window into virtual world, with which you interact using shutter glasses and 3D input. This is a low-cost alternative to wearable devices, and are suitable for scientific data visualization. They are also flexible (easily switch from monoscopic to stereoscopic; easy keyboard access). This range of equipment includes stereoscopic workbenches, tables and desks. However, desktop devices suffer from the following drawbacks: they are based on the single user approach they do not provide a full immersion experience. External devices External devices are used to interact with your Version 5 session. Those devices consist of a hand held equipment in which a tracker and a set of buttons have been integrated. Hand tracking allows you to add a virtual hand in the model to perform interactive functions such as selection, command run or navigation. Display systems Large virtual models and environments are projected onto flat or curved screens, using such technologies as virtual reality walls (for example, in Silicon Graphics Reality Centers). They can also be projected onto vertical and/or horizontal surfaces in special chambers like "caves" (for example, the Fakespace CAVE) or "walk-in domes".

These devices are the most sophisticated (and most expensive). They are ideal for digital prototyping, provide high resolution, and allow groups of participants to get involved and collaborate. They also require a lot of physical space.

Which Virtual Reality tools/technologies can be used in Version 5? In the myriad of tools and configurations available, we can already identify a short-list of hardware useful for navigating through or manipulating CAD data in real time, and capable of providing some level of immersive experience: Stereoscopic viewing Stereoscopic viewing of 3D images is built in Version 5. It can be achieved either in active or passive stereo mode, depending on the display system abilities. In an active stereo display system, left eye and right eye images are alternatively displayed on the screen at twice the refresh rate. An active pair of glasses with two shutters working in synchronization with the images is needed. Synchronization is often achieved using an infrared emitter: the left eye shutter is closed when the right eye image is displayed, and reciprocally. In a passive stereo display system, left eye and right eye images are displayed simultaneously on the screen. Image separation is performed by filtering glasses using polarized light, for instance. Stereoscopic viewing is extremely easy to implement. All hardware manufacturers provide now graphic boards supporting OpenGL quad-buffered stereo on Windows and UNIX based systems. Stereoscopic shutter glasses, such as the CrystalEyes manufactured by StereoGraphics, provide a partially immersive experience of digital mock-up visualization at lowest price investment. Another possibility is to use a StereoGraphics Z-Screen mounted on top of a standard monitor and viewed wearing non-expensive and lightweight passive stereo glasses. Head mounted display Head mounted display (HMD) afford a more immersive experience. Equipped with position-tracking capability, it displays output imagery based upon the position of your head. To use a head mounted display, you can have either:

an image generator computing left eye and right eye image separately such as an SGI Onyx workstation. Those are high-end systems providing high performance and high quality 3D viewing or an active to passive stereo converter such as Cyviz XPO2 box. This solution allows you to use an head mounted display on any platform supporting active stereoscopy. In addition to head mounted display, a standard joystick can be added to the virtual reality configuration, providing a very easy way to navigate in the digital mock-up. Projector tables, projection walls, Immersive Rooms Digital prototyping is served well by using a large projection systems going from the single screen projection table, such as Fakespace Systems ImmersaDesk or Barco Baron, to the multi-projector and multi-sided projection room, such as the FakeSpace Systems CAVE or the Barco I-Space. Version 5 also supports reconfigurable immersive display systems such as the Fakespace RAVE or the Barco MoVE. Those systems are ideal for scale one digital mock-up review or designing large assemblies and facilities. Displaying the Version 5 on a single screen/single projector display system requires no specific Version 5 service. You just need to plug your machine graphic board video output to the display video input. When you have a multi-projector display system, for instance as in a TAN Holobench or in a SGI Reality Center, you need a specific hardware and specific Version 5 functionalities. Using a multipipe SGI Onyx workstation, Version 5 can support any kind of immersive environment, that is to say any number of screens and projectors, in passive or active stereo vision mode. In such environments a better immersion is achieved using head tracking, providing a 3D image depending on the exact user point of view, as well as hand tracking for immersive interaction. To do so, Version 5 supports: Trackers such as Polhemus Fastrak, Intersense IS-900 and any devices compliant with the Fastrak Protocol Hand held devices with integrated tracker and buttons such as Virtual Presence SpaceStick, Fakespace Neowand or Intersense Wand

3D Connexion Spaceball and Space Mouse which could dramatically increase your work productivity by helping you manipulating the model with your second hand. Please note that those devices are not specific to virtual reality and can be used in any standard desktop configuration.

What does Version 5 support natively? The Version 5 infrastructure provides support for: stereoscopic viewing: refer to "Stereoscopic Viewing" for more information multipipe and multithread rendering: refer to "Running a Multipiped, Multithreaded Version 5 Session" for more information head and hand tracking: refer to "Using Head and Hand Tracking Devices in Version 5" for more information.

Stereoscopic Viewing

This section provides background information about stereoscopic viewing. Computer technology uses stereoscopic viewing to recreate the way we naturally see depth - stereoscopically. Stereoscopic viewing describes how we use both eyes, each with a slightly different perspective, to perceive depth in a physical environment. It delivers the most realistic visual representation possible of complex digital models, giving engineers, architects and scientists the best possible understanding of three-dimensional information, and yielding levels of technical proficiency not available using a typical 3D view. These images can be perceived by a user wearing special glasses which continuously transmit separate images to the left and right eyes, creating a view of computer or video-based objects that have depth, perspective and presence in three-dimensional space.

We do not intend to describe here all the possible hardware configurations which support stereoscopic viewing for Version 5. Consider the examples of hardware configurations mentioned in this section as no more than that: just examples. What Do You Need? Stereoscopic viewing is possible on both entry-range and high-end configurations: you do not automatically need expensive equipment to enter the realm of stereoscopic viewing.

Entry-Range Configurations On entry-range configurations, you need at least a graphics board supporting stereoscopic viewing on your platform, and a set of special glasses. The CrystalEyes range of glasses (designed by StereoGraphics, Inc.) is an example of the type of special glasses supported allowing you to benefit from stereoscopic viewing capabilities. Many graphics boards are supported. For detailed information about supported hardware configurations if you are running Windows NT, and general information about StereoGraphics, Inc. products, browse the following Internet site: http://www.stereographics.com/boards/brd-chrt.htm In case you want to use a standard machine with only one graphic board, two video inputs (one per eye) are required to manage a stereoscopic display system. If you have a machine with only one graphic board providing a single video output, the Cyviz XPO2 is a solution. The Cyviz XPO2 is a small electronic box converting one active stereo video input into the two corresponding plain video outputs (one per eye). A typical application would be a projection wall with passive stereo (two projectors) or a head mounted display.

You can click the thumbnail of the XPO2.

if you want to display a full-size picture

For detailed information about XPO2, please browse the following internet site : http://www.cyviz.com

High-End Configurations High-end configurations typically involve not only specific graphics boards and special glasses, but also a whole range of high-quality, immersive, stereoscopic display platforms from vendors such as FakeSpace Systems, which allow you to manipulate, assemble, and disassemble virtual mechanical objects while navigating through the entire digital mock-up. For detailed information about supported hardware configurations, and general information about FakeSpace Systems products, browse the following Internet site: http://www.fakespacesystems.com/ http://www.barco.com/projection_systems/

How to setup stereoscopic viewing in Version 5? This section is dedicated to stereoscopic viewing on systems that use one graphic board supporting OpenGL quad buffered stereo. 1. Set up the appropriate hardware configuration.

2. Set up the graphic adaptor configuration for stereoscopic display. This step depends on hardware and operating system configuration. Some systems require administrator privileges to change the graphic adaptor display mode. You are required to determine the height, width and frequency characteristics of the graphic interface. On IRIX: With root privilege, from the command line, you can use the setmon command, for instance: $ ls /usr/gfx/setmon -x 1024x768_96s For this to be taken into account, restart the graphic subsytem: $ (/usr/gfx/stopgfx;/usr/gfx/startgfx)& On SGI Onyx2 or SGI Onyx 3000 system, you should rather use the ircombine command. For detailed information, please refer to the SGI documentation.

On Solaris: On Solaris 8 use the fbconfig command, first to know the available configurations: $ /usr/fbin/fbconfig -res ? Choose a configuration, for instance 1280x1024x114s, then use the fbconfig command once again: $ /usr/fbin/fbconfig -res 1280x1024x114s Logout to restart the X server. On previous Solaris versions, the configuration command may depend on the kind of graphic adaptor you have: ffbconfig for Creator 3D, afbconfig for Elite and SUNWifb_config for Expert 3D.

On AIX: On AIX systems, you can use the smit utility: log as root run smit choose "Devices" choose "Graphic Displays" choose "Select the Display and Resolution refresh Rates", then the correct graphic board if more than one are on the system choose a stereo visual. The "list" button provides a list of all available graphic modes. Stereo modes are at 120Hz, for instance 1024x768@120Hz.

On HP-UX: With root privilege, use the setmon command to know the available configurations: $ /opt/graphics/common/bin/setmon -r This gives a table on which each line corresponds to an available graphic mode. To choose a graphic mode, type: $ /opt/graphics/common/bin/setmon -s n where "n" is the entry number of the chosen graphic mode.

On Windows based platforms Stereo activation can be found in "Display properties" (select the "properties" contextual command in your desktop background). Depending on the graphic adaptor, you may need to have administrator privilege to access the stereo setting. The location of this setting varies depending on the graphic driver vendor. If it is not directly available in the vendor. If it is not directly available in the vendor tab page, look for "advanced configuration" in the vendor tab page or in the "settings" tab page. In some cases, you may need to reboot the machine to activate the new mode.

1. Start a session. 2. Select the Tools->Options... command. 3. Click the Devices tab, and set the Stereo option to ON to enable stereoscopic viewing. Note the following platform-specific restrictions when enabling stereoscopic viewing: on AIX: you loose colors by passing from 24-bit to 12-bit colors using the GXT800 graphics board on SGI: performance decreases by approximately 10%. 4. Exit your session to save your settings, then restart.

5. Display the Stereoscopic viewing dialog box as follows: enter the following command in the power input field: c:Stereoscopic or, select the Tools->Customize... command, select the Commands tab, select the "All commands" item from the "Categories" list, then select the "Stereoscopic..." command. You can then add the command to a toolbar for easy access as explained in "Customizing a Toolbar by Dragging and Dropping". Select the command once it has been moved to the toolbar or select the View->Commands List... command then choose the "Stereoscopic..." command from the list.

The Stereoscopic viewing dialog box looks like this:

By default, stereoscopic viewing is disabled (Off).

6. Set the Stereo option to On to enable stereoscopic viewing.

Note that visualization performance will be impaired if you set the Stereo option to ON. 7. Set either "Manual" or "Automatic" mode. This mode sets the distance between your eyes when using stereoscopic viewing. The default mode is "Automatic". Automatic mode When working in Examine mode, you should set the eye gap to "automatic". Use this setting if you are viewing an object that in real life you could reasonably manipulate using your hands. This setting is suitable for working in confined spaces requiring an accurate perception of depth, in which you focus on the rotation point. When automatic mode is active, the eye-distance is adjusted automatically depending on the zoom factor. In automatic mode, the line of sight converges on the focal point. If the focal point is far away, and objects are located before the focal point, these objects will be viewed in a fashion more precise than in real life, so viewing results are unrealistic in this case.

Manual mode Manual mode provides you with precise control over the distance between your eyes, so that you can adapt your field of vision to the working context. The value you enter will be in millimeters. This mode is particularly suitable for working in Walk or Fly mode, when working on large-scale assemblies or industrial plants requiring a wider field of vision. If you need to perceive a high degree of depth, you should set the distance between your eyes accordingly. In this mode, the line of sight is parallel.

Running a Multipiped Version 5 Session

In "About Virtual Reality Support in Version 5", we discussed the different types of virtual reality configurations available. However, intensive use of virtual reality technology leads to loss of performance if you are using only one graphics pipe.

What is a "pipe" and what is the difference between a single and multipipe system? A "pipe" in this context refers to the graphics board associated with each single window into an application. It also refers to the data that is placed by the application which owns the pipe. You can also have a single pipe feeding three display channels like this: Nothing prevents you from using virtual reality configurations with just one pipe, the problem is that the overhead of running multiple applications in a single piped system can result in very poor performance. In a "multipipe" system, you can have several graphics boards, and each graphics board feeds a different display channel. Each application in a " multipipe" system has its own distinct pipe to the graphics hardware. There is a price to pay in memory usage and a very slight price to pay in computer overhead to manage the multiple pipes, but the overall positive effect on system performance is dramatic. Performance can be enhanced even further if you are running workstations using multiple processors, which allow "multithreading" of applications. Note that: the Version 5 infrastructure for UNIX platforms provides support for 16 windows maximum one window/pipe can be assigned to two threads (2 CPUs). A typical configuration is an SGI Onyx2 or SGI Onyx 3000 workstation using four graphics pipes. You run a main Version 5 session using one pipe from a workstation, and create three secondary windows (each one using its own graphics pipe) for projection onto a Reality Center-type projection screen, or inside a virtual reality CAVE. 1. Log onto the Onyx workstation.

2. Run the following command to display graphics subsystem information about your configuration: /usr/gfx/gfxinfo This command displays information (display name, resolution, etc.) about each graphics pipe like this: Graphics board 0 is "KONAL" graphics. Managed (":0.0") 1280x1024 ... Graphics board 1 is "KONAL" graphics. Managed (":0.1") 1280x1024 ... Graphics board 0 is "KONAL" graphics. Managed (":0.2") 1280x1024 ... Graphics board 1 is "KONAL" graphics. Managed (":0.3") 1280x1024 ...

3. Synchronize the graphics pipes with the video channels in your configuration by running the program: /usr/gfx/ircombine Refer to your IRIX documentation for more information about the ircombine program.

4. Export one of the following environment variables: export CATMPConfig=path/myconfigfile or export CATMPKConfig=path/myconfigfile where "path" is the path of a directory and "myconfigfile" is the name of a configuration file which you must create and edit to set up the secondary windows and assign them to different graphics pipes and displays.

Version 5 supports OpenGL Multipipe SDK technology (MPK) as well as an older set of SGI multipipe services. The MPK library is developped by SGI to manage multi-channel display configurations. Version 5 mpconfig command switches on and off the Version 5 multichannel support. The prerequisite is that one of the environment variables, i.e. CATMPKConfig or CATMPConfig, is valuated to a configuration file path before running the application: if CATMPConfig is valuated, the command activated the old set of multipipe services if CATMPKConfig is valuated, the command activates the MPK support.

Using MPK Version 5 provides powerful support for many virtual reality configurations: active or passive stereo decompositions, such as Stereo (Eye), DPLEX, 2D all multi-screen/multi-projector configurations such as TAN Holobench, Fakespace CAVE, etc. viewpoint tracking on all screens. Note: in order to use MPK, you need to download the corresponding library. For detailed information, browse the following internet site: http://www.sgi.com/software/multipipe/sdk/

When turned on using the mpconfig command, the multipipe support displays an information panel (named "Multi Pipe started") in which you just have to click OK to proceed. Some additional windows will then appear on the managed piped and the Version 5 model will be displayed across all windows. These two variables are not compatible and if you export both of them, the CATMPConfig variable supersedes the CATMPKConfig variable.

5. Edit the configuration file. If the display ":0.0" is used for the main Version 5 session, the syntax of the following file shows how to project a session using three separate pipes and the CATMPConfig environment variable :

pipe { name ":0.1" window { x 0 y 0 width 1280 height 1024 reference parameters wall_position [0,0] window is 0,0 } }

// First pipe declaration

// Display name // First window declaration

//Horizontal position (in pi //Vertical position (in pixels) //Window width (in pixels) //Window (in pixels) //Use width and height of this window to compute all size //Define the wall position (in pixels); the center of the main

pipe { name ":0.2" window { x 0 y 0 width 1280 height 1024

// Second pipe declaration

// Display name // Second window declaration

//Horizontal position (in pixels) //Vertical position (in pixels) //Window width (in pixels) //Window height (in pixels)

wall_position [1280, 0] } }

pipe { name ":0.3" window { x 0

// Third pipe declaration

// Display name // Third window declaration

//Horizontal position (in pixels)

y 0 width 1280 height 1024

//Vertical position (in pixels) //Window width (in pixels) //Window height (in pixels)

wall_position [-1280, 0] } }

6. Save your changes to the configuration file, then start your main Version 5 session.

7. In your main session, run the command: c:MPConfig to start multipiping. This creates the three empty secondary windows whose display name, size and position you defined in the configuration file. If you are using a Reality Center-type projection screen, for example, the three windows will be displayed side-by-side.

8. In your main session, run the command, select the command View->Full Screen. The video output displayed inside your main session is now projected coherently across the three windows.

9. In your main session, run the command: c:MPConfig again to stop multipiping.

Note that you can use stereoscopic viewing from within a multipiped session.

Note also that in CAVE configuration, you can increase the specular lighting accuracy by checking the "Enable OpenGL local viewer lighting" option in Tools->Options->General->Display->Performances. Be aware that this may lead to a loss of performance.

Calibrating the multi-channel support First of all, let`s remind us of the SGI pipe and channel architecture. An SGI machine as an Octane or an Onyx may host several graphic boards, named pipes. A same application can render images on all of these pipes. A pipe has a frame buffer in which the application write the images they compute. More precisely, each application writes images in windows that are sub-parts of the frame buffer. On the video output side, the system reads the pipes frame buffer and generate video signals. There is one video signal per active channel. Each pipe may host several channels. Each channel is positioned on a part of a pipe frame buffer, and a video signal generated display this particular part. The important caracteristic of the system is the number of pipes, their frame buffer size (called managed area), the number of channel per pipe, their corresponding frame buffer sub area and the video signal format they output. You get the system information by typing /usr/gfx/gfxinfo in a shell. You can modify your system configuration using the setmon or ircombine commands. They enable you to change the pipe-managed area size, the activated channels on each pipe, their frame buffer part as well as their video format. Report to the SGI documentation to use these commands. The pipes are usually named :0.0 , :0.1 , :0.2 etc , unless you have several X Servers, in which case they are named :0.0, :0.1 on X Server 0, :1.0, :1.1,, on X server 1 etc.

On the scheme above, the system has two pipes and six channels per pipe. Only two are activated on each pipe. The pipe-managed areas are 2560x2000. The Pipe 0, channel 0 is associated to an area of size 1280x1024, and located at the coordinate (0,0). The Pipe 0, channel 1 is associated to an area of size 1280x1024, and located at the coordinate (0.5,0). The Pipe 1, channel 0 is associated to an area of size 1280x1024, and located at the coordinate (0,0). The Pipe 1, channel 1 is associated to an area of size 1280x1024, and located at the coordinate (0.5,0). The channel video format are 1280x1024 at 96Hz stereo for instance. Version 5 renders 3D images in four windows. Two of them are on pipe 0, and the other two on pipe 1. Among these windows, one is particular: this is the main document window which appears within the application frame. The other windows are called auxiliary windows. If the user goes to the FullScreen mode, a complete image of the model will appear on the screen. All the information Version 5 needs for such a configuation are in a configuration file (refer to SGI MPK support). However, the system should also be correctly set up using the ircombine or setmon commands. Also, since this system outputs active stereo, the pipes need to be genlocked. This means that their video refresh are synchronized. This is necessary for the stereo glasses to work corrrectly. You should refer to the SGI support for genlocking your system. For instance, to set up the system, you can run the following script in a shell. You need the administrator privileges. This script will log you out and may badly affect the system if there is an error in it. echo "Pipe 0 INTERNAL (master). Setting ..." /usr/gfx/ircombine \ -target :0.0 \ -destination eeprom \ -global syncsource=INTERNAL,size=2560x2000 \ -channel 0 format=1280x1024_96s,sync=RGB,sourceloc=0+0 \ -channel 1 format=1280x1024_96s,sync=RGB,sourceloc=1280+0 echo "done."

echo "Pipe 1 EXTERNAL (slave). Setting ..." /usr/gfx/ircombine \ -target :0.1 \ -destination eeprom \

-global syncsource=EXTERNAL,syncformat=1280x1024_96s,size=2560x2000 \ -channel 0 format=1280x1024_96s,sync=RGB,sourceloc=0+0 \ -channel 1 format=1280x1024_96s,sync=RGB,sourceloc=1280+0 echo "done." echo

(/usr/gfx/stopgfx;/usr/gfx/startgfx)&

There are two kind of configuration file you can use to deal with multi-channels configurations. We only speak here about the MPK config file. To run V5 with such a configuration file, type in a shell: export CATMPKConfig={complete path of the config file}. then, in this same shell, run CATIA : /usr/DassaultSystemes/B07/irix_a/command/catstart env {EnvName} direnv {environment path name} The Mpconfig command will use the configuration file pointed by the CATMPKConfig environment variable.To have a full undertanding of the MPK config file format, please refer to the MPK documentation. Only a standard display configuration will be taken as an example and detailed here. Lets assume we have a cubic immersive space such as a Fakespace CAVE, or a Barco Cubic Immersive Space. This system has four walls. All of them are square. The length of each square side is 3 meters long. There are four projectors displaying active stereo (one projector per wall). The machine has two pipes and six channels per pipe. It is set (ircombine) so that: The pipe-managed areas are 2560x1024 Pipe 0 channel 0 goes to the front wall. Its size is 1280x1024. Its location is (0,0) Pipe 0 channel 1 goes to the right wall. Its size is 1280x1024. Its location is (1280,0) Pipe 1 channel 0 goes to the left wall. Its size is 1280x1024. Its location is (0,0) Pipe 1 channel 1 goes to the floor. Its size is 1280x1024. Its location is (1280,0) The mpk file writes as follows:

global
{ MPK_WATTR_PLANES_ALPHA 1 MPK_DEFAULT_EYE_OFFSET 57 MPK_WATTR_HINTS_STEREO 1 MPK_DATTR_QUADSTEREO_HEIGHT 768 MPK_DATTR_QUADSTEREO_WIDTH 1024 } config { name mode mono stereo "Config" stereo [ "", none ] [ "", quad ]

This is the global section where you set some global options. Always specify the MPK_WATTR_HINTS_STEREO option when using stereo. Set the MPK_DATTR_QUADSTEREO_HEIGHT and MPK_DATTR_QUADSTEREO_WIDTH to your manage area size when using stereo. Set the mode to stereo or mono to activate or not the stereoscopic rendering.

Declare the pipes you are using and specify their name. In each pipe section, declare the windows Version 5 will manage on these pipe (including the main document window). The main document window should always appear first in its pipe. If your run Version 5 in pipe X, the main document window will use the paramaters of the window declared first in the pipe X section of the configuration file. The window viewport specifies the window size and position within the pipe frame buffer. The figures correspond to a ratio of the managed area size : [x,y,width.height]. You should always declare one channel per window, and only one (Version 5 only support on channel per window). The term channel may be confusiong since it does not have the same meaning as the usual pipe channels. Just always declare the channel viewport as [0,0,1,1]. Then, specify the coordinates of the wall corners. This window image will then be supposed to be projected onto the corresponding wall, fitting exactly the rectangle described by the coordinates. The coordinates should be expressed in the MPK reference frame. Use the same unit as the unit. name viewport channel { name viewport wall { "left view" [ 0., 0., 1., 1. ] "left window" [0, 0, 1, 1 ] The default eye position is defined by this reference frame. This means that if you use the MPConfig command without head tracking, the point of view will be computed for a user standing with its head at this reference frame origin, looking along its Z axis, and with its right on the positive X axis side. Since it is usually better to define the system front wall as the one naturally seen by the default head position, the MPK reference frame is chosen so that this front wall is on its Z axis side. Bear also in mind that the interaction with the model is only possible within the main window. In particular, this is the case of the viewpoint manipulation with the mouse. Thus, the front wall is usually set as the main document window. Here, we get :

pipe { display window { ":0.0"

bottom_left -1524, 1828.8 ] bottom_right -1524, -1828.8 ] top_left 1828.8 ] }

[-1828.8, [-1828.8, [-1828.8, 1524,

} } window { name viewport channel { name viewport wall { bottom_left -1524, -1828.8 ] bottom_right -1828.8 ] top_left -1828.8 ] } } } } pipe { display window { name viewport channel { name viewport "right view" [ 0., 0., 1., 1. ] "right window" [0, 0, 1, 1 ] ":0.1" [-1828.8, 1524, [-1828.8, [1828.8, -1524, "front view" [ 0., 0., 1., 1. ] "front window" [0, 0, 1, 1 ]

wall { bottom_left -1828.8 ] bottom_right 1828.8 ] top_left -1828.8 ] } } } window { name viewport channel { name viewport wall { bottom_left -1524, 1828.8 ] bottom_right 1828.8 ] top_left -1828.8 ] } } } } [-1828.8, -1524, [-1828.8, [1828.8, -1524, "floor view" [ 0., 0., 1., 1. ] "floor window" [0, 0, 1, 1 ] [1828.8, 1524, [1828.8, -1524, [1828.8, -1524,

Using Head and Hand Tracking Devices in Version 5

This task aims at giving you a general overview of the necessary virtual reality devices as well as two application examples for head tracking and hand tracking, respectively.

Device Overview
Using efficiently Virtual Reality services implies that you fully understand the Virtual Reality architecture. To do so, let`s have a quick look at the following scheme:

The virtual reality devices which can be handled are connected to Version 5 through a socket communication mechanism involving three actors: Version 5, a broker and a device driver. Version 5 requires a broker to be able to use device drivers. A broker is a small application holding all the running driver communication port. This broker application always runs on the same machine as Version 5, whereas the drivers can run on another machine or another operating system. Each driver declares itself to the broker thus implying that the broker should always run before running a driver. Broker and driver applications can be standalone processes or run within the Version 5 process (they are threaded processes). Some drivers may be threaded or not, depending on the devices. As a consequence, you can use either a threaded or standalone driver with a standalone broker. To run a standalone broker or driver, you need to execute it explicitely, whereas running a threaded broker or driver only requires they be activated via the Device tab in the Tools->Options.

Prior to using head or hand tracking in Version 5, you need to set up these actors proceeding the following way: 1. Start the broker. The broker role is to list and store any device declaration and to provide this list to Version 5 when requested. The broker must be started on the same host as the one of Version 5 session. 2. Start the driver. The driver will declare itself to the instantiated broker and will answer Version 5 when an event enumeration or an event sending is requested. The driver may be launched on a different host as the one of the Version 5 session. The driver sends events to the Version 5 application. Here are the four event types used: POSITION_EVENT for the tracker position and orientation in space VIEWPORT_EVENT for the coordinates of the screen corners as well as the letf and right eye position ButtonPress which for the press button number ButtonRelease for the released button number. 3. Start a Version 5 session. When started, Version 5 will ask the broker for a list of devices and will ask each device for an event enumeration. In the meantime, these devices will be asked to start or stop event sending.

Application Examples
Head tracking There are two kinds of head tracking: camera tracking in which the tracking acts as if a camera moves in the model. The displayed image is the one filmed by the camera. In that case, the rendering projection pyramid keeps its original shape. This tracking is typically used for head mounted display or to simulate a camera asymetrical tracking in which an image is computed and displayed on a screen that should be considered as being fix in relation to the model, although you move in relation to the screen. This tracking is used for displaying images on fix screens and making the user feels as if the model were steady in the room as he moves in it.

The camera tracking functionality requires a POSITION_EVENT or a symetric VIEWPORT_EVENT (head mounted display type). The asymetrical tracking functionality requires a POSITION_EVENT if the SGI multipipe management system is running, otherwise a VIEWPORT_EVENT. When using a POSITION_EVENT, the head tracking requires the POSITION_EVENT X axis to be in the same direction as the vector defined by (Left Eye, Right Eye):

If the tracker is not fixed on the stereo glasses so that X is well aligned, you will need to aks the driver to apply an offset matrix. If several matching events are available, a panel will prompt you to choose an event when launching the VRViewTracking command: just select the event corresponding to the tracker dedicated to head tracking. You can also identify the convenient event thanks to its type and emitter driver name. The following examples detail the viewpoint tracking installation procedures using a Polhemus Fastrak sensor and an Irix platform. The Version 5 driver managing the Polhemus Fastrak is a standalone (i.e. non threaded) driver named "PolExecDaemon".

1. The first step is to edit a configuration file to adapt it to your own configuration. The configuration file holds necessary information for the driver: the communication baud rate on the serial port, the serial port number, the events to send, the matrix you could use to virtually offset the trackers from their mounting point, the screen definition and the eye position for the VIEWPORT_EVENT. Let`s describe a configuration file assuming you use a Polhemus Fastrak for tracking both head and hand. Your display system is a bench or a multi-channel display and you use the mpconfig functionality. In this case, you need the driver to send two POSITION_EVENTs. The # symbol indicates a comment in the configuration file and the opposite text explains each of the following instructions: SERIALPORT "COM1" BPS 38400 TRACKER 0 POSITION_EVENT TRACKER 1 POSITION_EVENT #Intersense Head Tracker MATRIX 0 [0,1,0] [0,0,-1] [-1,0,0] [0,0,0] #Intersense Wand MATRIX 1 [0,1,0] [0,0,-1] [-1,0,0] [0,0,0] SCREEN { UPPERLEFT [-700, 300, -430] UPPERRIGHT [-700, 300, 430] LOWERRIGHT [-700, 900, 430] }
Specify the serial communication port number. You can use either COM1, COM2 or COM3. Specify the communication baud rate with the Polhemus Fastrak. Usual baud rates are 38400 and 115200. Here you can type as many lines as events you need. Specify the tracker number: a Polhemus Fastrak has up to four trackers plugged in. Specify the desired event for each tracker. You can choose among four types of events by selecting them using the keywords POSITION_EVENTS, VIEWPORT_EVENT, BUTTON_PRESS and BUTTON_RELEASE. You can ask for different events on the same tracker number. Specify the matrix to be applied to the POSITION_EVENT coming from tracker 0. This matrix means that the drivers will send to the application the Y-tracker axis as X axis, the Z-tracker axis as Y axis and the X-tracker axis as Z axis. If you do not apply any matrix, use an identity matrix. Keep a screen section (detailed hereafter) even though it is not used.

Now, suppose you want to use the Polhemus Fastrak to track both hand and head, without using the mpconfig functionality. In this case, you will need asymetrical tracking just as you have done it before but, as you will not use mpconfig, you will need the driver to send a POSITION_EVENT for the hand and a VIEWPORT_EVENT for the head. The configuration file will then look like this: SERIALPORT "COM1" BPS 115200 TRACKER 0 VIEWPORT_EVENT TRACKER 1 POSITION_EVENT MATRIX 1 [0,0,1] [1,0,0] [0,1,0] [0,0,0] SCREEN { UPPERLEFT [-700, 300, -430] UPPERRIGHT [-700, 300, 430] LOWERRIGHT [-700, 900, 430] } LEFTEYE [0.0, 0.0, 61.0] RIGHTEYE [0.0, 0.0, 124.0] Let`s take a look at a last example and consider the following case: you want to use the Polhemus Fastrak to track both hand and head and your display system is a Head Mounted Display. You will thus need a camera type tracking. You also need the driver to send a POSITION_EVENT for the hand and either a POSITION_EVENT or a VIEWPORT_EVENT for the head. If the driver sends a POSITION_EVENT for the head, no stereo viewing is available and you need to adjust the viewpoint angle for your head mounted display in Version 5. To do so, create a named view by selecting the View->Named Views... command then edit its properties. Note: you cannot adjust its ratio in case the head mounted display optics are not symetric. This camera is saved in the .CATProduct file under the application node. The POSITION_EVENT must have its X axis going to the right, its Y axis up and its Z axis backward. Otherwise (as we explained it before), you have to ask the driver to apply a rotation matrix. You can use the first configuration file for this system. In case you use a VIEWPORT_EVENT, the configuration file should be as follows:
For the VIEWPORT_EVENT, you need to specify the corner coordinates of the projection screens. These coordinates are to be expressed within the same reference frame (R0) as the data sent by the tracker.

The screen is assumed to be rectangular.

You also need to specify the eye position in the mobile tracker reference frame. We call "mobile tracker reference frame" the reference frame defined by the x, y, z, h, p and r coordinates sent by the tracker. Express these coordinates in millimeters.

SERIALPORT "COM1" BPS 115200 TRACKER 0 VIEWPORT_EVENT TRACKER 1 POSITION_EVENT MATRIX 1 [0,0,1] [1,0,0] [0,1,0] [0,0,0] HMDSCREEN { UPPERLEFT [700, -900, -720] UPPERRIGHT [700, 900, -720] LOWERRIGHT [700, 900, 720] }

Use this section to describe the HMD fields of view. Describe the desired virtual projection pyramid. All the figures are to be expressed in the mobile tracker (fixed on the head) reference frame centered between right and left eye. For instance, if the tracker is mounted such as Z is going down and Y forward, the coordinates are as shown below:

Here, the pixel ratio is 1.25.

LEFTEYE [0.0, 0.0, 61.0] RIGHTEYE [0.0, 0.0, 124.0] We recommend you to pay attention to the coordinates you enter. The more careful you are, the better the results will be.

2. Run the Virtual Reality broker using the following instruction: /.../B08/irix_a/code/command/catstart -run CATVisVRBroker where /.../ is the Version 5 installation path. For a standard installation, the path should be /usr/DassaultSystemes. 3. Run the tracker device driver for viewpoint tracking: /.../B08/irix_a/code/command/catstart -run PolExecDaemon -object "machine_name configuration_file" where "configuration_file" is the full path name of the configuration you edited in step 1 and "machine_name" is the name of the machine.

This driver may be used with any device compliant with the Fastrak protocol.

4. Start Version 5: /.../B08/irix_a/code/command/catstart If you want to use stereoscopic viewing, you have to perform Steps 5 to 12 otherwise, jump to Step 13.

5. Select the Tools->Options... command then the Devices tab from the General category. 6. In the "Stereo enable" area, check the On option. 7. In the "Virtual reality starting mode" area, check the Manual option. 8. Click OK to validate your parameters. 9. Restart Version 5.

10. In the power input field, enter the following command: c:stereoscopic 11. In the Devices tab, set the "Stereo enable" and the "Virtual reality starting mode" options to On and Automatic, respectively. 12. Click OK.

13. In the power input field, enter: c:VRViewTracking The Viewpoint Tracking is activated. It can be simply deactivated by re-entering the c:VRViewTracking command in the power input field Note: before using this command, make sure that a driver is running and able to send POSITION_EVENT or VIEWPORT_EVENT.

Since the Intersense firmware protocol is an enriched Fastrak protocol, the PolExecDaemon Version 5 driver can communicate with an Intersense IS900 tracker. The above-mentioned instructions are still valid in this case. In addition, the Intersense IS900 supports a Wand hand tracker. This specific hand tracker has four buttons the driver is able to decode as ButtonPress and ButtonRelease events.

To configure the driver these two events, use the keywords BUTTON_PRESS and BUTTON_RELEASE as explained above. Use the following matrix in the PolExecDaemon driver so that the attached reference frame is as required by the Version hand tracking functionality: MATRIX 1 [0,1,0] [0,0,-1] [-1,0,0] [0,0,0]

Hand tracking These two examples are designed for hand tracking using: a Joystick Spacestick VirtualPresence with a Polhemus sensor and the DMU Navigator 3 product a FakeSpace Neowand

The VR Cursor command switches on and off the hand tracking functionality with the following prerequisite: one or more drivers should be running and able to send a POSITION_EVENT, a ButtonPress and a ButtonRelease. The command will look for the first driver able to send POSITION_EVENT then, ButtonPress and ButtonEvent. The POSITION_EVENT used for hand tracking should have its X axis pointing to the right, its Y axis up and its Z axis backward as shown below:

If the tracker is not fixed this way in the hand device, you will have to ask the driver to apply an offset matrix. When "On", hand tracking displays a red laser pointer. This pointer is collocated with the hand tracker so that you really feels the pointer getting out of your hand. This feeling is reinforced in stereoscopic display:

The buttons enable you to pick within the model and to manipulate the viewpoint. There are two manipulation modes: Examine mode and Fly mode. You can switch between the two simply by running the VRFly command. The Examine mode is the default mode when running the VRCursor command. You can also move the model objects by snapping the 3D compass to them. The 3D compass will then follow your hand moves. Note: setting the compass to "Snap automatically to selected object" lets you snap the compass to any objects you can pick with the laser pointer. Now let`s go to using hand tracking!

Joystick Spacestick 1. Run the PolExecDaemon. 2. Run the Joystick3DExecDaemon using the following command: /.../B08/{OS_a}/code/command/catstart -run "Joystick3DExecDaemon BrokerHostName serialPort" where - /.../ is the Version 5 installation path. For a standard installation, the path should be /usr/DassaultSystemes/ - {OS_a} is the name of your operating system (irix_a, etc.) - brokerHost is the name of the machine on which the device broker and Version 5 are running - serialPort is the port to which the joystick is connected (e.g.: COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4). There is no configuration file for this driver. Another method to run the driver is to first create an icon on your desktop, then drag the Joystick3DExecDaemon.exe file from the explorer and drop it onto the desktop (this file can be found in the installation directory, in intel_a\code\bin). Edit the icon properties and modify the target file to c:\...\intel_a\code\bin\Joystick3DExecDaemon.exe BrokerHostName serialPort. Then, you just have to double-click the icon to run the driver.

3. For the Polhemus version (a Polhemus tracker is fixed inside the joystick), use the following matrix in the PolExecDaemon driver so that the attached reference frame matched the Version 5 hand tracking functionality requirements: MATRIX [0,0,1] [1,0,0] [0,1,0] [0,0,0] The buttons are located as described on the picture below:

4. Run the DMU Immersive Review configuration then the DMU Navigator 3 product.

Fakespace Neowand The Version 5 driver managing the Fakespace Neowand buttons is a standalone (i.e. non threaded) driver named "CATNeoWandDriver". 1. Run the CATNeoWandDriver using the following command:. /.../B08/{OS_a}/code/command/catstart -run CATNeoWandDriver -object "machine_name" where - /.../ is the Version 5 installation path. For a standard installation, the path should be /usr/DassaultSystemes/ - {OS_a} is the name of your operating system (irix_a, etc.) - brokerHost is the name of the machine on which the device broker and Version 5 are running - serialPort is the port to which the joystick is connected (e.g.: COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4). There is no configuration file for this driver.

Another method to run the driver is to first create an icon on your desktop, then drag the CATNeoWandDriver.exe file from the explorer and drop it onto the desktop (this file can be found in the installation directory, in intel_a\code\bin). Edit the icon properties and modify the target file to c:\...\intel_a\code\bin\CATNeoWandDriver.exe BrokerHostName serialPort. Then, you just have to double-click the icon to run the driver. 2. In case a Polhemus tracker is fixed inside the NeoWand, use the following matrix in the PolExecDaemon driver so that the attached reference frame matches the Version 5 hand tracking functionality requirements: MATRIX [0,1,0] [0,0,-1] [-1,0,0] [0,0,0] The buttons are located as shown in the picture below:

Click the thumbnail

to see the full-size picture.

Tracking calibration In case you intend to use a multi-channel display system with head tracking, you should add some information related to the tracking sytem inside the MPK configuration file. These information should be added at the end of the file, before the last closing bracket }. They should all begin with a comment symbol #. Even though there are commented out, they are used by Version 5. The only used information are those included in the userdata section. The measure unit for all the numbers it the millimeter. As required by the head tracking functionality, the mobile tracker reference frame should have its X axis pointing right, its Y axis pointing up, and its Z axis pointing backward. However, it may not have its origin located exactly between the two eyes. The eye-offset keyword enables you to specify the middle eye point coordinates in this mobile tracker reference frame. The fix tracker reference frame may be different from the MPK frame. Use the tracker-X, tracker-Y and tracker-origin keywords to specify it. In the example below, the fix traker frame has its X axis pointing backward., its Y axis pointing to the right and its origin directly 1524 mm under the MPK origin. If you used the millimeter as unit in the MPK file, the keyword "MPK_unit_in_mm" should be valuated to 1. If you used meter for instance, it should be valuated to 1000. # All dimensions are to be specified in mm. # - eye-offset specifies the eye coordinates in the mobile tracker frame # - IPD is the inter-pupillary distance # - the tracker related data describe the fixed tracker frame in the MPK global frame # - MPK_unit_in_mm defines the MPK data unit. # userdata #{ # # # # # # eye-offset IPD tracker-X tracker-Y tracker-origin [0,-20,0] 57 [0,0,-1] [1,0,0] [0,-1524,0] 1

MPK_unit_in_mm

A standard session example Suppose the following case: you use a three-channel display system in a reality center you also use a three-pipes SGI machine. The display system has three projectors, one per channel, projecting active stereo you want your head and hand to be tracked in front of the screens your tracking system is an Intersense IS900 there are two trackers, one for the head and one for the hand, both plugged on the IS900 the hand tracker is an Intersense wand with four buttons. You have already set up the system, i.e. you have all the necessary configuration files and your CATSettings are up-to-date. Moreover, you have set the "Virtual reality starting mode" option to "Manual" in the Tools->Options->General->Devices tab since the Intersense driver is a standalone, i.e. non threaded, driver. The scenario detailed hereafter will show you how to use the system. 1. Power up the Intersense IS900 2. Open a shell window then run the broker (this is a non threaded case) 3. Open another shell window then run the Version 5 IS900 driver. Because of the configuration file you use, the driver will send two POSITION_EVENTs (one per tracker), a ButtonPress and a ButtonRelease 4. Open a third shell window then run a Version 5 session 5. Open a .CATProduct model file 6. Key in the following command in the power input field: c:mpconfig then click OK when a panel appears to indicate that the Multipipe mode is started 7. Key in the following command in the power input field: c:VR View Tracking then choose the head tracker POSITION_EVENT before clicking OK . 8. Key in the following command in the power input field: c:VR Cursor 9. Key in the following command in the power input field: c:VRFly to select the convenient manipulation mode for your session 10. Select the View->Full Screen command. The system is running. Note: you can customize the commands entered in the power input field so

that they appear as push buttons in a toolbar. You can also assign a keyboard shortcut to them if you wish so. When you want to open a new model or quit the session: 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Deactivate the full screen mode by unchek the Full Screen contextual command Key in c:VR View Tracking in the power input field to stop head tracking Key in c:VR Cursor in the power input field to stop hand tracking Key in c:mpconfig in the power input field to stop the multipipe management Select the File->Open or the File->Exit command.

Navigating in Examine Mode

This task shows you how to navigate in examine mode Navigating in Examine Mode is the default mode. In this mode your object is driven by the joystick, it is just as if you would be using remote control to position your object. You are manipulating the object directly. While manipulating, you can also examine your document as you would from the outside by moving around the document's perimeter, or as you would from within, turning your head to view or moving closer (zoom in, zoom out) to different objects. Open the GARDENA.CATProduct document. 1. Target Point a location and click the side button and release (simple click). This selected location will be positioned and centered in the screen plane.

2. 3D Panning and Rotating Click the side button without releasing: you are turning around the target. Translating Push the joystick forward or pull the joystick backward

Rotating Drag and /or rotate in 3D using the side button. See the figure below:

3. Rotating only Click the side button without releasing and press the trigger without releasing (still holding the side button down).

4. Zooming in/ zooming out Press and hold down the side button, then press and release the trigger button and push (to zoom in) or pull (to zoom out), still holding the side button down.

3. Manipulating Translating Push the joystick forward or pull the joystick backward

Rotating Drag and /or rotate in 3D using the side button. See the figure below:

Navigating in Fly Mode

In Fly mode you can move upward or downward on any horizontal view plane as you move forward or backward (backward in advanced mode only). This task shows you how to navigate in fly mode with a 3D joystick. You already opened your document GARDENA.CATProduct in DMU Navigator workbench (please refer to Loading documents in the ENOVIA - DMU Immersive review documentation) More About the joystick: In Fly mode you will use the joystick Side button 1. Click the Fly Mode icon in the Immersive Review toolbar. You can now begin to fly. Note that when the fly mode is activated, the head tracking behavior is still active. It means that you can still turn head during flying operation to look at details in a given direction.

2. Flying forwards/backwards if you push forward the joystick, the speed increases and you start moving forward (towards the circular symbol ) , if you pull the joystick, the speed decreases and you start moving backwards. Note: Try not to incline the joystick performing this operation if you want to fly straightforward

A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view: The speed at which you first approach the object is 0. The further you push/pull the joystick from its starting position, the greater the speed.

This symbol represents the circular target towards which you fly. 3. Flying up/down

The figure below the arrow specifies the speed at which you are flying:

if you incline the joystick forward, you start flying downward if you incline the joystick backwards, you start flying upward

If you pull the joystick at the maximum, you will not be able to perform a complete looping, you will just continue to fly up. If you push the joystick back to its initial position, you will stop flying upward progressively. 4. Flying right/left If you turn left, you change direction (left) If you turn right, you change direction (right)

As you manipulate the joystick, the shape of the arrow changes to reflect the direction in which you are flying:

You can combine simultaneously these joystick manipulations (above described) to obtain the fly behavior you wish.

To return to the default navigation mode, click the Examine mode icon

Working With the VisionDome

The VisionDome is a multi-user, single projector hemispherical display system for which wearable devices (such as glasses) are not required. It lets you display 3D models with a full-color image projected onto a 180-degree hemispherical screen, providing a highly immersive experience. This task provides a step-by-step scenario explaining how to work with the VisionDome as well as suggested settings allowing you to take the best advantage of it.

For best performance, we recommend that you use high-end graphics card (such as Wildcat 4210) with latest graphics drivers. Here are a link to the IBM website where you can dowload the latest graphics card drivers available: ftp://intelli:intelli3tech@ftp.pc.ibm.com/pub/intellistation/WC4110_04010205.zip ensure you installed a compatible software version, i.e. Version 5 Release 5 Service Pack 2 or later. You can download Service Pack 6 from the following website: http://search.support.microsoft.com/kb/articles/Q152/7/34.asp check you have a working nodelocked license.

1. Download the spiw.dll extra library from the following website: ftp://intelli:intelli3tech@ftp.pc.ibm.com/pub/intellistation/TruTheta_V5R5SP1.zip then place it into the system root directory. 2. Prior to starting Version 5, set the appropriate environment variables by selecting My Computer then right-clicking Properties from the contextual menu.

3. In the System Properties dialog box, click the Environment tab then enter CNextVisionDome in the Variable field and 0 in the Value field as shown below:

4. Click Set then OK to validate. The software is now enabled to work on the VisionStation. Note: If you wish to disable this variable, just set its value to 1 instead of 0. 5. Check that the getvpdc.exe file exists in the system root directory. When run the following information, for instance, should be returned:
IBM Intellistation (Z-Pro Thor), Model 686627U S/N 23FF072 Planar S/N JF9FY02742B, Build PFKT39AUS

6. Access the Taskbar Properties then set the "Always on top" option to OFF and the "Auto hide" option to ON. It also recommended that you drag the taskbar to the right of the screen. 7. If necessary, repeat Step 3 to access the Environment variables then set the following variables with the corresponding values in order to move the eyepoint to the specific location: SPI_EYE_X = 0.0 SPI_EYE_Y = 0.5 (do not set more than 0.59 or the picture will be broken) SPI_EYE_Z = 0.345 SPI_LENS_X = 0.0 SPI_LENS_Y = - 0.138 ("-" for minus sign) SPI_LENS_Z = 0.0

The above-mentioned variables and values are recommended since they give geometrically correct projection, however at the expense of a larger area of black at the bottom of the screen. They can be corrected if needed but should always be set prior to running a Version 5 session for the first time. 8. Start a Version 5 session.

9. Select the Tools->Options... command. In the General category, select the Display sub-category then the Navigation tab to uncheck the "Preselect geometry view" option:

10. Click the Open icon (or select the File->Open command) then use the File Selection dialog box to navigate to the desired model. 11. Finally, three modifications have to be made for visualization purpose: right-click the XYZ axis in the middle of the screen then select "Hide" from the contextual menu select the View->Render Style->Apply Customized View command then check that the "Outlines" option if OFF select the View->Specifications command (use the F3 key) to remove the specification tree. 12. Select View->Full Screen. Do not forget to navigate in Fly mode since it allows you to manipulate and navigate through a real-time simulation of your model, thus giving you a better sense of being immersed. To do so, click the Fly Mode Mode->Fly. icon in the View toolbar or select View->Navigation

Installation Requirements
Basic Software Requirements Hardware requirements How Are Version 5 Products Packaged? More About the Licensing Mechanism

Basic Software Requirements

Common Software Requirements

Refer to the Program Directory or contact your IBM Support Center, for appropriate corrective service to apply to the software described in the topics that follow.

Windows 95 or Windows 98 (P1 products only)

Note: The Windows 95 and Windows 98 environments apply only to Platform 1 (P1). The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2, or Windows 98, with the following components: A Microsoft implementation of OpenGL libraries is delivered with Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98; these libraries may be updated depending on selected graphic adapter, when installing the graphic adapter and associated drivers. Dassault Systmes will provide recommendations related to driver levels based on tested graphic adapters through the following website at: http://www.ibm.com/solutions/engineering A localized version of the operating system may be required when the selected installation locale differs from latin. Version 5 P2 products do not operate on Windows 95 or Windows 98.

Windows NT and Windows 2000

The following components at the minimum indicated level are required:

Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Version 4.0 with Service Pack 4, Service Pack 5, or Service Pack 6a, or Windows 2000 Professional, with the following components: Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000 deliver an implementation of OpenGL libraries. These libraries may be updated depending on the selected graphic adapter, when installing the graphic adapter and associated drivers. Dassault Systmes will provide recommendations related to driver levels based on certified configurations through the following website at: http://www.ibm.com/solutions/engineering a localized version of the operating system may be required when the selected installation locale differs from Latin1 (for example, for the Japanese language environment) Note: For remote access from networked clients, Terminal Server is supported with Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Terminal Server Edition, at Service Pack 4 level on the Windows NT server. Access through standard browsers requires Citrix MetaFrame 1.0 to be installed in addition on the server. Terminal Server is also available with Windows 2000 Server and Windows 2000 Advanced Server.

IBM AIX
The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: AIX Version 4 Release 3.2 or 3.3, including: C Set++ for AIX Application Runtime: at minimum level 3.6.4 for AIX 4.3.2 (5648-A81) at minimum level 4.0.2 for AIX 4.3.3 (5765-D52) (C Set++ Application Runtime is shipped with AIX Operating System). IBM XL Fortran Runtime Environment for AIX (5765-C11, or 5801-AAR-7070, P/N 04L2123), at minimum level 5.1.0 OpenGL and GL3.2 Runtime Environment (delivered with AIX 4.3 operating systems) CDE (Common Desktop Environment, delivered with the operating system).

HP-UX
The following components at the minimum indicated level are required:

HP-UX Version 10.20 A.C.E. 4 (Workstation Additional Core Enhancements for HP-UX 10.20 - July 1999), or 10.20 A.C.E. 5 (Workstation Additional Core Enhancements for HP-UX 10.20 - December 1999), or HP-UX 11.0 A.C.E. (November 1999), including: ANSI C++ Runtime Environment (aC++, at minimum level 1.21, delivered with the operating system) HP FORTRAN Runtime Environment (delivered with the operating system) HP-UX 700 OpenGL 3D API Runtime Environment CDE (Common Desktop Environment, delivered with the operating system) A localized version of the operating system may be required when the selected installation locale differs from ISO code pages. Note: Because of binary incompatibilities between HP-UX 10.20 and HP-UX 11.0, support of HP-UX 11.0 is limited to a strict run-time environment.

SGI IRIX
The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: IRIX 6.5.2m, including: C, C++ and Fortran77 standard execution environment (delivered with the operating system) OpenGL (delivered with IRIX execution environment) IRIX Interactive Desktop (delivered with the operating system) WorldView is required when the selected installation locale differs from ISO-1.

Sun Solaris
The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: Sun Solaris 2.6.0, Solaris 7 or Solaris 8, including: C and C++ runtime environment (delivered with the operating system) OpenGL runtime environment (delivered with the operating system) the Fortran runtime environment is delivered with Version 5 CDE (Common Desktop Environment, delivered with the operating system) a localized version may be required when the selected installation locale differs from ISO-1.

Hardware Requirements

V5 Virtual Reality Infrastructure: supported hardware

Workstations: SUN, IBM, HP, SGI, NT multi-channel configurations necessary for some output devices (eg CAVE) are only supported on SGI multi-pipe workstations: head mounted devices that are compatible with SGI multi-pipe workstations or Cyviz XPO Box are supported benches from Fakespace WorkDesk and Solutions ImmerseDesk Family, BARCO Baron dome from eLumen display devices active or passive stereo glasses: CrystalEyes and NuVision 60Gx 3D sensors for viewpoint tracking: Polhemus Fastrack Family and InterSense IS900 3D input devices: SpaceStick from Virtual Presence, Fakespace NeoWand, InterSense Wand

DMU Immersive Review: integrated hardware

Workstations: SUN, IBM, HP, SGI, NT multi-channel configurations necessary for some output devices are only supported on SGI multi-pipe workstations: all benches configurations supported in V5 active or passive stereo glasses supported in V5 3D sensors for viewpoint tracking supported in V5 3D input devices: SpaceStick from Virtual Presence

How Are Version 5 Products Packaged?

The Version 5 product packaging model is based on the concepts of configurations and products.

Configurations
Configurations are a convenient and attractive way for you to order and install the adequate combination of products for each type of user, while offering a single solution from a licensing point of view. There are two types of configurations: standard configurations contain a pre-defined list of products, corresponding to most frequent user profiles across industries and processes. These configurations are offered at an attractive price compared to the sum of the individual product prices. the content of custom configurations is dynamically defined at ordering time, thus allowing you to adapt the configuration content to the most specific user needs. The content of a custom configuration is defined by adding individual products (see product delivered as "add-on" below) to an existing standard configuration. The result is a competitively priced solution, and remains a single solution from a licensing point of view. After initial installation, the configuration mechanism lets you manage the evolution and growth of your user profile content by allowing you to add new products. The resulting new seat definition is still a single solution from a licensing point of view. To be able to use Version 5, you need to purchase and acquire at least one configuration license. NOTE you need the DN3 configuration to access the DMU immersive Review Product ( Du3).

If you already have a custom configuration, you can extend it by adding products. But before you do so, you must use LUM to migrate your server license database to support custom configuration growth. To do so: stop your LUM license server migrate your server license database to the new format using the command: i4ccmig then import your new license as usual.

Products
Products are the elementary software building blocks for Version 5 installations. Version 5 may be ordered in three ways: As a standard configuration As an "add-on" product on top of a standard configuration to build a custom configuration. As a "shareable" product. In this case the product is delivered with its own license key, allowing the user to obtain the license at the beginning of the session, or to leave it for another user. Prices of products ordered in this mode are different, versus "add-on" price, to take into account multiple users potential. Shareable product licenses do not have serial numbers.

More About the Licensing Mechanism

Version 5 delivers identical licensing mechanisms on UNIX and Windows environments, based on LUM (License Use Management). The following licensing principles apply: Using a given Version 5 product requires a license for it and for its prerequisite products Using a given Version 5 configuration requires a license for it. Licenses for Version 5 configurations are acquired and released for the total configuration. The products within a configuration cannot be shared. In all cases, licenses are acquired at the beginning of the process, and released at its termination. Version 5 can be used in two licensing modes: nodelock or with concurrent usage of licenses on a network.

Nodelock Licensing
The use of local display of the hardware configuration is mandatory for Version 5 usage in nodelock mode. There is no limit to the number of Version 5 processes launched for a given license (product or configuration). For instance, a user can launch the following simultaneous processes: a Version 5 interactive session a Version 5 process executed through an OLE container application replay of macros recorded from captured sequences of Version 5 user interactions.

Concurrent Licensing
A user on one machine, using one display, uses one license per product used, regardless of the number of processes. If the display changes, then an additional license is taken for the corresponding process. Add-on and shareable products require a license for a configuration which includes at least the prerequisite products. Licenses for Version 5 configurations are acquired and released for the total configuration. The functions within a configuration cannot be shared.

Demo Usage
In addition to its normal mode of operation where all licensed functions are accessed, Version 5 is capable of running in demo mode, on UNIX and NT, with some disabled functions (such as File->Save - see list below): Existing Version 5 customers, who have a minimum of one regular license, can switch from standard mode to demo mode (Tools->Options->Licensing tab). As the user restarts a session, the demo mode will be automatically used. Qualified prospects, who may be given the Version 5 code for evaluation purposes, are required to enter a special demo license key. This will ensure that the code starts automatically in demo mode. With this mechanism, customers can explore add-on products for which they do not yet have a license. The qualified prospect can get first hands-on experience, verify the ease of use of Version 5, and create the first parts. In both cases, a favorable business environment is created for accelerating sales cycles. When using Version 5 in demo mode, the following functions are disabled: File Save and Save as File Read (except for prepared Version 5 demo documents) Embedding Version 5 documents in OLE documents Opening Version 5 documents using OLE technology Cutting, copying and pasting Version 5 documents with the NT clipboard Recording and replaying macros.

Using and Customizing Fonts

About Fonts Customizing User Interface Fonts on Windows Customizing User Interface Fonts on UNIX Customizing Fonts for Displaying Texts Customizing Fonts for Displaying Geometry Area Texts Adding Extra PostScript Fonts Understanding Differences Between Font Display and Printed Output Recovering Custom Fonts Developed Using CATIA Version 4

About Fonts
This section contains principally conceptual information about font support in general, identifies which areas of the Version 5 software are concerned by font support, and explains how you can customize fonts. The areas of the software which allow font customization are: user interface: menu names, command names, tooltips, dialog box names and texts, etc. specification tree texts texts you enter in certain applications, and which reference fonts: a typical example is the text you enter in drawing documents created using the Generative Drafting product. You will also find information about how, in certain contexts, the text you see in the geometry area may not look exactly the same when you print. And finally, if you used the CATFONT utility in CATIA Version 4 to customize your own fonts, you will also find information about how to recover the fonts for use in Version 5.

Customizing User Interface Fonts on Windows

This task explains how to customize user interface fonts on Windows. 1. Select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, then click the Appearance tab (if it is not displayed by default). The following dialog box appears:

2. Use the Item list to select an item of the user interface you want to customize, or click on a user interface item in the area in the center of the dialog box. For example, select the items: Menu Message Box if you want to customize menu command, message box, dialog box and tooltip text fonts.

3. Select the desired font, font size and color. 4. Click Apply, then OK. 5. If you have a Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect.

Customizing User Interface Fonts on UNIX

This task explains how to customize user interface fonts on UNIX. 1. Go to the directory:
Install_directory/resources/msgcatalog/

where "Install_directory" is the root installation directory you chose when installing the software. If you installed the software at the default location, you would go to the following directory:
/usr/Dassault Systemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog

if you are using the English language. A subdirectory is provided for each language supported. Go to the appropriate subdirectory if you are using a language other than English.

2. Edit the file named "Dialog". The "Dialog" file contains resource declarations for fonts (and foreground and background colors) for certain user interface components. The file is delivered at installation and is ready for use as is. Note that you can declare Motif fonts only.

3. Customize the last line of each user interface component declaration if you want to change the font and the font size. 4. If you have a Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect. Make sure you exported the LANG variable for the desired locale before restarting a session.

Customizing Fonts for Displaying Texts

This task explains how to customize the fonts used, for example, to display: texts in the specification tree constraint texts in the Sketcher, Part Design, Assembly workbenches and, in general, all 2D texts. Note that system fonts are used for displaying these types of text. This does not concern texts you enter in drawing documents created using the Generative Drafting product. On Windows 1. Select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, click the Display control then click the Appearance tab (if it is not displayed by default). 2. In the Item list, select the Message Box item, or click inside the Message Box item (on Message Text) in the area in the center of the dialog box. 3. Select the desired font, font size and color. 4. Click Apply, then OK. 5. If you have a Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect. On UNIX

1. Go to the directory:
Install_directory/resources/msgcatalog

where "Install_directory" is the root installation directory you chose when installing the software. If you installed the software at the default location, you would go to the following directory:
/usr/Dassault Systemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog

if you are using the English language. A subdirectory is provided for each language supported. Go to the appropriate subdirectory if you are using a language other than English.

2. Edit the file named "Visualization". The "Visualization" file contains resource declarations for fonts for displaying annotation texts. Each font is declared using six identical declarations which differ only in the font size. This is required to allow end users to zoom the text size. The range of font sizes allows end users to zoom within the limits of those font sizes. The file is delivered at installation and is ready for use as is. Note that you can declare Motif fonts only. The Visualization file for the DBCS language (Japanese, Korean and Simplified Chinese) environments contains two lines for each declaration: one line for the SBCS character set, and one line for the DBCS character set. 3. Customize each line if you want to change the font. 4. If you have a Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect. Make sure you exported the LANG variable for the desired locale before restarting a session.

If you exchange documents with a site using a different language, text display may contain "garbage" in 2D areas such as the specification tree and in editable fields. As explained above, specification tree texts, for example, are displayed using system fonts. If you do not have the same fonts installed on both sites, the text will not be lost: it will just not be displayed correctly. To display all text correctly, you must do the following on the receiving site: install and activate the appropriate locale for reading the document make sure that the appropriate system fonts are installed and declared correctly on the receiving site. Text in the geometry area points to CATIA Version 4, Bitstream or custom fonts. Make sure that the appropriate fonts are installed and declared correctly on the receiving site.

Customizing Fonts for Displaying Geometry Area Texts

This task explains how to choose fonted texts displayed in the geometry area, for example, when using the Generative Drafting product, and lists the fonts you can choose from. You need access to the Generative Drafting product license to follow this scenario which shows you how to enter text in a drawing and choose a font for the text. The objective is to present the list of fonts supported. 1. Open a drawing you created using the Generative Drafting product. 2. Click the icon, then click a point in the drawing to position the text.

The Text Editor dialog box is displayed. 3. Use the Text Editor dialog box to write the text, justify it, specify the text height and define the anchor point, then click anywhere outside the Text Editor window, but inside the main application window. The Text Editor dialog box disappears. 4. Point to the text, right-click and select the Properties command. The Properties dialog box is displayed:

5. Click the Font tab. The Font tab includes controls for setting the font, font style and size.

Which Font Formats Are Supported? Version 5 provides the following font formats: PostScript Type 1 format PostScript CID (rearranged fonts are not supported) CATIA Version 4 FONT format TrueType format With respect to the PostScript Type 1 font format, note that on Windows only, if a TrueType version of the font exists or has been created, the TrueType version of the font can be used to optimize visualization quality.

Which Fonts Are Provided? The following fonts are supported and are installed ready for use without further customization when you install Version 5: all default stroke fonts delivered previously with CATIA Version 4 22 Bitstream Type 1 fonts an extra font (customized by Bitstream): CATIA Symbols; this font contains the symbols from Version 4 fonts TrueType fonts provided by Windows Note that the Bitstream fonts are delivered in several different styles (depending on the font), whereas the CATIA Version 4 fonts are delivered in regular style only. Furthermore, the 22 Bitstream fonts support ISO-8859-1 environments only. The fonts in TrueType format may be used as is, i.e. all fonts delivered will be displayed in the font list. However, you can customize this list (for instance, to keep only the fonts you use most frequently) by copying the desired fonts to your Version 5 environment in: install_root\resources\fonts\TrueType where "install_root" is the installation folder (Windows NT). For TrueType fonts, a ".ttf" file is required.

Note that no PostScript CID fonts are provided. For Russian, Polish and Czech environments, no Type 1 fonts are provided, only Version 4 fonts. For Japanese, Korean, Taiwanese and Chinese environments, no CID fonts are provided, only Version 4 fonts.

Which Bitstream Fonts Are Supported? The Bitstream fonts are:

Font Name Swis721 BT

Attribute File Name roman Swiss.pfb italic SwissI.pfb bold SwissB.pfb bold italic SwissBI.pfb Swis721 LtCn BT light condensed SwissCL.pfb light condensed italic SwissCLI.pfb Swis721 BdOulBT bold outline SwiOuB.pfb Monospac821 BT roman Monos.pfb italic MonosI.pfb bold MonosB.pfb bold italic MonosBI.pfb Dutch801 Rm BT roman Dutch.pfb italic DutchI.pfb bold DutchB.pfb bold italic DutchBI.pfb Courier10 BT roman Coure.pfb italic CoureI.pfb bold CoureB.pfb bold italic CoureBI.pfb UniversalMath1 BT regular Mathe.pfb SymbolMono BT regular SymbM.pfb SymbolProp BT regular SymbP.pfb

Note that: the Swiss 721 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Helvetica the Monospace 821 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Helvetica Monospaced the Dutch 801 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Times Roman the CATIA Symbols font (not in the above list) contains the symbols from Version 4 fonts.

For each of the Bitstream fonts, the following files are delivered in the location referenced by the CATFontPath variable: in the Postscript folder or subdirectory: .pfb, .inf, .pfm, .afm in the ExtraFiles folder or subdirectory: .ttf. Note: On Windows only, installing Version 5 also installs in the ExtraFiles environment the equivalent fonts in TrueType format. The TrueType font format offers enhanced visualization quality. The installation adds the fonts (in TrueType format) to the list of system fonts you can view by selecting the Start->Settings->Control Panel command and double-clicking the Fonts control. Which Version 4 Fonts Are Provided? The following Version 4 fonts are supported and are installed ready for use without further customization when you install Version 5:

SSS1.font, SSS2.font, SSS3.font, SSS4.font: 4 simplex sans serif fonts ROM1.font, ROM2.font, ROM3.font: 3 roman fonts GOTH.font: 1 Gothic font SYM1.font, SYM2.font, SYM3.font, SYM4.font: 4 symbol fonts KANJ.font: Kanji font (Japanese) Regarding the KANJ font, from now on, halfwidth Katakana characters are displayed with a smaller width than the width with which they were displayed in CATIA Version 4 KOHG.font: Hangeul font (Korean) TRCH.font: Traditional Chinese font SICH.font: Simplified Chinese font.

Note that: SYM1 contains annotation and tolerance symbols, and plot markup characters SYM2 contains ISO symbols fonts SYM3 contains roughness symbols SYM4 contains graphic and mathematical symbols as well as miscellaneous technical symbols.

Adding Extra PostScript Fonts

This section explains how to add extra PostScript Type 1 fonts. A large choice of PostScript or TrueType fonts is available from Bitstream Inc. (http://bitstream.com). You can address questions about ordering Bitstream fonts to: http://catia_support@bitstream.com 1. Copy the new fonts to your Version 5 environment in:
install_root\resources\fonts\PostScript

where "install_root" is the installation folder (Windows) or directory (UNIX).

For Type 1 fonts, the following files are required: ".pfb" or ".pfa" font files ".afm" and ".inf" files. To achieve enhanced font visualization (Windows only), if the associated TrueType font does not exist, you can ask the system to generate it from the PostScript files (the following file types are needed: .pfb, .afm, .inf). 2. To do so, select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, double-click the Fonts control, then select the File->Install->New Font... command. 3. Select the font, and when prompted, check the three options, notably the first option in the dialog box: "Convert Type1 to TrueType", then click OK. If an agreement exists between the font supplier and Microsoft, the system will then generate the corresponding TrueType font. If not, the font will not be generated.

4. Edit the file:

install_root\resources\fonts\PostScriptRelatedTrueType

to map the PostScript file name with the full name of the TrueType equivalent. The "full name" refers to the name of the font visible when selecting the Start->Settings->Control Panel command and double-clicking the Fonts control. If you already have the TrueType fonts, you can simply install them. To do so, select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, double-click the Fonts control, then select the File->Install->New Font... command and select the fonts to be installed.

Note about CID Fonts For CID fonts, the following files are required: the CID font file (with the ".cid" suffix) the CMAP file associated with UNICODE encoding (with the ".cmap" suffix) the ".afm" file.

Understanding Differences Between Font Display and Printed Output

This section contains information about minor differences you may notice between the way text is displayed in the geometry area and how it looks in printed output. Text Display In general, there is a slight difference in how text is displayed between Windows NT and UNIX: on Windows NT, text is displayed using TrueType fonts, whereas Type 1 Postscript fonts are used on UNIX. Differences between Text Display and Printed Output When printing on printers using the drivers listed below, you can expect the following results:

Driver GDI

Font Used for Printing Font Used for Printing On UNIX On Windows NT TrueType N.A. Any differences between displayed and printed text depend on how your System Administrator set up your printer. Your printer may be set up in one of three ways: the printer has all the required memory and fonts the printer does not have the fonts, but the PostScript file contains fonts

Discretization is applied to Drafting texts. For 2D texts (for example, in the specification tree), if the CATIA - P2 setting is active, printing the text produces a bitmap, whereas in all other cases, texts are printed using the font referenced in the following resource file:
Install_folder/resources/msgcatalog/Print

PostScript

By default, the font is Helvetica. For DBCS languages, discretization is applied to 2D texts. or you may have to map your printer to a specific font. For example, to view your printer properties in a Version 5 session, select the File->Print command, click the Properties... button and view the printer properties on the Advanced tab. CGM HP-GL2, HP-RTL CalComp C907 Oce N.A. Graphics GPR50 Versatec: VCGL and VGS 2.0 VRF

Discretization is applied to texts

Recovering Custom Fonts Developed Using CATIA Version 4

This task explains how to use CATIA Version 4 FONT files and set them up in your Version 5 environment. For more information about CATIA Version 4 FONT files, refer to your CATFONT Version 4 utility documentation. 1. Make sure that the fonts you created are in the FONT format (described using the UNICODE code key) and not in the FONTDATA format (described using the EBCDIC code key). The internal font format we recommend from CATIA Version 4 Release 1.8 onwards is described using UNICODE codes. If you did not already migrate your user FONTDATA files to FONT files and FONT CODE files, you must do so using the CATFONT utility using, as a minimum level, CATIA Version 4 Release 1.8. Regarding FONT CODE names, refer to your CATFONT utility documentation for more details. Note that the following is no longer supported: the font described with proportional format the grid defined by five numbers. In both cases, the associated orders are ignored. Note that none of the CATIA Version 4 basic delivered fonts used any of these options.

2. Copy the Version 4 FONT files to your Version 5 environment in:

install_folder\resources\fonts\Stroke

where "install_folder" is the installation folder (Windows) or directory (UNIX).

3. Copy the FONT CODE files to your Version 5 environment in:

install_folder\reffiles\NLS\fontcode

4. Declare your Version 4 FONTLIB names by referencing them in the following file:
install_folder\resources\fonts\V4FontInteroperability

This file maps to a Version 4 FONTLIB name, the FONT and FONT CODE associated with it. Regarding Korean fonts, since there are differences in Korean ideogram UNICODE codes between the UNICODE used in Version 4 and Version 5, no Version 4 user-defined Korean font can be used directly in Version 5.

Using Catalogs
Getting Started with Catalogs Creating a Catalog Using the Catalog Editor Creating a Catalog in Batch Mode Browsing a Catalog Reordering Catalog Components Instantiating Catalog Components Resolving Part Families Making a Standard Query in a Catalog Making a Smart Query in a Catalog Creating Components from Catalog Filters

Getting Started with Catalogs

This section tells you what you need to know about catalogs. Users often need a way of storing and classifying the many objects they have at their disposal, whether they be screws, ball bearings or computer parts. These objects may number tens of thousands, each with its own specific characteristics such as shape, color, size, diameter, length, standard, etc. To facilitate fast and easy retrieval of such objects thus avoiding time-wasting redesign Version 5 offers the possibility of creating catalogs. These can either be created from scratch or through the conversion of CATIA Version 4 libraries. For details about creation from scratch see Creating a Catalog Using the Catalog Editor or Creating a Catalog in Batch Mode. To find out more about the conversion of V4 libraries see "Converting CATIA Version 4 Libraries into Version 5 Catalogs" in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide.

Note that Dassault Systmes does not guarantee downward compatibility for Version 5 catalogs. A Version 5 catalog is in the form of a tree structure made up of: chapters: a chapter references other chapters or families. It is a way of classifying the elements it refers to families (end chapters): a family is a set of components components: a component is a reference to an external document or an entity such as a feature (e.g. PowerCopy), V4 documents (e.g. models) or V5 documents (e.g. CATPart, CATProduct, etc.) described with keyword values keywords: a keyword is an attribute describing the chapter and family content. Each component may be assigned its own attribute value. You can associate keywords to chapters and families and thus, perform searches by attribute value to filter their content. The example shown below and elucidated in some of the following tasks is a generic family comprising bolts, i.e. a chapter ISO_Bolts referencing end chapters (ISO 4014 Hexagon head bolts-grade A & B, ISO 4014 Hexagon head bolts-grade A & B (non-preferred) and ISO 4016 Hexagon head bolts-grade C) which, in turn, reference entities. The entities referred to by the end chapters can be described using keywords such as PartNumber, PartName, Designation, etc.

After catalog creation, two functions facilitate and expedite navigation: search by keyword allowing you to find more easily the entities that come closest to your requirements

Obviously, the more criteria you use the easier it is to narrow down the search for as satisfactory a result as possible a preview function (detailed further in this guide) enabling the viewing of all entities in a given chapter to facilitate and expedite your search:

You can of course define more levels in the catalog's tree structure than shown above. There are two important points to bear in mind: Any chapter can be referenced by one or more other chapters. This means that you have more than one way of accessing a catalog entity. Any chapter can be considered to be an entry point into a catalog.

Finally, catalogs can be incorporated into the CATIA - Team PDM database. For more information about this product, see the CATIA - Team PDM User's Guide.

Creating a Catalog Using the Catalog Editor

This section introduces the Catalog Editor workbench which provides interactive commands to create and modify your own catalogs by adding chapters, keywords and descriptions. From the Start menu, select the Infrastructure->Catalog Editor commands to open the Catalog Editor workbench. An empty catalog containing a first chapter is created as you access the workbench. The icons available in the Catalog Editor are updated, i.e. grayed or ungrayed, according to the contextually edited element. For example, if you double-click a family you will only be able to add a keyword or a description. Now let`s go to adding elements to our catalog!

Add a Chapter As shown in the Getting Started with Catalogs task, a Version 5 catalog is made up of chapters, each chapter describing what we call a "family". In our example, the ALL_FASTENERS.catalog comprises a chapter, ALL FASTENERS, and two families, SCREWS and NUTS. 1. In the left-hand part displaying the catalog structure, double-click to activate the chapter under which you want to create a chapter or a subchapter. This chapter must not be a family. or select the Insert -> Add Chapter... 2. Click the Add Chapter icon commands from the main menu to display the Chapter dialog box .

3. Key in the name of your new chapter in the Name field. 4. Click OK. The new chapter is created and displayed in the catalog structure. Once a chapter has been created, you can easily modify its name and its icon using two methods: select the chapter in the catalog structure and use the End chapter object->Definition... contextual menu to change its name and its icon select a created description in the right part of the window then choose the Edit current chapter... command from the contextual menu.

Add a Link to Another Catalog 1. Open the catalog to which you want to create a link. 2. Activate the ALL_FASTENERS.catalog window. 3. Click the Add link to another catalog icon or select the Insert -> Add link to another catalog... commands from the main menu. 4. In the other catalog, select the chapter or the family to be linked. The link is created. An icon is displayed in the graph and its appearance changes according to the selecting item: family or chapter.

Add a Family The family you are going to create will be directly added to the current chapter. 1. Click the Add Family icon or select the Insert -> Add Family... commands from the main menu to display the Component Family Definition dialog box.

2. Indicate the name of the family in the Name field. 3. In the Type field, select an application type from the pulldown list. 4. Click OK. The family is created.

Add a Keyword

The keyword will be added to the current chapter. 1. Click the Add Keyword icon or select the Insert -> Add Keyword... commands from the main menu to display the Keyword creation dialog box.

2. Specify a name for the new keyword. 3. Use the drop-down list to select the keyword Type. This list provides all knowledge types, i.e. Integer, String, Boolean, Angle, and so on. 4. Enter a Default Value for the keyword. This value may optionally be unset by clicking the Unset button.

You can uncheck the Visibility option if you do not wish the keyword to be visible. In that case, the keyword will be visible in the Catalog Editor only and not in the Catalog Browser. 5. Click OK. The keyword is created and associated to the selected chapter. Note: The "With discrete list of values" option lets you assign legal values to the keyword. Once the keywords have been created, they can be easily modified using two methods: select the chapter in the catalog structure and use the End chapter object->Keyword default values... contextual menu select a created description in the right part of the window then choose the Keyword default values... command from the contextual menu. The Chapter`s keywords dialog box is then displayed.

This dialog box lets you specify a new Name and a default Value for the selected keyword, unset the displayed values or even remove a keyword. The Visible option is used by the catalog administrator to make a keyword visible or not when a user browses the catalog.

Position your pointer on the Value field then use the contextual menu and select the Range... command. This command lets you define a Minimum and a Maximum bound for the description value.

Add a Component to a Family 1. Activate the family. or select the Insert -> Add Component... 2. Click the Add Component icon commands from the main menu to display the Description definition dialog box.

Once the description has been created, it can be easily modified. Just select the description in the right part of the window then double-click it or choose the Definition... contextual menu. 3. Click the Select document button if you want to select a referenced object. You can select .CATPart, .CATProduct, .CATScript or .CATGScript documents. Your choice is displayed in the File name field. Or Click the Select external feature button to choose a PowerCopy, a Details, a Formula or Rules Checks feature in another document open in the current session.

Or Click the Select document in session button lets you create a component pointing to a document already opened in your current session. Clicking this button opens the Session document panel which enables you to select a file from the list of currently opened documents as shown below:

This panel lets you filter the files by type and displays a preview of the selected file. This file will be considered as a "Document" in the Type field. Note that as far as ENOVIA V5 or ENOVIA VPM documents are concerned, the the DocId are taken into account in the File name field.

4. Click the Keyword values tab. This tab enables you to set values for all keywords you have previously defined.

5. In the Keyword name list, select the element for which you want to set a value. 6. Enter your value in the Value field.

You can click the Unset button to unset the displayed value.

7. Click the Preview tab.

A default document preview, which is the Referenced document, is displayed if you point on a document. If you point on a feature, nothing is displayed. 8. Choose the "Local preview" option if you want to refer to a document stored in the .catalog file or the "External file preview" option to preview an external file in .jpg, .bmp., etc. format. If you click the "External file preview" radio button, you can select a file in the Select File dialog box. The complete path will then be displayed. You can also directly click the Select an external preview file button instead of clicking the External file preview radio button. 9. Click OK when you have finished. The description is created. You can update all the descriptions of a chapter at the same time using the value of a string type keyword. To do so, choose a chapter then select the Update descriptions name command from the Insert menu.

The Update descriptions name dialog box enables you to indicate a new Reference keyword. When you rename the description, the Name value will be modified as well but if no Name has been specified, you can modify the description without creating this keyword.

Add a Part Family A part family is made of components referring to a .CATPart document. This part is unique but has been assigned different sets of parameter values, each of them being managed by a design table. For more information on design tables, refer to the "Design Tables" section in the Version 5 - Knowledge Advisor User`s Guide. This section shows you how to add a part family from a selected document (i.e. a .CATPart document) managed by one or more design table(s). 1. Select a chapter. or select the Insert->Add Part Family... 2. Click the Add Part Family icon commands to open the Part Family Definition dialog box. A default name is given to the part family but you can modify it.

3. In the Type field, select an application type from the pulldown list. 4. Under the Reference tab, click the Select Document button to define the document that will be referenced. This document should be a CATPart with a single design table, otherwise an error message will be displayed. The Type field will be automatically filled according to the file you selected.

In case the document you selected contains more than one design table, the following dialog box appears:

Just select a design table from the list before clicking OK to validate your choice. 5. Click the Browser Preview tab to specify the type of browser preview you want to use.

A Default document preview, which is the document stored in the .catalog file, is displayed . 6. Choose the "Referenced document preview" option to preview the document you point to or the "External file preview" option to preview an external file in .jpg, .bmp., etc. format. If you click the "External file preview" radio button, you can select a file in the Select File dialog box. The complete path will then be displayed. The "Store preview in catalog" option lets you save the preview in your catalog.

7. Click OK. The part family is created and displayed in the specification tree. A sheet containing a component for each line of the design table is also created. When you double-click the part family in the specification tree, any corresponding information contained in the design table is displayed. Each information corresponds to a keyword in the chapter.

Note that you can hide or add part family definition and keyword values by selecting the corresponding item from the contextual menu.

Add Part Family Components This section shows you how to add components managed by a design table to an existing part family. 1. Double-click to activate the part family to be edited. 2. Click the Add Part Family Components icon or select the Insert->Add Part Components... commands to open the Part Family Definition dialog box. The name of the active part family is displayed and can be modified, if needed.

3. Click the Select Document button to choose the component that will be referenced. The Type of the selected document will be automatically displayed. In case the document you selected contains more than one design table, the Part Family Design Table List dialog box appears to let you choose the desired design table. 4. Click the Browser Preview tab to specify the type of browser preview you want to use. Refer to Add a Part Family (Step 5) for more information. 5. Click OK to validate. The new components are added to the part family with their related information.

Note: another method to create a catalog is to click the New icon the File->New... command.

or select

In the New dialog box, double-click the CatalogDocument type or select it then click OK.

Using Icons If you prefer not to use the default icons supplied with the catalog application, you can associate one of your own with each chapter. You can do that by putting: either the complete path indicating the location of the icon or just the name of the icon (without the .bmp extension) in the cell reserved for referring to your own icons. If for whatever reason the icon you wish to use is not found no icon will appear, neither the default icon nor of course the icon you wanted to associate yourself. Entering the complete path has the disadvantage of presenting problems when exporting the catalog to another site. Entering just the name means that you must put all your icons in a single folder or directory which you must create (and not in the Version 5 filetree). You must then concatenate the folder/directory location by resetting the Version 5 environment variable "CATGraphicPath" in your current environment to point to the folder/directory. When exporting the catalog, you then only have to reset the variable specifying the receiving site. For more information about customizing environments, see "Managing Environments".

Creating a Catalog in Batch Mode

Creating a Catalog in Batch Mode Creating a Catalog with a Part Family in Batch Mode

Creating a Catalog in Batch Mode

This task explains how to create a catalog in batch mode. Have access to the files ALL_FASTENERS.csv, SCREWS.csv, and BuildCatalog.CATScript. 1. Start the Catalog Editor workbench by selecting Infrastructure -> Catalog Editor from the Start menu. 2. Open the file ALL_FASTENERS.csv. It looks like this:

The file ALL_FASTENERS.csv contains the information required to create a chapter referencing subchapters (CHAPTER is specified in cell 1A with its name ALL_FASTENERS in 1B). The names of the catalog documents containing the referenced chapters must also be given (SCREWS and NUTS with their paths in 4C and 5C). In this particular example, these two families of entities are described in ALL_FASTENERS by a keyword named FASTENERS and identified by the names SCREWS and NUTS (in cells 4B and 5B). 3. An example of what one of the families could look like is given in the file SCREWS.csv. Open this file. It looks like this:

For each chapter (family or not) you must create either a text file (with columns separated by a comma or a semi-colon) or an Excel file (with cells separated by a comma or semi-colon) and save it in the .csv format. Note the following: The first cell is reserved for the declaration of the chapter type: CHAPTER for a chapter referencing subchapters or ENDCHAPTER for a family referencing one or more entities. The second cell is reserved for the name of the chapter to be generated.

If you do not wish to use the default icons supplied with the application to identify the chapter to be generated, you can reserve one of the cells to indicate your own icon to be referred to. This cell may be called, for instance, "ScrewIcon". For more information see Using Icons at the end of this task. Our example uses the default icons thus there is no ScrewIcon column in the above image. The mandatory items are Keywords to define the names of the keywords associated with the chapter and Types to define their unit (or their type for simple cases). The types allowed are Real, String, Integer, Boolean and the units: m, mm or km for a LENGTH, etc. For more information see "About Parameters" in the CATIA - Knowledge Advisor User's Guide. After Keywords and Types, each line represents a description of the constituent entities i.e. their keyword values, their name, their location and their associated external preview. The values attributed to the magnitudes are assumed to be in the unit (mm for LENGTH, g for MASS, etc). For more information see "About Parameters" in the CATIA - Knowledge Advisor User's Guide. The first column may be empty or contain the name you want to associate to the description. The V5 document names in the column located after the last keyword of the description line (in our example, the CATPart documents in column F of SCREWS.csv) can be preceded by their location (with the complete path), otherwise an attempt is made to find these documents based on the Search Order... command. In the last column (and for families only), you can specify the external preview file you want to link to the component. This column is optional.

Do not use the quote symbol (") in any cell (chapter name, keyword name, keyword value) to enable queries on your chapter. In the query syntax, this symbol is used exclusively to isolate keywords whose names may contain non-alphanumeric characters. Example: "DESIGNATION :"=="CHC" Make sure when entering paths and filenames in the .csv file that upper and lowercase characters are kept as is. 4. On Windows: Open an empty Excel file and, with the aid of the ALL_FASTENERS.csv file supplied, complete the table giving all the keywords, types and catalog names required for the creation of the chapter. 5. Open a second empty Excel file and, with the aid of the SCREWS.csv file supplied, complete the table giving all the criteria required for the

classification of the entities to be included in the chapter you want to create. 6. Once you have completed the Excel file save it in the csv format making sure it is comma or semi-colon delimited. On UNIX: The csv format is a text format recognized by UNIX. Any Excel file opened on Windows and saved in the csv format can subsequently be used on UNIX. However, if you prefer to work exclusively on UNIX you can use any text editor provided you use the same syntax as the csv format i.e. cell separation by comma or semi-colon. The catalog batch builder requires the creation of a csv file per chapter which results in the creation of a catalog document per chapter. 7. Before being able to use the CATScript file in order to run the batch operation you must make sure the CclTypeLib library is loaded. This library declares the catalog creation method. To do this, select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears with the General category selected in the left-hand column. 8. Click the Automation tab. The following dialog box appears:

9. If the CclTypeLib library is not in the Selected list click on the Browse... button and retrieve the library from intel_a\code\bin. Make sure it is in the Selected list before clicking OK. 10. Open the file BuildCatalog.CATScript. In our example, the content looks like this:
Language="VBSCRIPT" Sub CATMain() ' Defines the absolute path of the input csv or text file InputFile ="E:\Catalog\BuildFiles\SCREWS.csv" ' Defines the absolute path of the output catalog file OutputFile ="E:\Catalog\SCREWS.catalog" ' Creates a document of type CatalogDocument Dim Catalog As Document Set Catalog=CATIA.Documents.Add("CatalogDocument") ' Calls the CreateCatalogFromcsv method on Catalog to create the catalog Catalog.CreateCatalogFromcsv InputFile , OutputFile ' Closes the document Catalog.Close End Sub

As you can see, this file, written in the VBScript language, contains the information required to batch-generate a .catalog file in the location you specify. It can be used on both Windows and UNIX. 11. If you want to use it, copy it and change the csvFile and catalogFile paths to adapt them to your environment. The comments relating to these paths are shown above in red. In the example above the CATScript file contains just one set of instructions for the batch-generation of one catalog. However, a CATScript file can of course include several series of instructions for the generation of several catalogs. 12. You are now ready to run the batch operation. Select the Tools ->Macro->Macros command. The following dialog box appears:

13. Select the appropriate CATScript file. Make sure that at the bottom of the box External File is selected indicating the location of the macro. Click Run. This batch operation will generate: a report in the same location as the catalog file, allowing you to check verify successful creation of the catalog. For example:
Creating E:\Catalog\SCREWS.catalog From E:\Catalog\BuildFiles\SCREWS.csv ------------------------Terminal Chapter Creation ------------------------Creating chapter with the name SCREWS Creating keyword DESIGNATION of String type Creating keyword TYPE of String type Creating keyword DIAMETER of Length type with mm as unit Creating keyword LENGTH of Length type with mm as unit ------------------------------------------------------------DESCRIPTION NUMBER 1 DEFINITION: DESIGNATION = FHC M03-05 TYPE = FHC DIAMETER = 3 mm LENGTH = 5 mm Referenced document path : FHC_M03-05.CATPart .... 6 descriptions have been created. -----------------------Batch successfully ended ------------------------

The above example shows only one description but the .report file details each description, ending with the total number of created descriptions as well as the catalog creation status. and a catalog with the name originally given in the Excel file, SCREWS.catalog. You are advised to keep the csv files used for catalog generation as no changes can be made to the catalog without completely regenerating it in the way described above. 14. If you want to open the catalog you have just created see "Previewing a Catalog".

Creating a Catalog with a Part Family in Batch Mode

This task explains how to create a catalog containg parts with a design table in batch mode. This creation mode lets you add only one design table to your catalog and this design table must contain a column entitled "PartName". Have access to the AddPartFamily.CATScript. Before being able to use the CATScript file in order to run the batch operation you must make sure the CclTypeLib library is loaded. To do this, repeat the above-mentioned steps 7 to 9 in "Creating a Catalog in Batch Mode".

1. Open the file AddPartFamily.CATScript. It looks like this:

Language="VBSCRIPT" Sub CATMain() ' Defines the name of the new part family ChapterName ="NewChapter" ' Defines the absolute path of the CATPart file PartWithDesignTable ="E:\Catalog\Model\HEXAGON_HEAD_SCREW.CATPart" ' Creates a document of type CatalogDocument Dim Catalog As Document Set Catalog=CATIA.Documents.Add("CatalogDocument") ' Calls the CreateChapterFromDesignTable method on Catalog to create the part family Catalog.CreateChapterFromDesignTable ChapterName , PartWithDesignTable ' Saves the document Catalog.Save ' Closes the document Catalog.Close End Sub

2. If you want to use it, copy it and change the ChapterName and the PartWithDesignTable name and path to adapt them to your environment. The comments relating to these elements are shown above in red. In the example above the CATScript file contains just one set of instructions for the batch-generation of one part family. However, a CATScript file can of course include several series of instructions for the generation of several families. 3. Select the Tools ->Macro->Macros command. The following dialog box appears:

4. Select the appropriate CATScript file as shown above. Make sure that at the bottom of the box External File is selected indicating the location of the macro. Click Run. This batch operation will generate a new chapter containing the part and its associated design table.

Browsing a Catalog
Catalog Editor Browser Display Catalog Browser

This task explains how to preview and navigate through catalogs using the Catalog Editor, the browser display and the Catalog Browser, each of them providing different views and functionalities.

Use the Catalog Editor

1. In a Version 5 session, open the catalog to be previewed. In our example, the catalog is named ALL_FASTENERS. The ALL_FASTENERS chapter, the only chapter contained in the ALL_FASTENERS.catalog appears in a catalog navigator window.

Double-clicking on a family displays, in the navigator window, all the chapters referenced by the family. 2. Double-click ALL_Fasteners. The entities contained in the chapter selected then appear in the left-hand part of the catalog navigator as shown:

Default Icons Two default icons are used: the folder icon identifies a chapter and the folder + arrow icon chapter in another catalog identifies a

the sheet icon identifies a catalog family and the sheet + arrow icon family in another catalog. To find out how to use other icons, see "Using Icons".

identifies a

3. Double-click a family name or icon: The entities contained in the selected chapter appear in the form of a table in the Keywords tab on the right-hand side of the navigator:

The values assigned to each component attribute are displayed under the Keyword tab. 5. Click the Reference tab:

Three columns are displayed: Name: name of the description Type: type of the description. It may be a chapter, a file or a feature. Object Name: name of the pointed object. It may be a file or a CATPart. When a component is resolved (as for component n2 in our example), it points to the document generated in the storage folder. Refer to Resolve a Part Family for detailed information. This tab corresponds to the Reference tab of the Description Definition dialog box detailed in Creating a Catalog. 6. Click the Preview tab to visualize the listed entities:

The Generative Data tab is dedicated to resolved queries. A resolved query is relevant for parts with design tables only since it aims at storing a filtered view of the design table data. This type of query is detailed in Creating Components from Catalog Filters. A design table is a feature created in CATIA either from the current parameter values of your document or from external data. This feature facilitates the definition and management of mechanical parts by enabling you to regroup in the form of a table, in a .xls or .txt file, the various sets of parameter values that can be assigned to a part. Each set of parameter values is called a configuration. For more information on design tables, refer to the "Design Tables" section in the Version 5 Knowledge Advisor User`s Guide. You can open an entity in one of the above-mentioned tabs by double-clicking it. If you want you can now edit the entity just like any other V5 document. To narrow the selection criteria using the keywords you originally chose see "Making a Query in a Catalog". When selecting an element in one of the above-detailed tabs, you can also use all or part of these contextual commands, according to the tab in which you perform your selection: Definition: lets you modify the component description definition. For more information, refer to Add a Component to a Family Remove description: lets you remove a component description Open document: lets you open the referenced document Open as new document: lets you open the referenced in a new document window Edit current chapter...: lets you add a family to the current chapter. For more information, refer to Add a Family Keyword default values: lets you modify the component keyword values. For more information, refer to Add a Keyword Reorder sub-chapters: lets you reorder sub-chapters.

Use the Browser Display

1. In a V5 session, open the ALL_FASTENERS.catalog. The catalog opens in the Catalog Editor which lets you preview the catalog components as explained above. 2. Click the Display with browser Browser dialog box. icon from the Browser toolbar to open the Catalog

This dialog box lets you browse and preview the content of the current catalog. 3. Double-click a chapter, SCREWS for example.

The parts included in the SCREWS end chapter are displayed with their corresponding preview. 4. Select Details from the pulldown list to show the catalog descriptions and keywords. By default, they are not displayed. You can choose your preview type simply by selecting it from the pulldown list and you can also click the Catalog tree icon to switch from a display mode to another. These display options are illustrated by the following picture:

This browser also enables you to perform queries on keywords and descriptions: 5. Enter your search string in the Filter field. For more information on how to query catalogs, refer to the Making a Query in a Catalog task in this guide. 6. Click the search icon. The search result is displayed . 7. Click Close to exit the Catalog Browser. For more information on the Catalog Browser, refer to the Browse a Catalog part in Using the Catalog Browser in this guide.

Use the Catalog Browser

The Catalog Browser provides interactive commands to browse a catalog. It slightly differes from the above-detailed Browser since it is available in several workbenches such as Assembly Design, Part Design, Generative Shape Design or Drafting and it lets you instantiate components For more information on component instantiation, refer to Instantiating Catalog Components in this guide. 1. Open the Catalog browser dialog box by clicking the Catalog Browser icon the Tools->Catalog Browser commands. or selecting

to open the File Selection dialog box. This dialog 2. Click the Browse another catalog icon box enables you to navigate to the selected catalog. In our example, we have selected the SCREWS catalog.

3. Click Open to open your catalog.

The current catalog name is displayed in the title bar and the current chapter name is indicated at the top of the drop-down list. This drop-down list gives you access to the five latest catalogs selected. The icon with an ascending arrow returns to the previous chapter selected. You can also double-click an icon to directly open a chapter.

By default, the catalog content is displayed with small icons but you can easily switch from small to large icons by clicking the corresponding button: or .

4. Click the Table>> button to show/hide the catalog descriptions and keywords. By default, the table is hidden.

5. Enter your search string in the Filter field, for example, x.DESIGNATION.Search("FHC")>=0mm. For more information on how to query catalogs, refer to the Making a Query in a Catalog task in this guide. 6. Click the search icon. The search result is displayed.

If one of the catalog objects does not point to any element, its description appears in red and the word "Broken" is added at the end between brackets. An error icon no preview can be found. is also displayed if

Reordering Catalog Components

This task shows you how to reorder your catalog components, i.e. families, chapters, keywords, etc.) in order to classify them the way you want. 1. In a Version 5 session, open a catalog. In our example, the catalog is named ALL_FASTENERS. The ALL_FASTENERS chapter, the only chapter contained in the ALL_FASTENERS.catalog appears in a catalog navigator window. 2. Double-click ALL_Fasteners. The entities contained in the chapter selected then appear in the left-hand part of the catalog navigator as shown:

3. Double-click the element you want to reorder the components, for instance ALL FASTENERS. 4. Right-click then select object->Reorder children command to reorder the families contained in the ALL FASTENERS chapter. The Graph tree reorder panel opens:

The contextual reorder command will let you: reorder children reorder keywords reorder components According to the element you activated, some commands may be grayed. For instance, you will not be able to select the Reorder children command if you activated a family in the specification tree. 5. Select the element to move. 6. Click the up arrow to move the element up in the list or the down arrow to move it down.

7. Use the

button to sort the list in ascending order.

8. use the

button to sort the list in descending order.

9. Click OK to validate an close the panel.

Note: when reordering keywords or components, the display is automatically updated in the corresponding tab (Keywords or Preview).

Instantiating Catalog Components

This task introduces the Catalog Browser interactive commands you can use to instantiate parts, products, PowerCopy and details.

Instantiate Parts and Products 1. Open the product to which you want to instantiate a part. 2. Open the Catalog browser dialog box by clicking the Catalog Browser icon Tools->Catalog Browser commands or selecting the

to open the Select catalog dialog box then navigate to the 3. Click the Browse another catalog icon desired catalog and select the part to be instantiated. 4. Drag the part onto the product in the specification tree then drop it when the pointer shape changes.

The new CATPart is instantiated and displayed in the specification tree.

This method can also be applied to instantiate a part from a part family as shown below:

Note: You can also double-click an element to instantiate it. In this case, the Catalog window opens and displays the selected element:

You can manipulate the element wether in the Catalog window or in the geometry area, each view being independent from the other. In case you wish to instantiate an element onto another one, this method lets you choose the element location. To do so, simply select a point anywhere on the first instantiated element to indicate the origin of the second instantiation:

Instantiate a PowerCopy A PowerCopy is a set of features (geometric elements, formulas, constraints and so forth) that are grouped in order to be used in a different context, and presenting the ability to be completely redefined when pasted. This PowerCopy captures the design intent and know-how of the designer thus enabling greater reusability and efficiency. For more information, refer to the Instantiating Power Copies task from the CATIA Version 5 Generative Shape Design User`s Guide or the PowerCopy section from the CATIA Version 5 Part Design User`s Guide.

Instantiate a Formula, a Check or Rules Formulas, rules and checks can be stored in a catalog. They can then be reused in a document by using an instantiation mechanism. Refer to Instantiating Relations from a Catalog in the CATIA Version 5 Knowledge Advisor documentation.

Instantiate a Draw Detail 1. Open your .CATDrawing document or, if you want to use an empty document, select the Mechanical Design->Drafting workbench from the Start menu. 2. In the Catalog browser dialog box, select the detail you want to instantiate. 3. Double-click the detail. 4. Click the place where you want to position the detail.

The detail is instantiated. For more information on detail instantiation in the Drafting workbench, refer to the Reuse a 2D Component task from the CATIA Version 5 Interactive Drafting User`s Guide. For more information on the other uses, refer to the corresponding workbench documentation.

Resolving Part Families

In this task you will learn how to resolve a part family or part family component. Resolving a part family or a part family component means that you generate the .CATPart document(s) referred to by the part family or the part family component.

You can open one of the default catalogs provided with the Catalog Editor. In our example, we are working with the EN_Washers.catalog. This catalog contain a design table and can be accessed the following way: under Windows NT $CATStartupPath\startup\components\MechanicalStandardParts\EN_Standards\EN_Washers.catalog under UNIX $CATStartupPath/startup/components/MechanicalStandardParts/EN_Standards/EN_Washers.catalog

1. In the specification tree, select the part family to be resolved. 2. Right-click then choose Part family object->Resolve from the contextual menu:

The status indicated in the Type column under the Reference tab changes to "Resolved part family configuration"...

... and the corresponding reference documents are generated in the folder you specified...

...in the catalog settings, under the Tools->Options...->Infrastructure->Catalog Editor tab as shown below:

By default, the name of each generated document corresponds to a part name (if there is one in the design table) or to a part number contained in the design table. After resolution, each catalog description points to the corresponding resolved part (this link may also be displayed with the Edit->Links... command) and thus, whenever a reference part is modified, you just have to use the Synchronize option from the Links dialog box to update your catalog. Note: the resolved parts never contain the design table since it is removed during resolution.

You can also resolve each part family component individually. To do so: access the Preview tab select the component to be resolved right-click then select Component object -> Resolve from the contextual menu. A .CATPart document containing the resolved component opens. This document is generated in the storage folder defined under the above-mentioned Catalogs tab.

Making a Standard Query In a Catalog

This task explains how to make a standard query in a catalog. If a chapter contains a large number of entities one of the most effective ways of finding the entities you need is to narrow the selection criteria by means of the keywords you initially used to create the catalog. Have the ALL_FASTENERS.catalog open. 1. Double-click on a family name or icon, SCREWS for example. The entities contained in the selected family appear in the form of a table on the right-hand side of the navigator:

For any description contained in the selected family the query functionality evaluates the logical expression you enter and then displays the entities complying with the criteria you used. In the expression, "x." must precede each chapter keyword name. Here are some examples to be entered in the Filter: field below the Standard tab in the top-right of the navigator window. 2. Let's take a simple expression first. Enter: x.DIAMETER==4mm (for numerical values) The result is as follows:

or enter: x.TYPE=="FHC" (for the comparison of character strings) The result is as follows:

or x.DIAMETER >=x.LENGTH (for the comparison of values between different keywords) The result is as follows:

For more information about this type of expression see the list of comparison operators in "Constants, Units and Operators" in the CATIA - Knowledge Advisor Programming Guide. 3. Now let's take an example showing simple expressions connected by logical operators. Enter: (x.DIAMETER<=4)AND(x.TYPE=="FHC") (for the comparison of numerical values and character strings) The result is as follows:

For more information about this type of expression see the list of logical operators in "Constants, Units and Operators" in the CATIA - Knowledge Advisor Programming Guide. Here are some examples showing more complex expressions: 4. Enter an expression comprising arithmetic operators such as: (x.DIAMETER + x.LENGTH)>=10mm The result is as follows:

For more information about this type of expression see the list of arithmetic operators in "Constants, Units and Operators" in the CATIA - Knowledge Advisor Programming Guide. 5. Enter an expression comprising arithmetic operators such as: min (x.DIAMETER, x.LENGTH)>=6mm This particular formula is not applicable to our example but if you want to get more information about this type of expression, see the list of arithmetical operators in "Mathematical Functions" in the CATIA - Knowledge Advisor Programming Guide. 6. Enter an expression comprising arithmetic operators such as: x.DESIGNATION.Search ("FHC")>=0mm The result is as follows:

For more information about this type of expression see the list of arithmetical operators in "String Functions" in the CATIA - Knowledge Advisor Programming Guide. If a keyword includes characters other than upper or lowercase alphabet characters and numbers from 0 through 9 the name must begin and end with double quotes.

7. If at any time you wish to redisplay the query history, just click the descending arrow. 8. When you have identified the entity you require you can: either edit it by selecting the line where it appears and clicking the Open button or copy it into an appropriate document (see "Inserting CATPart or CATProduct Documents from a Catalog" in the CATIA - Assembly Design User's Guide).

Making a Smart Query In a Catalog

This task explains how to make a smart query in a catalog using either the Catalog Editor or the Catalog Browser. If a chapter contains a large number of entities one of the most effective ways of finding the entities you need is to narrow the selection criteria by means of the keywords you initially used to create the catalog.

Querying with the Catalog Editor

1. Open one of the default catalogs provided with the Catalog Editor, ISO_Screws for instance. By default, it is located under Windows NT: $CATStartupPath\startup\components\MechanicalStandardParts\ISO_Standards\ISO_Screws.catalog under UNIX: $CATStartupPath/startup/components/MechanicalStandardParts/ISO_Standards/ 2. Double-click the catalog entity you wish to query. 3. Click the search button to open the Filter dialog box:

4. Select the operators from the pulldown lists for the selected parameters along with the corresponding values or strings. 5. Select Apply then OK to run the query. The query syntax is displayed in the Filter field of the Catalog Editor and the result is as follows:

When you enter several criteria, the default operator is "AND" (as shown in the above screen grab) but you can change it to "OR" in the Filter field. The button lets you reset the currently displayed query but the query history is still accessible via the pulldown list.

Querying with the Catalog Browser

1. Click the Display with browser

icon to open the Catalog Browser:

2. Double-click the SCREWS catalog. 3. Click the search icon . The Filter dialog box opens:

The Filter dialog box facilitates the query creation since you just have to choose your operator from the displayed pulldown lists then enter the corresponding values/strings as shown below in our example:

4. Under the Basic tab, select the following values:

This query will search for any component which Designation and Type contain the value "F" and with a Diameter greater than 2mm and a Length lower than 10mm. 5. Click Apply then OK. As you can see, the query syntax is displayed in the Filter field of the Catalog Browser and the search result is as follows:

6. Click the Close button to exit the Catalog Browser.

Creating Components from Catalog Filters

This task explains how to create a resolved query in the Catalog Editor workbench. This functionnality aims at storing in a permanent way a filtered view of a catalog. During resolution, a local copy (i.e. a "sub-catalog") containing any description matching the query is generated. Each catalog description points to the corresponding resolved part (this link may also be displayed with the Edit->Links... command) and thus, whenever a reference part is modified, you just have to use the Synchronize option from the Links dialog box to update the sub-catalog.

1. Select the File->New->CatalogDocument command.

2. Create the part family that will contain the resolved components by clicking the Add Part Family icon. Then, choose a name as well as the document that will be referenced to by the part family. For more information, refer to Add a Part Family in this guide. 3. Activate the part family by double-clicking its name or icon. The entities contained in the selected family appear in the form of a table on the right-hand side of the navigator and the Data toolbar icon are activated:

2. Click the Add Catalog Resolved Filter Components Filter Definition dialog box:

icon to open the Resolved

3. Indicate the catalog to be queried either by entering the corresponding path in the Resolve chapter field or by clicking the Browse... button. This button opens the File Selection dialog box which lets you browse your folders to the desired location. 4. Click the search icon to open the Filter panel and define your filter criteria:

5. Click Apply then OK to validate. The query is displayed under the Generative Data tab and can now be resolved.

6. In the Generative Data tab, double-click the query to be resolved to re-open the Resolved Filter definition dialog box. 7. Click the Resolve Query button that is now displayed. Once the query is resolved, the Resolved Filter Definition dialog box re-opens and the corresponding components are displayed under the Generated Components section:

The file name of the resolved part (if there is one in the design table) is indicated in the PartName or PartNumber column. When several criteria are entered in the Filter dialog box, the default operator used for the query is AND. However, you can change it to OR if necessary once the query syntax is displayed in the Filter field. 8. If needed, modify your query before resolving it one more time or click Cancel to close the Resolved Filter Definition dialog box. Note: no design table is contained in the resolved part since it is always removed during resolution.

Using Knowledgeware Capabilities

Parameters Formulas Design Tables The Knowledgeware Language Working Through the Knowledgeware Capabilities

Parameters
Creating a Parameter Specifying a Parameter Value as a Measure Specifying the Material Parameter Importing Parameters Creating Points, Lines... as Parameters Applying Ranges to Parameters by using a Rule Activating and Deactivating a Component Refer to About Parameters for information on parameters. If you are already familiar with CATIA and only need a quick access to information, see the CATIA Knowledgeware Infrastructure - Tips and Techniques - Summary.

Creating a Parameter
This task explains how you have to proceed to create a Time type parameter and assign a value to it. 1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. 2. Click the icon. The f(x) dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the Time item with Single Value in the New Parameter of type list, then click New Parameter of type. The new parameter appears in Edit name or value of the current parameter. 4. Replace the Time.1 name with Machining_Time and assign the 1000s value to this parameter. Then click Apply. The Machining_Time parameter is added to the specification tree. The dialog box is modified as follows:

5. Click OK to terminate the dialog.

1. You can add properties to a .CATPart or a .CATProduct document by using the Properties command from the contextual menu. You just have to click the Define other properties... button in the Product tab then click New parameter of type. The dialog is similar to the f(x) dialog. See the Product Structure User's Guide for more information. The properties you define that way are also displayed in the parameter list of the f(x) dialog box. 2. You can specify that a parameter is constant by using the Properties command from the contextual menu. This command also enables you to hide a parameter.

Specifying a Parameter Value as a Measure

A common way to assign a value to a parameter is to use the Edit name or value of the current parameter field of the Formulas dialog box. But there is another way to proceed. The value you assign to a parameter can be deduced from a graphic selection. In the example below, a Thickness parameter of Length type is created. The value assigned to the parameter is deduced from the selection of two coplanar circular edges. 1. In Tools->Options->General->Parameters, enable the Load extended language libraries box of the Knowledge tab. 2. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. 3. Click the icon. The f(x) dialog box is displayed.

4. Select the Length item with Single Value in the New Parameter of type list, then click New Parameter of type. The new parameter appears in Edit name or value of the current parameter. 5. Replace the Length.1 name with Thickness, then right-click in the value field of Edit name or value of the current parameter.

6. Select the Measure... command from the contextual menu. The Measure Between dialog box is displayed. Select Between as Measure type, Edge only as Reference mode and Edge only as Target mode. 7. In the document geometry area, select successively one of the inner circular edge of the part, then the outer circular edge located on the same face. With the default settings of the Tools->Options->Visualization tab, the inner circular edge is displayed in green. With the default settings of the Tools->Options->Visualization tab, the outer circular edge is displayed in black

The 17.5 mm value is displayed in the Measure Between dialog box. 8. Click Close in the Measure Between dialog box. A dialog box asks you whether you want to copy the measure result in the document. 9. Click Yes. The 17.5 mm value is displayed both in the Formulas dialog box and in the specification tree. 10. Click OK to terminate the dialog. The Measure... command can be accessed from the contextual menu of any editor.

Specifying the Material Parameter Value

Whatever your document, the Material parameter is always displayed in the specification tree. By default, its value is set to None. The Mechanical_Property features are calculated from the Material value. Specify a material to set the values of the Mechanical_Property features. 1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. The Material parameter is displayed by default in the specification tree. Its value is set to None. . Double-click the Material feature in the specification tree to edit the parameter. The dialog box below is displayed.

b. Select the part root feature, then click Mechanical_Property parameter values.

to display the

2. Click OK in the Formulas dialog box, then click OK in the Edit Parameter dialog box. 3. Select the root feature in the specification tree. 4. Click the icon in the standard toolbar to display the available material library. Select the Metal->Iron material. 5. Click Apply. This is what you should see now in the specification tree. The Iron feature is added to the specification tree and the value of the Material parameter is modified.

Remember: To display parameter value, check Tools->Options->General->Knowledge->Parameters->With Value . Double-click the Material feature in the specification tree to edit the parameter. The dialog box below is displayed.

b. Click to display the Mechanical_Property parameter values (no changes). 6. Click OK in the Edit Parameter , Formulas and Material Library dialog boxes. 7. Keep your document open and proceed to the next task.

Valuating the Mechanical Property Parameters

Once the Material value has been specified, the Mechanical_Property parameters are automatically updated when the Properties option is selected in the contextual menu. This is what you have to do to display the updated Volume, Mass and WetArea properties after you have assigned a value to the Material parameter. 1. Select the root item in the specification tree and open the Properties dialog box from the contextual menu. 2. Select the Mass tab. The document mechanical properties have been updated from the value assigned to the Material parameter. 3. Click OK to go back to your document. icon to check that in the parameter list, the mechanical property 4. Click the values are updated.

5. Click OK to terminate the dialog.

Importing Parameters
Parameters and parameter values can be imported from a text file or from an Excel file (Windows NT). If imported parameters already exist in the document, the import process automatically updates the document. Here are the formatting rules the external file should comply with: Column 1 Parameter names Column 2 Parameter values. Multiple values are allowed. Values should then be separated by a ";". The imported value is the one delimited by the "<" and ">" tags. Use the Tab key to skip from one column to the other in a tabulated text file. Column 3 Formula. If no formula is specified, the third column should be left empty. In a tabulated text file, just press the Tab key twice from column 2 to leave column 3 empty. Column 4 Optional comment. 1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. 2. Click the icon. The f(x) dialog box is displayed.

3. Click Import.... A file selection dialog box is displayed. 4. Select the ExCompanyFile0.xls file(Windows NT only) or the TxCompanyFile0.txt file, then click Open. The list of parameters to be imported into the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document is displayed.

5. Click OK to import the parameters from the input file into the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. The imported parameters are now displayed in the parameter list of the f(x) dialog box and in the specification tree.

6. Click OK to terminate the dialog.

Creating Points, Lines... as Parameters

To create elements such as Points, Lines, Curves, Surfaces, Planes or Circles and use them in knowledgeware relations, you can: Create these elements as 'Isolate' elements in the Generative Shape Design workbench. 'Isolate' elements also called Datum are elements that have no link to the other entities that were used to create them. For information on 'Datum' type elements, see the Generative Shape Design User's Guide. Create these elements by using the f(x) capabilities and select the right type of element in the New parameter of type list. The scenario below explains how to determine the position of the inertia axis of a pad. To do so, start from a pad, then: 1. Create a line by using either method ('datum' or ) 2. Use the inertiaAxis line constructor to specify that this line is to be the inertia axis of the pad. 3. Retrieve the coordinate of the point located at the intersection of the inertia axis and the pad extrusion plane. 1. Access the Part Design workbench, create any sketch in the yz plane, then extrude this sketch to create a pad. If need be, refer to the Part Design User's Guide. 2. Create a line intended to be used as an inertia axis afterwards. To do so, you can: 1. Click the Formulas icon , select the Line item in New Parameter of type, then click New Parameter of type. 2. Access the Generative Shape Design workbench, then: 1. Create two points by specifying their coordinates. 2. Click the icon.

Then create a 'datum' line passing through the two points. After the line has been created, it is displayed in the specification tree as a datum. If need be, see the

Generative Shape Design User's Guide. 3. Click the Formulas icon. In the parameter list, select the line you have just created (Open_body.1\Line.1). 4. Click Add Formula and add the formula below in the editor:
Open_body.1\Line.1 = inertiaAxis(3,PartBody)

The inertiaAxis function is accessible through the Line constructors. The axis number 3 is the one which is in the extrusion direction (normal to yz). Click OK in the Formulas dialog box. The inertia axis is displayed in the geometry area. 5. Back to . Create three length type parameters: X, Y and Z.

6. Retrieve the coordinates of the point located at the intersection of the inertia axis and the 'yz plane'. To do so, create the formulas below:
X=intersect(Open_body.1\Line.1, 'yz plane').coord(1) Y=intersect(Open_body.1\Line.1, 'yz plane').coord(2) Z=intersect(Open_body.1\Line.1, 'yz plane').coord(3)

You get the intersect function from the Wireframe constructors and the point.coord method from the Measures item of the dictionary. 7. Check the value displayed in the specification tree as well as in the Formulas dialog box. The KwoGettingStarted.CATPart document used as a sample for the Product Engineering Optimizer User's Guide illustrates this scenario.

Applying Ranges to Parameters by using a rule

This task explains how to apply ranges to parameters by using a rule.

1. Open the KwrRangesParameters.CATPart. 2. Click the icon and select Real in the scrolling list to create two parameters of Real type: Real.1 and Real.2. 3. Select Real.1 and right-click the field next to the Edit name or value of the current parameter box. 4. Select Add Range The Range of Real.1 dialog box opens. 5. Specify the Minimum and the Maximum bounds (-5 and 5 for example), and click OK twice. 6. Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench and click the Rule icon ( and click OK. The Rule editor opens. 7. Enter the following rule: Real.2 =Real.1 .InferiorRange and click OK: Real.2 value changes to -5. ). Rename the rule

8. Double-click the rule under the Relations node and replace the existing script with Real.2 =Real.1 .SuperiorRange and click OK: Real.2 value changes to 5.

Activating and Deactivating a Component

This task explains how to activate and deactivate a component. In the scenario described below, the CATProduct file contains two CATPart files that you will activate and deactivate alternatively after creating user parameters and a rule based on these parameters.

Parameters driven by rules are designed to enable the user to control components activities at assembly level.

1. Open the KwrSyringe.CATProduct file: This file contains a syringe made up of three different parts: A barrel, and two different plungers. 2. Create a multiple value parameters of string type. To do so, proceed as follows: Click the icon. The Formulas Editor opens.

Select String in the scrolling list with Multiple Values. Click the New Parameter of type button. The Value List dialog box opens. Enter two different values, Hollow and Full, and click OK. Edit the name of the new parameter (SyringeType in this scenario) in the Edit Name or value of the current parameter and click OK. The new parameter is displayed under the Parameters node of the Specification tree. 3. Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench and click the Rule icon to create a rule. The script of this rule will allow you to enable or disable one of the plungers. 4. Enter the code below in the Rule Editor, and click OK.

if (SyringeType == "Hollow") { S3\Component_Activation_State S2\Component_Activation_State } else { S2\Component_Activation_State S3\Component_Activation_State } 6. Double-click the SyringeType parameter under the Parameters node and select Hollow in the Edit Parameter window. The SyringeBarrel CATPart and the HollowSyringePlunger CATPart are displayed.

= false = true

= false = true

7. Double-click the SyringeType parameter and select "Full" in the Edit Parameter window. The SyringeBarrel CATPart and the SyringePlunger CATPart are displayed.

About Parameters
When you create a part like the hollow cylinder of our "Getting Started" example, you often start by creating a sketch, then you create a pad by extruding the initial sketch, then you add other features to the pad created. The final document is made up of features which define the intrinsic properties of the document. Removing one of these features results in a modification of the document. These features are called parameters. Parameters play a prominent role in knowledgeware applications. They are features that can be constrained by relations and they can also be used as the arguments of a relation. In addition to these parameters, CATIA allows you to create user parameters. These user parameters are extra pieces of information added to a document. User parameters are very handy in knowledgeware applications: they can be used to add specific information to a document they can be defined or constrained by relations they can be used as the arguments of a relation. A given relation may take as its arguments both types of parameters (intrinsic and user).

Displaying Parameters in the Specification Tree

The user parameters are displayed in the specification tree provided you check the Parameters box below the Specification tree settings in the Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Part Design dialog box. The user parameter list contains at least the Material parameter. The initial value of the Material parameter is set to None. In addition, parameters can be displayed with their values provided you check the With Value box below the Parameter Tree View settings in the Tools->Options->General->Parameters dialog box

Copy/Pasting Parameters
The Tools->Options->General->Parameters check boxes allow you to: paste a parameter without the formula which defines it. For example: Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = 15 (if the With Value box is checked)

paste a parameter as well as the formula which defines it, but only if the parameters referred to in the formula are also selected in the copy. For example: Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = 15 if the Diameter parameter does not belong to the items selected for the copy but HolePlus will be pasted as Real.i = 15 = Real.j + 10 if Diameter is selected in the copy (use multi-selection). paste a parameter as well as the formula. Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = Diameter + 10

Parameters and National Support Languages

CATIA users working with non-latin characters should check the Tools->Options>Knowledge->Parameter Names->Surrounded by' option. Otherwise, parameter names should have to be renamed in latin characters when used in formulas.

CATIA Knowledgeware Infrastructure

Parameters Formulas Design Tables

Tips and Techniques - Summary

This part is intended for those of you who need a quick answer to their questions about the knowledgeware capabilities. However, using this part requires a prerequisite knowledge of things as no detail is given.

Parameters
Creating a parameter Creating a multiple-value parameter Displaying parameters in the f(x) dialog box Displaying parameter values in the geometry area Editing or modifying a parameter Specifying a parameter value as a measure Adding a comment to a parameter Hiding a parameter from the specification tree Declaring a parameter as constant Specifying a tolerance Specifying lower and upper bounds Specifying an increment/decrement amount Specifying the Material parameter value Valuating a Boolean with a Predicate Importing parameters Deleting a parameter Creating a Parameter Click . In the f(x) dialog box, select a type in the New Parameter of type list, then click New Parameter of type. The new parameter is added to the parameter list. A default name is given to the parameter. If need be, rename this parameter. Creating a multiple-value parameter To assign multiple values to a parameter, you just have to select the Multiple values option at parameter creation and enter the values one by one to specify the value list. Displaying parameters in the f(x) dialog box The parameter list displayed in the Formulas dialog box depends on the selected feature. If you select the document root feature in the specification tree, you display all the document parameters. If you select a given feature in the specification tree, you display only the parameters related to this feature.

Displaying parameter values in the geometry area To display parameter values in the geometry area, you must have the Formulas dialog box open. Selecting a parameter in the parameter list will highlight this parameter in the specification tree and display its value in the geometry area. Editing or modifying a parameter There are three ways: Click . Select the parameter to be edited in the f(x) dialog box, then modify its value in the Edit name or value of the current parameter field. In the specification tree, double-click the parameter to be edited, then modify its value in the Edit Parameter editor. In the specification tree, right-click the parameter to be edited, then select the Parameter object->Definition... function from the contextual menu. Editing constrained parameters When a parameter is constrained, a push button is provided opposite the value field of its edition box. This push button represents the relation which constrains the parameters. Clicking this button displays the editor of the relation which constrains the parameter (the formula editor or the rule editor for example). Specifying a parameter value as a measure Edit the parameter, then in the value field of the parameter editor, select the Measure command from the contextual menu. The Measure Between dialog box is displayed. You can use this dialog box to measure the distance between two edges for example. Select Between as measure type, then select successively two edges in the geometry area. The distance between both edges is displayed in the Results pane. Adding a comment to a parameter There are two ways to proceed: Edit the parameter, then in the value field of the parameter editor, select the Edit Comment... command from the contextual menu. Select the Properties command from the parameter contextual menu. In the Parameter properties tab, fill in the Comment field. Hiding a parameter from the specification tree There are two ways to proceed: Edit the parameter, then in the value field of the parameter editor, select the Hide command from the contextual menu. Select the Properties command from the parameter contextual menu. In the Parameter properties tab, check the Hidden option. Declaring a parameter as constant Select the Properties command from the parameter contextual menu. In the Parameter properties tab, check the Constant option. Specifying a tolerance (Length or Angle parameter only) The default tolerance specified in Parameter Tolerance tab of the

Tools->Options->General-> Parameters settings can be redefined. To do this, edit the parameter, then in the value field of the parameter editor, select the Tolerance->Edit... command from the contextual menu. Specifying lower and upper bounds Edit the parameter, then in the edition box, right-click the value field(s) and select the Add Range... command from the contextual menu. This capability does not apply to parameters such as booleans or strings. Specify an increment/decrement amount Edit the parameter, then in the edition box, right-click the value field(s) and select the Change step... command from the contextual menu. This capability does not apply to parameters such as booleans or strings. Specify the Material parameter value There are two ways to proceed: Select the part you want to apply the material to, then click the icon. Select one of the material in the library which is displayed. Prior to doing this, check that the material catalog is installed on your machine. Edit the material parameter from the specification tree, then enter the new material in the parameter editor. Valuating a boolean with a predicate It is now possible to valuate a boolean with a predicate instead of using operators. See the example provided in the KwrPredicate.CATPart file. Importing parameters icon in the standard tool bar. Then click Import.... A file selection dialog box is Click the displayed. Select either a .xls file (Windows NT only) or a .txt file. If the imported parameters already exist in the document, the import process automatically updates the document. Associating a URL with a parameter Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench, then click the Comment & URLs icon. Deleting a parameter There are two ways to proceed: 1. Click the icon in the standard tool bar. In the Formulas dialog box, select the parameter to be deleted, then click Delete Parameter. 2. In the specification tree, right-click the parameter to be deleted, then select the Delete function from the contextual menu. Only user parameters can be deleted (the Material parameter cannot be deleted).

Formulas
Creating a formula The Incremental option of the formula editor Tips about the formula editor Using the dimensions of a sketch in a formula Editing or modifying a formula Displaying only a formula definition in f(x) Specifying a measure in a formula Activating / deactivating a formula Importing parameters and formulas Deleting a formula Creating a formula There are three ways to proceed: Click the icon in the standard tool bar. Select the parameter to be constrained, then click Add Formula. Enter the formula in the Formula Editor. Click the icon in the standard tool bar. Double-click the parameter to be constrained and enter the formula in the Formula Editor. Edit a parameter, right-click the value field(s), then select Edit formula... from the contextual menu. The Incremental option of the formula editor The Incremental option allows you to restrict the list of parameters displayed in the dictionary. Select a feature either in the tree or in the geometry area. Only the first level of objects right below the selected feature will be displayed in the dictionary. If the Incremental option is unchecked, all the objects below the selected feature are displayed. The Incremental mode is useful when you work with large documents and when the parameter lists are long. Tips about the formula editor To help you write a formula, the formula editor provides you with a dictionary. This dictionary exposes the list of parameters and functions you can use to define a formula. Depending on the category of objects to be referred to in the formula, the dictionary is divided into two or three parts. To insert any definition in the formula editor, just double-click the object either in the dictionary or in the tree. If you double-click a function in the dictionary, its signature is carried forward to the formula editor. Only the argument definitions are missing. Using the dimensions of a sketch in a formula Unless sketch dimensions are declared as constraints, you cannot manipulate them as parameters in relations. This applies for example to the radius of a circular sketch or to the width and length of a rectangular sketch. Editing or modifying a formula

There are four ways to proceed: In the specification tree, right-click the formula to be edited, then select the Formula object->Definition command from the contextual menu. In the specification tree, double-click the formula to be edited. In the specification tree, double-click the user parameter, then click the f(x) button in the Edit Parameter dialog box. Edit a parameter, right-click the value field(s), then select Formula->Edit from the contextual menu. Displaying only a formula definition in f(x) When you select a formula in the specification tree, then click the Formulas icon, the parameter list displays the constrained parameter, the formula activity and the parameters used as input in the formula. Specifying a measure in a formula or Edit the parameter, right-click the value field in the parameter edition box, then select the Edit formula... command from the contextual menu. In the formula editor, click the Wizard button, select the Measures item in the dictionary then select one of the measure functions displayed in the wizard. Fulfill the function prototype and allow for the required number of arguments. To enter an argument value, position the cursor where the argument is intended to be and capture the feature definition from the specification tree or from the geometry area. Activating / deactivating a formula There are three ways to proceed: Click the icon in the standard tool bar. In the parameter list of the Formulas dialog box, select the formula/activity parameter and modify its value in Edit name or value of the current parameter. In the specification tree, right-click the formula whose activity is to be modified, then select the Formula object->(De)Activate function from the contextual menu. Edit the constrained parameter, right-click the value field(s), then select the Formula->(De)Activate function from the contextual menu. Importing parameters and formulas icon in the standard tool bar. In the f(x) dialog box, click Import, then specify the Click the import file path. The import file should be either a .txt file or a .xls file. The parameters and formulas are applied to the document. If the imported parameters already exist in the document, the document is automatically updated by the import process. Deleting a formula There are three ways to delete a formula: 1. Click . In the parameter list of the f(x) dialog box, select the parameter which is constrained by the formula to be deleted, then click Delete Formula.

2. In the specification tree, right-click the formula to be deleted, then select the Delete function from the contextual menu. 3. Editing the parameter. In the parameter editor, right-click the value field(s), then select the Formula->Delete function from the contextual menu.

Design Tables
Creating a design table from the document parameter values Creating a design table from a pre-existing file Editing a design table Adding a column to a design table About the parameters that cannot be inserted in a design table Tips about selecting the parameters to be inserted in a design table Tips about using the access fonctions to the design table Making a query in a design table About the broken status Deleting a design table Creating a design table from the document parameter values Click the icon in the standard tool bar. Check the option Create a design table with current parameter values. Select the parameters to insert, then specify the .xls (Windows) or .txt file where the design table is to be created. Creating a design table from a pre-existing file icon. Check the option Create a design table from a pre-existing Click the file. Specify the file containing the design table data, then create the necessary associations. Editing a design table There are two ways to proceed: 1. In the specification tree, double-click the design table to be edited. The CATIA design table is displayed. The active configuration is highlighted. 2. In the specification tree, right-click the design table to be edited, then select the DesignTable.object->Edition function from the contextual menu. Adding a Column to a Design Table To add a column to a design table, open the .txt file in a text editor or the .xls file in Excel, and add a column to the file. Deleting a design table In the specification tree, right-click the design table to be deleted, then select the Delete function from the contextual menu. About the parameters that cannot be inserted in a design table Only parameters which are not already constrained by any other relation or by any other design table can be used to create a design table. If a parameter is already constrained, it does not

appear in the Parameters to insert list in the design table dialog box. Tips about selecting the parameters to be inserted in a design table The Filter Name and Filter Type filters can be used to restrict the display of a parameter list. If you specify x in the Filter Name field of the Select parameters to insert dialog box, you will display all the parameters with the letter x in their name (xA, xB, xC, xD, xE). If you select the Renamed Parameters in the Filter Type list, you will display all the parameters you have renamed in the Formulas dialog box (yA, xB, xA, yC, xC, yB, yD, xD, yE, xE, TangE). Parameters to be inserted can be multi-selected. You just have to keep on pressing the Ctrl key while you select parameters. If you do this, the group of multi-selected parameters will be carried forward onto the Inserted parameters list in the order in which they are displayed in the initial list. When the design table is created, the rank of the columns fits the rank of the parameters in the Inserted parameters list. If you want to have columns ordered in a given way in the design table, you must insert the parameters one by one. Tips about the access functions to the design table Once in the formula (rule or check) editor, select the Design Table item in the dictionary, the list of the methods that can be applied to a design table is displayed. Select a method, then click F1 to display the associated documentation. Making a query in a design table The syntax which is authorized in the Filter field of the Design Table dialog box (Configurations tab) is the same as for Knowledge Advisor checks. You can type the filtering relation directly in the appropriate field or click the Edit... button to access the language dictionary. An example of a query relation: TangE >10 deg and yE > 10mm About the broken status When the active configuration does not fit the set of configurations resulting from a query operation, you get a message prompting you to deactivate the filter (uncheck the filter box) or change your configuration. If neither action is undertaken, your design table takes on a broken status. In the specification tree, a broken or invalid design table is displayed.

Formulas
Creating a Formula Specifying a Measure in a Formula Referring to External Parameters in a Formula Refer to About Formulas for information on formulas. If you are already familiar with CATIA and only need a quick access to information, see the CATIA Knowledgeware Infrastructure - Tips and Techniques - Summary.

Creating a Formula
This task explains how to create a formula specifying that the external radius of a hollow cylinder is twice its internal diameter. Note that the radius of a sketch can be defined by a formula provided it is declared as a constraint. For more information on how to write formulas, see The Knowledgeware Language in the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide. 1. Make sure the Relations option is active in the Tools->Options->Part->Display tab. 2. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. icon to display the f(x) dialog box . The Incremental 3. Click the box must be unchecked. Method 1 1. Double-click the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius parameter in the parameter list. The Formula Editor is displayed. 2. Enter the 2 * PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter relation in the formula field. Go to Tips and Techniques for information on how to manipulate parameters and formulas. 3. Click OK in the Formula Editor. Method 2 1. Select the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.1\Radius in the parameter list. 2. Click Add Formula. The Formula Editor is displayed. 3. Enter the 2 * PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter relation in the formula field. Go to Tips and Techniques for information on how to manipulate parameters and formulas. 4. Click OK in the Formula Editor. 4. Click Apply to update the document.

5. Click OK to terminate the dialog.

Specifying a Measure in a Formula

Measures, i.e. values captured from the geometry area can be used in formulas. Here are some examples of measures that can be used in formulas: Distance between two points. Total length of a curve. Length of a curve segment - between a point and the origin or between a point and the curve extremity. Length of a curve segment - between two points. Area of an extruded surface. The purpose of this task is to explain how to specify that the value of a Length type parameter is equal to the curvilign abcissa of a point located on a curve. 1. Check the Load extended language libraries box in the Tools->Options->General-Knowledge tab. 2. Open the KwrMeasure.CATPart document. The whole document has been created using the Generative Shape Design product. The Extrude.1 and Extrude.2 surfaces are extruded from the Spline.1 and Spline.2 curves. The point whose abscissa is to be measured is Point.5. The origin of the curve where Point.5 is located on is Point.8

3. Click the Formula icon. The f(x) dialog box is displayed. 4. Create the CurveLengthFromOrigin parameter. . Select the Length item with Single Value in the New Parameter of type list, then click New Parameter of type. The new parameter

appears in Edit name or value of the current parameter. b. Replace the Length.1 name with CurveLengthFromOrigin, and click Apply. 5. Specify that the value of CurveLengthFromOrigin is the abscissa of Point.5: . Select the CurveLengthFromOrigin parameter in the parameters list, then click Add Formula. The Formula editor is displayed. Check the Select Feature box. b. Click the Wizard button, then select the Measures item from the Dictionary list. c. In the list of measures, select the length(Curve,Point,Boolean) item. The length function is added to the Formula Editor.

d. Fill in the Formula editor field as indicated below. 1. Insert parentheses and allow for three arguments within the parentheses. The three arguments are: a curve to be selected from the geometry area, a point to be selected from the geometry area and a boolean.

2. Position the cursor where the first argument is intended to be typed. Then select the Spline.2 feature in the specification tree. The curve argument is added to the length definition. 3. Position the cursor where the second argument is intended to be typed. Then select the Point.5 feature in the specification tree. The point argument is added to the length definition. 4. Type a boolean for the third argument: True if the length is to be calculated from the origin, False if the length is to be calculated from the curve end.

5. Click OK to confirm the formula definition. You are back to the Formulas dialog box. The CurveLengthFromOrigin formula and value(47.5mm) are added to the parameter list. e. Click OK to add the parameter as well as its formula to the document.

Referring to External Parameters in a Formula

In a formula, you can use parameters defined in external documents. This works between any types of document. For example, in a CATPart document, you can specify a formula referring to parameters defined in a CATDrafting document. External parameters can also be used when working within an assembly. 1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document as well as the KwrImportParameter.CATPart document. Select the Window->Tile Vertically command from the standard menu bar. Both documents are displayed. 2. Make active the KwrImportParameter document. Click the icon to display the f(x) dialog box. 3. Select the Sketch.1\Radius.1\Radius parameter, then click Add Formula. The formula editor is displayed. 4. In the KwrStartDocument specification tree, select the Hole.1 feature. The External parameter selection dialog box is displayed. 5. In the External parameter selection dialog box, select the Diameter object in the external parameter list. Then click OK. The Length.1 definition is carried forward to the formula editor. Complete the formula definition as indicated below: Open_body.1\Sketch.1\Radius.1\Radius = Length.1*0.45 6. Click OK in the formula editor. You are back to the Formulas dialog box. In the parameter list, the Sketch.1\Radius.1\Radius parameter value is modified according to the formula specified. In the KwrImportParameter specification tree, the External Parameters node is added. Expand this node to display the Length.1 parameter. 7. Click OK to add the formula to the KwrImportParameter.CATPart document and exit the dialog. 8. Select the Edit->Links command from the standard menu bar.

The displayed dialog box confirms that there is a link between the KwrImportParameter\Length.1 object and the KwrStartDocument\PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter object. 9. Click Isolate in the Links dialog box, then click OK. In the KwrImportParameter.CATPart specification tree, the External Parameters node can no longer be expanded and the Length.2 parameter is added below the Parameters node. 10. Select the Edit->Links command from the standard menu bar. A message box informs you that the active document has no external link.

About Formulas
Formulas are features used to define or constrain a parameter. A formula is a relation: the left part of the relation is the parameter to be constrained, the right part is a statement. Once it has been created, a formula can be manipulated like any other feature from its contextual menu. The formula language uses operators and functions of all types whereby you can carry out operations on parameters.

Displaying Formulas in the Specification Tree

Formulas are relations and as such they can be displayed below the Relations node provided you check the 'Relations' box below the 'Specification tree' settings in the Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Part Design dialog box. In addition, formulas can also be displayed below the Parameters node provided you check: the 'Parameters' box below the 'Specification tree' settings in the Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Part Design dialog box as well as the 'With Formula' box below the Parameter Tree View settings in the Tools->Options->General->Parameters dialog box

The Activity Parameter

A formula is a feature which is assigned a parameter called the activity. The activity value is a boolean. If the activity is set to true, the parameter value cannot be calculated from the formula. If a formula is created for a parameter which is not already constrained by another formula, the activity of the new formula is set to true by default.

A parameter can be constrained by several formulas, but only one formula can be active at a time. Before activating a formula on a given parameter, you must deactivate the other formulas defined on the same parameter. Activity value Relation icon in the specification tree false true

Importing Formulas
Parameters as well as the associated formulas can be imported from an external file. Refer to About Parameters and Importing Parameters for more information on how to import formulas.

Design Tables
Creating a DT from Current Values Creating a DT from a Pre-Existing File Refer to About Design Tables for information on design tables. If you are already familiar with CATIA and only need a quick access to information, see the CATIA Knowledgeware Infrastructure - Tips and Techniques - Summary.

Creating a Design Table from the Current Parameter Values

A design table is a feature that you create from your document parameters or from external data. No matter the existence of external data, you must create the design table in CATIA. There are two ways to create a design table: From the current parameter values From a pre-existing file. The scenario described below explains how to proceed in the first case. The design table creation process includes the following steps: . Create a table from the document parameters. b. Select the parameters to add to the design table. c. Specify a file to contain the generated design table. d. Edit the generated CATIA design table. e. Apply the design table to your document. For information on how to use the different dialog boxes related to the design table, see The Design Table Dialog. 1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. 2. Click the Design Table icon in the standard toolbar. The Creation of a Design Table dialog box is displayed. See The Design Table Dialog for further information. 3. If need be replace the default name and comment for the design table. 4. Check the Create a design table with current parameter values option. 5. Click OK. The Select parameters to insert dialog box is displayed. 6. In the Parameters to insert list, select the PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit\Length and the PartBody\Pad.1\SecondLimit\Length items. Then click

the right arrow to add both items to the Inserted parameters list. 7. Click OK. A file selection box is displayed. 8. Specify the pathname of the design table to be created. Click OK in the file selection dialog box. The design table feature is added to the specification tree and a dialog box displays the newly created design table. This design table contains only one configuration. By default it is active. If the file specified already exists, the Creation of a Design Table dialog box is re-displayed as well as a message box asking you whether you want to overwrite the existing file. 9. Click Edit table... to start an Excel application (under Windows NT) or open the text editor under Unix. Replace the PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit\Length parameter value with 80mm. 10. Save your Excel or .txt file and close your application. Some information messages are displayed in a dialog box warning you about events related to the design table. Click Close. 11. Click Apply into the CATIA design table dialog, the document is updated as well as the CATIA design table. Click OK to exit the dialog and add the design table to the document.

A design table can only be created from non-constrained parameters, i.e. from parameters which are neither referred to in an active design table nor used in any other active relation. If you keep the Activity option checked for DesignTable0 and you try to create another design table, you will have to select the parameters to add to your second design table among a restricted parameter list. Uncheck the Activity option if you want to deactivate a design table and reuse its parameters in another design table.

Creating a Design Table from a Pre-existing File

A design table is a feature that you create using your document parameters or external data. No matter the existence of external data, the design table must created in CATIA. There are two ways to create a design table: Using the current parameter values Using a pre-existing file The scenario below describes how to proceed in the second case. Here are the main steps to follow: . Select the pre-existing file containing the raw data. b. Create the associations between the document parameters and the external table columns. You can choose to create these associations automatically. c. Edit the generated CATIA design table. d. Select a configuration in the generated design table. You can modify the default configuration proposed by CATIA. e. Apply the design table feature to your document. For information on how to use the different dialog boxes related to the design table, see The Design Table Dialog. 1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. 2. Click the Design Table icon in the standard toolbar. The Creation of a Design Table dialog box is displayed. Enter a name (DesignTable1 for example) and a comment. 3. Check the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option. Click OK. 4. Select the KwrBallBearing.xls file, and click Open. A dialog box asks you whether you want to perform automatic associations between the design table columns and the document parameters which have the same name. 5. Click Yes. The Material parameter is the only one which is common to the document parameters and to the external design

table. A multi-row design table is created. The '<' and '>' symbols denote the current configuration. 6. Select the configuration you want to apply to the document (line 4 for example). Click Apply. The Iron parameter value is displayed in the specification tree. 7. Click OK to end the design table creation.

The scenario below illustrates how to create a design table by associating one by one the document parameters with the input file columns. 1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. 2. Click the Design Table icon in the standard toolbar. The "Creation of a Design Table" dialog box is displayed. Enter a name (DesignTable2 for example) and a comment. 3. Check the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option. Click OK. A file selection panel is displayed. 4. Select the KwrBallBearing.xls file. Click Open. The Automatic associations? dialog box is displayed. 5. Click No. The design table dialog box informs you that there is no associations between parameters and columns. Now, you have to associate one by one the document parameters with the design table columns. 6. Click the Associations option. The table design dialog box now displays side by side the document parameter list and the input file columns. 7. In the Parameters list, select the PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter item. In the Columns list, select the d parameter. Then click Associate. A parameter couple is now displayed in the Associations between parameters and columns list. 8. Repeat the same operation for the Material parameter.

Selecting a parameter or an association in the list highlights the corresponding values in the geometry area. The parameter list can be filtered: By clicking on a feature (either in the specification tree or in the geometry area). All the parameter values of the selected feature (and children) are highlighted in the geometry area. The parameter list displays only the parameters of the selected features (and children). By specifying a string in the Filter Name field. For example, typing *ength* displays all Length parameters By specifying a type in the Filter Type field. The Create parameters... button allows you to create automatically parameters and associations for items of the Columns list. The Rename associated parameters button replaces the parameter name with the column name. 9. Click OK to end the DesignTable2 creation dialog. The DesignTable2 feature is added as a relation to the specification tree. Double-click DesignTable2 in the specification to edit the table. By default, the configuration <1> is applied to the document. A new material (Aluminum) is applied to the document and the hole diameter is modified. You can select another configuration and apply it to your document. As long as a design table is active, the parameters which are declared in it are constrained parameters and you are not allowed to modify them. Double-clicking a design table in the specification tree displays the design table with its set of configurations and allows you to select a new configuration.

About Design Tables

A design table provides you with a means to create and manage component families. These components can be for example mechanical parts just differing in their parameter values. Screws are a good example of mechanical parts that can be described by a design table. To simplify, imagine they all described by four parameters: the head width, the head height, the body width and the body height. The sets of four parameter values that can be assigned to a screw can be easily regrouped in a design table. This design table has as many columns as screw parameters and as many rows as sets of parameter values. In a design table, a set of parameter values is called a configuration and it is registered in a row. A design table is a tool mainly intended to ease the definition of mechanical parts. It is provided to all CATIA users. But you will make the best use of it in a Knowledge Advisor application. A design table can be created from a CATIA document, the document data is then exported to the design table. It can also be applied to a document, the document data is then imported from the design table. The purpose of the design table is to drive the parameters of a CATIA document from external values. These values are stored in the form of a table either in a Microsoft Excel file on Windows or in a tabulated text file. When using a design table the trick is to associate the right document parameters with the right table parameters. The design table columns may not all correspond to your document parameters and you may decide to apply only part of the design table values to your document. By creating associations, you declare what document parameters you want to link with what table columns. The design table becomes a more powerful tool when it is used with the Knowledge Advisor. You are provided with functions to read the design table parameters. These design table functions can be used when programming your checks and rules. Using these functions spares you all the association operations.

The Excel Sheet Format (on Windows)

The values mentioned in the sheet cells have to be expressed in appropriate units. Otherwise, the right values won't be associated with the document parameters. Only Excel sheets created with Excel 97 and subsequent versions are supported. If no unit is mentioned within a cell: the unit taken into account is the one mentioned in the first row and if no unit is specified in the first row, the unit taken into account is the relevant SI unit. Here is an example of an Excel sheet:
When a configuration which contains empty cells is selected, the parameters associated with the empty cells are not modified. This property enables you to modify parameters but only under certain conditions.

column name

column unit

Within a given column, you can change the units.

Units can be specified in cells. No unit = SI

The Tabulated Text File Format

Here is an example of a tabulated file format. You can use your favorite text editor to create this design table. Use the Tab key to skip from one column to the other. Unit rules are the same as for the Excel sheets.

The CATIA Design Table

Once it has been read and processed by CATIA, the design table looks something like this:
No units in column Check box to modify the activity

Displays the design table raw data.

Values with units

Duplicates the design table external data into the CATIA document. Check this box whenever you intend to re-access your design table on another platform.

The Knowledgeware Language

The documentation of the objects to be manipulated in formulas, rules and checks (for those of you using the Knowledge Advisor product) can now be accessed by clicking F1 in the f(x) dictionary. Just select an item (for example the MaxInColumn method in the Design Table package), then click F1 to display the documentation of the MaxInColumn method. The knowledgeware language is described in the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.

Working Through the Knowledgeware Capabilities

Introduction - The Design Intent Calculating and Checking a Volume Working with a Design Table About Rule Firing Knowledgeware Automation Optimizing a Volume Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body

Introduction Design Intent

Configuration 1 of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart

The bottle above is used to demonstrate the major knowledgeware techniques that can be used in CATIA Version 5 to help you design a product. Throughout this section, most facets of the CATIA knowledgeware capabilities are examined, from relations such as formulas and rules to optimization algorithms. A scenario is developed in every chapter around a specific theme, and for each scenario tips and techniques are given. This part is intended for advanced users. Before you tackle the scenarios defined in this guide it is better to have previous knowledge of the products listed below and have an idea of the basic tasks you can carry out with them: CATIA Infrastructure CATIA Part Design CATIA Generative Shape Design CATIA Knowledge Advisor CATIA Product Optimizer.

Design Intent
When developing a product, you must first of all define your product requirements. These requirements may be the result of mechanical, manufacturing or style considerations. The approach you follow in knowledge-based design consists in integrating these requirements in specific tools so that, for example you can check and validate data during the design process or observe how your document behaves depending on the context. This chapter defines the requirements of the bottle used as an example and explains how to capture your design intent, i.e. describe your requirements through knowledgeware features.

Design Requirements
Suppose you are designing a new bottle and you are required to make proposals to your marketing department. Leaving aside style considerations, you are free to do what you want except for the following restrictions: the thickness of the bottle is determined by manufacturing considerations. This is not a parameter you can modify. you can propose any bottle shape as long as, for a first estimate, the internal volume remains in the [230 cm3 - 280 cm3] range. This is the only requirement as regards geometrical properties. The trick for you now is to determine the volume of the bottle, have this volume updated whenever you change the bottle's shape and be warned should the calculated volume be out of range. The approach followed to capture this design intent relies on measures. The "measure" capabilities provide you with a function which calculates the volume of a body. There is no real means to prevent you from designing bottles that are too small or too large, but using Knowledge Advisor checks is a good way to be warned whenever the volume is out of range. This is explained in Calculating and Checking a Volume. Having on hand a series of bottles' shapes fulfilling all requirements, you are required to be able to refine your result and search for a design so that the exact volume of the bottle is 250 cm3. To achieve this goal, we use the Product Synthesis Optimizer capabilities and both available algorithms to design the final bottle shape. This is explained in Optimizing a Volume.

Assembly Requirements
It is planned to provide the bottle with a cap. After reviewing development plans with the marketing department, it has been decided that selling this new perfume brand with

an already existing cap would be a saving. The cap they plan to reuse is the one below: Reusing this cap affects the bottle neck design which must allow for a certain section as well as a certain depth. Although it is planned to re-design this cap, the marketing department would like to have an idea of the assembly made up of the bottle and the cap. To check the overall design of the product, the marketing people want to be able to generate the bottle assembly automatically on screen each time a bottle shape meets the requirements.

A CATIA Knowledgeware answer to this problem is a Knowledge Advisor rule which can be triggered whenever certain conditions are fulfilled and generate automatically the global assembly from a VB macro. This is explained in detail in About Rule Firing. How you record , replay or modify a macro is discussed in CATIA Knowledgeware Automation.

Style Requirements
The Marketing Department already has an idea about the shapes they would like to study. The proposed shapes should be revolution bodies. The longitudinal view of the product should exhibit no edges. In other words, all contours are intended to be smooth. Stylists want you to provide them with a flexible design, they want profiles that are easy to be deformed by controlling one or more parameters. They want an immediate result on screen and they also want a clue as to whether they are still working within the authorized limits. Our initial feature is a five-point spline. The points making up the bottle neck are fixed as they must accommodate the cap. The other points are those providing the required flexibility. You alter them to create a new bottle shape. To create a bottle, you must create the spline, then rotate this spline. At this stage you obtain a revolution surface open at both ends. Then you have to create a fill at the aperture which is assumed to be the bottom of the bottle, join all the faces and thicken the resulting joined surface. All this is described in Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body. After a new shape has been designed and satisfies the requirements, you can store its

parameters in a design table. The design table is a way to gather in an external file all the profiles satisfying the requirements. How to create a design table storing the data of all profiles and how to use a design table are explained in Working with a Design Table.

Calculating and Checking a Volume

Configuration 2 of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart

The bottle we start from is described in Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body. First of all, we want to be able to measure the bottle's volume, then each time the bottle's profile is modified, we want to be warned about whether the resulting volume is still in the [230 cm3 - 280cm3] range. To achieve this goal, we will be using two CATIA knowledgeware capabilities, the measures and the checks. Measures are functions provided by various applications such as Part Design or Generative Shape Design to compute data. These functions can be used in formulas as well as in rules and checks. They can be accessed from an interactive dictionary. Checks are relations that don't modify the document but just tell you whether certain specified criteria are fulfilled.

Specifying the Proper Settings

Before going any further in the scenario developed in this Part, check the settings below:

In Tools->Options->General->Parameters In the Knowledge tab, the Load extended language libraries box must be activated otherwise you won't be able to access the Measures in the knowledgeware dictionary. In the Knowledge tab, check the With Value and With Formula check boxes. In the Units tab, specify cm3 as the default volume unit. In Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Part Design Check at least the Relations and Parameters boxes. But it is recommended to all the options below the specification tree settings.

Calculating the Bottle Volume

1. Open the KwrThickSurface.CATPart document. 2. Click the icon or select the Tools->Formulas command from the standard menu bar. The "Formulas" dialog box is displayed. 3. Select the Volume item in the New Parameter of type list. Then click New Parameter of type. A parameter with Volume.1 as its name is displayed and highlighted in the parameter list. 4. In the Edit name or value of the current parameter field, replace the Volume.1 name with BottleVolume. 5. Click Add Formulas. In formula editor, click the Wizard button. The dictionary is displayed. Check the Select Feature box. 6. In the dictionary, select the Measures item, then select Volume in the measure list. If need be, add parentheses after the function name in the formula editor. At this stage the formula must be: BottleVolume = volume ( ) 7. Position the cursor between the parentheses and capture the joined surface

(Join.1) definition from the specification tree. To do this, just click the Join.1 feature. The formula definition you should get in the editor is something like: BottleVolume = volume (Open_body.1\Join.1) 8. Click OK in the formula editor. You are back to the Formulas dialog box. The new formula is displayed in the parameter list opposite the BottleVolume parameter. It is also displayed in the specification tree under the Parameters and Relations nodes. Click OK again in the Formulas dialog box to exit the Formulas dialog.

Checking the Volume Value

1. Select the document root feature, then access the Knowledge Advisor workbench. To do this, select the Start->Infrastructure->Knowledge Advisor command from the tool bar. 2. Click the icon to display the check editor. In the first dialog box, replace the default name with VolumeCheck. Click OK. The check editor is displayed. 3. Define your check. To do this: . Select Information or Warning in the Type of Check list. b. Enter the string "Volume out of range" in the message field.

c. Enter the statement below in the edition window: (BottleVolume > 230 cm3) and (BottleVolume < 280 cm3) 4. Click OK to exit the dialog box and add the check to the document. In the specification tree, the check icon is green.

The resulting document is KwrVolumeCheck.CATPart.

Working with a Design Table

Configuration 3 of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart

You now have a preliminary document. How are you going to warp the profile of the bottle and search for other shapes? How can you capture all the data fulfilling the requirements? If need be, how are you going to proceed to refine your design in order to obtain a given volume? Using a design table is a way to capture your design intent and modify your document through an external file. In the scenario below, we first deform the bottle shape interactively by manipulating the control points of the spline, then we create and enrich a design table from the data of the documents fulfilling the requirements.

Searching Interactively for Valid Shapes

1. Open the KwrVolumeCheck.CATPart document. 2. Double-click the Sketch.1 feature and manipulate the D and E control points to deform the spline. See Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body for a definition of the D and E control points. As soon as you deform the spline: . The document color changes (by default it turns to red). b. In the specification tree, an update icon is displayed on the root feature and on the formula. 3. Update the Part by double-clicking the root feature in the specification tree or in the geometry area.

4. Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench by double-clicking the formula in the specification tree. icon to update the formula. If the recalculated volume does not 5. Click the satisfy the requirements, a message box is displayed informing you that the volume is out of range and the check icon turns red. Otherwise, the check icon turns green. Redo these interactions until you obtain a bottle satisfying both your style criteria and your volume requirements. As soon as you find the right profile, follow the method below to create a design table intended to store the data related to this profile as well as the data corresponding to other profiles.

Initializing and Enriching a Design Table

1. Open the KwrVolumeCheck.CATPart document and save it under a new name. 2. In the renamed document, access the Sketch.1 feature and add the xD,yD, xE and yE offset constraints on the D and E control points. The constraints named x are defined along H while those named y are along V. Add a tangency constraint on E with respect to H as on the figure below and name it TangE. Refer to Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body for the definition of the control points. The figure below is an example of a valid shape.

If need be, update the document and the formula. 3. In the standard toolbar, click the icon to create a design table.

4. In the Creation of a Design Table dialog box, check the Create a design table with current parameter values box. Click OK. The Select parameters to insert dialog box is displayed. 5. Select the xD, yD, xE, yE and TangE parameters in the Parameters to insert list. Use the right arrow to move them to the Inserted parameters list. Click OK. 6. In the Select the Pathname of the File to be Created dialog box, specify the pathname of an .xls file to store the design table, and click Open. A single row design table similar to the one below is displayed.

7. Edit the created design table by clicking the Edit table... button. The Microsoft Excel application is started. A single row table with the xD, yD, xE and yE and TangE parameter values is displayed. Click OK in the design table dialog box to add the created design table to your document. Save and close this document. 8. Go back to KwrVolumeCheck.CATPart, edit the sketch and search for another profile. As soon as you think a profile is worth saving, edit the control points and carry forward the edited values to the Excel table you have just created. Each time you do this, you add a new row to the design table. 9. After the data of all the profiles to be stored have been added to the Excel table, close this .xls file and re-open the renamed document. Re-edit the design table, select one by one each design table configuration in order to display the various shapes on screen. If you enrich the created design table with the data below:

This is what you get on screen when this design table is edited in the renamed document.

The design table above is provided in the KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls sample. The bottle shape corresponding to each configuration of this design table is depicted by the figure which starts each chapter of this part.

About Rule Firing

Configuration 4 of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart

This scenario explains how to write rules and gives some tips about the process which is behind the rule firing. Two rules are created. One launches a macro which updates and saves the document whenever the design table configuration results in a valid check. The other starts a macro which generates an assembly with constraints.

Writing the Rules

1. Open the KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart document. icon. In the dialog box which is displayed, check the Create a design 2. Click the table from a pre-existing file box. Click OK. In the file selection dialog box, select the KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls sample. Click OK in the box which asks you whether you want to associate automatically columns with parameters. Select Configuration 2 as the active configuration. Save the document under the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart name. 3. Check that the KwrTipSave.CATScript and KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATScript macros are downloaded in your environment as well as the KwrCap1.CATPart document. In the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATScript macro, replace the path defining the assembly components in the var1(0) and var2(0) definitions. 4. Deactivate the design table from the contextual menu. 5. Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench to create the UpdateAndSaveRule rule. To do this:

. Click the

icon.

b. In the first dialog box which is displayed, enter the UpdateAndSaveRule name. Click OK to display the main rule editor. c. In the rule editor, enter the rule below: if Relations.1\DesignTable.1\Configuration < 7 { Message("Document update and save") LaunchMacroFromFile("e:\users\...\KwrTipSave.CATScript") } else Message("Configuration # is invalid", Relations.1\DesignTable.1\Configuration) Prior to clicking OK, replace the path specified in the LaunchMacroFromFile function with the path where you have downloaded the KwrTipSave.CATScript macro. d. Click OK to add the rule to the document. A message box is displayed (Document update and save). This message box is generated by the Message function in the rule. Two Visual Basic boxes are also displayed. They are generated by the KwrTipSave.CATScript macro. e. Deactivate the rule. 6. Use the same procedure to create the AssemblyRule rule below: if Relations.1\UpdateAndSaveRule\Activity == true LaunchMacroFromFile("e:\...\KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATScript") Prior to clicking OK, replace the path specified in the LaunchMacroFromFile function with the path where you have downloaded the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATScript macro. 7. Deactivate all the features located below the Relations node of the specification tree then save your document.

Firing the Rules

1. Reactivate UpdateAndSaveRule. The message boxes warning about the update and save operations are displayed. 2. Reactivate DesignTable.1 and modify the design table configuration. To do this, double-click the design table icon in the specification tree then select a new row among the displayed configurations (from 1 to 6). 3. Reactivate AssemblyRule. The macro which creates the assembly is launched. You get on screen a message warning you that an assembly is going to be created. Click OK in the Visual Basic message box. The assembly is generated. You can see the different

steps on screen.

Once the macro has finished running, close the product which has been generated, then deactivate AssemblyRule. 4. Go back to the initial document. Modify again the design table configuration. The UpdateAndSave macro is launched but not the AssemblyRule macro which is deactivated. To create the assembly corresponding to the new configuration, reactivate AssemblyRule.

About Automation

Configuration 5 of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart A macro is a way to store instructions intended to be repeated many times. It can also be a good means to store intricate interactions or describe a document in a clear text file easy to edit and requiring less memory than a document. Knowledgeware automation provides you with a way to store operations in the form of a .CATScript file. In this chapter we discuss the macro used to create the assembly in About Rule Firing, then we introduce the knowledgeware automation objects. For more information, see the Knowledge Advisor Journaling Guide. We will not dwell on the part which consists in creating an assembly as this guide deals more specifically with knowledgeware techniques. If you need a brush up on how to create an assembly, see the Assembly User's Guide.

Creating an Assembly using a CATScript Macro

A CATScript macro is written in a language similar to the Visual Basic language. You can record a CATScript macro, then replay it later on or write it from scratch. The recommended method is to start from a record then, depending on your needs, edit and modify the pre-recorded macro. Recording the CATScript Macro To record the macro used in About Rule Firing: 1. Close all the documents open in your session. 2. Select the Tools->Macro->Start Recording... command from the standard menu bar then in the Record Macro dialog box displayed, specify the path of an external file. If need

be, see the CATIA Knowledge Advisor Journaling Guide for information on how to record a macro. Press the Start button to start the macro recording. From now on, all the interactions are recorded in the CATScript file you have just specified. Start of recording . Select the Start->Infrastructure->Product Structure command from the standard tool bar. The product1 root product is created. b. Select the Components->Existing Component... command from the root product contextual menu to add the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart component then the KwrCap1.CATPart component. c. In the Assembly Design workbench, specify an offset constraint of 1 mm between the Plane.1 plane of the bottle and the Pad.2 surface. Refer to the figure below to see how to select the elements to be constrained.

d. Specify a coincidence constraint to make the cap and the bottle axes coaxial. For more information, refer to the Assembly User's Guide. If need be, update the document. End of recording 3. Select the Tools->Macro->Stop Recording command from the standard tool bar. This closes the file which records all the interactions described above.

Taking a Look at the Macro

The CATScript macro you have just recorded is similar to the one below. For the sake of clarity and to make lines shorter: Some objects have been declared while others have been renamed The arguments passed in functions using the generic naming method are written in italics. Before replaying this macro, you should replace the path specified as the argument of the AddComponentsFromFiles method.

Dim PrDoc0 As Document Set PrDoc0 = CATIA.Documents.Add("Product") Dim Prod1 As Product Set Prod1 = PrDoc0.Product Dim var1 ( 0 ) ' Replace the path below before replaying the macro var1 ( 0 ) = "E:\...\KwrCap1.CATPart" Prod1.Products.AddComponentsFromFiles var1, "*" Dim var2 ( 0 ) ' Replace the path below before replaying the macro var2 ( 0 ) = "E:\...\KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart" Prod1.Products.AddComponentsFromFiles var2, "*" Dim CstS1 As Collection Set CstS1 = Prod1.Connections("CATIAConstraints") Dim Ref1 As Reference Set Ref1 = Prod1.CreateReferenceFromName(Plane.1) Dim Ref2 As Reference Set Ref2 = Prod1.CreateReferenceFromName(Pad.2 face) Dim Cst2 As Constraint Set Cst2 = CstS1.AddBiEltCst(1, Ref1, Ref2) Cst2.Dimension.Value = 1.000000 Cst2.Orientation = 2 Dim Ref3 As Reference Set Ref3 = Prod1.CreateReferenceFromName(Bottle axis) Dim Ref4 As Reference Set Ref4 = Prod1.CreateReferenceFromName(Cap axis) Dim Cst3 As Constraint Set Cst3 = CstS1.AddBiEltCst(2, Ref3, Ref4) Prod1.Update This macro can be started from a rule (see About Rule Firing) or directly by selecting the Tools->Macro->Run command from the standard menu bar.

About CATIA Automation Learning

There is a lot to be learned before you can write a complete macro in Visual Basic, but once you understand the basics of the language, you can be up and running in no time at all. Visual Basic is based on objects which have their own methods and properties. To set the value of a property, you follow the reference to an object with a period, the property name, an equal sign (=), and the new property value. At first sight, it is simple. The tedious thing when you have no previous

programming skills is that the macro you record is a raw macro with objects and properties chained in one statement as in the extract below: Dim ProductDocument0 As Document Set ProductDocument0 = CATIA.Documents.Add ( "Product" ) Dim var1 ( 0 ) var1 ( 0 ) = "E:\...\KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATScript" ProductDocument0.Product.Products.AddComponentsFromFiles var1, "*" When you tackle automation, there are two ways to proceed: You already have a background in Visual Basic and you can refer to the list of Programming Interfaces provided with the CATIA documentation to write a macro or interpret a pre-recorded macro You are a beginner and just record a scenario. You must replay it to check whether the scenario has been actually recorded.

About Generic Naming

Generic naming is a CATIA technique which creates a label whenever an element has been selected interactively. This label is a coded description of the selected element. This generic naming label appears when you record a .CATScript macro by using the Tools->Options->Macros command. If you perform interactions such as selecting an edge or a face, the value specified for the arguments of some methods are written using generic naming. When you take a look at the macro, you can see arguments which are neither Visual Basic objects nor usual data. These arguments are written in a form similar to the simple example below: Brp:(Pad.1:0(Brp:Sketch.1;1)). You don't have to worry much about generic naming as the definitions relying on this technique are automatically inserted in CATIA macros.

Knowledgeware Automation
The objects below can be created and managed in a .CATScript macro: Parameters Formulas Design tables Rules and checks

Creating Knowledgeware Objects

The knowledgeware features are created from the collection which refers to their type. For example, to create a relation in a Part type feature, you must first retrieve the collection object containing the Part relations by using the Relations method on the Part object. To create a parameter in a Part, you must retrieve the collection object containing the Part parameters by using the Parameters method on the Part object.

Modifying Knowledgeware Objects

To manipulate a knowledgeware object, you just have to use the methods and properties of the relevant object.

An Example
Open the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart document and run the KwrRelations.CATScript macro. Sub CATMain() ' Retrieve your active document - CATIA is your application ' You get the active document by using the ActiveDocument property ' on your application object Dim myDoc As Document Set myDoc = CATIA.ActiveDocument ' Check whether the document is a CATPart ' Analyse the pathname of the document ' If the extension .CATPart is not found, a message is displayed ' but you exit the procedure ' InStrRev is a standard VB function Dim strPartName, strCATPart, myPos strPartName = myDoc.Name if (InStrRev(strPartName,".CATPart",-1) = 0)_ then MsgBox("Your document should be a .CATPart") : Exit Sub ' Retrieve the collection object which contains ' all the document relations ' Activate all the relations ' Display the relation names in a message box ' Note: Statements below could not be applied to a CATProduct Dim strRel0 As String Dim strRel1 As String strRel1 = "Here is the list of relations" & vbCrLf & strRel0 Dim myRelCol As Relations Set myRelCol = myDoc.Part.Relations For Each myRel in myRelCol myRel.Activate() strRel1 = strRel1 & vbCrLf & myRel.Name Next Msgbox strRel1 ' Make the configuration 4 active Dim des1 As Relation For Each myRel in myRelCol if myRel.Name = "DesignTable.1"_ then Set des1 = myRelCol.Item("DesignTable.1"): des1.Configuration = 4 Next CATIA.ActiveDocument.Part.Update End Sub

This macro displays the list of relations within the document, changes the design table configuration and updates the document.

Tips
Operations that Cannot be Recorded There are some operations that cannot be recorded but that can be programmed in a macro (the activation or deactivation of a relation for example). The list of objects, methods and properties you can actually use when writing a macro is given in the Programming Interfaces. Access to this documentation is provided on the CATIA documentation home page. Retrieving Collections Collections such as the Relations and Parameters objects can only be retrieved from a CATPart document. Prior to retrieving these collections, it is better to check the document type in your script, otherwise the macro crashes. Retrieving a Collection Object When retrieving a collection object by its name, it is better to check whether the object exists, otherwise the macro crashes.

Optimizing a Volume

Configuration 6 of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart

You now have a number of valid configurations. They are all stored in the form of a design table. Among the valid configurations, there is one that catches your attention. Configuration 2 is neat, but you would like to modify slightly its dimensions so that its internal volume is exactly 250 cm3. In the scenario below, we explain how to use the Product Engineering Optimizer to refine the results obtained for one of the bottles' shapes.

The Gradient Algorithm

1. Open the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart document. 2. Access the Product Engineering Optimizer workbench and click the The Optimization dialog box is displayed. 3. Fill in the fields with the data below: Optimization type Optimized parameter
Target value BottleVolume

icon.

Target value Free parameters

250cm3 xD initial value 82 mm lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm yD initial value 53mm lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm xE initial value 91 mm lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm yE initial value 26 mm lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm Don't specify any step. gradient default values

Algorithm Termination criteria

4. Click the Save Optimization data box, otherwise you won't be able to save your optimization data. 5. Click Run Optimization to launch the algorithm. Don't intervene to stop the process. After the process has finished running, the target value is reached or almost reached. The values of the free parameters are displayed in the optimization box. Note that the results depend on the platform.

The Simulated Annealing Algorithm

1. Click Cancel in the Optimization dialog box. 2. Click the icon or double click the optimization feature in the specification tree to display the optimization dialog box. 3. Fill in the fields with the values below: Optimization type Optimized parameter Target value Free parameters
Target value BottleVolume 250cm3 xD initial value 82 mm lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm yD initial value 53mm lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm xE initial value 91 mm lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm yE initial value 26 mm lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm Specify a 0.1mm step for each free parameter.

Algorithm Termination criteria

Simulated Annealing - Fast default values

4. Click the Save Optimization data box, otherwise you won't be able to save your optimization data. 5. Click Run Optimization to launch the algorithm. Don't intervene to stop the process.

Appendix Creating a Deformable Revolution Body

The bottle to be designed will be a five point spline rotated around an axis, and thickened. Once it is created, the spline is rotated, the open end corresponding to the bottom of the bottle is closed and the resulting shape is thickened.

Creating the Initial Spline

1. Create a new part. 2. In the Part Design workbench, access the Sketcher by clicking the 3. Click the below. icon.

icon to draw a five point spline looking something like the curve

4. Specify the constraints given in the table below.

Location on spline Control point A Control point B Extremity on the neck Next to A on the neck Offset along H Offset along V Tangency constraint xA = 0mm xB = 7mm xC = 14mm yA = 12 mm yB = 10.5mm yC = 10 mm none specified none specified horizontal

Control point C Next to B on the neck Control point D Next to C Control point E Other extremity

none specified none specified horizontal none specified none specified none specified

Use the icon to specify offset constraints on the three control points making up the bottle neck. Use the icon to specify an horizontal tangency on points C and D.

At this stage, don't specify any offset on point D and E otherwise you won't be able to modify the bottle profile. But if you wish to start from a spline similar to the one below, you can set the D coordinates to 59 mm (along H) and 50 mm (along V) and the E coordinates to 77 mm and 17mm. 5. Click the icon to access the formulas dialog box, then modify the offset names according to the names given in the table above. The resulting document is KwrInitialSketch.CATPart

Creating the Revolution Surface

1. Access the Generative Shape Design workbench and use the icon to rotate the spline created above around the H axis. Do a complete rotation (0deg 360deg). The generated surface is opened a both ends. This is what your revolution surface looks like from the bottom.

2. Access the Generative Shape Design workbench and use the the bottle lower part. This is now what you should get onscreen.

icon to close

3. Use the

icon to join the Revolute and Fill type features.

Thickening the Revolution Surface

icon to thicken the joined 1. Access the Part Design workbench and use the surface. Specify a 1.5 mm as First Offset and 0 mm as Second Offset. This thickness should be an external thickness. The arrows displayed on screen when you apply the offset values should be directed toward the outside of the bottle (see the figure below).

2. Save the resulting document. The resulting document is KwrThickSurface.CATPart When applying a thickness to the joined surface, we could specify a first offset as well as a second offset. But this would make things a bit more complicated as later on we want to measure the internal volume of the bottle. This internal volume is to be calculated from the "Volume" measure of a surface. Adding an internal thickness entails subtracting the volume resulting from this internal thickness to the one calculated for the joined surface. Now you can select the sketch feature in the specification tree to access the sketcher, drag the D and E points and see how the global shape reacts.

Using the Feature Dictionary Editor

Starting the Feature Dictionary Editor Creating a New Object Class Adding Properties to an Object Class Defining Discrete Values for a Property Generating a Report Creating a New Feature Dictionary Opening a Reference Dictionary Modifying the Object Naming Rules

Starting the Feature Dictionary Editor

This task shows you how to start the Feature Dictionary Editor. The feature dictionary editor allows you to create delete and manage object classes. Object classes are classifications under which you create various objects, like components, for storing in the catalog. You may, for instance, want to have several object classes under valve_function, one of them being check_valve_function, and create various types of check valve under the class. 1. Click Start - Infrastructure - Feature Dictionary Editor. opens. The Feature Dictionary Editor The specifications tree displays three views. Referenced Dictionary will display under it any external dictionary files that are referenced in the document. Feature View will have under it all classes defined in the document. Classes View will display all classes available in the document, including the predefined classes that are included with the application. On the right side, Inherited View shows attributes that a class inherited from its super class. Local Attributes shows attributes added specifically to a class.

2. To view the feature dictionary for a specific application (such as Piping Design) you need to open the .CATfct file associated with it. The .CATfct file contains all the classes. To open it click File - Open and navigate to intel_a\resources\graphic and open the relevant .CATfct file, such as CATPipingSample.CATfct for Piping Design. The file will open in the feature editor and you will be able to see all existing classes, and make changes if you need to.

Creating a New Object Class

This task shows you how to create a new object class. 1. From Start, go to Infrastructure and click on Feature Dictionary Editor. Click the Open Application Dictionary button Open Application Dictionary dialog displays. . The

2. Click on the down arrow and select one of the categories. Enter a name in the Client ID field. This will appear next to the classes in the specifications tree. Click OK. 3. The classes that are available to the document display in the specifications tree under Classes View. The object classes that will be displayed are the base classes included with the application. You cannot rename or delete them, but you can create object classes under them.

4. Double click on the object class under which you want to create the new class, then click the Create Subclass button dialog box displays. . The Create Subclass

5. Enter a name in the Class name field and click OK.

6. The new object class is created and displays in the specifications tree under Feature View and Classes View.

Adding Properties to an Object Class

This task shows you how to add properties to an object class. 1. In the specifications tree, select the class to which you want to add a property. When you select a class its existing properties show under the Inherited Attributes and Local Attributes windows. Inherited attributes are those inherited from the super class to which this class belongs. Local attributes are properties added to the class itself. 2. Click on the Add Attributes button display. . The Add Attribute dialog box will

3. Enter an attribute name. Click on the down arrow in the Attribute type field and select an attribute type. Click on the down arrow in the With field and select Single Value or Discrete Values. If you select Single Value, you will be able to change the value later by using the Edit - Properties command and entering a new value. If you choose Discrete Values, you will only be able to select a value from a predefined list. See Defining Discrete Values for a Property to find out how to create and save this list of values. Enter a default value. Click OK. 4. The new attribute will display in the Local Attributes window.

Defining Discrete Values for a Property

When you add properties to an object class, you have to select whether you want a single value or discrete values. If you select discrete values, it means that the property will have predefined values - the user will not be able to enter a value but will have to select from a predefined list. Those values have to be created in a text file and stored in a specific directory. You also need to be familiar with project resource management to be able to create and store those discrete values. Please refer to Understanding Project Resource Management in this guide.

Generating a Report
This task shows you how to generate a report that displays all objects. This function allows you to generate an external file. The report will display all the objects under the Classes View and the Referenced View of the specifications tree. It will also display all the attributes associated with an object. See Starting the Feature Dictionary Editor. 1. Click the Generate Report button box will display. . The Save User Dictionary Report dialog

2. Navigate to the directory where you want to save the file, give the file a name and save it. The report will be saved in HTML format.

3. To view the report open it in your Web browser.

4. To view the attributes click on any of the objects. The report will display both inherited and local attributes.

Creating a New Feature Dictionary

This task shows you how to create a new Feature Dictionary. Many users will find it sufficient to add classes or attributes to the sample feature dictionary provided with the application. Some may prefer to create one or more new dictionaries. To be able to use a new feature dictionary you must change settings. 1. Start the feature dictionary editor and click the Open Application Dictionary button . The Open Application Dictionary dialog box opens.

2. Click on the down arrow to select an application, such as Piping, and enter a Client ID. Click OK. A new .CATfct is created and the basic classes available to you appear in the feature editor.

3. Make your additions and save the .CATfct file to the directory: intel_a\resources\graphic.

Opening a Reference Dictionary

This task shows you how to create a open a feature file of a different domain from your current document to the Feature Dictionary Editor for viewing purpose. 1. Start the feature dictionary editor and click the Open Application Dictionary button . The Open Application Dictionary dialog box opens.

2. Click on the down arrow to select an application, such as Piping, and enter a Client ID. A new .CATfct is created and the basic classes available to you appear in the feature editor.

3.

Click the Open Reference Dictionary Dictionary dialog box opens:

button. The Open Reference

4. Navigate to select the .CATfct or .feat file you wish to open then click Open.

As you can see it above, the content of the reference dictionary you selected is displayed under the Reference View in the specification tree. The document from the Piping domain is still the active document while the reference dictionary from the Instrument domain is displayed for viewing purpose. You can add attributes to the object that is under the Reference View. However, creating subclasses is forbidden.

Modifying the Object Naming Rules

This task shows you how to modify or define the object naming rules. See also Line Lists and Default Name Settings. Examples from the Piping Design product are used in this task. The procedure is the same for all products that have this function - substitute the appropriate file or object when using another product. Every object that you create (except a run), or part that you place, in your design document can be given a unique identifier. This identifier usually consists of a prefix that identifies the type of object or part it is, followed by a unique number. This enables users, for instance, to maintain a history of each part - when it was serviced, or repaired or replaced - and schedule servicing and replacement dates. When you create an object or place a part in your document the application will suggest a name for it - the default name. (In many cases you have the option of rejecting this name and entering a different name, or renaming it.) The default name is based on certain rules. A set of default rules is included with this application, but most users will want to modify these rules to suit their own requirements. You can modify or define the naming rules in the following way: 1. Open the Feature Dictionary Editor - Start - Equipments & Systems - Feature Dictionary Editor. 2. Click the Open User Dictionary button dialog box displays. . The Open User Dictionary

3. Navigate to the directory where your .CATfct files are stored. The default is .. intel_a\resources\graphic. The CATfct files contain a list of all the object classes. Select and open the file associated with the product you are working with, i.e. Piping or Tubing, etc. All the classes in the file are displayed in the Feature Dictionary.

4. Select a class in the specifications tree and click the Define ID Schema button . The Define ID Schema dialog box will display.

5. You have two options In the ID usage field, Instance and Reference, and you usually have to define naming rules for each object using both options. The naming rules you define under the Instance option are used by the application when you are placing a part in a document. The naming rules you define using the Reference option are used by the application when you build a component for placing in a catalog. Most users will define naming rules for an object using both options. Depending on your needs, you can choose to simplify the procedure by defining rules for the parent function, which is Piping Part Function in the example above, and these rules will be inherited by all the objects under it. If the Inherited from field is blank it means the name is not inherited from another class. Select Yes or No for Sequence number. Yes or No cannot be selected if you have Reference as the ID usage. Minimum length refers to the number of digits in the numbering scheme. For instance, 3 means the number will show up as 001. 6. Click the Define/modify ID schema button schema dialog box will display. . The Define/modify ID

7. In this dialog box you can define what you want to appear in the name of an object, in this case the object being Piping Part Function. The dialog box has a window in the lower half which displays the current naming scheme. You can delete one or more of the fields using the Delete field/Delete all fields buttons .

Click Add after entering or selecting a value in a field. You can choose to have more than one attribute value displayed in a name, for instance when you want to add a Separator at more than one place. Click Add after selecting each one. You can select the order in which the values will appear in a name by using the Up or Down arrows or the buttons in the Insert mode field. 8. Select one of the attributes from the drop down list in the Attribute name field

. If you select Nominal size, for instance, the object name will display the nominal size of the object. These attributes are for the Piping Part class only - other classes will have different attributes displayed. You can display more than one attribute in the name. 9. Enter any value you want displayed in the Constant field. If you enter PP (for Piping Part), all piping part names will display this value. You can add a constant to a name anywhere you require it. For instance, you may begin a name with PP, and end it with WR for a project name. 10. The Program field is used to execute a program that will then add a value to the name. You can create your own programs, but some sample programs are provided with the application and are listed below. Enter a program name in this field if you want it to be executed. For instance, if you enter CATPspEncSchedule in the field, then the short value of the Encoded Schedule attribute will be added to the name (the short value of Extra Strong is XS.). These programs are Standards-based and will execute based on the standard you have defined in your Options. The default standard is ASTL. The following list shows the programs provided with the application as a sample, and the attributes they refer to: CATPspEncRating - Encoded Rating CATPspEncRating2 - Encoded Rating2 CATPspEncRating3 - Encoded Rating3 CATPspEncRating4 - Encoded Rating4 CATPspEncNominalSize - Encoded Nominal Size

CATPspEncNominalSize2 - Encoded Nominal Size2 CATPspEncNominalSize3 - Encoded Nominal Size3 CATPspEncNominalSize4 - Encoded Nominal Size4 CATPspEncSchedule - Encoded Schedule CATPspEncMaterialCategory - Encoded MaterialCategory CATPspEncMaterialCode - Encoded MaterialCode

11. The Domain program field is used to execute a program that will add the name of the domain to which the object belongs. Domain in this case refers to an object to which the object to be named is connected. For instance, when naming a nozzle it is preferable to add the name of the equipment to which it is connected. One sample domain program is provided with the application, and provides this function: CATPspConnectedEquip. 12. The Separator field is used to add separators, such as a hyphen or semi colon, after the domain field. 13. Use the buttons in the Insert mode field to organize the name. Append field to list will move a field to the end of the name. The other buttons are used when you are adding a field, to position it in the name.

Using the Data Upward Assistant

The CATDUA V5 tool, also called Data Upward Assistant, allows you to have a support for CATIA level changes, to make a diagnostic, and eventually a healing of CATIA Version 5 data. If some return codes are detected within CATIA elements, it is advisable to run the Data Upward Assistant utility on these documents in order to check and/or upward them. And for better performances, the Data Upward Assistant and CATIA versions should be the same. WHEN IS THE DATA UPWARD ASSISTANT USEFUL? before recovering external data before going into a new CATIA release broken links when opening CATProducts incidents when updating a component (for instance, Sketch update) the Edit-Links panel appears: some documents are found but they have no references. performance problems when opening a CATProduct (because some elements have lost their links). Here is a schema explaining when it should be used:

The first task provides a step-by-step scenario for using the Data Upward Assistant (description of the commands) and the second one indicates the return codes that can be detected by the Check/Upward operation (definitions). Using CATDUA V5 in Interactive Mode Return Codes Detected by the Data Upward Assistant

Using CATDUA V5 in Interactive Mode

This task will show you how to use the CATDUA V5, also called Data Upward Assistant, on NT and UNIX out of a CATIA V5 session. The Data Upward Assistant settings work with the same CATIA settings. If the Cache Activation option (in CATIA Tools->Options->Infrastructure->Product Structure) or the Load referenced documents option (in CATIA Tools->Options->General->General) have been selected, they will be taken into account in the Data Upgrade Assistant. In CATIA Tools->Options->General->General, it is recommended to select the Load referenced documents option.

How to launch the V5 Data Upward Assistant on NT?

In MSDOS (or Command Prompt), go to the level in which CATIA is installed (example:E:\Install) Enter the following command: cd intel_a\code\bin Then enter: CATDUAV5 (E:\Install\intel_a\code\bin\CATDUAV5) And the Data Upward Assistant dialog box is displayed:

How to launch the V5 Data Upward Assistant on UNIX?

Place yourself in the following directory: cd Install_folder/OS_a/code/command Run the command: catstart -env EnvName -dirEnv DirName -run "CATDUAV5" "EnvName" is the environment file and "DirName" is the directory in which the environment is. On UNIX, the dialog box is not exactly the same: the browsing button to enter the UNIX path /u/... manually. is missing and you need

Description of the Data Upward Assistant dialog box

Click the button in order to select the Output Directory in which the CATIA upgraded documents will be saved. Once you have made your choice, the directory path is copied into the box (E\tmp for instance). By default, the last directory you have opened is automatically chosen. To select CATIA documents (CATPart or CATProduct, CATProcess, CATAnalysis, CATDrawing) to check, press the Check button .

To select CATIA documents (CATPart or CATProduct, CATProcess, CATAnalysis, CATDrawing) to upward, press the Clean button and the Browser dialog box appears: you can select one or more CATIA documents by pressing the Ctrl or Shift key. If you want to remove a document within the Check or Clean window on the panel right side, select it and press the Remove button .

It is possible to use both the Check mode and the Clean mode upon the same documents and to apply the Check mode on documents and the Clean mode on different ones.

Customizing CATIA documents selection

Press the button and the following dialog box is displayed:

To check or clean a CATProduct and all its linked components, you can tick off the box entitled Process pointed documents. Then, the components are automatically listed in the Check / Clean space. If you want to get the result of priority1 and/or 2 and/or 3 errors, you need to tick off one or all the priority boxes: . Click the arrow under Display messages to choose the kind of information you need.

button to start the the Data Upward Assistant execution. A message appears, Click the telling you that the operation took place and explaining where the Check results are: in the file entitled OutputCATDUA.htm.

Having access to the Data Upward Assistant results

The Check/Upward results are stored in an html file in the Output directory you had defined above. To have access to this file, you can find it in a Windows NT Explorer.

Example1: In Check mode on one or several CATParts Press the Check button and select the CATPart(s) of your choice.

Click on the Launch button to start the process. The Checked documents file is an htm document with hyperlinks:

The Output directory is not automatically emptied by the Data Upward Assistant before launching a new Check or Clean. If you do not wish to visualize your former results in the html file, you need to clear the directory. The delivered information is: - number of the detected return codes - number of the fixed return codes - number of the priority1 / priority2 / priority3 return codes - information about the save operation: OK In the table entitled Report for Checked Documents, by clicking on the hyperlinks in the Reports Return Codes column, you have access to the .txt document (E:\tmp\Axis_R04.CATPart.checker_traces.txt). This document delivers the Check results and informs you about the status of the return codes, if they can be repaired or not:

You can have access to: Priority Level: corruption level of the file.

Return codes can be corrected: the number of return codes that can be solved in the Upgrade mode. To visualize the first page (..OutputCATDUA.htm), click on Back in the menu bar of the Internet Explorer window.

Example2: In Upward The way of selecting the documents is the same as for the Check mode.

Click the Launch button to start the process. The file looks like the one for the Check mode; this is an htm document, with a table entitled Report for Cleaned Documents, containing hyperlinks.

If you click on a link, you can find the Upward results in the document .cleaner_traces.txt, with the number of upwarded return codes out of the total number of return codes:

The saved document (CATPart, CATProduct,...) can be found in the Output directory as well:

Example3: In Check / Upward mode on one or several CATProducts

The selection of one or several CATProducts and the launching of the Data Upward Assistant for CATProducts is exactly the same as for CATParts. Click Launch.

You can get the same document format (.htm) with the tables entitled Report for Checked Documents and Report for Cleaned Documents. Lastly, to close the application, click on the cross button in the right corner of the window.

Return Codes Detected by the Data Upward Assistant

The Data Upward Assistant capabilities are to CHECK structural data within a CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATAnalysis, CATProcess, and to UPWARD (modify) the data structure. WHEN IS THE DATA UPWARD ASSISTANT USEFUL? before recovering external data before going into a new CATIA release broken links when opening CATProducts incidents when updating a component (for instance, Sketch update) the Edit-Links panel appears: some documents are found but they have no references. performance problems when opening a CATProduct (because some elements have lost their links). Here is a description of the return codes that can be detected by the Check and/or Upward: PRIORITY LEVELS Priority Level Legend: (1) : Priority One Return Code: Upwarding action may lead to data deletion. (2) : Priority Two Return Code: Upwarding action may lead to data modification (without deletion). (3) : Priority Three Return Code: Upwarding action without data deletion or modification (no impact on data). LIST OF THE DETECTED RETURN CODES 1. ObjectSpecsModeler: DOC: linked document (container root), DOC_3 (2): missing links => Cleaner: link meters are updated. DOC_4 (3): phantom links and un-necessary links=> Cleaner: link meters are updated. CAT_0 (2): a feature catalog with no name (empty name) => Cleaner: deletion of the link to this catalog. VAL_0 (2): problem with an attribute (inconsistency for IN and NEUTRAL attributes) => Cleaner: The attribute becomes IN.

2. Product Structure: BRK: Broken Object BRK_0 (1): the type late of non-aggregated broken objects cannot be found => Cleaner: these objects are deleted. LIF: product lifecycle LIF_2 (1): Aggregated objects are part of the CATProduct container but they are not accessible (from the root product) => Cleaner: the objects are deleted. ATT: rule attribute ATT_2 (3): presence of the _UpdateError attribute => Cleaner: the attribute is deleted in Product objects. ATT_3: non-used attribute (activrep) => Cleaner: the attributes are deleted in order to reduce the size of the model. SYN: Synchro Time Stamp (between products). SYN_0 (3): equal time-stamp for Product references and instances. UAV: Product structure unexpected Attribute Value UAV_0 (1): wrong position attribute (non-isometric position) but the product is not deleted => Cleaner: right position is re-established. UAV_1 (1): overloaded position (overloaded position on instances before getting flexible products) => Cleaner: correction by creating flexible Products. UAV_2 (1): list of components but some of them are missing (holes in the list) => Cleaner: the holes are deleted. DOC: linked document (container root), DOC_7 (2): during the Save operation, the link to the sub-product is lost (bugs: edition in context), the instance-reference link is not kept => Cleaner: the link is restored.

3. Mechanical Modeler: LIF: Product Lifecycle LIF_1 (1): non-aggregated geometric features; the objects are isolated within the part container or you cannot have access to them => Cleaner: destruction of these objects. MMR: Mechanical Modeler MMR_1 (2): No link between the Product and ShapeRep (the Geometry has lost its connection with the Product) => Cleaner: restores the connection. MGN: Mechanical Generic Naming (topology) MGN_0 (2): the Feature has more than one topological result => Cleaner: the excess result is deleted. MGN_1 (2): no bridge (no associativity, no geometric connection table) for synchronization. => Cleaner: the geometric feature is cleaned. MTR: Mechanical Tools Result MTR_0 (2): wrong connection of the tools result => Cleaner: the result is reconnected. MTR_1 (3): the Body reference is lost => Cleaner: the reference is re-installed on the startup. MTR_2 (3): wrong connection of the Shape Features MTR_3 (3): VisuOnOff Attribute with wrong value => Cleaner: re-valuation of the attribute. GST_0 (2): GSMRolingOffset (instance) has lost its startup (basic attributes of the object) => Cleaner: the startup is reconnected. CTX: Context CTX_1 (3): multi-contextual Part => Cleaner: deletes the excess context. LIF: Product Lifecycle LIF_3 (3): 3 Constraints Features are destroyed => Cleaner: before the destruction of these Features, the data is transferred into the Features and saved into CATIProperties.

4. Assembly: ASD: Assembly Design (constraints) ASD_1 (3): isolated constraint => Cleaner: destruction of the constraints. ASD_2 (3): wrong constraint storage => Cleaner: destruction of the constraints. ASD_3 (3): lost constraint data => Cleaner: modification, synchronization of the constraints. 5. Analysis: SAF : Features (Spec view) SAF_1 (2): "Required Feature not found": to check that the features are always in the document => Cleaner: creation of the missing Feature. SAF_2 (2): "Property Set trouble /P1", physical properties are inconsistent => Cleaner: UptoDate False (the object is not updated in order to be recalculated). SAF_3 (2): Mesh Set is inconsistent => Cleaner: UptoDate False. SAF_4 (2): "The Feature has not got his explicit image", broken SpecResult link => Cleaner: creation of this link. EXP: Result view EXP_2 (2): "Object of the explicit model is not valid", inconsistent Mesh element => Cleaner: UptoDate False. PRO PRO_1 (2): "Renumber model missing, access to results denied": the model is not well numbered and the access to the results is denied. Inconsistency between the number of applied properties and the number of finite elements => Cleaner: UptoDate False. PRO_2 (2): "Mismatch in element physical type": surface meshing and volume data are not compatible elements. Finite element property is not consistent with the Specification => Cleaner: UptoDate False.

6. Sketcher: SKT: Sketcher SKT_0 (1): problems with the Sketcher. The Sketch has no father => Cleaner: destruction of the Sketch. SKT_1 (2): Basic rules on PrtSketch 1 (Attribut _FtrList is not neutral) => Cleaner: changes the attribute quality. SKT_2 (1): Attribut _FtrList with no attributed value => Cleaner: destruction of the Sketch. SKT_3 (1): Attribut _FtrList with more than one element => Cleaner: destruction of the Sketch. SKT_4 (1): the first object of _FtrList is not SolveManager => Cleaner: destruction of the Sketch. SKT_5 (1): SolveManager with no attributed value => Cleaner: attributes a value to SolveManager. SKT_6 (2): SolveManager has no link with the first element of _FtrList => Cleaner: the link is restored. SKT_7 (2): SolveManager attribute has no entry => Cleaner: the attribute is put back in the entry position. SKT_8 (1): AbsoluteAxis is not the second son SKT_9 (1): AbsoluteAxis with no attributed value SKT_10 (1): AbsoluteAxis has no link with the second element of _FtrList SKT_11 (2): AbsoluteAxis is not a neutral attribute => Cleaner: the attribute gets neutral. SKT_12 (2): Version is not an entry attribute => Cleaner: the attribute is put back in the entry position. SKT_13 (1): Version with no attributed value => Cleaner: the attribute is assigned to a value. SKT_14 (2): associated geometries are not an entry attribute => Cleaner: the attribute is put back in the entry position. SKT_15 (1): associated geometries with no attributed value SKT_16 (2): the ReportName attribute is not neutral => Cleaner: the attribute gets neutral. SKT_17 (1): the ReportName attribute with no attributed value SKT_18 (2): the ReportName attribute with no proper attributed value SKT_19 (2): CurrentAxis is not neutral => Cleaner: the attribute gets neutral. SKT_20 (1): CurrentAxis has no link with the second son

SKT_21 (2): MngFlag attribute is not neutral => Cleaner: the attribute gets neutral. SKT_22 (1): _FtrList attribute has holes => Cleaner: changes the dimensions of the attribute. SKT_23 (1): the Sketch and its sons are not within the same container => Cleaner: destruction of the sons. SKT_24 (2): the Fsur of the _FtrList should be referenced => Cleaner: destruction of the Fsur. SMG: SolveManager (Sketch object) SMG_0 (1): problems with SolveManager (object is aggregated by the Sketch) => Cleaner: destruction of SolveManager. SMG_1 (1): Solvemanager is aggregated but not in a Sketch => Cleaner: destruction of SolveManager. SMG_2 (1): _FtrList attribute with no attributed value => Cleaner: complete cleaning of the list. SMG_3 (2): ImportedGeom attribute is not in entry position => Cleaner: the attribute is put back in the entry position. SMG_6 (2): invalid ImportedGeometry attribute => Cleaner: the attribute is devaluated. SMG_7 (1): ImportedGeometry attribute is not in the sons list of the Sketch => Cleaner: destruction of ImportedGeometry. SMG_8 (2): Constraint is not an entry attribute => Cleaner: the attribute is put back in the entry position. SMG_9 (1): invalid number of constraints => Cleaner: destruction of these constraints. SMG_10 (1): invalid Cst_Value attribut => Cleaner: destruction of SolveManager. SMG_11 (1): invalid list of constraints => Cleaner: destruction of these constraints. SMG_12 (1): invalid elements within the list of constraints => Cleaner: destruction of these constraints. SMG_13 (2): AbsoluteAxis attribute is not in entry position => Cleaner: the attribute is put back in the entry position. SMG_14 (2): invalid AbsoluteAxis attribute SMG_15 (1): invalid AbsoluteAxis attribute. SMG_16 (1): AbsoluteAxis attribute is different from the Sketch support. SMG_17 (1): AbsoluteAxis is not valuated. IGS: Imported GeomSet IGS_0 (1): unreferenced mark on phantom operator. A feature is connected with a phantom operator => Cleaner: deletes

the phantom operator DAT: Datum DAT_0 (1): Basic rules on Datum 0. A contextual Sketcher is not linked to its 2D Datum (2D visualization) => Cleaner: re-establish a link between the Sketch and its Datum. 7. Material: MAT: material MAT_1 : several application containers for material => Cleaner: destruction of the excess containers and only one is left. 8. Drafting: DWS: Drawing Sheet DWS_0 (2): a sheet with disordered views. Cleaner: arranges or classifies the views (the principal view is in the first position). DWV: Drawing View DWV_0 (2): a view has not been correctly aggregated (it does not have the right father) => Cleaner: destruction of the view. DVM: Drawing View MakeUp DVM_0 (2): a useless View MakeUp => Cleaner: destruction of this View MakeUp. GIE: Generated Item GIE_0 (2): a useless item (it should be associated with a curv) => Cleaner: this item is destroyed. DAF: Drawing Area Fill DAF_0 (1): Area Fill without profile, Area Fill without geometrical element to define its profile => Cleaner: Area Fill is destroyed. DAF_1 (1): Area Fill not aggregated by a valid model element and without instances => Cleaner: Area Fill is destroyed if there is no instance. STD: Standards

STD_0 (2): too many standards in the document => Cleaner: deletion. STD_1 (2): the standard is not synchronized with current sheet => Cleaner: re-synchronizes. DET: Drawing Detail (2D component) DET_0 (1): 2D Component not aggregated by a valid model element and without instances => Cleaner: destruction of the component. DET_1 (1): 2D Component not typed through CATI2DDetail or CATI2DDitto interfaces and without instances => Cleaner: destruction of the component. 9. Annotation: DST: Simple Text DST_0 (1): invalid simple text => Cleaner: destruction of simple text. DCR: Connector DCR_0 (1): section profile is missing on a connector DDI: Dimension DDI_0 (1): invalid position of a dimension => Cleaner: destruction of the dimension. DCS : Constraints DCS_0 (1): element without constraint DAC DAC_0 (1): invalid dimension line => Cleaner: destruction of the dimension line.

Workbench Description
Version 5 lets you create and manage parts, assemblies, drawings and CATIA Version 4 models in documents. There is a specific document type for each type of data you create with Version 5. Version 5 uses a multiple document interface (MDI), meaning that you can manipulate several documents at the same time. You can even view the contents of the same document in several windows at the same time. Opening a specific type of document activates the workbench and the associated workbench toolbar containing all the tools you need to edit the document, so the Version 5 application window looks a little different depending on what type of document you are editing. The same applies to the contents of the menu bar and the commands on pulldown menus.

This section contains the description of the icons and menus specific to the CATIA Object Manager workbenches. These commands are discussed in greater details elsewhere in the guide. The main application window looks like this (click the sensitive areas to see the related documentation):

The section is organized as follows:

Menu Bar Standard Toolbar View Toolbar Capture Toolbar Graphic Properties Toolbar Viewing and Hiding Toolbars Viewing the Commands List Keyboard Shortcuts Specification Tree Symbols Catalog Editor Toolbar Feature Dictionary Editor Toolbar Knowledgeware Toolbar

Infrastructure Menu Bar

This section presents the main menu bar available when you run the application and before creating or opening a document.

Start

File

Edit

View

Insert Tools Window

Help

Start
The Start menu is a navigation tool intended to help you toggle between different workshops. The contents of the Start menu vary according to the configurations and/or products installed. For more information about the Start menu, refer to "Accessing the Navigation Tools".

File
For... New... New from... See... Creating New Documents Creating a New Document from an Existing One Opening Existing Documents Closing Documents Saving Existing Documents Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name Saving Documents In Other Formats Saving All Documents Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents Using the FileDesk Workbench Transferring Version 5 Data

Open... Close Save Save As

Save All Print...

Desk... Send To

Edit
For... Undo Redo/Repeat Cut Copy Paste See... Undoing Actions Redoing and Repeating Actions Cutting and Pasting Objects Copying and Pasting Objects Cutting and Pasting Objects Copying and Pasting Objects Deleting Objects Selecting Using the Search... Command Storing Selections Using Selection Sets

Delete Search... Selection Sets...

Define Selection Set Storing Selections Using Selection Sets Links... Properties... Editing Document Links Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties

View
For... Toolbars Commands List... Geometry See... Viewing and Hiding Toolbars Viewing the Commands List Setting Document Window Layout Preferences

Specifications

Setting Document Window Layout Preferences Compass About the 3D Compass Reset Compass Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass Specifications Using the Overview on the Overview Specification Tree Geometry Overview Using the Geometry Overview Fit All In Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area Zoom Area Zooming In On An Area Zoom In Out Zooming In Zooming Out Pan Panning Rotate Rotating Modify->Look At Looking At Objects Modify->Turn Head, Turning Your Head To Zoom In, Zoom Out, View An Object Normal View Zooming In Zooming Out Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane Named Views... Using Standard and User-Defined Views Render Style Using Rendering Styles Navigation Mode Navigating Lighting... Setting Lighting Effects Depth Effect... Setting Depth Effects Ground Viewing Objects against the Ground Magnifier... Magnifying Hiding and Showing Hide/Show Objects Using the Full Screen Full Screen

Tools
For... Formula... Image See... Using Knowledgeware Capabilities Capturing and Managing Images for the Album Recording, Running and Editing Macros Customizing Toolbars

Macro Customize...

Visualization Filters... Using Visualization Filters Options... Customizing Settings

Window
For... New Window Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Cascade See... Using Document Windows Using Document Windows Using Document Windows Using Document Windows

Help
For... CATIA V5 Help CATIA User Companion Contents, Index and Search What's This? See... Getting Contextual Help

Accessing the Online Help Library Using the What's This? Command

User Galaxy About CATIA V5

Accessing the Dassault Systmes User Galaxy Displaying Copyright Information

Standard Toolbar

See Creating New Documents See Opening Existing Documents See Saving Existing Documents See Printing a Document Quickly without Customizing Print Settings See Cutting and Pasting Objects See Copying and Pasting Objects See Cutting and Pasting Objects, and Copying and Pasting Objects See Undoing Actions See Recovering Last Action Undone See Using the What's This? Command

View Toolbar
The View toolbar appears in three different configurations. This is the default View toolbar: Note: the visualization mode icons always show a black arrow within a white square to indicate a full pop-up. This means that clicking the icon displayed in the toolbar will pop-up the whole icon box to let you choose the appropriate rendering style (wireframe, shading. etc.). As it is a visualization mode command, it would be useless to let you run the command currently displayed without displaying the other available modes.

This is the View toolbar in Walk mode:

This is the View toolbar in Fly mode:

See Navigating in Fly Mode See Navigating in Fly Mode See Navigating in Walk Mode See Navigating in Examine Mode See Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area See Turning Your Head To View An Object See Navigating in Fly Mode, Navigating in Walk Mode

See Navigating in Fly Mode, Navigating in Walk Mode See Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Panning See Rotating See Zooming In See Zooming Out See Wireframe (NHR) See Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD) See Shading (SHD) See Shading with Edges (SHD+E) See Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges See Customizing the View Mode See Hiding Objects See Displaying Hidden Objects

Capture Toolbar

See Capturing Selected Areas of Images See Capturing Simple Images See Capturing Simple Images See Capturing Simple Images See Saving Images to Other Formats See Printing Images from the Album See Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only) See Capturing Simple Images See Capturing Simple Images

Graphic Properties Toolbar

The Graphic Properties toolbar is hidden by default.

See Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties See Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties See Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties See Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties See Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties See Using Layers See Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties

Viewing and Hiding Toolbars

Method 1 1. Select View->Toolbars. The list of current toolbars is displayed. Currently visible toolbars are indicated by a tick symbol to the left of the toolbar name.

2. In the list, click the toolbar you want to view or hide. Note that: you can detach toolbars from the application window border by dragging the double line to the left of the toolbar: you can drag the toolbar anywhere around the screen, then dock the toolbar in the same or in another location by dragging it onto the the application window border you can drag a tool icon from a workbench toolbar, and drop it onto a selected object: this is a quicker way to run a command. You can also drag and drop an object onto an object: for example, copy a fillet on a part.

Method 2 1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar. The list of current toolbars is displayed. Currently visible toolbars are indicated by a tick symbol to the left of the toolbar name.

2. Select the Customize... command to display the Customize dialog box. 3. Click the Toolbars tab, then toggle the Hide or Show button to hide or show the toolbar.

Viewing the Commands List

This task illustrates how to access a list of all available commands.

1. Select View -> Commands List... The Command List... dialog box is displayed:

2. Select a command in the list. Help about the command is displayed in the dialog box:

3. With the command still selected, click OK. The selected command is accessed if the appropriate workbench is already activated. To access a command rapidly, double-click the name of the command in the list. If you know the first letter of the command, select any command in the list, then type the first letter to go to the commands starting with the letter you typed.

Keyboard Shortcuts
Use this keyboard key (or combination)... Escape F1 Shift + F1 Shift + F2 F3 Alt + F8 Shift + F3 Home End Page Up Page Down Ctrl + Page Up Ctrl + Page Down Up arrow Down arrow Left arrow Right arrow Ctrl + Tab Another useful shortcut Clicking an icon lets you run the command associated with that icon only once. However, double-clicking an icon lets you use the associated command as many times as you want without having to click on the icon several times. To... Exit the current dialog box (when there is one) Get contextual online help Get help on toolbar icons Toggle the specification tree overview on and off Toggle specification tree display on and off Run macros Activate the graph is the model is active and inversely Display the top of the graph Display the bottom of the graph Relocate the graph one page up Relocate the graph one page down Zoom In the graph Zoom Out the graph Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of a page to the top Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of a page to the bottom Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of a page to the left Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of a page to the right Swap active document windows

Symbols Used in the Specification Tree

Depending on the operations you perform, you may encounter new symbols on your features in the specification tree. This table provides a list with a brief explanation about the use of these symbols.

Miscellaneous Product Structure Symbols reflecting an incident in the geometry building Referenced Geometry Analysis

Miscellaneous Symbols
Miscellaneous A part body. You have access to the part's features, the way it is organized (Pad, Pocket, Intersection, etc.). xy plane, yz plane or zx plane. You can click the desired reference plane either in the geometry area or in the specification tree. Formula defined for Point.1. For more about formulas, please refer to CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5.

PartBody

xy plane

BODY1

A model with geometrical representation. Sketch. For more information about Sketcher Workbench, refer to : Entering the Sketcher Workbench in Sketcher User's Guide. Absolute Axis: contains information about Origin, HDirection and VDirection.

Sketch.1

AbsoluteAxis

Origin

Origin.

HDirection

HDirection or VDirection.

Geometry

Geometry (Point, Line,...): Wireframe and Surfaces features.

Constraints

Constraints: Parallelism, Perpendicularity, etc. Publication : a CATPart or CATProduct element is published that is to say its geometrical data is exposed. For more information refer to Managing a Product Publication in Assembly User's Guide. Assembly hole. For more about Assembly features, please refer to CATIA Assembly Design User's Guide Version 5.

face

Open_body.1

External references branch of the part : external geometry (a face, a point or a line) is copied/imported from driving parts to contextual parts that are being driven (Design in context). You can customize External References in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Part Design, select the General tab and check the box Keep links with selected object.

A product in NO SHOW. By clicking in the CATProduct's contextual menu or by using Product4 , you can put the the Hide/Show icon product in the SHOW or NO SHOW area, the product's geometry is hidden. As a consequence, the documents under it, for instance the CATPart is in the NO SHOW space as well. For more information about the SHOW/NO SHOW modes, see Displaying Hidden Objects in CATIA - Infrastructure's User Guide. A part in NO SHOW. The Sketcher symbol is by default in NO SHOW. By this means the geometry lighter. But you can reactivate the Sketcher representation by clicking in the contextual . menu or by using the Hide/Show icon By double-clicking on this symbol you can return into the Sketcher workbench.

Part5

Product Structure Symbols

Product Structure A product. For more information, refer to Insert a New Product in CATIA - Product Structure User's Guide.

Product1

Product2

A component or sub-product. For more information, refer to Insert a New Component in CATIA - Product Structure User's Guide.

Flexible_product

The little wheel to the left corner of the CATProduct icon is purple. This identifies a flexible sub-assembly. For more information, refer to Soft Sub-Assemblies in CATIA - Product Structure User's Guide.

Part2

means that Instance of a part. This symbol there is a geometrical representation of the part.

Contextual_part

This is a part and the green gear signifies the "original" instance of a part that is contextual (driven by another part, built with another part's data) in a CATProduct.

Imported_part

The brown gear signifies the second or subsequent instance of a part that is contextual. There is a distinction between the "original" and subsequent instances of contextual parts because the geometrical definition of contextual parts (Skillets) is dependant upon neighboring components (support) in the Assembly. This symbol can appear when you import this part in another CATProduct. For contextual parts, every instance keeps a link with its reference. But their first reference has only one link, with a single instance which is contextual. This unique link allows you to know the name of the document (CATProduct) on which the part 's external geometry rests.

Part5

Reference of a part. For more information, refer to Insert a New Part in CATIA - Product Structure User's Guide.

A deactivated component. The shape representation is deactivated; its geometry is not visible. This functionality can occur simultaneously on several CATIA documents containing this component, especially when this component is the instance of a reference. This operation is equivalent to the Delete operation because the reference of the component no longer exists within the Bill Of Material.

A deactivated product.

Symbols reflecting an incident in the geometry building

Miscellaneous Incidents Incidents on Constraints Miscellaneous Incidents

Part to be updated

Product5

No visualization of the product or the part. The product's reference cannot be found. The geometry of the component disappears.

Product6

The geometry of the component disappears. The product is downloaded, its references are missing but the user is able to find them back.

PartBody

A broken link. The access to this product is impossible because the link with the root document has been lost.

A broken Shaft.

Part6 The representation of the component (a part or a product) is deactivated . Before opening a document, you choose the activate or deactivate Shape representation in Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure, select the Product Structure tab and check the box entitled Do not activate default shapes on open . For a particular instance in the document, you can deactivate or activate it by selecting the Representations -> Deactivate Node / Activate Node contextual commands.

BODY2

A model's representation is deactivated.

The pocket's representation is deactivated.

Isolated plane (can no longer be edited)

Incidents on Constraints A broken constraint. The access to this product and the information about its constraints cannot be retrieved.

Offset.1

Parallelism.1

A deactivated constraint (a parallelism constraint).

Perpendicularity.1

A constraint to be updated (a perpendicularity constraint).

Referenced Geometry Symbols

Referenced Geometry Geometry copied from a document different from the CATPart document in which it is pasted. Initial geometry has undertaken modifications in the original CATPart document: solid to be synchronized. Initial geometry has been deleted in the original CATPart document or the original CATPart document has not been found Pointed document found but not loaded (use the Load contextual command or the Edit -> Links command) External link deactivated so that geometry cannot be synchronized during the update of the part (even if the option "Synchronize all external references for update" is on). Geometry pasted (using the As Result with Link option) within the same CATPart document from which it is has been copied Point referenced in the CATPart document is a published element.

Point referenced in the CATPart document is a published element. The published point has undertaken modifications so that a synchronization is required.

Analysis Symbols
Depending on the operations you perform, you may encounter new symbols on your features in the specification tree. This table provides a list with a brief explanation about the use of these symbols. Analysis Manager Links Manager Nodes and Elements Properties Property Connections Virtual Parts Restraints Loads Mass Adaptivity Process Sensors Analysis Connection Manager

Analysis Manager All the objects making up an analysis document.

Links Manager

All the links managed from the CATAnalysis document to other documents: a part, result data or computation data. Models with representations used for performing computer-aided engineering analysis (CAEA) of products. They are complementary to computer-aided design (CAD) models, which are mainly geometric representations of products.

Finite Element Model:

Adaptivity Process

Any specification required for managing the process that will let you perform adaptativity computation (re-meshing).

Links Manager All the links managed between the CATAnalysis document and other documents: a part, result data or computation data. Path to an external storage file directory (result data). Path to an external storage file directory (computation data). Any link to a part or a product (assembly).

Results Computations

Link

Finite Element Model

Models with representations used for performing computer-aided engineering analysis (CAEA) of products. They are complementary to computer-aided design (CAD) models, which are mainly geometric representations of products.

Static Case

A procedure for the computation of the system response to applied static loads under given restraints. A procedure for the computation of the system vibration frequencies and normal modes for a given non-structural mass distribution under given restraints.

Frequency Case

Buckling Case

A procedure for the computation of the system buckling critical loads and buckling modes for a given Static Analysis Case.

Nodes and Elements Nodes and elements that can be created are either Smart Surface Mesh (FMS) or OCTREE (GPS) type. OCTREE Tetrahedron Mesh Automatic mesh specifications generating tetrahedron mesh elements and using OCTREE methods.

Properties

Any specification applied to physical properties (geometry): material and thickness (surface), connections, virtual connections and virtual parts.

Material Property3D

A link to the material (either 2D or 3D) assigned to the part: name, support and thickness.

Property Connections Property Connections: assembly connections used to specify the boundary interaction between bodies in an assembled system. Fastened Connections Link between two bodies which are fastened together at their common boundary, and will behave as if they were a single body. Link between two bodies which are constrained to move together in the local normal direction at their common boundary, and will behave as if they were allowed to slide relative to each other in the local tangential plane. Link between two part bodies which are prevented from inter-penetrating at their common boundary, and will behave as if they were allowed to move arbitrarily relative to each other as long as they do not come into contact within a user-specified normal clearance.

Slider Connections

Contact Connections

Pressure Fitting Connections Link between two bodies which are assembled in a Pressure Fitting configuration, more precisely when there are interferences or overlaps between both parts. Bolt Tightening Connections Connection that prevents bodies from penetrating each other at a common interface. Virtual Rigid Bolt Tightening Connections

Connections used to specify the boundary interaction between bodies in an assembled system. This connection takes into account pre-tension in a bolt-tightened assembly in which the bolt is not included.

Virtual Spring Bolt Tightening Connections

Connections are used to specify the boundary interaction between bodies in an assembled system. This connection takes into account pre-tension in a bolt-tightened assembly in which the bolt is not included. Connection that fastens bodies together at a common rigid interface. Connection that fastens bodies together at a common soft interface. Connection that fastens bodies together at a common soft interface.

Rigid Connections

Smooth Connections

Spot Welding Connections

Virtual Parts

Structures created without a geometric support. They represent bodies for which no geometry model is available, but which play a role in the structural analysis of single part or assembly systems. Virtual Parts are used to transmit action at a distance. Rigid Virtual Parts Smooth Virtual Parts Contact Virtual Parts Generates a stiff transmission rigid virtual part. Generates a soft transmission rigid virtual part. Generates a contact transmission rigid virtual part. Generates a stiff transmission elastic spring virtual part. Generates a soft transmission elastic spring virtual part.

Rigid Spring Virtual Parts

Spring Smooth Virtual Parts

Restraints Generates restraining joins, either on a geometry selection or on a virtual part or still various types of degree of freedom restraints. Any combination of degrees of freedom on a geometry selection. Statically determinate supports generated on a part. Fixes all degrees of freedom on a geometry selection. Generates surface constraint joins, which allow points of a surface to slide along a coinciding rigid surface (fixes the translation degree of freedom for a surface in the direction of the local normal).

Restraint

Isostatic Clamp Surface Slider

Slider

Sliding Pivot

Ball Join

Pivot

Generates prismatic joins (sliders), which allow a rigid body to translate along a given axis (fixes all degrees of freedom of a point, except for one translation). Generates cylindrical joins (actuators) which allow a rigid body to translate about and rotate around a given axis (fixes all degrees of freedom of a point, except for one translation and one rotation). Generates spherical joins (balls), which allow a rigid body to rotate about a given point (fixes all translation degrees of freedom of a point). Generates conical joins (hinges), which allow a rigid body to rotate around a given axis (fixes all degrees of freedom of a point, except for one rotation).

Loads Generates distributed force systems equivalent to given static resultants, force densities of given intensity or acceleration fields. Pressure Distributed Force Generates pressure loads over a surface. Generates a distributed force system equivalent to a pure force at a point (given force resultant and zero moment resultant). Generates a distributed force system equivalent to a pure couple (given moment resultant and zero force resultant). Simulate contact loads applied to cylindrical parts. Generates a uniform acceleration field over a part. Generates a linearly varying acceleration field over a part. Generates a line force field of given uniform intensity on a part edge. Generates a surface traction field of given uniform intensity on a part face.

Moment

Bearing Load Acceleration Rotation Force Line Force Density Surface Force Density

Body Force Enforced Displacements

Generates a volume body force field of given uniform intensity on a part. Assigns non-zero displacement values to restrained geometric selections.

Mass Non-structural mass densities of given intensity. Distributed Mass Equipment Non-structural lumped mass distribution equivalent to a total mass concentrated at a given point. Scalar line mass field of given uniform intensity on a curve geometry. Scalar surface mass field of given uniform intensity on a surface geometry.

Line Mass Densities Surface Mass Densities

Adaptivity Process Adaptivity Convergence

Adaptivities

Adaptivity Boxes

Creating global adaptive mesh refinement specifications and computing adaptive solutions. Selectively refining the mesh in such a way as to obtain a desired results accuracy in a specified region. Local specifications relative to the maximum error in the approximate computed solution relative to the exact solution.

Sensors Sensors A synthesis of analysis results which provide measures that can be re-used in Knowledgeware in order to set rules, checks and formulas.

Sensor sets

Different types of object sets can be generated: Static case: misesmax (Maximum von Mises), dispmax (Maximum Displacement), reaction (Reaction on geometry associated to restrain and connection specifications) and globalerror Frequency case: Frequency (Represents the frequency value) and Frequencies (Represents the list of the frequency values) Buckling case: Buckling Factor

Analysis Connection Manager Analysis Connections

Face Face Analysis Connections Distant Analysis Connections

Spot Welding Analysis Connections

All the connections that you choose not to create using the Assembly Design workbench. Connections used for connecting either faces that are parallel to each others or concentric cylinders, on an assembly model. Connections used for connecting any part from an assembly with or without point type geometrical elements, on an assembly model. Connections used for projecting welding points onto two parallel faces, on an assembly model.

Catalog Editor

See Add a Chapter See Add a Link to Another Catalog See Add a Family See Add a Part Family See Add a Keyword See Add a Component to a Family See Add Part Family Components See Creating Components from Catalog Filters See Use the Catalog Browser

Feature Dictionary Editor Toolbar

See Creating a New Object Class and Creating a New Feature Dictionary See Modifying the Object Naming Rules See Opening a Reference Dictionary See Creating a New Object Class See Adding Properties to an Object Class See Modifying the Object Naming Rules See Generating a Report

Knowledgeware Toolbar

See Using Knowledgeware Capabilities See Using Knowledgeware Capabilities See the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide

Customizing
Customizing Toolbars Customizing Settings

Customizing Toolbars and Workbenches

Customizing a Toolbar by Dragging and Dropping Managing User-Defined Toolbars Creating User-Defined Workbenches Customizing Command Properties Customizing Icon Size and Tooltips

Customizing a Toolbar by Dragging and Dropping

This task shows how to customize a toolbar by dragging and dropping a command onto the toolbar to add the command, and dragging a command away from a toolbar to delete the command. 1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars. For example, the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open:

2. Select the Customize... command to display the Customize dialog box. The dialog box contains the following tabs: Start Menu: customizes the Start menu and workbench access icons (as described in "Accessing the Navigation Tools") User Workbenches: lets you create your own workbenches Toolbars: lists the currently visible toolbars (default) Commands: lists the commands you can drag and drop onto a toolbar.

Options: contains general customization options. With the Toolbars tab open, double-clicking any icon highlights, in the toolbars list, the toolbar the icon belongs to. Double-clicking any toolbar also highlights the toolbar name, allowing you to identify it. 3. Click the Commands tab to list the commands available. The Categories list allows you to filter the listed commands by category: the category is the name of the menu in the menu bar. For example, selecting the Edit category in the Categories list displays in the commands list all the commands likely to appear on the Edit menu.

The category All Commands lists all commands available. You can also select the Select command. If you created macros, the macro names are also listed. You can then add macros to a toolbar. 4. Select a command from the command list. In this example, the Capture... command has been selected. Note that the icon for the command is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box, along with a short help message explaining the role of the icon.

5. Drag the command from the command list to the toolbar to which you want to add the command. 6. Drop the command onto the desired toolbar. In our example, the icon for the Image Capture... command has been added to the standard toolbar: 7. To delete a command from a toolbar using the drag-and-drop mechanism, drag the command and drop it back inside the list of commands in the Customize dialog box. You can also drag and drop commands which do not have icons: in this case, the command name appears in the toolbar. Your customization is stored automatically in the FrameConfig.CATSettings file: you recover it if you exit and restart. For more information about settings, refer to "About Settings" .

Managing User-Defined Toolbars

This tasks shows how to create, rename, delete, restore, hide and show user-defined toolbars 1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars and associated commands. For example, the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open: 2. Select the Customize... command to display the Customize dialog box, and click the Toolbars tab if it is not already activated. The Toolbars tab lists the currently available toolbars, and provides the commands for: creating new toolbars renaming toolbars deleting toolbars restoring the original content of selected toolbars restoring the original content of all toolbars

restore the toolbars to their original position in the current workbench add commands to the selected toolbar remove commands from the selected toolbar. 3. To create a new toolbar, click the New... button. The New Toolbar dialog box appears with a default toolbar name (NewToolBar001), and an empty toolbar appears:

4. Enter the name of the new toolbar, then click OK. The new toolbar is added to the bottom of the list, and an empty toolbar is added to the right of the main application window. In our example, the toolbar "MyToolbar" has been added to the list:

5. Click the Command tab and drag and drop commands onto the new toolbar. In our example, the toolbar "MyToolbar" contains three icons:

6. To rename a user-defined toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, click the Rename... button and enter the new name, then click OK. 7. To delete a user-defined toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, click the Delete... button, then click OK. 8. To restore the original contents of a toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, click the Restore... button, then click OK. The Restore All... button restores the original contents of all toolbars.

9. To hide or display a user-defined toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, and click the Hide or Show button to toggle toolbar display on or off, then click OK.

Creating User-Defined Workbenches

This task explains how to create and customize workbenches. 1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars. For example, the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open:

2. Select the Customize... command to display the Customize dialog box.

3. You can select a workbench then click the Ctrl, Shift, Alt or Other... buttons to include them in the shortcut displayed in the Accelerator field.

The Other... button lets you see the list of available keys. Just select a key then click the Add button, or double-click a key. Whichever method you use, the corresponding choice is displayed in the Accelerator field, for example like this: Ctrl+.

The shortcut you define will appear besides the workbench name in the Start menu.

4. Click the User Workbenches tab. Note that the New... option will be available only if there is an active workbench: if no document is open, the New... option will not be available.

5. Click the New... option to display the New User Workbench dialog box:

6. Enter the name for your workbench, then click the OK button. In our example, let's assume the name of the user workbench is "My Workbench". Clicking the OK button adds the workbench name to the list...

... deactivates the current workbench, and activates "My Workbench", represented by the icon top right:

7. Click the Toolbars tab, then click the New... option to start adding toolbars to "My Workbench". The New Toolbar dialog box and an empty toolbar are displayed:

In the New Toolbar dialog box: the Workbenches list contains a list of all workbenches related to the current working context: in our example, a CATPart document was open when we created "My Workbench", so the list contains all workbenches that could possibly be activated in a CATPart document. the Toolbars list contains the toolbars belonging to the selected workbench. 8. Name the new toolbar to be included in your workbench. 9. Select a workbench from the Workbench list. The toolbars belonging to the selected workbench are displayed in the Toolbars list. 10. Select a toolbar. The contents of the toolbar are added to your empty toolbar, for example:

11. Click OK, and close the Customize dialog box. You can then drag your new toolbar and dock it to the right of the application window so that your workshop now looks like this:

Note: your user-defined workbench will remain active after it is created, until you activate another workbench.

Your new workbench is added to: the top of the Start menu (and to the Favorites list in the Start menu tab) the "Welcome to CATIA V5" dialog box, which appears when you start a session, or when you click the icon representing the current workbench. the list of workbench icons accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon.

You can also insert your favorites workbenches in the Workbenches toolbar. This toolbar is activated when you select Workbenches from the toolbar list:

The Workbenches toolbar displays the workbenches selected as favorites in the Start Menu tab of the Customize dialog box.

In the example below, we selected the Product Structure, Rendering and Catalog Editor workbenches as favorites. Thus, the Workbenches toolbar will look like this:

Just click one of the icons to start the corresponding workbench.

Customizing Command Properties

This task explains how to customize command properties by assigning keyboard shortcuts or icons to the commands. 1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars and associated commands. For example, the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open: 2. Select the Customize... command to display the Customize dialog box. The dialog box contains three tabs: Start Menu: customizes the Start menu and workbench access icons (as described in "Accessing the Navigation Tools") User Workbenches: lets you create your own workbenches Toolbars: lists the currently visible toolbars (default) Commands: lists the commands you can drag and drop onto a toolbar.

Options: contains general customization options. 3. Click the Commands tab to list the commands available.

4. Select a category (menu name), then double-click a command, or select it and click the Show Properties... button. The Command Properties frame is added to the bottom of the dialog box:

5. Enter a new name for the command, if needed, in the title field. 6. Click the Ctrl, Shift or Other buttons to include them in the shortcut displayed in the Accelerator field. The Meta button is now named "Other". 7. If you want to use another key, click the Other... button to see the list of available keys.

8. Select a key then click the Add button, or double-click a key. Whichever method you use, the corresponding choice is displayed in the Accelerator field, for example like this: Ctrl+. The User Alias field lets you assign an alias to the selected command. After clicking the Close button, you just have to type c:alias_name in the PowerInput field to run the command. For example: enter cap in the User Alias field then enter c:cap in the PowerInput field press ENTER The Capture command starts.

9. Click the button to the right of the Icon option (bottom right). This displays the Icon Browser which lets you access all the graphic icons installed with the Version 5 software, then browse to select the appropriate icon.

10. Click an icon and click the Close button (if you used the Icon Browser). The icon is now displayed for the command in the Commands tab, and the Show Properties... button changes to Hide Properties...:

11. Click the Reset... button to access the reset options. You can: restore the original settings of the present command or restore the original settings of all commands in the present category.

12. Click the Close button.

Customizing Icon Size and Tooltips

This task explains how to customize general options. 1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars and associated commands. For example, the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open: 2. Select the Customize... command to display the Customize dialog box. 3. Click the Options tab:

4. Check the Large Icons option if you want large icons displayed. The default icon size is large. Uncheck this checkbox if you want the icons to be normal size.

5. Check the Tooltips option to switch tooltips on or off. Tooltips are short help messages displayed when you point to icons, as explained in "Displaying Tooltips and Help Messages". 6. Check the Lock position of toolbars option to lock the position of all toolbars so that they cannot be moved. Note that you do not need to restart the session to take the lock into account.

Customizing Settings
About Settings General Infrastructure Mechanical Design Shape Analysis & Simulation AEC Plant NC Manufacturing Digital Mockup Equipment and Systems

About Settings
Types of Data Created by Version 5 Version 5 creates two types of data: application data contained in the documents you create and setting files which are non-editable There are two types of settings: temporary settings permanent settings. What Do Settings Files Contain? Temporary settings contain settings of a temporary nature (album screen captures, roll file information,...) CATTemp contains two folders or directories: Album: contains screen captures created using the Tools->Image->Capture... command CNext01.roll: roll file. Temporary settings are created in a location referenced by the CATTemp variable. Permanent setting files store customization you perform mainly using the various tabs provided by the Tools->Options... command. For example, application window customization, background colors, part and print settings, etc. Permanent setting files are identified by the suffix: *.CATSettings, and are created in a location referenced by the CATUserSettingPath variable. Deleting either types of files deletes your customization.

How Do You Specify Settings?

You specify settings using the Tools->Options... command which displays the Options dialog box:

The left-hand column contains a list of categories used for organizing the different groups of settings. There are general settings for all configurations and products, and settings for each type of configuration installed. The category names are the same as those listed on the Start menu. To access the settings for a specific configuration, click the "+" to display the subcategories. Clicking on the subcategory displays the settings tabs for that subcategory.

Where Are Settings Files Located on Windows? The location of settings files on Windows platforms is inspired by the general data and settings management requirements operating on the Windows 2000 platform, which provides an underlying infrastructure allowing you to separate user data, user settings and computer settings. The mechanism used is the CSIDL value mechanism. This implementation allows: your permanent settings (CATSettings) to roam as part of your user profile (CSIDL_APPDATA) your temporary settings (CATTemp, etc.) to be still stored in the user profile, but prevents them from roaming (CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA). The following table will help you determine where your settings are now located: Windows NT
VARIABLE CATUserSettingPath CATTemp CATCache CATReport CATErrorLog CATMetasearchPath CATW3PublishPath

LOCATION
C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp Obsolete C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATReport C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\error.log C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp

Windows 2000
VARIABLE CATUserSettingPath

LOCATION
C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings

CATTemp CATCache CATReport CATErrorLog CATMetasearchPath CATW3PublishPath

C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp Obsolete C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATReport C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\error.log C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp

Windows 98
VARIABLE CATUserSettingPath CATTemp CATCache CATReport CATErrorLog CATMetasearchPath CATW3PublishPath

LOCATION
C:\Windows\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp Obsolete C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATReport C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\error.log C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp

CSIDL Values in Environment Variable Paths The values: C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Application Data (Windows NT) C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data (Windows 2000) C:\Windows\Application Data (Windows 98) are the defaults on these Windows platforms for the CSIDL_APPDATA values. The values: C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data (Windows NT) C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data (Windows 2000) C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data (Windows 98) are the defaults on these Windows platforms for the CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA values.

Location of Settings Files on UNIX Permanent settings are stored in the CATSettings directory in your home directory; temporary settings are stored in the CATTemp directory, also in your home directory. Administrator Settings If you start a session in administrator mode using a specific environment, you can lock settings so that other users running a session with the same environment inherit those settings and cannot change them. For full details how to do so, refer to Locking Settings. Default Settings and Recommended Settings Default settings are provided by applications. However, we recommend the following settings to enhance performance: General category, Performance tab: deactivate occlusion culling level of details (static) = 1 to 1.2 level of details (while moving) = 10 to 11 General category, Visualization tab: deactivate the graduated color background deactivate preselect highlighting deactivate the manipulation bounding box Product category, Cache Management tab: work with cache management cache size = 600MB Selecting View->Render Style->Shading to work with shading without edges will also enhance performance.

Accessing Settings Without Running a Session You do not need to start a session to be able to access your settings. On Windows

1. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product. On Windows, the default folder is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B08\OS_a\code\bin

where "OS_a" is: intel_a (Windows NT and Windows 2000 platform) win_a (Windows 98). 2. Enter the command:
CATOptionsMgt

You can also access the Options dialog box using the Start->Programs->CATIA Tools menu, and running the Settings Management V5R8 command. The Options dialog box is displayed. This function is useful for administrators because it allows you to set up user settings without having to start an interactive session first. Specify your settings as usual. On UNIX 1. Log on as root or end user. 2. Enter the command:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B08/OS_a/code/command/catstart -run CATOptionsMgt

General
General Macros Document Licensing Statistics Display Compatibility Parameters and Measure Devices and Virtual Reality Performances

General
This task explains how to customize general-purpose settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Select the General category (in the tree to the left), then the General tab:

User Interface Style CATIA - P1: sets the P1 user interface style, and is available for both CATIA - P1 and CATIA - P2 users CATIA - P2: sets the P2 user interface style, and is available for CATIA - P2 users only CATIA - P3: sets the P3 immersive user interface style and features, and is available for P3 products/configurations only. Save The option Automatic save every ... minutes allows you to specify a save frequency other than the default frequency (30 minutes).

Note that the automatic save can only be used to retrieve data following a crash. When you restart a session, you are prompted to retrieve the session data saved prior to the crash. However, if you exit a document without first saving it you cannot retrieve the data lost. Disconnection The option Automatic disconnection after ... minutes lets you activate automatic disconnection after a user-defined duration (in minutes) without program use.

Referenced Documents By default, the Load referenced documents option is checked. This means that when a father document is loaded, the child documents it points to are also loaded. However, if you uncheck this option, only the father document is actually loaded when you open it. This may be useful for reasons of performance and efficiency. A typical case of this would be a CATProduct or CATDrawing document, i.e. the father document pointing to CATPart or model documents i.e. the child documents. Once a father document has been loaded you cannot load or unload its child documents as changing the option cannot apply retroactively. You must close the father document, check or uncheck the Load referenced documents option then reopen the father document.

If you open a father document containing unloaded child documents you can load one or more of these documents using the File->Desk command (see Using the FileDesk Workbench).

CATIA The Doc Installation Path field displays the current location of the online documentation. By default, the online documentation is located in:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06doc

Enter the path where the documentation is installed. Note that, if you install the documentation on the network, you can map a drive and enter the appropriate path in this field. UNC (Universal Naming Convention) syntax is also supported. Refer to "Doc Installation Path" for more details.

Conferencing If you installed a license for a DMU Navigator product, you will be able to run conferencing sessions: a conference host initiates a conferences and invites other users to join the conference as guests. The actions replicated during a conference are the following: workbench transition object selection viewpoint modification (zoom, rotation) 3D annotations (creation, modification and deletion) 2D annotations (linked to cameras) creation, modification and deletion. Conferencing is available on the Windows and UNIX platforms, and is based on two underlying prerequisites: NetMeeting (provided with Windows) the Communications Backbone (provided with the Version 5 infrastructure), required for conferencing on UNIX. For more information, refer to the DMU Navigator Users Guide.

Drag & Drop Enables dragging and dropping in the viewers (for copying, pasting or cutting purpose only). For more information, refer to "Dragging and Dropping Icons onto Objects" and "Dragging and Dropping Objects onto Objects" in this guide.

Note: this drag and drop option does not apply to toolbar customization.

3. Click OK to confirm.

Macros
This task explains how to use the Macros tab for accessing the macro development environment for automation purposes. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Select the General category (in the tree to the left), then the Macros tab:

Default Editors The default editors list is as follows: CATScript: internal V5 editor VBScript: internal V5 editor VBA: Visual Basic Editor. If you are using CATScript or VBScript, click the Change editor... button and select the editor you want to use. You cannot change the editor if you are using VBA. After choosing an external editor, you can restore the default editor by selecting the language and clicking the Default editor button. External References External references are only used when your macro script is used to control external applications. You have identify and select the corresponding typelibs.

By default, the external references list is empty. Clicking the All references... button displays the Current references dialog box containing a list of all the Version 5 typelibs because they are installed automatically. To add external typelibs, click the Add reference... button and navigate to select the typelibs. If you click the All references... button again, you will see the external references at the bottom of the list in the Current references dialog box. To remove external references, select them from the list and click the Remove reference button. 3. Click OK to confirm.

Document
This task explains how to manage document environments as well as linked document localization. For detailed information about the administration of document environments based on the DLName mechanism, refer to Administrating Data Using the DLName Mechanism. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General category, click the Document tab:

Document Environments
The Document Environment is a way of accessing your documents. When you access the Document tab, two document environments are displayed: Folder and DLName. Folder: default document environment in which the dialog access the folders containing the documents DLName: document environment that lets you access the folders containing the documents using DLNames. A DLName is a name which stands for a folder. In other words, it may be defined as a logical name used for paths. Any modification of a path impacts the DLName once, thus avoiding to search for and modify manually any occurrence of this path. The administrator may also define the folders in which users are allowed to work. A document environment may be assigned one of the following states: Current: sets the selected environment as the current document environment and defines the dialog box (i.e. File->Open, File->Save, Edit->Links, etc.) that will be displayed when accessing your documents Allowed: indicates that the environment may be set as "Current" or "Not allowed" Not allowed: indicates that the environment may not be set as "Current". You have to assign it the "Allowed" state before selecting it as your "Current" environment.

If your administrator has locked the document environments, the Allowed and Not allowed buttons are grayed and thus cannot be selected by the user. Only the Current and Configure... buttons are active. Setting the DLName environment as Current 3. In the Document Environments column, select "DLName". 4. Select successively the Allowed and Current buttons. DLName is now defined as your current document environment as indicated by the "Current" value in the State column.

Defining DLNames

Now that you have set the DLName environment as your current environment, you have to create the DLNames you will use.

5. Click the Configure... button to open the Configure dialog box which lets you add or remove DLNames: Note: the Unix Folder and Lock columns are displayed only when you are running in administration mode.

6. Click the Add button to create a new DLName. A default name and a default folder are assigned to the new DLName as shown below:

7. If needed, modify the name and folders by editing the cell in the list. You may also choose a folder by clicking the Browse... button. Note that you can include variables in DLNames using the syntax $ {VARIABLE}: Example 1 C:\users\${MODEL}\publish where ${MODEL} is a user-defined variable. Example 2 DLNAME2=${HOME} where ${HOME} is equivalent to c:\ on Windows NT.

8. If you are running in administration mode, you can Lock or Unlock a DLName. Locking a DLName changes its state from "Green" to "Orange" (and inversely when you unlock the DLName). Note: an "Orange" DLName state turns "Red" for the user which means that the DLName may neither be modified nor removed by the user. 9. When finished adding DLNames to your list, you can then click the Export... button to save your list of DLNames as a .txt file in the appropriate location using the Export dialog box. You can make as many lists as you like. Whenever you want to use one of them, just click the Import... button before selecting a list from the Import dialog box.

10. Click OK to close the Configure dialog box then OK to exit the Document tab. Once you have defined your DLNames, you are allowed to put them in a search order. For more information, refer to Localizing Linked Documents further in this task.

DLName Integration
This task aims at giving you one example of the DLName integration with the File->Open command.

1. Click the Open icon following panel opens:

or select the File->Open... command. Instead of the usual File Selection dialog box, the

In case no DLName has been previously defined, a warning dialog box opens when running the command.

The "Look in" pulldown list only contains the DLNames you defined in the previous steps. Note: this File Selection dialog box is very similar to the File Selection displayed when opening existing documents since you can, for instance, select the document type. For more information, refer to Opening Existing Documents in this guide.

2. Select the desired File name and type from the list 3. Click OK to open the document.

DLNames are also integrated in the following commands: File->Save (included Save As, Save All and Save Management) File->Desk File->New from... File->Send To Edit->Links Catalogs Search order ("Other folders" option), etc. For more information on these commands, refer to the corresponding task in this guide by clicking one of the above hyperlinks.

Localizing Linked Documents

The "Linked Document Localization" replaces the "Search Order" command. This task shows you how to define a personal strategy for link resolution.

The primary aim of the Linked Documents Localization... function is to resolve document links and to manage in an easy way the strategy that will be used to locate your linked documents. Its purpose is different from that of the Edit -> Links command (see Editing Document Links). 1. Select the Tools->Options... command then in the General category, click the Document tab. The following dialog box appears:

The Document Location column contains the various strategies you can choose to localize your linked documents. The Active column indicates whether a strategy has been activated ("Yes" value) or deactivated (blank value). If your administrator has locked the Linked Document Localization, all buttons except Configure... are grayed.

2. Choose a strategy from the proposed list:

Folder of the link: provides the absolute path which was saved in the link, i.e. the path used when you saved your document Folder of the pointing document: provides the current folder of your document Relative folder: provides a sub-folder with the same starting path Other folders: provides a user-defined list of folders (former "Search Order") ENOVIA5 (appropriate license is required) for documents stored in ENOVIA Version 5 ENOVIA VPM database (appropriate license is required) for documents stored in ENOVIA VPM. The following example illustrates more precisely the behavior of each above-mentioned strategy:

First of all, we created a product named Product1.CATProduct in the folder /u/users/DS/. This product is linked to Part1.CATPart, which is stored in the folder /u/users/DS/Sub/. Then, we moved Product1 to another folder, i.e. E:\users\DS\. As this product is linked to Part1.CATPart, you need to select a link resolution strategy. Depending on the strategy you select, the behavior will be: Folder of the link: try to locate Part1 in /u/users/DS/Sub Folder of the pointing document: try to locate Part1 in E:\users\DS Relative folder: try to locate Part1 in E:\users\DS\Sub Other folders: try to locate Part1 in user-defined folders.

3. Once the strategy is selected, click one of the buttons displayed in the right part of the dialog box. These buttons are grayed out depending on the strategy you selected: "Activate" lets you activate a strategy that has been deactivated "Deactivate" enables you to deactivate a strategy "Up" and "Down" let you customize the strategy order "Configure" is available for the Other folders strategy only.

Here is a comparison between the former Search Order command and "Linked Documents Localization":

Tools->Search Order

Tools->Options->Document->Linked Document Localization

= "Folder of the link" first = "Other folders" first = Deactivate "Other folders" = Only "Other folders" is activated

Note: "Relative folder" is used for catalog component links.

When you click the "Configure..." button, a dialog box appears with a look depending on your current document environment. In our example, we are working in a Folder environment. For more information on managing document environments, refer to the Document Environments part in this task.

Folder environment

4. Select a directory in the "Look in" list then click the Add button. Note: you can also click the Add Tree button to add the folder tree underneath the specified directory. However, bear in mind that the more elements, the longer the duration. This button is available for the Folder environment only. When working in a DLName environment, you can copy a DLName but not its folders.

This puts the directory into the Search order list as shown below:

The

icon lets you access your various directories and the

icon lets you move up in the directory hierarchy.

You do not need to enter the whole path in the "Look in" field. Just enter the main directory and press Enter. Any subdirectories are then displayed in the list. Select the appropriate subdirectory and click the Add button.

Note that you can use the multiselection to add your folders to the search order:

The Search order list is intended to contain the directories in which your linked documents are saved. You may wish to use different search order lists for particular uses and for different circumstances. 5. Continue adding your most frequently used directories to the list. When you have finished click the Export... button and save the list as a .txt file in the appropriate location in the Export Search Order dialog box:

6. You can make as many lists as you like. When you want to use one of these lists just click the Import... button. The Import Search order dialog box appears.

Right-clicking on any of the .txt files allows you to edit these files. If you then click the Open button the contents of the .txt file you chose is placed in the list and replaces the elements previously contained, if any.

The Import Add... button lets you import and add a search order contained in a text file to the current Search order list.

7. The search order lists can easily be updated. To change the priority of a directory i.e. move it up or down in the list, select it then click the corresponding button: Up or Down. Note that the multi-selection is also allowed.

8. To remove a directory, simply select it and click the Remove button. The Remove, Up and Down buttons are activated only when at least one item in the list is selected.

Licensing
Refer to "Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager" for detailed information about how to reserve configuration and product licenses using the License Manager.

Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager

This task explains how to reserve product licenses during a session using the Licensing tab via the Tools->Options... command. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Select the General category, then the Licensing tab to display the License Manager. The role of the License Manager is to allow you to reserve licenses before using these products. You will not be able to work with any Version 5 products until you have first reserved the corresponding licenses. You must select at least one configuration license. In our example, it will look like this if you installed the configurations CATIA - Mechanical Design (MD2) and CATIA - Drawing Production (DP2), and imported a nodelock license for the CATIA - Mechanical Design (MD2) configuration:

The list contains all the installed configurations and products. Note that, if you have not previously reserved any licenses, none of the check buttons is checked. If you entered a nodelock license during the installation, the corresponding configuration is preselected in the list. In our example, the MD2 option is checked because we imported a nodelock license for this configuration (CATIA - Mechanical Design (MD2) configuration (DS58BB40000 - MD2) during the installation.

In the upper part of the tab: Target id: specifies the target id of your computer Display Type: informs you whether you are running on a local or remote display; Local: you are running on a local display and you are working with a nodelocked or server license Remote: you are running on a remote display and you are working with a server license only Server Timeout: a slider lets you specify approximately the amount of time you are prepared to wait for a server license to be made available by the license server, from a few seconds to a few minutes Demo mode: You will be able to work in demo mode if you registered and reserved at least one configuration license, and checked the Demo Mode option. For more information about the demo mode, refer to "Running in Demo Mode". Show License Info: check this option if you want feedback when attempting to reserve a license reserved by another user. The next time you start a session, the software will inform you who is using the license you are trying to use. If you are using network licensing, the list of all active and available license servers is now displayed near the top like this:

A "+" button is displayed next to the license in the list. Clicking this button lets you switch between compact mode (the default) and expanded mode. In compact mode, the license imported is already reserved. Click the "+" button to switch to expanded mode. In this mode, a sublist is displayed containing the list of all the installed licenses, preceded by the Any License option. A list of licenses may exist, for example, when you have several identical configuration licenses with different serial numbers. This can be the case, for example, when licenses are served by different servers, or set up for use by different groups.

Your administrator may instruct you to reserve a specific license in the list. If not, just click the Any License option, which means that you consider any of the licenses in the list to be sufficient for your needs. Click the "-" button to return to compact mode. All configurations are considered as custom configurations. When you install a configuration, the list in the dialog box will contain: custom configurations appear at the top the names of the products appear after the name of the last configuration. In our example, note that: the check button next to, for example, the configuration "MD2" is checked because, during the installation, the corresponding nodelock license was imported the status Granted appears next to the products in the list which belong to that configuration. The product names in the list are grayed out and the check buttons cannot be checked: this is because, in our example, no licenses exist for the individual products. Furthermore, the status Not Granted means that you attempted to reserve a license that is not available (nodelock license expired, server license expired, network server down, etc.). the status No License appears next to configurations and products which have been installed, but for which you do not have a license. The configuration name is grayed out in the list, and the check button cannot be checked. For example, the "DP2 - CATIA - DrawingProduction 2 Configuration".

Below each license, you will see Local or Server which informs you whether the license is a nodelock (local) license or a server license. If you are using a server license, the name of the server will be displayed like this: Server (ip:server_name) where "server_name" is the name of the license server. 3. Check the check buttons for the configurations and/or products for which you want to reserve a license. When you are working with nodelock licenses, the license will be reserved by default when you start your session, even if you unchecked the corresponding check button. 4. Click OK. 5. Exit and restart your session. You need to restart your session after reserving configuration and/or product licenses. Licensing settings are stored in a settings file. The settings active in the License tab depend on what you set the last time you used it. If you run a Version 5 session in administrator mode, you can now lock individual configuration and/or product licenses to control their usage. For background information about locking settings, refer to Locking Settings. Troubleshooting Messages You may encounter one of the following messages when using the Licensing Manager: "Environment xxx not set or incorrect" Set an environment using the setcatenv command. "Environment xxx incorrect" Set a valid environment using the setcatenv command. For more information about customizing environments, refer to "Customizing Your Environment on Windows". "No Configuration/Product Available" The path containing the information required to display the list of configurations/products, referenced by the CATICPath environment variable, is incorrect, or the information is incomplete. "You have not requested one or more product licenses, but no configuration license" Click OK and select at least one configuration license using the Licensing tab. "No License Available for Requested Configuration(s)" Click OK and select at least one valid configuration license using the Licensing tab. "Not All Licenses Available" Contact your administrator.

Statistics
This task explains how to obtain workbench and command use statistics, to log the time spent in workbenches and specific commands. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Select the General category, then the Statistics tab.

You can log statistics for two types of activities: time spent in workbenches time spent using specific commands in those workbenches. There are two log display modes: File: the log is written to the file whose default name is Workbench.log or Command.log, when you exit the session, in the location pointed to by the CATErrorLog variable. Consequently, the files are written by default to:
CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\Statistics\Workbench.log CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\Statistics\Command.log

Console: the log is written to a window. There are two log update modes: Add: the log is written to the existing log Session: the existing log is overwritten by the log of the current session. The log can be formatted or non-formatted. Logging Workbench Activity

Example of formatted traces for a workbench log: them=WORKBENCH:time=Fri Sep 22 16:55:33 2000:elps=0,000000:cpus=0,000000:Session=Start:User=EGD:Host=LARONDE them=WORKBENCH:time=Fri Sep 22 17:04:17 2000:elps=15,000000:cpus=15,000000:Session=Start:User=EGD:Host=LARONDE them=WORKBENCH:time=Fri Sep 22 18:18:45 2000:elps=15,000000:cpus=15,000000:Session=Start:User=EGD:Host=LARONDE them=WORKBENCH:time=Fri Sep 22 18:18:45 2000:elps=6047,000000:cpus=1750,000000:Workbench=CATStCLA:NLS=FreeStyle them=WORKBENCH:time=Fri Sep 22 18:18:51 2000:elps=3938,000000:cpus=1015,000000:Workbench=CATShapeDesignWorkbench:NLS=Shape Design Workbench Example of non-formatted traces: WORKBENCH:Fri Sep 22 18:22:17 2000:16,000000:15,000000:Start:EGD:LARONDE WORKBENCH:Fri Sep 22 18:22:17 2000:3703,000000:1671,000000:CATStCLA:FreeStyle WORKBENCH:Fri Sep 22 18:22:21 2000:3125,000000:671,000000:CATCloudEditorWorkbench:Digitized Shape Editor Note that:

Workbench = internal workbench name NLS = NLS name of the workbench (the name which appears in the Start menu). When you change an option, exit the session and restart to take your settings into account. Logging Command Activity

Here is the log syntax: Them=COMMAND:time=Date and time:elps=elapsed time:cpus=cpu time:Workbench=Internal current workbench name:NLS=Workbench title:Command=Internal command name:NLS=Command title Elps: elapsed time spent in the command. Cpus: cpu time spent is the command. This trace will be logged when you exit the command. The workbench name is the current workbench when you exit the command. Note that certain auxiliary commands (for example, the Search command) are not logged. Example of formatted traces for a workbench log:
them=COMMAND:time=Tue Mar 13 16:36:31 2001:elps=0,000000:cpus=0,000000:Session=Start:User=CVE:Host=ANJOUTEY them=COMMAND: time=Tue Mar 13 16:36:32 2001:elps=6875,000000:cpus=765,000000:Workbench=CATInternalNameWb1:NLS=WB1:Command=Select:NLS=Select them=COMMAND: time=Tue Mar 13 16:37:32 2001:elps=6875,000000:cpus=765,000000:Workbench=CATInternalNameWb1:NLS=WB1:Command=CATInternalNameCmdA:NLS=CmdA them=COMMAND: time=Tue Mar 13 16:36:32 2001:elps=6875,000000:cpus=765,000000:Workbench=CATInternalNameWb2:NLS=WB2:Command=Select:NLS=Select them=COMMAND: time=Tue Mar 13 16:37:32 2001:elps=6875,000000:cpus=765,000000:Workbench=CATInternalNameWb2:NLS=WB2:Command=CATInternalNameCmdB:NLS=CmdB them=COMMAND: time=Tue Mar 13 16:36:32 2001:elps=6875,000000:cpus=765,000000:Workbench=CATInternalNameWb1:NLS=WB1:Command=Select:NLS=Select them=COMMAND: time=Tue Mar 13 16:37:32 2001:elps=6875,000000:cpus=765,000000:Workbench=CATInternalNameWb1:NLS=WB1:Command=CATInternalNameCmdA:NLS=CmdA them=COMMAND: time=Tue Mar 13 16:37:32 2001:elps=6875,000000:cpus=765,000000:Workbench=CATInternalNameWb1:NLS=WB1:Command=CATInternalNameCmdA:NLS=CmdA

Display
Linetype Navigation Performance Thickness & Font Tree Visualization

Linetype
This task explains how to set linetype properties. This functionality is relevant for Drafting products only. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General catagory, click the Display sub-category then the Linetype tab:

The available linetypes are displayed in a list, the height first types being grayed as they correspond to the default linetypes (displayed in the Graphic Properties toolbar) and cannot be modified. 3. Double-click the linetype to be modified. The Linetype Editor opens:

You can either define a mono-dimensional linetype or a bi-dimensional linetype. 4. To define a mono-dimensional linetype, click the Define a new mono-dimensional linetype button. The Mono-dimensional linetype editor panel opens:

This panel lets you define the linetype for visualization and print purposes. 5. In the Visualization definition field, click the desired squares to define the linetype pattern: a white square corresponds to a drawing, a black square to a blank. You can select up to 16 squares. 6. Use the Factor field to stretch the pattern by increasing the value as shown below:

7. In the Print definition field, enter the length in millimeters for each pattern segment. A positive value indicates a drawing (white squares), a negative value indicates a move without drawing (black squares). Do not forget to insert a blank between each value. The capture below illustrates the print definition of the pattern defined above, the red numbers we inserted correspond to the number of white and black squares:

8. Click OK to validate and close the dialog box. The new linetype replaces the selected line in the Linetype editor list. If you do not wish to go on defining linetypes, just click OK once again to close this dialog box and the new linetype will be displayed instead of the selected line at the end of the Linetype list. 9. To define a bi-dimensional linetype, double-click a line from the Bi-dimensional linetype list in the Linetype editor. The Bi-dimensional linetype editor panel opens:

10. Move the cursor then click to create a segment and repeat theses steps as necessary to define the desired pattern. You can create segment breaks by double-clicking a point then moving the cursor to draw a new segment:

11. Use the following icons to: delete the whole pattern delete the last segment reframe the bi-dimensional line editor. 12. Click OK to validate and close the dialog box. The linetype is displayed instead of the selected line at the end of the Linetype editor. 13. Click OK once again to close the Linetype editor and display the new linetype instead of the selected line at the end of the Linetype list.

Customizing Navigation Settings

This task explains how to customize display navigation settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General category, select the Display sub-category then the Navigation tab:

The Navigation tab lets you customize:

Preselect in geometry view: activates preselection highlighting. As you point to objects, different parts of the objects are highlighted in the geometry area, and the object name is highlighted in the specification tree.

Preselection navigator after ... second(s): sets the amount of time, in seconds, which elapses before the preselection navigator appears after pointing at an object. Refer to "Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator" for more information about how to use the preselection navigator. For more information about navigating in fly mode, refer to "Navigating in Fly Mode". Highlight faces and edges: controls the way faces and edges are prehighlighted and highlighted. How elements are prehighlighted and highlighted: is determined by whether you are in Design mode (editing an element in the context of an assembly) or in Visualization mode and varies according to the current visualization mode: shading with edges. shading, wireframe (NHR), dynamic hidden line removal (HRD). Note that some minor differences in the way elements are highlighted are noticeable using the HRD mode. The default prehighlight and highlight colors are different, and can be customized using the Visualization tab. By default, faces and edges are highlighted. Depending on the element type, elements may or may not be displayed using the Z-buffer.

The following examples use the shading mode. When you are editing an object, a selected face is highlighted like this:

... and a selected edge is highlighted like this:

If you select the Pad or the PartBody in the specification tree, the whole object is highlighted like this:

If you are in Visualization mode in an assembly, the whole object is highlighted. Highlight bounding box: if you use the bounding box, this option highlights the bounding box when you point to it.

Display manipulation bounding box: when clicking on an object, displays a box around the selected object if it uses manipulators:

Objects using manipulators can be manipulated by the 3D compass . For more information about manipulating objects using the 3D compass, refer to "Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass".

Limit display of manipulators to ... element(s): sets a limit on the number of elements selected in multi-selection mode (using the selection trap) on which manipulators can be displayed. In case you select more elements than the limit (for example, by using the CTRL key to extend the selection), no element can be manipulated. This option is activated when working in a 2D context (objects with handles such as texts and arrows, for instance) or 3D context. The following scenario uses the Drafting application as an example:

1. Enter a value in the Limit display of manipulators field, "10" for instance then click OK to validate. 2. In the geometry area, select six elements either using the selection trap or the CTRL key. As you can see it below, manipulators are displayed on the selected elements to let you modify them:

If you set the limit to "10" instead of "5", no manipulator will be displayed since the number of selected elements (i.e. six) exceeds the limit:

Gravitational effects when navigating: fixes the X, Y or Z axis during navigation. While turning in Fly mode, this creates the impression that the user viewpoint tilts or banks with respect to the fixed axis, as in a real plane.

Animation during viewpoint navigation: set this option if you want viewpoint changes in certain contexts to be animated. icon. The To see an example of the effect of this option, check the option, then select a plane and click the Sketcher selected plane is slowly rotated until parallel to the screen just like during an animation. If you do not check this option, the selected plane is set parallel to the screen immediately (without the animation effect).

Collision detection enabled: when flying and walking, detects if you collide with an object, so that you bounce off the object instead of going through it. Mouse Sensitivity: sets the mouse sensitivity when flying and walking: if you set a low value, pointing the cursor produces only slow, minor changes in direction; if you set a high value, pointing the cursor produces rapid, significant changes in direction.

Mouse Speed: sets the time interval (from 0 to 100 milliseconds) during which mouse movements will not be taken into account for prehighlight purposes: the higher the speed, the fewer elements are prehighlighted.

3. Click OK to confirm, or Reset... and OK again to reset default settings.

Performance
This task explains how to customize display performance settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General category, click the Display category then the Performances tab:

Occlusion Culling Click "Occlusion culling enabled" to activate occlusion culling (for DMU Navigator). Occlusion culling avoids redisplay of hidden elements, particularly useful when viewing highly compartmented scenes such as plants and buildings but it does not improve display performance.

3D Accuracy and 2D Accuracy The accuracy setting controls the tessellation of surfaces (the surfaces of your geometry are built using a mesh of polygons). You have two choices: Fixed: sets a fixed sag value for calculating tessellation on all objects, which does not vary with object size: a low value (close to 1) means that a very fine mesh is used to render surfaces, but the drawback is that geometry will be redrawn more slowly when using the viewing tools a high value (close to 10) means that a very coarse mesh is used, but the advantage is that geometry will be redrawn more quickly. Proportional to element size Tessellation is calculated according to object size: the larger the object, the coarser the tessellation. For the same sag value, the tessellation on small objects will always be finer than on large objects. The sag value used to calculate the tessellation of each object is calculated is as follows:
sag x radius of sphere/100

where: "sag" is the sag value you set using the slider (between 0.1 and 1) "radius of sphere" is the radius of a sphere encompassing the object entirely (this value is obviously higher on larger objects).

The preview area to the right shows you the effect of each setting.

2D accuracy settings are the same as for 3D.

Level of Details You do not always need to view a high level of detail in your geometry all the time. You can use the Static and When Moving settings to add or remove display quality: Static: even if you do not want to move geometry, it is often useful to remove details you do not need to see. Set a low value if you want to see all the details, or a high value to remove details. While Moving: you will be able to move large parts more quickly if you set While Moving to a high value. When you release the mouse after moving the part, the normal level of detail will be redisplayed. In both cases, the higher the value, the lower the level of detail. Normally, you set Static to a low value, and While Moving to a high value. The added value is increased display performance.

Note that if you are using the Level of Details option with product structure or DMU Navigator functions, you must activate the cache for your LOD settings to be taken into account.

Transparency Quality Low (Screen Door): similar to viewing an object through a mesh or a screen. Use this setting when you need to look at objects through another transparent object. This mode is also recommended for increased display performance. When checked, the transparency is not impacted whatever value you set (between 1 and 255). High (Alpha Blending): similar to looking through clear glass. Use this setting when you need to view several transparent objects located at different depths of a scene. For example, looking through a car windscreen at other opaque objects inside the car. Note, however, that this mode is computation-intensive and consequently has an adverse affect on display performance. When checked, the transparency is impacted according to the value you set. Note that you also need to set the transparency coefficient on selected objects using the Edit->Properties command or Properties command on the contextual menu, by dragging the Transparency slider on the Graphic tab. Refer to Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties for more information.

Frames per second Check the Activate button if you want to control the minimum number of frames per second (frame rate) during animations (zooming, moving, flying,... etc.). The frame rate varies from 1 to 30. Setting a low frame rate keeps a maximum number of details visible, but animations are less smooth and fluid; setting a high frame rate limits visible details, but provides smoother, more fluid animations. This option is particularly useful, for example, in Fly mode: when flying within large objects, you may not need to see all the details, but you want to navigate through the object in as smooth a manner as possible.

Show Outline (wherever possible) This option is useful if you always want to display outlines for parts created from surfaces of revolution, for example, shafts, and cylinders. This setting determines whether you see outlines when using the NHR and Shading + Edges modes.

Whereas edge display is computed by your workstation's graphic adapter, outline display is computed by the display software. Note that, in large assemblies, displaying outlines may affect display performance. You may want to switch outline display off in this case.

Show Hidden Edges (whenever possible) Displays or hides the hidden edges of selected objects.

For example, when the hidden edges of this object are not displayed, it looks like this:

.. and like this when the hidden edges are displayed:

Enable isoparametrics generation When checked, this option grays out the Isoparametrics option in the Custom View Mode dialog box. Select the Isoparametrics option to display the topological elements defined as being isoparametrics. For more information on the Custom View Mode dialog box, refer to Customizing the View Mode in this guide. By default, the "Enable isoparametrics generation" option is not checked for performance reasons.

Enable two side lighting for faces and surfaces only This option helps you viewing the two sides (i.e. front side and back side) of a face or surface by lighting them.

Enable back face culling for faces and surfaces only Check this option to avoid redisplay of back sides of faces or surfaces. Note that when this option is checked along with the "Enable two side lighting for faces and surfaces only" option, only front faces will be lightened.

Enable OpenGL local viewer lighting When checked, this option provides a better lighting quality. However, bear in mind that there is a price to pay in performance.

Save lineic elements in cache This option lets you save lineic elements (such as wireframe elements, for instance) when saving files of type cgr.

Halo when displaying the geometry with hidden lines removed This option lets you display a halo around intersecting edges to create a perspective effect. Prior to using it, do not forget to select Tools->Customize...->Commands then choose "All commands" from the Categories list and "Hidden Line Removal (HLR)" from the Commands list. Otherwise, you will not be able to use this option.

Accurate Picking Accurate Picking option helps you select more precisely elements that are very close to each other when displaying the geometry. It is recommended to work with a magnified view of your document by selecting the View->Magnifier... command as shown below:

For more information, refer to Magnifying in this guide.

Checking this option may have a negative impact on the performances when using big models.

3. Click OK to confirm.

Thickness & Font

This task explains how to set thickness properties. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General catagory, click the Display sub-category then the Thickness tab:

3. In the Index column of the Thickness area, select a thickness type from the 63 values contained in the list. 4. If necessary, modify the Size in pixels or in millimeters by selecting the value to be modified then clicking it once. The Size in pixels reflects the result displayed on screen and the Size in mm corresponds to the printed version.

You cannot assign a size greater than 16 pixels.

5. The "Use system TrueType fonts in CATIA" option enable you to use TrueType fonts provided by Windows and thus, add them to the font chooser. This default list of fonts can be customized. To do so, refer to Customizing Fonts for Displaying Geometry Area Texts in this guide.

6. Click OK to confirm.

Setting Specification Tree Options

This task explains how to set specification tree display options. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears with the General category selected in the left-hand column.

2. In the Display sub-category, select the Tree tab to display the document layout options. In the Tree Type section of the dialog box, you will notice that the option Classical Windows Style is selected by default. This is the conventional way of displaying the specification tree.

Classical Windows Style This option might, for example, be useful when working on solids and assemblies.

Structure

Constructive Historic: Vertical If the whole of the tree is not displayed, you may have to enlarge the window. Alternatively, you can reduce the length of tree item names. To do this, go back to the Tools->Options... dialog box and select the Fixed Size option in the Tree Item Size section. The default number of characters is 8. You can of course specify the number you wish.

Constructive Historic: Horizontal To do this, go back to the Tools->Options... dialog box and select the Horizontal option in the Tree Orientation section. The tree will then look something like this:

This option might, for example, be useful when working on solids and surfaces.

Relational: Vertical

As you can see, this option shows all possible relations between the different items that go to make up the part.

Relational: Horizontal To do this, go back to the Tools->Options... dialog box and select the Horizontal option in the Tree Orientation section:

This option could, for example, be used for surface creation. You can also change the background colors using the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options... function. If the specification tree prevents you from seeing the geometry, you can move the tree by first clicking the reference axis (the geometry is displayed in low highlighting mode), then dragging the tree to a new location using the middle mouse button. Activate the Visualization of Show/No Show When this option is checked, if you select an item in the tree, then select the Hide/Show grayed out in the tree. icon, the item is

When the size of the tree exceeds the window size, a scrollbar appears: you can then move the tree and navigate using the scrollbar. If you want to manipulate the specification tree on its own (zoom it up and down, etc.), click the reference axis in the bottom left corner of the document or any branch in the tree: the geometry is dimmed, and only the tree is active.

Activate automatic scroll When checked along with the "Activate the Visualization of Show/No Show" option, this option lets you scroll the tree automatically when dragging and dropping icons or objects onto it. The tree is scrolled until you remove the mouse from the scroll area. For more information on dragging and dropping, refer to Dragging and Dropping Icons and Objects in this guide.

Customizing Visualization Settings

This task explains how to customize display visualization settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General category, select the Display sub-category then the Visualization tab:

The Visualization tab lets you customize: Graduated color background Note that this option is also available for P1 users.

This option activates a graduated color background in all open documents, and in the Preview and workbench list areas of the Visualization tab itself. For example, this document uses a graduated color background. The color becomes gradually lighter towards the bottom of the document:

...but this document uses a normal color background:

Background: sets background color in all open document windows Selected element, Low-intensity highlighting and Preselected element linetype: set colors of selected elements and low-intensity elements, and the linetype used to display preselected elements. Refer to "Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer" for a discussion of preselection and selection techniques Update needed: sets the color of objects to be updated; refer to the Part Design documentation for more information about updating objects Handles: sets manipulator handle colors. Graphic manipulators are displayed on certain objects (planar patches, holes, ...) for the purpose of moving the objects more easily. Refer to "Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass" for more information about how the compass is used on examples of where manipulators are used. Surface boundaries: check this option to set the color and thickness of surface boundaries. Display all elements using Z-buffer depth: activates the Z-buffer so that all elements hide each other. When activated, all elements including lines and planes (usually displayed in front of other elements) are displayed at their true depth in the 3D scene. When deactivated, lines and planes are always displayed in front of other elements. Anti-aliasing: activates anti-aliasing on all edges and lines. Anti-aliasing makes jagged lines and edges appear smoother:

... and when switched off, edges and lines look jagged:

3. Click OK to confirm, or Reset... and OK again to reset default settings.

Compatibility
V4 / V5 Infrastructure V4->V5 Draw V4->V5 Space V4->V5 SPEC DELMIA/Deneb DXF Import/Export Format External Format IGES SmartBOM STEP VRML

V4 / V5 Infrastructure
This task shows you how to customize Compatibility settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears with the category tree in the left-hand column. 2. In the General category of the Options Tree, select Compatibility and click the V4/V5 Infrastructure tab. The following dialog box appears.

In CATIA Version 4, certain information was specified by means of the parameter settings in the declaration files. These declaration parameters are no longer supported in Version 5 and there is no way to transfer them automatically to Version 5. Such information must be provided by means of the Options dialog box shown above, before attempting to read Version 4 data. The Options dialog box lets you: display faces and surfaces visible in shading mode in CATIA Version 4 open CATIA Version 4 models referencing an external PROJECT file specify the code page identifying unlabeled data

declare the code page to be stored in the CATIA data to be written when saving Version 5 CATPart documents as CATIA Version 4 models.

Displaying elements with the Display Mode Sensitive attribute: In V4, the display attribute CURRENT DISPLAY MODE SENSITIVE enables you to decide whether to display the hidden parts or not, to display faces and surfaces visible in shading mode in CATIA Version 4. In Version 5, by default, only faces and surfaces that were in shading mode in Version 4 are shown in models displayed by means of the CATIA Site Navigator. To display all faces and surfaces, you must therefore activate the CURRENT DISPLAY MODE SENSITIVE attribute. To do this, in the Conversion part of the Options dialog box, check the box Display elements with the Display Mode Sensitive attribute. You can now visualize in Version 5 all Version 4 faces and surfaces, even those that were not in shading mode.

V4 Declaration Opening CATIA Version 4 models referencing an external PROJECT file In V4, certain model data must be contained in a PROJECT file which can either be internal to the model or external. If it is external, the only way to access such data is to provide Version 5 with precise information about the PROJECT file's whereabouts. Enter, in the PROJECT File Path field, the location of the PROJECT file referenced by the V4 model you wish to display. Make sure you complete this field before displaying a Version 4 model. Bear in mind the following: If you do not specify the PROJECT file path before opening the model, a warning message will appear. There are no restrictions as regards the PROJECT file's code page. However, you must make sure that the code pages of the model and the PROJECT file are compatible. You can display such models on Windows and on UNIX. If you want to display the model on Windows, the address to be specified should look something like this: http://UNIXmachinename/path/PRJDirName You can have access to the PRJ Files installed on the NT disk. In that case, you need to bring these Project files referenced by the model into an NT directory and rename these files according to the conversion table. For more information about character conversion, refer to the Conversion Table in the Model Naming chapter in CATIA - V4Integration User's Guide. Thus, in the PROJECT File path you refer to the directory containing the Project Files. For more information about the methodology of coping your Project File on NT, refer to Having Access to PRJ File on NT in CATIA - V4Integration User's Guide. On UNIX, just specify the path, for example:/u/users/username/PRJDirName The following reference tables in the PROJECT files can now be accessed in Version 5: attribute and class tables annotations/dimensions.

Writing the Initial Model File Path With this option, you have the possibility to translate V5 CATPart documents into V4 Models using V4 standards defined in the V4 Initial Model. You may use an Initial Model; this means that you define a reference model which includes default values. To customize the environment (initialization values to modal parameters and management parameters), you need to create an Initial Model. Such a Model is often used to ensure that everyone in a company works with the same predefined standard values. The Save As Model operation is able to take into account a V5 setting: a V4 Initial Model file path. Before saving a V5 CATPart as a V4 model, you can specify an initial Model file path in this setting Tools->Options...->General->Compatibility->V4/V5 Infrastructure.

The "Initial Model file path" setting can replace the following settings: The "WRITING_CODE_PAGE" setting The "Model Dimension" setting The "Model Unit" setting. And the "Initial Model file path" setting defines other V4 standards: The layer filters The colors Standards for SPACE elements Standards for DRAW elements This information will be extracted from the Initial Model and added to the V5-generated model. Specifying the code page identifying unlabeled data In V4, the declaration parameter catsite.DEFAULT_DS_CODE_PAGE declares the language to identify the data read if this data is not labeled (i.e. if it is just labeled EBCDIC or ASCII, and not labeled with a standard code page such as ISO8859-x, IBM-392, EUC-KR, EUC-CN, and so forth). In Version 4, information such as the language used to identify unlabeled readable data was specified by means of the parameter settings in the declaration files. These declaration parameters are no longer supported in Version 5 and there is no way to transfer them automatically to Version 5. Such information must be provided by means of the dialog boxes described below, before attempting to read Version 4 data. For Version 4 data that is not labeled with a standard code page (for example, ASCII-DS-xxx or EBCDIC-DS-xxx) other than US English, you must specify the appropriate language from the list provided. To do this, click on the DS_DEFAULT_CODE_PAGE list in the V4 Declarations part of the dialog box and select the appropriate language.

Declaring the writing code page when saving Version 5 CATPart documents as CATIA Version 4 models For a full scenario illustrating this functionality see "Saving Version 5 CATPart Documents As CATIA Version 4 Models" in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide. In Version 4, the declaration parameter catsite.WRITING_CODE_PAGE declares the code page to be stored in the Version 5 data to be written. The writing code page ISO-8859-1 is the default value so normally, unless another code page was already specified, you can go ahead with the save. However, if you want to use a writing code page other than ISO-8859-1, open the WRITING_CODE_PAGE list in the V4 Declarations part of the dialog box (indicated by the arrow above), select the appropriate code page and click OK.

Declaring the Model Dimension when saving Version 5 CATPart documents as CATIA Version 4 models It is possible to customize Model Dimension for V4 models generated in V5. V4 tolerances will be computed according to V4 recommended values from this Model Dimension. In V4, model tolerances can be modified through Standards -> Model Function. The Model Dimension Parameter, which can be modified in CATIA V4, has an impact upon the precision of geometrical calculation. The value by default is 10000mm and it corresponds to the V4 value. Before saving a V5 Part as a Model, you can change the Model Dimension parameter to fit your V4 standards. The whole set of tolerances will be computed from this Model Dimension according to the V4 recommended values. Be aware that modifying this value without consideration can affect dangerously the V4 geometry. The modification of the Model Dimension parameters should only be used to respect the V4 standards. The management of the resolution is different in V5 and in V4 : In V5 the main concept for tolerances is the Resolution which defines the minimum length of a valid object. It is fixed to 10-3mm. The management of confusions ("Do two objects have the same geometry?") is a direct consequence of the resolution: if the distance between to geometric points is less than the resolution, the two points are considered to be geometrically at the same location. In V4, tolerances are driven by the Model dimension. The most appropriate value to fit V5 resolution is 10000mm. Note that this is also the V4 default value.

Declaring the Model Unit when saving Version 5 CATPart documents as CATIA Version 4 models:

You can apply a scale factor between the imported file and what you want to get from the original Model. You can choose a V4 Unit in this list:

Conversion V4/V5
Characters Equivalence Table Path: The Characters Equivalence Table allows to convert special characters contained in CATIA V4 documents during the V4->V5 Migration. The table file is a .txt document. By default, the conversion table will be applied to special characters: ASCII Code of the Original Character
0x22 0x2a 0x2f 0x3a 0x3c 0x3e 0x3f 0x5c 0x7c

Character to be Replaced
" * / : < > ? \ |

New Character String

_Inch x _ _ _ _ _ _ _

For instance, the double-quotes (0x22 in ASCII code) will be replaced by "_Inch". If you want to display it on Windows, the address to be specified should look something like this: home/path/table.txt. Selecting the Migration of SPACE / DRAW data in Batch Mode: According to its content, a model is migrated into several documents : a CATPart and / or a CATProduct and / or a CATDrawing. It is possible to separate the treatment of SPACE data and DRAW data. In the Batch window, there is an Options button giving you access to this Tools-Options panel and you can choose between Space And Draw, Space, and Draw. When a model contains DRAW data, they are migrated as a unique document : a CATDrawing. Some entities undergo a few changes during the V4 to V5 conversion: V4 DRAFT -> V5 Sheet V4 Detail -> V5 Detail Sheet V4 Views -> V5 Views In the Batch Mode, all Draw and Detail workspaces are migrated in CATIA V5. On the contrary, if you Copy / Paste a Draft or a View interactively, only referenced Details are migrated. Batch Migration of SPACE data : In V5R6, the "V4 Part" definition is the Geometric Set : the subsets will be migrated into a V5 CATPart document. We will offer several part definitions in the future releases. Every Geometric Set contained in a model generates a CATPart (only Dittos are managed separately). Every Workspace containing several Dittos or Set instances is converted as a CATProduct. Under this CATProduct, there are as many components as Dittos (Part or Product instances) and Sets (Part instances only). The impacts of the V4 to V5 conversion on the entities: V4 Set -> V5 Part V4 Detail -> V5 Part or Product

V4 Model -> V5 Part or Product and/or CATDrawing V4 Ditto -> V5 Product component Selecting the format of Migration in Batch Mode : AS SPEC or AS RESULT By default, the format of this migration is AS SPEC, but the user can select the AS RESULT option. With the AS SPEC format, you can get the model's specifications in a first place and the geometry in a second place (after updating the document). Then you can modify the elements you have converted into CATIA V5. The AS RESULT format allows you to migrate the V4 elements that cannot be converted AS SPEC. And this operation is more efficient in terms of performance. Click OK to confirm.

V4 / V5 DRAW
You can customize given options when using interoperability from version 4 to version 5. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click Compatibility in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Drafting V4 tab.

Geometry import When importing geometry, you can decide that you do or do not create centers and end points. Dimension conversion mode When converting dimensions, the resulting dimensions can or cannot be edited (modified). Explode ditto mode When importing a ditto (or component), this ditto is automatically exploded. As result each element in that ditto can be modified separately. 4. Click OK to confirm the operation.

V4->V5 Space
You can customize given options when using interoperability from CATIA version 4 to CATIA version 5. You can choose different parameters for pasted Surfaces/Curves Continuity and Segmentation. In order to optimize Continuity, this panel offers you 3 settings allowing you to control the deformation of V4 Geometry in CATIA V5: Gap Healing Curvature Improvement (Maximum Deformation) Surface and Curve Sub-elements (Segmentation)

And 3 examples for practice: How to use Gap Healing How to use Curvature Improvement How to keep Segmentation

CATIA V5 requires its geometry to be C2-continuous. When non C2-continuous geometry must be imported from CATIA V4 to V5, this geometry (Curves, Surfaces) is first optimized and then broken down into a set of contiguous geometries (Faces, Edges), each of them being C2-continuous. This panel allows you to optimize and control the quality of the geometry and to obtain C2 Continuity (deformation is possible).

Open the .model of your choice. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click Compatibility in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the V4/V5 SPACE tab.

You can customize V4->V5 SPACE settings:

1. Gap Healing Gap Healing has an impact on External Control Points and not on Inner Control Points. External Control Points are modified according to the following options. In this category you have the choice between two options:

Model relative value (corresponding to the Identical Curves Value defined by the model) External Control Points are modified according to the model's value or tolerance. User defined value (External Control Point Maximum Deformation) Here is a schema to explain the position of the External Control Points, before activating this option:

and the displacement of the External Control Points after activating this option:

When this option is activated, it allows you to fill in the gaps between two arcs/patches, and therefore to optimize the geometry. Both patches are joined because the External Control Points have merged. There is however a deformation tolerance and this process can give the Surfaces a C0 Continuity. The examples in How to use Gap Healing will help you to understand the results.

2. Curvature Improvement (Maximum Deformation) For a Surface/Curve, the number of generated V5 Faces/Edges varies according to another parameter: the maximum value allowed for Control Point deformation. Curvature Improvement has an impact on Inner Control Points. Inner Control Points are modified (displaced) according to the value defined by the following options. If you select the Inner Control Point Maximum Deformation option, the Curvature Improvement value can be modified.

Use the default value (corresponding to the Projection Point tolerance defined by the model) If you choose this option, the value which is taken into account is the maximum value between the V5 resolution value (10-3) and the Projection Point tolerance value (10-3 for instance, in V4) for a model dimension of 10 000m. For a model dimension of 10m, the standard value of the Curvature Improvement is 0.001mm (corresponding to the V4 model's value). In CATIA V4, the geometric standards are listed in the following dialog box:

In order to understand the Curvature Improvement results, please refer to the paragraph entitled How to use Curvature Improvement. Inner Control Point Maximum Deformation (User Value)

If the Inner Control Point Maximum Deformation value is equal to 0, the geometry is broken and an edge is created for each patch limit. To decrease the number of cells/patches in the geometry, you need to select this option (default value) and to increase the tolerance/curvature improvement. The unit is the

millimeter (V4 model unit in general). 3. Surface and Curve Sub-elements (Segmentation) When V4 Surfaces/Curves are migrated into CATIA V5, some Faces/Edges are created in V5. In order to keep a C2 continuity with the geometric objects, Surface and Curve sub-elements may be deformed and cut into several pieces (where they are not C2).

Keep Segmentation By default, the Keep Segmentation option is not selected, the simplification of the geometry is active. If you want to reduce the geometry data size, select this option. If you want to keep the same number of sub-elements, deselect this check-box. For instance, two arcs and two surfaces with a C2 Continuity can be transformed into a single patch or arc in order to simplify the geometry. But if you keep the patch segmentation, these arcs and surfaces are not simplified. You can find an example in the section entitled How to Keep Segmentation.

How to use Gap Healing

Open SURFACE_NON_C0_WITH_CURVE.model.

In all these examples, the option Keep Segmentation is not activated.

Example 1: 1. Select the following settings:

2. Copy / Paste the .model document into a CATPart and you obtain:

3. Update the CATPart:

External Control Points are modified according to the model's value or tolerance.

Example 2: 1. Select the following settings:

2. Copy / Paste the .model document into a CATPart and press the Update button.

The number of cells is reduced because there is an optimization of the geometry.

Example 3: 1. Select the following settings:

2. Copy / Paste the .model document into a CATPart and press the Update button.

The patches are joined because the External Control Points have merged.

How to use Curvature Improvement

Open SURFACE_CURVATURE.model Enter the parameters in the Curvature Improvement (Maximum Deformation) area, according to the maximum value allowed for deformation. In all these examples, the option Keep Segmentation is not activated. If the Curvature Improvement value is positive or equal to 0, the value appearing in the V4/V5 SPACE panel is recommended as Maximum Deformation. These examples reveal the influence of Curvature Improvement variations.

Example1: 1. Select the following settings:

2. Copy / Paste the .model document into a CATPart and press the Update button.

Example2: 1. Select the following settings:

2. Copy / Paste the .model document into a CATPart and press the Update button.

Example3: 1. Select the following settings:

2. Copy / Paste the .model document into a CATPart and press the Update button.

The higher the Curvature Improvement value is, the fewer Faces there are. Tolerance is more important when Curvature Improvement is high, which means that a slight variation is allowed between the original document and the new one.

How to Keep Segmentation

Open SURFACE_C2_WITH_3_PATCHES.model and copy / paste it into a V5 CATPart and update the V5 CATPart.

Here are two examples illustrating the behavior of this setting:

1. When the Keep Segmentation option is not activated and the Curvature Improvement (Maximum Deformation) is 0.1mm, go into the FreeStyle Shaper workbench and copy/paste *SUR5 into a new Part. Select Surface.1 (*SUR5) and click the Geometric Information icon . The Geometric Analysis dialog box appears:

Geometry Analysis delivers the following information: Number of components U: 1 Number of components V: 1 -> only one component because you do not have selected the Keep Segmentation option. The default value of this option is taken into account and the Surface has been simplified. Without selecting the Keep Segmentation option, the nodes are removed and geometry is simplified within the tolerance. 2. When the Keep Segmentation option is activated and the Curvature Improvement (Maximum Deformation) is 0.1mm, go into the FreeStyle Shaper workbench and copy/paste *SUR5 into a new Part. Select Surface.1 (*SUR5) and click the Geometric Information icon . The Geometric Analysis dialog box appears:

Number of components U: 1 Number of components V: 3 -> 3 components because you have selected the Keep Segmentation option and it forces the numbers and boundaries of the arcs and patches to be kept.

V4->V5 SPEC
You can customize given options when using interoperability from version 4 to version 5. Open the .model of your choice. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click Compatibility in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the V4/V5 SPEC tab.

Use of Step-by-step Update and Reroute: Step-by-step Update: If you select this option, you do not need to update your document after the copy/paste of a .model into a CATPart or a CATProduct. The update operation is automatic and you no . longer need to press the update button: Automatic Reroute: it is a means to use the geometry in order to recover the Edges and Faces. This functionality is applicable only with updated EXACT or SMART Solids. In interactive mode, this option is deselected by default. In batch mode, this check-box is selected by default. What is the reroute mechanism? When a contextual primitive (a Fillet, a Chamfrain, a Support or a Feature Draft) is unsolved in V5, the Modeler (in Part Design) is able to visualize the former geometric shape and the Fillet's Specifications.

Setting the DELMIA/Deneb Compatibility Tab

The following procedure describes how to set the DELMIA/Deneb Compatibility tab. Setting this tab enables your V5 system to use D5 data created with DELMIA (formerly Deneb Robotics) software. 1. Select Tools->Options. By default, the General option is highlighted. 2. If the gray ball next to General (in the left bar) has a plus (+) sign next to it, and does not show its three sub-options, click on the ball to expand the tree. The compatibility option appears, as shown in the figure below.

3. Select the "DELMIA/Deneb Compatibility" tab.

4. Enter the full path name of the project library in the PATH block. 5. Click the Register button to register this path in the root library list. Several project libraries can be entered in the root library list. If more than one library is currently in the list, select the one which you would like to be the current project and click the Set Current button. This will place the selected library at the top of the root library list. 6. Press the OK button. Whenever work is saved or imported, the system looks in the current project directory. The last project selected by the Set Current button remains the current project until it is changed again.

DXF Import/Export Format

As you import/export a CATDrawing from/into a DXF/DWG file, you may customize units, destination and/or format. 1. Select Tools -> Options... . 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Click the DXF tab.

Import with unit and/or scale factor

You can apply a scale factor between the imported file and what you want to get from the original Drawing. Imported file destination, either working view or background sheet.

Import Space Configuration:

This functionality allows you to choose which drawing space you want to import : Model Space or Paper Space or Both. Import line type mapping: A default mapping is available for imported lines, but you can use the Tools->Options->General->Compatibility->DXF menu to customize the mapping of imported line types.

Push the Line Type button. The Import Line Type Mapping dialog box is displayed.

A default mapping is proposed for each DXF/DWG line type. Use the Sort button of the DXF/DWG column to list the DXF/DWG line type names in alphabetical order, Use the Sort button of the CATIA V5 column to list the CATIA line type by number. To modify the mapping for a given DXF/DWG line type, select the name of this line type in its text field and select a new CATIA V5 line type from the corresponding combo box. To add a new DXF/DWG line type, push the New button. A line is added at the bottom of the list. The name proposed for the new line type is New_x. A default mapping is proposed for this new line type. Proceed as above to modify this mapping. To change the name of an existing line type, or of a newly created line type, select the text of the line type and enter the new name. To remove a line type from the list, select the name of the line type, erase it in the text field and click outside the text field. For better performances, do not hesitate to remove useless types from the mapping list.

DXF Dimensions Import Configuration:

CATIA dimension + Details: linear dimensions will be preserved, others will be transformed into details, Details: dimensions are turned into details, Exploded geometry: geometry is exploded, check this option to keep the graphical aspect (this mode increase performance when loading a model).

Export all sheets in distinct files: export either all sheets or only current sheet of a multi-sheet drawing.

You can export either all sheets or only current sheet of a multi-sheet drawing.

DXF/DRW export files format

Note that Version 5 supports DXF/DWG formats version 12, 13, 14 and Autocad2000. 4. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box.

Customizing External Format Import

This task explains how to customize the import settings. You imported a CAD Part through the Insert ->Existing Component command. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Expand the General category in the left-hand tree and select the Compatibility category. 3. Click the External Formats tab.

4. Modify the settings as desired. Visu Format Unit : This setting allows you to specify the number of millimeters per unit of the model. For instance, if you have a file in inch, you need to enter 25.4 in this field. This option is taken into account when you have the following formats: SLP, STL, OBJ, BYU and IFF.

Preferred Conversion Technology Indirect : use of CAD license. Direct : no use of CAD license. For ProE 20i and UG v15, both direct and indirect modes are used on NT.

For ProE 2000i and 2000i2, UG v16 and v17 and IDEAS, this is the indirect mode only.

For Solidworks, SolidEdge, Parasolid, ACIS, DXF 3D, Inventor and VDA-FS : use the direct mode on NT. Link Mode Visu : tesselated data. Exact Geo : recovery of CAD's exact geometry to generate US geometry (NCGM). After selecting this option, this message appears: "Please, restart session to take modifications into account". CATPart : link with a V5 CATPart and this CATPart can be modified if opened into CATIA V5.

Others Save Coorsys in cgr : store part coordinate systems in .cgr file. It is only supported in the indirect mode.

Associative Mode Associative Mode : Associative mode is disabled when cache is not activated and when the link mode is set to a CATPart. Output Path : When importing a part, a link is kept with the original part and stored into the directory of your choice. In non-associative mode, you can customize the Output File for generated data.

How associative mode works :

When an assembly file is converted to V5, the associated part files of the imported CAD assembly can be converted as well. Using associative mode places the individual CGR part files in cached memory, where they can be subsequently manipulated in V5. Whenever a CAD cached part file (from the original CAD assembly) is modified, it is re-converted so that the V5 geometry of the CAD part is always up to date. Non-associative mode is referred to when the "Associative" feature is disabled. IDEAS Tesselation Parameter : parameter of IDEAS chordal deviation.

ProEngineer Quilts Read : Quilts are supported in the .cgr files. Simplified Representation : only part simplified representation is supported. To set the name of the part simplified representation to use before the Assembly conversion, check this box and enter the name.

5. Click OK to confirm your operation.

Customizing IGES Settings

This task shows you how to customize IGES settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Select the General category, then the Compatibility category, then click the IGES tab.

In the EXPORT section you can choose from several options: The default Standard option and the BSpline option allow you to select which curve and surface types you want to be generated. If you leave the default Standard option selected the curve and surface types created in the Part are kept as is. If you select the BSpline option all curves and surfaces are converted into B-splines. The default Surface option and the Wireframe option allow you to select the Representation mode. If you select Surface solid decomposition will be identical in both the original model and the resulting file. Only the surfacic decomposition of the original model is stored. Wireframe is a new option in Version 5 and should be used if you want 3D visualization of solid edges to be identical in both the original model and the resulting file. Only the wireframe decomposition of the original model is stored. This may be useful in cases where curves are the only form of input accepted. You may wish to round digits up or down to 7, 8, 9 or 10 digits. If so, check the Round up/down real number option and use the Number of digits list provided. The option Show/NoShow allows you to save only shown entities.

If you are happy with the settings you have selected and do not want the Save as igs dialog box to appear the next time you save (for more information about "Exporting CATPart Data to an IGES File" refer to the CATIA - Data Exchange Interfaces User's Guide), check the Do not show dialog box option.

In the IMPORT section you have the possibility to join the surfaces of the model : If you want to join the surfaces of your IGES model into a shell. You can select the Join option in the Settings : Tools -> Options -> General -> Compatibility -> IGES -> Import : Join. If this option is active, the software will try to knit the surfaces from an importable file into a shell. If you select the option : join surfaces of each group. The software try to knit the surfaces of each group into one shell per group. This option is useful if you intend to work with IGES models which enclose separate parts, and recover separate shells into CATIA. You can select the tolerance which is used to join the surfaces of each group: If you know the tolerance of the system which has created the IGES file, you can use it. Otherwise, it is better to begin with a small tolerance.

To see the boundaries of the created shell, you can select : Tools -> Options -> General -> Display -> Visualization -> Colors : Surfaces' boundaries. For more information refer to Customizing Visualization Settings.

If you select the join option, while importing IGES files to CATIA, make sure that model is constituted of one part. In case you used to handle several parts in one single IGES Model, make sure that each part corresponds to an associativity instance (402). The import operation generates a report file (filename.rpt) and an error file (filename.err). These files are created in a location referenced by the USERPROFILE variable on NT and by the HOME variable on UNIX. The default location is the folder Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATReport on Windows NT (where "user" is your logon id) or the CATReport directory in your home directory on UNIX.

Controlling the Number of Generated Curves and Surfaces A new setting allows a better user control over the number of curves and surfaces that are created during the process of importing IGES data into CATIA:

CATIA V5 requires its geometry to be C2-continuous. When non C2-continuous geometry must be imported from a IGES file, this geometry (curves, surfaces) is broken down into a set of contiguous geometries, each of them being C2-continuous. This is what happens when the not "not optimized" option is chosen. However, this can produce in an increase of the size of the resulting data, because more curves/surfaces are created. In order to limit this drawback, two other modes are optionally offered. In those modes, the IGES interfaces tries to limit the splitting of curves and surfaces by slightly modifying their shape, so that they become C2-continuous while remaining very close to their original shape. In order to guarantee that the deformation is not excessive, a maximum deviation parameter is used. When in "automatic" mode, this maximum deviation is read into the IGES file itself, in the IGES parameter that documents the precision of points in the file. In this mode, the value read from the IGES file is then corrected so that it remains 10E-3. This guarantees an optimization that remains compatible with the precision for the data that was set by the emitting system. Last, if this strategy is not enough, the user can choose the "manual" mode, by which an arbitrary deviation value can be entered.

3. Click OK.

Export SmartBOM from CATIA Version 5

This task shows you how to export SmartBOM from CATIA Version 5. In Supply Chain environment or in Project management, the Bill of Material (BOM) is one of the most precious information shared between actors. Export of BOM Briefcase enables to share such data by means of nomad application (SmartBOM Editor from SmarTeam corporate). No specific installation is required to view and edit BOM. Install SmartBOM Product from the SmarTeam Corporate. 1. In order to set the environment data, select the Tools -> Options... command. The option dialog box appears with the category tree in the left-hand column. 2. In the General category of the options tree, select Compatibility and click the SmartBOM tab. The following dialog box appears. 3. Insert the User Name and e-mail address of you choice.

For the Export operation, 5. Check the Embed associated documents box to attach CATIA documents (geometry and specifications) in Briefcase. 6. Check the Export Active Briefcase box, if you want to export BOM as a nomad application (.exe). This will enable you to browse the "Install Path". Install path is a temporary directory where the nomad application is built before being sent.

For the Import operation, 7. Browse the temporary directory where imported package will be read. 8. Open a CATProduct document.

9. Save it as stbom file (or .exe file): select stbom or .exe as file format in the File/Save As dialog box.

This will generate the SmartBOM Briefcase (for instance: Landing_Gear_NewAssy.stbom) or SmartBOM Active Briefcase with your data (.exe file). You can then send this data by e-mail or publish it on your Web site.

10. Edit the stbom file in SmartBOM Editor: double-click the stbom file (or .exe file) to edit the BOM by using SmartBOM Product:

11. Save your changes by using SmartBOM Editor (File->Save as). 12. To import a new SmartBOM Briefcase in CATIA V5, select File->Open in CATIA V5 and choose the stbom format: the new BOM is imported with the attached CATIA documents.

Customizing STEP Settings

This task shows you how to customize STEP settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Select the General category, then the Compatibility category, then click the STEP tab.

Export : Application Protocol (AP) When you Save a document AS STEP, this option panel appears and you have the choice of the Export Mode: AP203 AP214 The data contained in a CATPart or CATProduct document will be saved in STEP AP203 or AP214 formats. For more information about STEP AP203 and STEP AP214, refer to Exporting CATPart or CATProduct Data to a STEP AP203 / AP214 File in CATIA - Data Exchange Interfaces User's Guide.

Export : Assemblies This option allows you to select the export mode. The External References functionality is available only with AP214. External References have an impact on Parts only, that is to say on Assembly sheets. A STEP file cannot refer to a STEP assembly file.

Structure and Geometry in one file: one STEP file only containing the structure and geometry of the components. This is the option by default. External References: The STEP file names, for each component, have the same name as the CATPart's. Structure only: a STEP file containing structure and entities PRODUCT_DEFINITION_WITH_ASSOCIATED_DOCUMENT which have a link with CATPart files. This summary table shows you all the possible combinations within the first two frames, Export : Application Protocol and Export : Assemblies. With the ST1 or SI1 license or both: Frame Export AP --------Frame Export Assemblies Structure and Geometry in one file (3) External References (4) Structure only (5) 203 (1) YES NO (inactive button) YES 214 (2) YES YES YES

(1) = reference of the Application Protocol Config Control Design (AP203) (2) = reference of the Application Protocol Core Data for Automotive Machanical Design Processes (AP214) (3) = Export of the Structure and Geometry of a CATProduct into one file only (4) = Export of the Structure and Geometry of a CATProduct into different files (5) = Export of the Structure only of a CAProduct If you have no license, you can choose either AP203 or AP214, but the following buttons remain inactive: Structure and Geometry in one file External References

Export : Units mm (millimeter) Inch The purpose is to export a CATPart or a CATProduct in STEP format and in Inch or millimeter independently of the CATIA Session unit, by selecting either mm or Inch.

Controlling the Number of Generated Curves and Surfaces

A new setting allows a better user control over the number of curves and surfaces that are created during the process of importing STEP data into CATIA:

CATIA V5 requires its geometry to be C2-continuous. When non C2-continuous geometry must be imported from a STEP file, this geometry (curves, surfaces) is broken down into a set of contiguous geometries, each of them being C2-continuous. This is what happens when the not "not optimized" option is chosen. However, this can produce an increase of the size of the resulting data, because more curves/surfaces are created. In order to limit this drawback, two other modes are optionally offered. In those modes, the STEP interfaces tries to limit the splitting of curves and surfaces by modifying their shape slightly, so that they become C2-continuous while remaining very close to their original shape. In order to guarantee that the deformation is not excessive, a maximum deviation parameter is used. When in "automatic" mode, this maximum deviation is read into the STEP file itself, in the STEP parameter that documents the precision of points in the file. In this mode, the value read from the STEP file is then corrected so that it remains comprised between 10E-2 and 10E-3. This guarantees an optimization that remains compatible with the precision for the data that was set by the emitting system. Last, if this strategy is not enough, the user can choose the "manual" mode, in which an arbitrary deviation value can be entered. 3. Click OK.

Customizing VRML Settings

This task explains how to customize the VRML settings when saving a document in VRML format. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the left-hand tree, select the General category then the Compatibility sub-category. 3. Click the VRML tab:

4. Modify the settings as needed: Import Unit From the pulldown list, select the desired unit for the VRML file to be imported: Meter, Millimeter or Centimeter. Export Version You are now able to choose between the VRML 1.0 and the VRML 97 format. To do so, simply check the corresponding radio button. Note: when saving sections in VRML 97 format, make sure that the Save edges export option is checked. Export Options This option is relevant for VRML 97 format only and lets you save normals and/or edges contained in your model when converting it into VRML format. Bear in mind that saving edges increases the file size significantly. 5. Click OK to validate your settings.

Parameters and Measure

Knowledge Parameter Tolerance Symbols Units Measure Tools

Customizing Knowledgeware applications

This task explains how to specify the options you may need to check when working with knowledgeware applications. Most options are related to parameters and formulas. Refer to Using Knowlegeware Capabilities for more information. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Select General->Parameters and click the Knowledge tab. This is what you can see onscreen:

Parameter Tree View Field Check Tools->Options...->General->Parameters->Knowledge-> Parameter Tree View->With value to display the parameter values in the specification tree.

Check the Tools->Options...->General->Parameters->Knowledge ->Parameter Tree View->With formula to display the formulas constraining the parameter in the specification tree. Parameter names Field Check the Tools->Options...->General->Parameters->Knowledge->Parameter Names->Surrounded by the symbol' option if you work with non-Latin characters. If this option is unchecked, parameter names should have to be renamed in Latin characters when used in formulas. Language Field This field is to be used when using measures in relations or user functions. Measures are specific functions to be used in formulas and rules. The Knowledge Advisor User's Guide provides you with tasks explaining how to use measures. For how to create and use user functions, see the CATIA Application Architecture documentation. Check Tools->Options...->General->Parameters->Knowledge-> Load extended language libraries and select the packages you want to load under Packages to load if you want to load a limited number of packages. This option is particularly useful for the administrator to limit the number of packages used by the user. It is also very useful to improve performances since only the required libraries are loaded. Check Tools->Options...->General->Parameters->Knowledge ->Load extended language libraries and select All packages to load all the packages displayed under Packages to load.

The packages loaded in the Language field are the only packages that will be displayed in the Knowledge Advisor Formulas Editor and in the Knowledge Expert Browser. To display all the libraries in the Formulas Editor and in the Knowledge Expert Browser, check Tools->Options...->General->Parameters->Knowledge->Load extended language libraries and select All packages.

Parameter Tolerance
The Parameter Tolerance tab allows you to specify the default tolerance of Angle and Length type parameters. Angle and Length type parameters can be assigned a tolerance. To do this, edit the parameter, right-click the value field then select the 'Add Tolerance...' command from the contextual menu. The default values which are displayed in the tolerance dialog box are those you have specified in the Parameter Tolerance tab. Using the tolerances specified in the figure opposite: If you create a Length type parameter then assign a tolerance to it, the default values displayed in the tolerance edition box will be 1 mm and 0 mm. If you create an Angle type parameter then assign a tolerance to it, the default values displayed in the tolerance edition box will be 1 deg and 0 deg. If you uncheck the 'Default Tolerance' box, all value fields are grayed out and you can't specify any default values.

Customizing Constraint Appearance

This task shows you how to customize the display and style of the constraints defined in your document. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Click General category, then the Parameters category, then click the tab Symbols. This tab lets you customize: Constraint Style Dimension Style Display at Creation Note that a Preview glyph displays your preferences as you are specifying them.

Constraint Style 3. To set the colors where appropriate, click the arrow of the constraint type combo box. A list appears containing the current color and the colors available by default. You can define a personal color too. See CATIA for more information. 4. Choose any of these colors.

5. To choose between the constraints you wish to see or not in the geometry area, click the Filter button. The Constraint Filter dialog box contains filter options available for all the constraints that can be defined for the geometry.

The Filter frame contains three options: Show all: shows all the constraints Hide all: hides all the constraints Conditional Filter: once activated, it makes the options of the Status Filter frame available. You can then decide whether you wish to display the constraint status or not, or display unverified or verified constraints. It also makes the Filter by Type options available. You can then decide the constraint types you wish to display by checking the appropriate options. The Filter by Type option now lets you filter out driving or driven constraints. The Product frame contains the Show on active product option. If activated, this option displays the constraints defined on the active product. This option is specific to Assembly Design workbench. 6. Uncheck the constraints you do not wish to display and click OK to confirm.

Dimension Style 7. Set the Scale option to Large. This defines the size of the symbols for tangency and parallelism constraints. You can set: Small Medium Large

8. Check Displays iconified constraint elements. This option increases the number of graphic symbols you can see in the geometry area. For example, you can see symmetry axes. 9. Check Highlight pointed elements to make sure the application highlights the constrained elements when their constraints are pointed to. 10. Enter a value to define the gap between construction lines and geometric elements. For example, enter 4mm.

The default gap is 2mm. The glyph previews the new gap.

11. Enter a value to define the overrun between construction lines and geometric elements. For example, enter 9mm.

The glyph previews the new overrun.

Display at Creation

12. The Display mode option lets you choose between four options: - 'Value': only the constraint (or parameter) value is displayed.

- 'Name': only the constraint (or parameter) name is displayed.

- 'Name + Value': the constraint (or parameter) name and value are both displayed.

- 'Name + Value (formula)': the constraint (or parameter) name and value are displayed as well as the possible formula defined for this constraint.

Whatever mode you choose, it applies to all constraints you are creating. However, you can edit each constraint individually by using the contextual commands available (xxxobject -> Value Display or Name Display or Name/Value Display). 12. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the Options dialog box.

Customizing Units
This task explains how to customize units. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General category, click the Parameters sub-category, then the Unit tab. You can define or redefine: the default unit and the display of values for magnitude type parameters. In the upper part of the dialog box, the default unit along with its symbol is displayed for each magnitude:

3. In the lower part of the dialog box, the 'Dimension Display' check boxes allow you to define: whether you want to display trailing zeros the upper and lower limits for using an exponential notation how many decimal places to display . 4. If you want to redefine a default unit: 1. Select the line with the magnitude whose unit is to be redefined. The list of available units for this magnitude is displayed right below the magnitude list (the magnitude name is grayed out). For example, if you want to redefine the Length unit, the list of available units is:

5. 6. 7.

8.

2. select the unit you want to define as new default unit in the selection list (in the example above, the Inch has been selected). The magnitude definition is updated in the magnitude list right above. If you want to display trailing zeros, check the 'Display Trailing Zeros' box. Example: a 10 mm value will be converted in 10.000 mm if the number of decimal places is set to 3. If you want to redefine the decimal places, check the appropriate options. Example: a 10.571 mm will be converted to 10.57 mm if the number of decimal places is set to 2. If you want to define the exponential notation limits, enter the value under and below which you want to display a magnitude type parameter in an exponential form. Example1: 105700 mm will be displayed as 1.06e+005mm if the upper limit for an exponential notation is set to 5. Example2: 0.000057 mm will be displayed as 5.70e-005mm if the lower limit for an exponential notation is set to 4. Click OK to confirm your choice.

The new settings will apply immediately both to documents already loaded and to those subsequently loaded.The default values for length, mass and time are millimeters, kilos and seconds.

Measure Tools
This task explains how to customize measure updates and tilde display for the Measure Between and Measure Item commands. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click General -> Parameters and Measure in the left-hand box. 3. Click the Measure Tools tab.

The Measure Tools tab lets you customize Measure Between and Measure item command settings. Update: Automatic update in part context: when checked, measures made on parts are automatically updated if you edit the part. Note: This option requires that the automatic update of parts option is also checked (Tools -> Options, Mechanical Design -> Part Design -> General tab). Tilde Display Display ~ for approximate measurement: sets the default display of the tilde (~) in dialog boxes and the geometry area to visually identify approximate measures. 4. Click OK in the dialog box when done

Devices and Virtual Reality

Calibration Devices

Calibration
This task explains how to define 3D picking settings. The DMU Immersive Review license is required to display this tab. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General category, select the Devices and Virtual Reality sub-category: 3. Click the Calibration tab:

4. In the 3D Picking Calibration area, select the mode used for 3D picking by clicking the corresponding radio button, Automatic or Manual: Automatic 1. Position the tracker at the middle bottom of the screen, pointing up 2. Indicate the screen Width and Height in the Screen Dimensions area. Manual 1. Measure the distance (in millimeters) between the tracker and the screen corners in order to enter the corresponding coordinates in the Upper Left, Upper Right and Lower Right fields 2. Indicate the screen Width and Height in the Screen Dimensions area. 5. Use the Drivers event assignment area to assign a specific VR event for either head tracking or hand tracking. Just click the button next to the edit box to display a list of currently available events. Note: Version 5 device drivers should be up and running before using this functionality.

Customizing Device Settings

This task explains how to set up peripheral devices. The peripheral devices concerned are primarily: the joystick the spaceball/space mouse. The joystick is supported on: Windows 98 (for the DMU P1 product range only) the P2 product range. The spaceball and space mouse are supported on all P2 products on all supported platforms.

After installing Version 5, you must connect your peripheral devices and install the appropriate drivers.

1. Select the Tools->Options... command.

2. In the General category, select the Devices and Virtual Reality sub-category. 3. Click the Devices tab:

The Devices tab lets you customize:

Stereo Enables or disables stereoscopic visualization of graphical data with a perception of realistic, three-dimensional images: On: enables stereoscopic vision Off: disables stereoscopic vision. For more information, refer to "Stereoscopic Viewing".

Maximum frequency for event sending Maximum frequency (number of events per second) at which events are sent by peripheral devices. Use the default value (unless the peripheral device you are using has special requirements). A process filters the mass of events generated when using I/O devices and relays only the useful events to Version 5. The c:VR Monitor command toggles on a diagnostic panel (named VRMonitor) displaying any drivers declared to the broker as well as any events those drivers are able to send.

Virtual Reality Starting Mode Specifies how a process called the "device broker" is started: Automatic: use this setting if you are using the peripheral devices for which native support is provided by Version 5 (joystick, spaceball/space mouse): the device broker is started automatically when you start a session since it is a threaded broker. Manual: use this setting if you are using peripheral devices for which native support is not provided by Version 5. In that case, you have to execute the broker since it is non threaded. The process name on Windows is "CATDeviceBroker" and is referenced by the following line: CATDeviceBroker in the file: %windir%\system32\drivers\etc\services The process name on UNIX is "CATDeviceBroker" and is referenced by the following line: CATDeviceBroker in the file: /etc/services By default, these services are initialized during the installation, and the appropriate files are modified, when you set up communications ports. However, if you decide not to do so during the installation, you must edit the appropriate files manually at a later date. 6668/tcp 6668/tcp

Automatically Started Daemons This part of the tab lists the peripheral devices for which native support is provided by Version 5. Just activate the threaded drivers you need: Space Daemon: spaceball/space mouse. It is an automatic, i.e. threaded, driver which means that it can be managed by an automatic broker. This driver manages the orientation as well as button information. Function Keys SW_Joystick: joystick. Check the corresponding option to ensure that the peripheral device will be activated and recognized the next time you start a session. This setting requires the use of a peripheral broker. If you are using the peripheral devices for which native support is provided by Version 5 (joystick, spaceball/space mouse): the peripheral broker process is started automatically when you start a session. Otherwise, you must run it manually. VR Options Check the "Move compass with 3D devices" option to be able to move the compass using 3D devices, i.e. a Space Mouse ou a SpaceBall for instance when put into the 3D scene. 4. Click OK to confirm, or Reset... and OK again to reset default settings. 5. Exit your session, then restart for your new settings to take effect.

Performances
This task explains how to customize settings for undoing commands. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General category, select the Performances tab:

3. In the Stack size field, indicate the number of commands (up to 10) which can be undone for each document. 4. Click OK to validate.

Infrastructure
Product Structure Material Library Catalog Editor Rendering

Product Structure
Cache Management Enovia/VPM Node Customization Product Structure

Customizing Cache Settings

Working with a Cache System Two different modes are available when a component (V4 model, V5 CATPart, V5 CATProduct, etc.) is inserted into a DMU Navigator CATProduct document: Design mode: in this mode, the exact geometry is available and the document is inserted as is. Visualization mode: in this mode, a representation of the geometry only is available and the corresponding cgr file, if it exists, is inserted from the cache system. Using a cache system considerably reduces the time required to load your data. The cache system is organized into two parts: Local cache: a read/write directory located locally on your machine and used to store cgr files. The first time a component is inserted, it is tessellated. This means that the corresponding cgr file is computed and saved in the local cache as well as displayed in the document window. The next time this component is required, the cgr file which already exists (and not the original document) is automatically loaded from the local cache. The user is normally responsible for the local cache. Released cache: a read-only cache which is not necessarily located locally on your machine. Several directories can be defined for the released cache. If the cgr file cannot be found in the local cache, the DMU Navigator browses released directories in the order listed to check whether it is located in one of them. If it is still not found, the component is tessellated and saved in the local cache. The site administrator is normally responsible for the released cache. Reading Components from a Database: The cache system works in exactly the same way when components inserted into a CATProduct document come from a database. An additional check is run: if the cgr file is not found in the local or released caches, the DMU Navigator requests that, if the cgr file exists in the database, it be downloaded. The cache system is managed via the Cache Management tab in the Options dialog box. All cache options can be locked. This task explains how to customize data cache settings

A DMU Navigator document 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears 2. Click Product in the left-hand box 3. Click the Cache Management tab

4. Turn the cache activation mode on or off: By default, the activation mode is set to off. 5. (Optional) Enter the paths identifying the cache locations: Browse buttons let you locate the file you want. The user can enter the path to his own local cache location, and if permitted by the site administrator, one or more paths to released cache locations. The default directory is the user's home directory under UNIX and the USERPROFILE directory under Windows. 6. (Optional) Set the maximum size for the local cache (in write mode). The default size is 10 MB. 7. (Optional) Set the Check timestamp option: The timestamp option serves to check whether or not the tessellated cgr file is

up-to-date. If clicked, the system checks the original document's date against that of the corresponding cgr file, and if older, tessellates the document again overwriting the out-of-date version. If dates are the same, no tessellation is done and the cgr file in the data cache is loaded. Turning this option off means that no check is run and cgr files in the cache are systematically loaded. 8. Released Accuracy The default value for released accuracy is 20mm This value can also be defined by the administrator. How does the administrator define the release accuracy value? he sets a precise and required value in the release Accuracy field. then runs CATDMUUtility batch process without defining - vox option, the release accuracy value is taken into account. The data is pre-tessellated. 9. Note that you need to exit and restart to see the effects of customization, so click OK to confirm.

Customizing CATIA/ENOVIAVPM Interoperability Settings

This task shows you how to customize ENOVIAVPM settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. When it appears, select the Infrastructure->Product Structure category in the tree on the left. 2. Click on the ENOVIAvpm tab. The following dialog box appears:

As you can see, the Options dialog box is divided into four parts: CDM Interoperability Administration PSN Display Options Customize Session Building V4 CDM Cache Management CDMA Interoperability Administration There are three pushbuttons in this part: Selecting the Database Administration button lets you define the parameters for connection to the CDMA databases you wish to use (see "Connecting an ORACLE or DB2 Database to Your CATIA Version 5 Environment" in the ENOVIAVPM User's Guide). Checking the Database Server Dictionary box lets you define a CDMA dictionary associated with a server. Checking the ENOVIAvpm/Product Structure Mapping box lets you map CDMA and assembly attributes (see "Mapping CDMA and Assembly Attributes" in the ENOVIAVPM User's Guide). PSN Display Options There is one checkbox in this part:

Checking the Automatic Highlight in PSN box sets the automatic highlight for the identification of models in a PSN graph from a Version 5 session and vice-versa. This means that whenever you select one or more models in a PSN graph they are automatically highlighted in the Version 5 session. When selected in a Version 5 session, they are automatically highlighted in the corresponding PSN graph. If you do decide to use this option you should be aware that performance will be adversely affected. Customize Session Building There are two checkboxes in this part: Checking the Load all EnoviaVPM properties box means that when a session is built all the properties visualized in VPM that have not been mapped will be loaded as user properties. If you do decide to use this option you should be aware that performance will be adversely affected. Checking the Disable Applicative Object management box speeds up performance. If you do decide to use this option you should be aware that V5 applicative objects such as publications, constraints, etc. will neither be saved nor stored in the database. V4 CDM Cache Management There is one checkbox in this part: Checking the Work with the V4 CDM cache system box enables you to use the cache system and provide the location of the V4 local cache in the field CDM Cache path. You can also specify the access method in the field Access method.

Nodes Customization
This task shows you how to give a particular name, reference or description to a product or a component. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command and click the Nodes Customization tab. The following dialog box appears :

2. Check Customized Display. Then, you can select different options : Part number (#PN#), Revision (#RE#), Definition, Nomenclature, Source, Instance Name, Description. You can directly replace the diagram (PN, RE,...) between the two # by the term of your choice and it will appear in the Product Structure.

Customizing Product Structure Settings

This task explains how to customize Product Structure settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Select the Infrastructure category, then the Product Structure sub-category, then the Product Structure tab:

Defining the Default Part Number of the Component to be Imported Check Manual input if you wish to assign the name you wish to the component you insert into the assembly.

Ensuring Default Shapes are not Activated When Opened Check Do not activate default shapes on open if you want the product to appear when opened without any active representation. Selecting the Low Light Mode of the component that does not belong to the active level If you check the Low Light Mode option and select (double-click) a component in a CATProduct, it becomes UI Active (highlighted) in the Geometry Space:

The second example shows that the operation is also possible with Models. This is a visualization mode : the selected element remains highlighted and the other geometric components are in low light (gray-colored). If you double-click on another element, it immediately becomes highlighted and the other ones are grayed. Describing the model file in the Bill Of Material Select the Model In BOM option in order to have access the Models' information (path name for instance) in the document's BOM.

1. Open a CATIA document containing one or several models. 2. Select the Analyze -> Bill Of Material Menu and click the Listing Report tab.

3. Click on the Refresh button in order to access to the components' properties (path name for example):

These Models have been inserted into a CATProduct and you can now visualize the Models' path name. You can find the original directories in which the models were stored. When there is a broken link, you can read the following expression : "Unretrieved document". Reframe Mode after insert existing component Check the Reframe Mode options you need:

In the following examples, CRIC_FRAME.1 has been inserted into Product6 and a different Reframe Mode has been selected beforehand. The original CATProduct looks like this:

Global Reframe: this is the default value, Global Reframe zooms on the whole geometry and it allows you to see all the components. After the insertion of CRIC_FRAME.1 into Product6, the visualization of the geometry is re-adjusted in CATIA window so that all the components can be seen.

No Reframe: if you insert an element in the product, you may not see the totality of this element in the CATIA window. The visualization on the already existing component, CRIC_AXIS.1, does not change. There is no Reframe on the last inserted element.

Reframe on last inserted component: This zoom-in capability improves the visualization of the last inserted component. Therefore, in some cases, you cannot visualize the other CATIA objects because there is an automatic Reframe on the last inserted component.

Customizing the Specification Tree Check the display options you need: Automatic Expand to display the tree totally expanded Constraints to display the constraints and dimensions defined in the document Parameters to display the parameters defined using the Formula command Relations to display the relations defined using the Formula command. Note that the Constraints option is checked by default.

Material Library
This tasks explains how to define material general settings using the Tools -> Options... menu item. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click the Infrastructure category then select the Material Library subcategory to display the Material tab:

3. Activate the "Warning when adding new properties to a material".

4. Check the "Link mode is the default mode for applying materials" option to map the selected material as a linked object and thus, have it automatically updated to reflect any changes to the original material in the library. Note: the link mode is activated whichever method you use to apply the material: click Apply Material or use copy & paste or drag & drop capabilities. For more information, refer to "Applying Materials" in the CATIA - Real Time Rendering User`s Guide. 5. The "Force mode is the default inheritance mode" option lets you activate the force inheritance mode, i.e. force a material when applying it onto parts, products, bodies or surfaces in order to make it visible even if a father material propagates. For more information on inheritance modes, refer to Setting Priority between Part and Product in the CATIA - Real Time Rendering User`s Guide. 6. Use the "Desynchronize visualization when modifying material attributes" option to modify the material properties independently from the visualization and thus, to avoid visualization refresh which can take a long time when working on heavy models. 7. Enter the path to the user-defined catalog or use the icon to open the Material Directory Path dialog box which lets you browse your folders to the desired location. You no longer need to overwrite the default catalog (see "What You Should Know Before You Start" in the CATIA - Real Time Rendering User`s Guide) and to not have to exit the current session. Note, however, that the library must remain Catalog.CATMaterial. 8. When checked, the Material Parameter Creation option automatically creates a material parameter for any part or product you create or read, even if no material is mapped onto it. As a consequence, an automatic update may occur when opening a .CATProduct or .CATPart file. Checking the Material Parameter Creation option also means that the "Material=None" parameter will not appear in the specification tree.

If you use a SGI workstation, along with the ClearCoat product successfully installed, you can activate the ClearCoat Support option to be able to use its specific data. In this case, the system automatically looks for .cc360 extension files (if these files exist in the same directory) to replace the images used to define the material textures, i.e. tiff, rgb, and so on. For detailed information about ClearCoat 360, browse the following Internet site: http://www.sgi.com/software/clearcoat/ 9. The Environment Image area enables you to use your own environment instead of the default one provided. Simply enter the path to the user-defined environment or use the icon to open the File Selection dialog box which lets you browse your folders to the desired location. Or Click the Environment image generator Generator panel: icon to open the Environment Map

In the upper part of the dialog box, just click each environment wall (i.e. "Up", "Back", etc.) then navigate to the desired image using the File Selection panel. The resulting environment will be displayed on the environment map as shown below:

The Image Size pulldown list lets you choose a Small, Medium or Large size for your environment image. Once the image is generated, enter its name and path in the "Save as" field or icon to open the File Selection dialog box which lets you browse click the your folders to the desired location. Click OK to validate and go back to the Material tab. 10. Click OK. Once the warning option has been activated, whenever you wish to add properties to a material (by double-clicking on it and choosing the Analysis or Drafting tab for examples) a warning message is issued:

This to let you know that the material have been modified when you accessed the analysis or drafting properties.

Catalog Editor
This tasks explains how to define Catalog Editor settings using the Tools -> Options... menu item.

These settings are relevant for catalogs with design tables only.

1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click the Infrastructure category then select the Catalog Editor subcategory to display the Catalogs tab:

3. In the Storage Folder field, enter the path to the folder in which you will store your resolved parts along with their configurations. This avoids recalculating the part resolution whenever you wish to use a part in a configuration.

You can also click the icon to the right to open the Folder Chooser dialog box which lets you browse your folders to the desired location.

4. Use the "Create new reference for each instantiation" option to create a component reference from each instantiated reference part (just like the New from... command). In other words, each component instantiation will result in the generation of a .CATPart document saved in the Storage Folder you specified.

5. The "Allow family component dynamic resolution during instantiation" option lets you dynamically resolve components when instantiating them. 6. The "Instantiate only resolved family components" option lets you instantiate only resolved and stored components. Otherwise, an error message appears to warn you that the component cannot be resolved. 7. Click OK to validate.

Rendering
This task explains how to customize Rendering display and output settings as well as the sticker default image.

Rendering Display
1. Select the Tools->Options... command then in the Infrastructure category, click the Rendering sub-category. The Display tab appears:

Setting Light Display This area lets you control the display of inactive lights: check the "No display for inactive lights" option to turn off inactive light display check the "Full display for inactive lights" option to turn on inactive light display.

Setting Environment Display This area lets you to set the type of environment display: check the "No display for inactive environments" option to turn off inactive environment display check the "Simplified display for inactive environments" option to display inactive environments in a simplified way check the "Full display for inactive environments" option to turn on inactive environment display.

Note that dynamic reflections are no longer supported.

Rendering Output
1. Select the Tools->Options... command then in the Infrastructure category, click the Rendering subcategory. 2. Click the Output tab:

3. In the Image Size area, specify whether the image size is defined "From active viewpoint" or "Fixed". If you selected the "Fixed" option, you must then enter the image width and height in pixels. 4. In the Output area, indicate the output type, i.e. On screen or On disk. If you select the "On disk" option, you must then specify the new path and name of the image either by entering them directly in the field or by clicking the browse your folders to the desired location. icon to

5. In the Save area, check the "Increment name if file already exists". In case the file name you specify already exists, this option adds the suffix "_ number" to the name. The number will be automatically incremented as necessary, e.g. "CatiaRender_1.tif", "CatiaRender_2.tif", and so on.

Stickers
1. Select the Tools->Options... command then in the Infrastructure category, click the Rendering subcategory. 2. Click the Sticker tab:

3. The Default Image area lets you replace the default sticker image with your own image. icon to open the Simply enter the path to the user-defined image or use the File Selection dialog box which lets you browse your folders to the desired location. 4. Click OK to validate.

Mechanical Design
Part Design Assembly Design Sketcher Structure Design Drafting Functional Tolerancing and Annotation

Part Design
Display General Part Document

Customizing the Tree and Geometry Views

This task shows you how to control the display of the elements you create in the specification tree. It also shows you how to control the display of features in the geometry area. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category, then the Part Design subcategory, then the Display tab. The tab appears, containing two categories of options: Specification tree Geometry

Specification tree There are six options available for customizing the Specification tree display. External References Constraints Parameters (created using the Knowledge Advisor capability. If you wish to know what parameters and relations are, refer to the CATIA Knowledge Advisor Users Guide Version 5 Relations Bodies under operations (operations attaching bodies in different ways (Add, Assemble, Remove, Intersect, Union Trim). This option is available only with Part Design application. For more, refer to "Associating Bodies" in the CATIA Part Design Users Guide Version 5. Sketches (If the Sketches option is checked, the sketches are displayed in the specification tree during creation. If unchecked, sketches are present in the tree but you need to use the expand capability)

Geometry There is one option available for customizing the geometry display. The Only the current operated solid option is used when editing features belonging to attached bodies only. It lets you display only the features of the current body. This option is available only with Part Design application.

Customizing General Settings

This task shows you how to set general settings. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category, then the Part Design subcategory, then the General tab. The tab appears, containing three categories of options: External References Update Delete Operation

External References - Checking the Keep link with selected object option lets you maintain the links between external references, copied elements for example, and their origins when you are editing these elements. This option is used as you are editing parts included in assemblies. For more about designing parts in assembly context, refer to the CATIA Assembly Design Users Guide Version 5. If later you need to cut the link between external references and their origin, you just need to use the Isolate command. - Check Create external references in Show mode to define the visualization mode for the elements while they are being created. - Check Confirm when creating a link with selected object - Check Only use published elements for external selection if you want to make only published elements valid for selection.

Update - Check Manual: you wish to control your update operations. - Check Automatic: parts are updated automatically - Check Synchronize all external references for update to make sure that CATIA updates elements copied from other parts. Synchronizing assumes that all modifications to the other parts affect external references included in your part. If this option is deactivated, the application will update your part only.

Delete Operation - Check Display the Delete dialog box if you wish to access filters for deletion (see "Deleting Features" in the CATIA Part Design Users Guide Version 5). - Check Delete referenced sketches if you wish to delete sketches associated to features while you are deleting those features. Sketches will be deleted only if they are exclusive, which means that if they are shared by other features, they will not be deleted.

Customizing a CATPart document

This task shows you how to set general settings. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category, then the Part Document subcategory, then the General tab. The tab appears, containing one options: New part.

New Part Check Create an Axis System when creating a new part if you wish to create a three-axis system which origin point is defined by the intersection of the three default planes that is plane xy, plane yz, and plane zx. When the CATPart is open, the axis system is displayed both in the geometry and in the specification tree. For more information about the Axis System capability, refer to CATIA - Part Design User's Guide.

Note: data contained in the CGR format are saved within the CATPart format when you are saving your part in order to improve performance when working in Assembly Design workbench.

Assembly Design
General Constraints

Customizing Assembly Design Settings

This task will show you how to customize Assembly Design settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options.... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category, then the Assembly Design subcategory. The General tab appears, displaying the following options: Update

You can set an automatic or a manual update. The "Manual" option lets you decide when you need to update your design. It is the default mode. You can also update only the active level of the active component or all the levels of the active component. "All levels' allows you to update all the constraints defined on all the levels of the active component. Access to geometry

The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" ensures that the application will automatically launch the Design mode when using the following commands:
- Constraint (clicking on any constraint icon, the application

launches the Design mode, the cursor changes to an eye symbol, meaning that the Design mode is then active, you can then you set your constraint)
- Snap - Publication Management - Reuse Pattern - Define Multi-Instantiation - Manipulate - Translate - Rotate - Update

Move components

The option available controls the display of a warning message that appears when moving components. If you want to see a message indicating that you are moving components attached together, check the option "Display warning when moving a component involved in a Fix Together". The message will appear whenever you will apply the following commands to components fixed together : compass, snap and manipulate . , translation or rotation

Customizing Assembly Constraints

This task will show you how to customize Assembly Design constraints. 1. Select Tools -> Options.... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category, then the Assembly Design subcategory. 3. Click the Constraints tab. The following options are available: Paste Components

You can paste one or several components without the assembly constraints applying to them. You can paste one or several components with the assembly constraints applying to them, only after the Copy command. You can paste one or several components with the assembly constraints applying to them, only after the Cut command. You can paste one or several components always with the assembly constraints applying to them. Constraint Creation

These three options let you define the way of setting constraints: - Use any geometry: you can select any geometrical element - Use published geometry of child components only: you can select any published element belonging to child components - Use published geometry of any level: you can select any published element For more information about publication, refer to "Managing a Product Publication" in the CATIA Assembly Design Users Guide Version 5. Quick Constraint

The Quick Constraint command is based on a ordered list of constraints to be created by the application. The setting available here lets you reorder the list of constraints having priority when applying the Quick Constraint command to the selected geometrical elements. What you need to do is select the constraint type you wish to reorder and click the arrows to the right of the selection to reorder the selected constraint. Additionally, you can create verified constraints if the option Creation verified constraints first is on.

Sketcher
Customizing Sketcher Settings

Sketcher
The Sketcher options will help you sketch your profile with given options. For example, the grid will make it easier to sketch a profile requiring parallel lines. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Expand the Mechanical Design option, then click Sketcher. The Sketcher tab appears, containing the following sets of options: Grid Sketch Plane Geometry Constraints Colors

Setting a Grid To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the Primary spacing and Graduations fields. The Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid. The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid.

Click the Display box to display the grid in your session. You will note that this capability is also available in the Sketcher Options toolbar. Check the Snap to point option if your sketch needs to begin or end on the points of the grid. Once you have chosen all of your options, click OK to confirm the operations. These options are applied.

The Allow Distortions option allows applying different graduations and spacing between H and V.

Setting the Sketch Plane In the Sketch Plane frame, check the Shade sketch plane option. This lets you view the sketch plane in the Sketcher workbench. However, note that the grid must be displayed too to see the shaded plane.

The sketch plane is shaded in the Sketcher workbench.

Now, check Position sketch plane parallel to screen to make sure that each time you will enter the Sketcher workbench, the sketch plane will have the right position.

Customizing Geometry Creation When sketching circles or ellipses, you may prefer not to create their centers. Version 5 lets you decide what you really want to create. By default, the Create circle and ellipse centers option is on. Just uncheck it if you do not need to create centers when sketching.

Solving mode (switch button) When you want to move geometry, you can decide that you move either the minimum number of the elements, the maximum number of these elements, or still the minimum number by modifying the shape of these elements, if needed.

The Dragging of the elements category provides these options: Standard mode: you move the as many elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.

Minimum move: you move the as few elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.

Relaxation: method for solving element moving by minimizing energy cost. This implies that the new elements are newly distributed over the sketch, globally speaking.

Constraints You can create or not the geometrical or dimensional constraints detected by the SmartPick tool. If all of the detection options are unchecked, the Create detected constraints option is not available.

SmartPick (switch button) As you create more and more elements, SmartPick detects multiple directions and positions, and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to filter out undesired detections. This task shows how to do so:

The SmartPick category provides these options: Support lines and circles Alignment Parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency Horizontality and verticality Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect when sketching. Disabling SmartPick completely is particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, it may be a good idea to disable SmartPick to concentrate only on the geometry.

Colors Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors correspond to colors illustrating: Graphical properties Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the Tools->Options dialog box. OR Constraint diagnostics Colors that represent constraint diagnostics are colors that are imposed to elements whatever the graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in accordance with given diagnostics. As a result, as soon as the diagnostic is solved, the element is assigned the color as defined in the Tools->Options dialog box.

You can assign default colors to all the elements. If you click the Visualization of diagnostic switch button, the following dialog box appears:

Over-constrained elements: the dimensioning scheme is over-constrained: too many dimensions were applied to the geometry. Inconsistent elements: At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case when elements are under-constrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead to a solution. Not-changed elements: Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent. As a result, geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated. Iso-constrained elements: All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be moved from its geometrical support. If you click the Other color of the elements switch button, the following dialog box appears:

Isolated elements: use-edge that no more depend on the 3D. Protected elements: non-modifiable elements. Construction elements: A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch. This element is used as positioning reference. It is not used for creating solid primitives. SmartPick: colors used for SmartPick assistant elements and symbols.

Structure Design Settings

This first task shows you how to customize Structure Design settings. 1. 2. 3. Select Tools -> Options... from the menu bar. The Options dialog box appears. Click Mechanical Design -> Structure Design in the left-hand box. Click the Structure Design tab.

The Structure Design tab lets you customize default colors and materials, user types and enter paths to sample catalogs and the list of available sections.

Color and Material: Member color: select the default color for members in the box list. Plate color: select the default color for plates in the box list. Member material: select the default material for members in the box list. Plate material: select the default material for plates in the box list. User types: Add: enter the name of the member or plate type then click Add to add user types. Remove: select the member or plate type in the list then click Remove to remove user types. Catalog storage / Directory: identifies the path of the directory containing sample standard catalog sections supplied with the product: downloaddirectory/OS/startup/components/structuralcatalogs where OS is the operating system, for example intel_a (Windows NT). Section storage / Directory: identifies the full path of the directory containing the list of available sections, for example e:\Section. This directory contains resolved user-defined sections stored here directly as well as any standard or user-defined catalog sections selected via the Section icon or the Other section... option. It is recommended that an empty directory be identified. Click OK in the dialog box when done.

4.

Drafting
Dimension Creation General Settings Generation Geometry Layout Manipulators Annotation Customizing Company Standard Management

Dimension Creation
You can customize given options when creating or re-positioning dimensions. 1. Select the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design command. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Dimension tab.

Dimension Creation

Dimension following the mouse (ctrl toggles): you can decide that the dimension line is positioned according to the cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process. Constant offset between dimension line and geometry: the distance between the created dimension and the geometry remains the same when you move the geometry. Default dimension line/geometry distance: if you position the dimension according to the cursor, you can define the value at which the dimension is created. If you create associativity between the dimension and the geometry, you can define the value at which the dimension will remain positioned. End dimension creation at line-up: aligning a dimension to another automatically ends the command, you do not have to click in the free space. If you click the Associativity on 3D switch button the following dialog box appears:

A link can be applied between a dimension and the 3D part. As a result, when you update the drawing, the dimension is automatically re-computed. If you do not check this option, when you perform the update, you need to re-create the dimension afterwards. Create driving dimensions: the dimension you will create will drive the geometry. A new field appears in the toolbar during creation process, it allows you to enter the driving dimension value.

By default, dimension circles on their: the dimension you will create between a circle and another element will be either on the circle center or on the circle edge. Move

Activating Move only selected sub-part allows you to move only a dimension sub-part (text, line, etc.). You can activate the snapping option selecting Activate Snapping (shift toggles). The Configure switch button allows you to choose either the dimension to be snapped on the grid or/and the dimension value to be located at its default position between symbols (it will work only if the cursor is between the symbols).

Holding on the Shift key allows you to temporarily deactivate or activate this mode. Line-Up

You can organize dimensions into a system with a linear offset. The offset will align the dimensions to each others as well as the smallest dimension to the reference element. you can set the offset between the smallest dimension and the reference element (Default offset to reference). Default offset between dimensions allows you to set the offset between dimensions. You can align stacked and cumulated dimension values checking the corresponding options. Analysis Display Mode

Colors can be customized with the Activate analysis display mode option. If you activate this mode, it allows you to assign the desired color(s) to the desired dimension types by clicking the Types and colors switch button.

You will then be able to visualizing the colors assigned to the different types of dimensions.

General Settings
This task shows you how to set general settings to be used in the Interactive Drafting workbench.

1. Select the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design command. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the General tab.

Ruler Checking the Show Ruler option displays the ruler in your sheet. It means you visualize the cursor coordinates as you are drawing. Y

Grid To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the Primary fields. The Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid. The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid. The Display option allows displaying the grid in your session. You will note that this capability is also available via the Interactive Drafting Options toolbar. The Snap to point option needs be checked if the geometry needs to begin or end on the points of the grid. The Allow Distortions option allows applying different graduations and spacing between H and V.

Rotation The Rotation Snap Angle option allows snapping with a given angle for rotating elements. This option is used to rotate text elements (text, frame, or leader). In other words, it defines the snapping value used when rotating an element using the Select or Rotate commands. The Automatic Snapping option allows to automate this option.

Colors

You can customize given options for modifying the drawing background color. As shown below, you can customize the color type.

This is what you get if you do as detailed above:

You can modify the background colors at any time.

Tree You can display or not parameters and relations in the specification tree. View axis When you activate a view, you can choose to visualize the view axis. In addition, you can define whether these axes can be zoomed. You can define the view axis size with the Reference size option.

4. Once you have chosen all of your options, click OK to confirm the operations.

Geometry and Dimension Generation

You can customize given options for controlling geometry and dimension generation whenever you need to update sheets. 1. Select the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design-> Drafting command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Select the Generation tab.

Geometry generation / Dress up The following geometry is possibly generated (provided you check the desired options using the contextual menu, Properties option, View tab): Generate axes Generate center lines Generate (threads)

Generate fillet (boundary)

You can choose to visualize either the boundaries or the original edges.

Hidden lines 3D colors inheritance: the colors of a part can be automatically generated onto the views. Be careful: if the color of the part is white and the 3D colors inheritance option checked, the generated views will result white and therefore not necessarily properly visualized.

Project 3D wireframe Both the wireframe and the geometry can be visualized on generated views.

Project 3D points Check this option to project points from 3D (no construction element). Click configure to select the type of points visualized in the projected drawing:

you can keep symbol from 3D or choose a new appearance. Apply uncut specification In an assembly, you can define that given parts will or will not be sectioned into section views or breakout views (Generative Drafting workbench). For this, you select one view, then the Edit -> Properties command from the menu bar from the Assembly Design workbench (Mechanical tab, Drafting properties options) and either activate or de-activate the Not cut in section views options. linetype switch button If you click the linetype switch button, the Linetype for some views dialog box appears:

Select the line type you need and click Close. Dimension generation The generated dimensions are positioned according to the views most representative. In other words, a dimension will appear on a view so that this dimension needs not be also created on another view. The dimensions are generated on the views on the condition the settings were previously switched to the dimension generation option. If you check the Generate dimensions when updating the sheet option, this option makes the application automatically generate dimensions each time you update the sheet. 3. Click OK to confirm the operation.

Geometry Creation
You can customize given options when creating 2D geometry, either or not using autodetection (or SmartPick), or still adding constraints to this geometry. 1. Select the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design-> Drafting command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Select the Geometry tab.

Geometry You can decide that you want to create circle and ellipses centers and that you want to be able to drag elements, end points included. Constraints creation You can create or not the geometrical or dimensional constraints detected by the SmartPick tool. If all of the detection options are unchecked, the Create detected constraints option is not available.

SmartPick (switch button) As you create more and more elements, SmartPick detects multiple directions and positions, and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to filter out undesired detections. This task shows how to do so:

The SmartPick category provides these options: Support lines and circles Alignment Parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency Horizontality and verticality Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect when sketching. Disabling SmartPick completely is particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, it may be a good idea to disable SmartPick to concentrate only on the geometry. Constraints Visualization 1. Check the Visualize constraints option to visualize the logical constraints specific to the elements. 2. Modify the reference size, if needed. 3. Modify the constraints color using the combo, if needed. Note that if the Visualize constraints option is unchecked, the elements are not available. Constraints types (switch button) You can define which types of constraints you will visualize as you

create the geometry.

Colors

Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors correspond to colors illustrating: Graphical properties: Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the Tools->Options dialog box. OR Constraint diagnostics: Colors that represent constraint diagnostics are colors that are imposed to elements whatever the graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in accordance with given diagnostics. As a result, as soon as the diagnostic is solved, the element is assigned the color as defined in the Tools->Options dialog box. You can assign default colors to all the elements. If you click the Visualization of diagnostic switch button, the following dialog box appears:

Over-constrained elements: the dimensioning scheme is over-constrained: too many dimensions were applied to the geometry. Inconsistent elements: At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case when elements are under-constrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead to a solution. Not-changed elements: Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent. As a result, geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated. Iso-constrained elements: All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be moved from its geometrical support. If you click the Other color of the elements switch button, the following dialog box appears:

Isolated elements: use-edge that no more depend on the 3D. Protected elements: non-modifiable elements.

Construction elements: A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch. This element is used as positioning reference. It is not used for creating solid primitives. SmartPick: colors used for SmartPick assistant elements and symbols.

4. Click OK to confirm your operation and quit the dialog box.

View and Sheet Layout

You can customize given options when creating views or when adding sheets.

1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Layout tab, containing the following sets of options:

View creation When creating a view, you can define that you want or not the view name, scaling factor or frame to appear, and that you want broken and breakout specifications to be reproduced.

you can also decide if the auxiliary view will be oriented according to the profile. In this case, if the reference view has an orientation angle equal to 45, then auxiliary and section view you will create will have the same orientation angle. New sheet You can define that when creating a new sheet, you want the source sheet to be the first or one sheet from another drawing. Background view You can deny access to the background view locking it. You can specify the path to the directory containing frame and title block Section/Projection Callout You can choose the callout elements size not to be dependant on the view scale. For this before callout creation check this option.

Manipulators
You can decide that you will visualize given manipulators whenever creating or modifying dimensions. 1. Select the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design-> Drafting command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Select the Manipulators tab.

Manipulators The settings below can be used for any type of manipulators (texts, leaders, center lines, dimensions and so forth). You can make manipulators zoomable and, if needed, modify the size of the manipulators. The size of the manipulators is a reference size which corresponds, for example, in the case of texts, to the diameter of the rotation manipulators.

Dimension Manipulators You will define which manipulators you will visualize and therefore use when creating and/or modifying dimensions:

1. Modify overrun If you drag select one overrun manipulator, both overrun extension lines are modified. To modify only the selected overrun extension line, use the Ctrl key. You can also double-click on the manipulator and enter the new value in the dialog box that appears. 2. Modify blanking If you drag select one blanking manipulator, both blanking are modified. To modify only the selected blanking, use the Ctrl key. You can also double-click on the manipulator and enter the new value in the dialog box that appears. 3. Insert text before Allows inserting a text before, without using the Properties dialog box. For this, you will click on the manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears. 4. Insert text after

Allows inserting a text after, without using the Properties dialog box. For this, you will click on the manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears. 5. Move value Allows moving the dimension value and only it. 6. Move dimension line Allows moving the dimension line and only it by dragging to the new location. 7. Move dimension line secondary part Allows moving the dimension line secondary part and only it by dragging to the new location. 3. Click OK to confirm the operation.

Annotation
you can customize given options when creating annotations. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Annotation tab, containing the following sets of options:

Annotation Creation If you check one of the element in this option, the text or the leader (for Text with leader or Geometrical tolerance) will be snapped. Move You can activate the snapping option selecting Activate Snapping (shift toggles). The Configure switch button allows you to choose either the annotation to be snapped on the grid or according to the orientation, or both.

Customizing Company Standard Management

This task shows you how to edit the list of the parameters values which impact the representation of the texts and dimensions. 1. Enter install_root/reffiles/Drafting. 2. Enter one of the following files ISO.CatDrawStandard ANSI.CatDrawStandard JIS.CatDrawStandard

Functional Tolerancing and Annotation

Tolerancing Display Manipulators Dimension

Tolerancing
This task will show you how to customize Functional Tolerancing and Annotation tolerancing settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category. 3. Click the Functional Tolerancing and Annotation subcategory. 4. Click the Tolerancing tab The Tolerancing tab appears, displaying three categories of options: Tolerancing Standard

Define the default standard at creation provides: Three conventional standards ANSI(American National Standards Institute) ISO (International Organization for Standardization) JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) And three CATIA-CADAM standards: CCDANSI(CATIA-CADAM American National Standards Institute) CCDISO (CATIA-CADAM International Organization for Standardization) CCDJIS (CATIA-CADAM Japanese Industrial Standard)

Semantic Control

Define automatic upgrade of a non-semantic annotation during its creation to a semantic annotation. If it can be upgradable to a semantic annotation only. Define whether non-semantic tolerances creation is allowed or not. Define whether non- semantic dimensions creation is allowed or not. Leader associativity to the geometry

Define whether leader annotations are perpendicular to their geometrical elements or not. Rotation

Define an angle value for rotating elements. This option is used to rotate text elements (text, frame, or leader). Define whether the rotation will be snapped to the angle value or not. Note Object Attribute

Define whether note object attribute may be created by user or not. Enable or disable Note Object Attribute Creation icon.

Display
This task will show you how to customize Functional Tolerancing and Annotation tolerancing settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category. 3. Click the Functional Tolerancing and Annotation subcategory. 4. Click the Display tab The Display tab appears, displaying one category of options: Non-Semantic

Mark with a wavy red line, in the specification tree and the geometry, non-semantic annotations. View/Annotation Plane

Define whether the axis of the active view can be visible or not. Define whether the axis of the active view can be zoomed or not. Define whether the profile of the active view can be visible or not

Manipulators
This task will show you how to customize Functional Tolerancing and Annotation tolerancing settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category. 3. Click the Functional Tolerancing and Annotation subcategory. 4. Click the Manipulators tab The Manipulatorstab appears, displaying two categories of options: Manipulators

Define the size value to the manipulators. Define whether manipulators can be zoomed in or not. Dimension Manipulators

Define whether overrun extension lines can be modified or not during creation or modification. Define whether blanking can be modified or not during creation or modification. Define whether text can be inserted before or not during creation or modification. Define whether text can be inserted Define whether only the value can be moved or not during creation or modification. Define whether only the dimension line can be moved or not during creation or modification. Define whether only the dimension line secondary part can be moved or not during creation or modification.

Dimension
This task will show you how to customize Functional Tolerancing and Annotation tolerancing settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category. 3. Click the Functional Tolerancing and Annotation subcategory. 4. Click the Dimension tab The Dimension tab appears, displaying three categories of options: Dimension Creation

Define whether the dimension line is positioned according to the cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process or not. Define whether a dimension aligned to another automatically ends the command or not. Define whether the distance between the created dimension and the geometry remains the same when you move the geometry or not. Define the value at which the dimension is created from the geometry. If you create associativity between the dimension and the geometry, you can define the value at which the dimension will remain positioned.

Define the dimension you will create between a circle and another element will be either on the circle center or on the circle edge. Move

Define whether the dimension will be snapped on the grid and/or the dimension value will be located at its default position between symbols (it will work only if the cursor is between the symbols) or not. Define whether only a dimension sub-part (text, line, etc...) wil be moved or not.

Shape
General Display Free Style

Free Style Settings

This task explains how to customize settings for FreeStyle workbenches, namely FreeStyle Shaper, FreeStyle Optimizer and FreeStyle Profiler. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Select the Shape -> FreeStyle category in the tree to the left. The options for FreeStyle settings appear, organized in separate areas depending on the type of setting. Geometry Auto-detection Display Tuning 3. In the Geometry area, check:

Tolerances: to impose user-defined tolerances to every elements to be created and modified within a FreeStyle workbench. You can define: the constraint tolerance value used to define the continuity variation. In this case if the continuity is over the set value the element is not created/modified. In P1 mode, the constraint tolerance value is set and cannot be modified. the deviation tolerance value, used when converting elements using the Converter Wizard for example (see Approximating/Segmenting Procedural Curves and Approximating/Segmenting Procedural Surfaces in the FreeStyle Shaper, Optimizer and Profiler User's Guide). In this case you accept the conversion up to the set tolerance value.

Max order: to set the maximum allowed order along the U (and V) directions for each curve segment and surface patch. This maximum order value ranges from 5 to 16 included, in a given direction. In P1 mode, the Max order is set to 16 and cannot be modified. 4. In the Auto-Detection area, you can choose to display: the point coordinates as the pointer moves along the geometry by selecting the Coordinates checkbox the dressing mode by selecting the Search dressing checkbox. This option allows the display of control points on geometry detected with the pointer when using the Snap on Cpt (snap on control points) option from the Dashboard (see the Auto-Detection basic task from the FreeStyle Shaper, Optimizer, and Profiler User's

Guide).. 5. In the Display area, you set the information to be displayed on the geometry as you manipulate it, that is: the Control Points on the geometry the Continuities at every connection between elements (such as blend and match curves and surfaces, fill surfaces, and so forth) the Tension manipulators at every connection between connecting elements (such as blend and match curves and surfaces, and so forth) The Tension manipulators are available in P2 mode only.

the Curvature texts on an element (such as blend and match curves and surfaces, and so forth) the Contact Point at every connection between connected elements (such as blend and match curves and surfaces, and so forth) the Order number along the U (for curves) or U and V directions (for surfaces).

6. In the Tuning area, you set the values used when manipulating views or geometry (P2 only). See Editing Surfaces Using Control Points, and Manipulating Views in the FreeStyle Shaper, Optimizer and Profiler User's Guide for example. 7. Click OK to confirm setting these options. For further information on the Performance tab, refer to Customizing Performances Settings.

Analysis & Simulation

Tolerance Analysis General

Tolerance Analysis
General Fastening

Customizing General Settings

This task will show you how to customize Tolerance Analysis of Deformable Assembly general settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Analysis & Simulation category. 3. Click the Tolerance Analysis subcategory. 4. Click the General tab The General tab appears, displaying five categories of options: File Out Folder

Define the folder path where to save file out of tolerance analysis. Conversion Range

Define the range value to switch between tolerance interval and statistic law. In our example, 99.73% of measures contained in the tolerance interval represent the statistic law field.

Feature Colors

Define the default colors of tolerance analysis features: rigid support, flexible support, mechanical joint, fastening, contact. Links Creation Mode

Define whether the links creation can be automatic or not. With the automatic mode, the software take into account the appropriate contacts around a fastening element, else user must define the contacts take into account the fastening element. Meshes

Define the maximal distance allowed between a point defined as node by user and the part geometry. Out of this distance the point is not take into account when the mesh is automatically generated..

Customizing Fastening Settings

This task will show you how to customize Tolerance Analysis of Deformable Assembly general settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Analysis & Simulation category. 3. Click the Tolerance Analysis subcategory. 4. Click the Fastening tab. The Fastening tab appears, displaying four categories of options: Spot Welding

Define the mechanical joint take into account to represent spot welding before and after fastening activity. Settings available are: Before Point Planar After Revolute or Spherical Revolute

Riveting

Define the mechanical joint take into account to represent riveting before and after fastening activity. Settings available are: Before Point Planar Spherical Revolute Bolting After Revolute or Spherical Revolute Revolute or Spherical Revolute

Define the mechanical joint take into account to represent bolting before and after fastening activity. Settings available are: Before Point Planar After Revolute or Spherical Revolute

Spherical Revolute Spot Glueing

Revolute or Spherical Revolute

Define the mechanical joint take into account to represent spot glueing before and after fastening activity. Settings available are: Before Point Planar After Revolute or Spherical Revolute

General
This task explains how to customize Analysis & Simulation general settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Analysis & Simulation category. 3. Click the General tab. The General tab appears, displaying the following categories of options: Default analysis case Before defining a default analysis case using Tools->Options command, make sure you started the Analysis & Simulation (Generative Structural Analysis or Advanced Meshing Tools) workbench at least once.

The default starting analysis case is Static Analysis. You can decide that the new default will be either Frequency Analysis or Free Frequency Analysis. Be careful: the available listed cases will of course depend on the workbench you entered. Specification tree

You can display the parameters and/or relations in the specification tree.

AEC Plant
Display General

Display
This task explains how to specify which Plant Layout elements are displayed in the specification tree. 1. From the menu bar, select Tools -> Options.

The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Select the Product category from the left column of the dialog box.

3. Select the Plant Layout tab.

4. Change the settings as desired: To change the grid step, select the input field and key in a new value. For all other options, select the button next to an element to include it in or exclude it from the specification tree. In the example above, Contours and Grid Planes have not been selected, so these elements would not be displayed in the specification tree. 5. Click OK to accept the new settings.

NC Manufacturing
Display Resources Operation Output Programs Photo / Video

Display
This task explains how to customize Display settings for NC Manufacturing products. 1. Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. 2. Select the NC Manufacturing category in the tree to the left. The options for NC Manufacturing settings appear, organized in tab pages. Select the Display tab to customize: the display of the specification tree the colors of displayed geometry and parameters the tool display during tool path replay the handling of geometry necessary for manufacturing the use of the Smart NC mode. 3. In the Tree Display area: select the checkbox if you want to activate the PPR (Process Product Resources) tree display mode.

4. In the Color and Highlight area: select the colors to be used to identify the various manufacturing entities by means of the combos. For certain entities, you can select the corresponding checkbox to use highlighting. 5. In the Tool Path Replay area: select the first checkbox if you want to display the tool near your cursor position on the trajectory during a tool path replay select the second checkbox if you want to display the tool center point instead of he tool tip during a tool path replay. 6. In the Complementary Geometry area: select the checkbox to create a CATPart dedicated to manufacturing-specific geometry in the Product List part of the PPR tree. 7. In the Smart NC area: select the checkbox to activate the Smart NC mode. 8. Click OK to apply the settings and quit the dialog box.

Resources
This task explains how to customize Resource settings for NC Manufacturing products. 1. Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. 2. Select the NC Manufacturing category in the tree to the left. The options for NC Manufacturing settings appear, organized in tab pages. Select the Resources tab to customize: the path name for resource files the selection of tools.

3. In the Catalogs and Files area: enter the path of the folder containing tool catalogs, PP tables, machining processes, and post-processors. You can choose a folder easily by clicking the [...] button. 4. In the Tool Selection area: select the first checkbox if you want to to activate an automatic query after each modification of a tool parameter select the second checkbox if you want to preview the tool after selection. 5. Click OK to apply the settings and quit the dialog box.

Operation
This task explains how to customize Operation settings for NC Manufacturing products. 1. 2. Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. Select the NC Manufacturing category in the tree to the left. The options for NC Manufacturing settings appear, organized in tab pages. Select the Operations tab to customize: the use of default values the creation of machining operations the duplication of geometry links the creation of contour and island geometry.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

In the Default Values area: select the checkbox if you want operations to be created with the values used in the current program. Otherwise the default settings delivered with the application are used. In the After Creation area: select the desired checkboxes to specify conditions to be applied when you create machining operations: machining operations to be sequenced search for compatible tool in previous operations use a default tool start edit mode. In the When Copying area: select the checkbox if you want geometry links to be duplicated in a copied operation. Otherwise the geometry must be defined for the copied operation. in the When Selecting Geometry area: select the checkbox if you want contour and island geometry to be deduced from your part bottom selection. Otherwise this geometry must be defined for the operation. Click OK to apply the settings and quit the dialog box.

Output
This task explains how to customize Output settings for NC Manufacturing products. 1. Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. 2. Select the NC Manufacturing category in the tree to the left. The options for NC Manufacturing settings appear, organized in tab pages. Select the Output tab to customize: the type of PP files that will be proposed for generating ISO code output the tool path storage capability contact point storage type of tool output type default paths for NC document storage.

3. Select the desired option in the Post Processor area: None: no Post Processor is defined. ISO code output is not possible in this case Cenit: you can choose from among the Post Processor parameter files proposed by Cenit to generate your ISO code IMS: you can choose from among the Post Processor parameter files proposed by Intelligent Manufacturing Software (IMS) to generate your ISO code 4. Select the desired option in the Tool Path Storage area to store the tool path either in the current document or in an external file. 5. Select the checkbox in the During Tool Path Computation area if you want to store contact points in the tool path. 6. Select the desired option in the Tool Output Point area to select either the tool tip or tool center point as output point. 7. Specify default locations for storing Tool Path information, NC Documentation, and NC Code output. You can choose a folder easily by clicking the [...] button. 8. Click OK to apply the settings and quit the dialog box.

Program
This task explains how to customize Program settings for NC Manufacturing products. 1. Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. 2. Select the NC Manufacturing category in the tree to the left. The options for NC Manufacturing settings appear, organized in tab pages. Select the Program tab to customize program auto-sequencing rules and priorities.

Make sure that the document in the sequencing rules path (AllSequencingRules.CATProduct in the example above) is accessible in Read/Write. 3. The settings in the Auto-Sequencing area are mainly intended for the administrator: Select the first checkbox to authorize user access to sequencing rules. Specify the path for the rules base You can choose a rules base easily by clicking the [...] button. Select the second checkbox to authorize the display of sequencing rules and priorities in the user's view. In this case two more checkboxes can be selected in order to: allow the user to filter rules allow the user to modify rule priorities. 4. Click OK to apply the settings and quit the dialog box.

Photo / Video
This task explains how to customize Photo / Video settings for NC Manufacturing products. 1. Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. 2. Select the NC Manufacturing category in the tree to the left. The options for NC Manufacturing settings appear, organized in tab pages. Select the Photo/Video tab to customize the Photo and Video tool path simulation modes.

3. In the Simulation area: select the desired option to perform tool path simulation at either Program or Part Operation level. 4. In the Video Collision area, select the desired option to: ignore collisions during the Video simulation stop the Video simulation at the first collision continue the Video simulation. In this case, you can consult the list of collisions at the end of the simulation.

5. In the Fault Box area, select the desired box type for examining remaining material or gouges: Transparent: to display a transparent bounding box Wireframe: to display a wireframe bounding box None: if no bounding box is required. 6. In the Performance area, you can: select the desired option for facetization of the tool (Smaller, Larger or Standard) set the resolution for Photo simulation. It can be increased from 0 to improve machining accuracy and give a very detailed simulation. However, a higher resolution results in more memory and time being consumed for the simulation. specify the maximum angle that the tool axis is allowed to vary between two consecutive points. 7. In the Tool Color area, you can set the tool color to be the same as or different from the last tool, or have different colors for all tools. assign colors to the different tools using the color combo. 8. Click OK to apply the settings and quit the dialog box.

Digital Mockup
DMU Navigator DMU Space Analysis DMU Fitting DMU Immersive Review DMU Optimizer DMU Tolerancing Review

DMU Navigator
DMU Navigator General Invention Machine Tools

Customizing DMU Navigator Settings

This task explains how to customize DMU Navigator settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears 2. Click the Digital Mockup category. The DMU Navigator tab is active

The DMU Navigator tab lets you customize: Hyperlink representation (name) Automatic display of preview windows Marker Default Properties Scene Default Properties 3D annotation update (when moving the product) You can add hyperlinks to your document and then use them to jump to a variety of locations, for example, to a marketing presentation, a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or a HTML page on the intranet. 3. Set Hyperlink Representation to Name: By default, hyperlink names are displayed : all hyperlink will be textual. The name you give the link in the Manage Hyperlink dialog box when you create it will appear when using go to hyperlink. 4. Click preview checkboxes as appropriate to change the automatic display setting of preview windows when creating cameras, manipulating objects, etc. By default, preview windows are automatically displayed. 5. Change the color, font type and font size of 2D markers Note: Defining the Marker default properties in the Tools->Options->DMU Navigator sets the selected properties as default properties and changes how new annotations will look when you create them. 6. Change the Scene background color if necessary 7. Uncheck the Update on product move option if necessary. In this case, you will perform the update operation manually using the update item annotations contextual menu. 8. Click OK in the dialog box when done. from the 3D

Customizing General Settings

Document contents at creation Empty:After a File->New, you just see onscreen the tree with the OBJECTS, ACTIONS, PROBLEMS, CONCEPTS and VARIANTS nodes. Sample Elements: In addition to the basic tree, you get onscreen a sample of a graph. Display of actions in tree A :Only the action label is displayed (example: Generates). SAO: The action is displayed in the <subject> <action> <object> form (example: Motor Generates Noise). ASO:The action is displayed in the <action>(<subject>-><object>) form (example: Generates(Motor->Noise). Graph options UML Only objects and actions are displayed. IMC In addition to objects and actions, problems, variants and concepts are displayed.

Customizing Invention Machine Tools

The Tree Display section relates to the listing of the problems in the Problem Manager. Choosing All problems causes the problems detected by the FunctionalSystem and the user defined ones to appear in the list. If you do not want to see the ones detected by the FunctionalSystem, select User problems only. The Concept presentation in tree section has options for you to choose to display concepts related to all problems or only those related to user defined problems. The Knowledge Base Access section determines how you access the information in the Knowledge and Innovation Server (KnIS). The Start Web Browser in CATIA (NT only) opens the default Web Browser and displays the effects/examples from KnIS in it. The Start ENOVIA portal option opens the effects/examples in the ENOVIA portal. The address of the KnIS site should appear in the KnIS Site edit box. Absolute and Relative addressing options lets you

choose the method to use. The Trimming Variant Change Mode section has options for choosing to use the Trimming Wizard to guide you through the process of trimming a component or to use Free Edit to add, delete, or move the parts of the model.

DMU Space Analysis

DMU Clash DMU Clash - Detailed Computation DMU Clash - Penetration DMU Clash Publish DMU Sectioning DMU Distance

Customizing DMU Clash Settings

This task explains how to customize the clash settings of the Clash command. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Digital Mockup category, then the DMU Space Analysis subcategory. 3. Click the DMU Clash tab.

The DMU Clash tab lets you customize the following clash command settings: Retrieve Information: retrieves clash results for comparison purposes: From previous computation From PDM: from both Enovia V5 and Enovia VPM. Note that in the case of Enovia VPM, comparison is available on UNIX only. No comparison (default setting) Results Window / Automatically open: automatically displays the results window when you run a clash command computation. Display in Results box: three options to set the default display in the results box of the Check Clash dialog box: List by conflict tab (default setting). List by product tab. First line automatically selected: automatically selects the first line in the List by Conflict or List by Product tab (default setting). Type of Computation: sets the default computation type and, if necessary, the default clearance value. During Initial Computation: has the system compute and display the penetration depth and minimum distance for all interferences detected during the initial computation. 4. Click OK in the dialog box when done

DMU Clash - Detailed Computation

This task explains how to customize the detailed computation settings of the Clash command. The detailed computation mode defines what is computed when you select a conflict or product in the Check Clash Results box. It can be run at element or product level. By default, the detailed computation is run at element level. The graphics representation of interferences (triangles for contacts and clearances, curves for clashes) and the penetration depth or minimum distance are computed. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Digital Mockup -> DMU Space Analysis in the left-hand box. 3. Click the DMU Clash - Detailed Computation tab.

The DMU Clash - Detailed Computation tab lets you customize the following settings: Level of Detail: sets the level of detail. Element: lets you work globally at product level while allowing you to pinpoint the elements involved. Product: gives information at product level only. Note: Element analysis in Detailed Results and Visualization boxes is only available if the level of detail is set to Element. Clash Result: specifies the graphics representation for clashes. Curve: Red intersection curves identifying clashing products are computed and displayed. None: No intersection curves are computed. Contact & Clearance Result: specifies the graphics representation for contacts and clearances. Triangles: Yellow and green triangles identifying products in contact and products separated by less than the specified clearance distance respectively are computed and displayed. Note: The graphics display and storage of the triangular representation is costly and may adversely affect performance. Surface: Yellow and green surfaces identifying products in contact and products separated by less than the specified clearance distance respectively are computed and displayed. If you select this option, you must set an accuracy. The value entered defines the maximum value for the length of the longest side of a triangular representation of the results. This representation is used to obtain the yellow and green surfaces. None: No triangles or surfaces are computed. Numeric Result: specifies the numeric result computed and displayed. Penetration depth or minimum distance: The penetration depth of clashes and the minimum distance for clearances is computed and displayed. None: No penetration depth or minimum distance is computed. 4. Click OK in the dialog box when done

DMU Clash - Penetration

This task explains how to customize the penetration mode setting of the Clash command. The penetration mode defines how penetration depth is computed. Two modes are available: Element (default mode) Product. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Digital Mockup -> DMU Space Analysis in the left-hand box. 3. Click the DMU Clash - Penetration tab.

The DMU Clash - Penetration tab lets you set the penetration mode: Mode of Penetration: Element This is the default mode and lets you assess the seriousness of a clash. In the Element mode, penetration depth corresponds to the depth of the intersection area visualized by the penetration vector. The maximum value is output, in our example, N2. Note: You cannot use this calculation to translate products and avoid clashes.

In our example, the green product comprises three elements and the blue product two elements.

Mode of Penetration: Product In the Product mode, penetration depth (visualized by a vector) is the minimum distance by which it is necessary to translate a product to avoid a clash. This mode corresponds to the penetration depth computation prior to Version 5 Release 8.

4. Click OK in the dialog box when done

DMU Clash Publish

This task explains how to customize publish settings of the Clash command. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Digital Mockup -> DMU Space Analysis in the left-hand box. 3. Click the DMU Clash Publish tab.

The DMU Clash Publish tab lets you customize XML publish settings: Default path: sets the default location in which to save the XML file. Style sheet: lets you select and apply your customized style sheet. Browser automatically opened: automatically opens a browser displaying results when clash results are exported. 4. Click OK in the dialog box when done

Customizing DMU Sectioning Settings

This task explains how to customize sectioning settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears 2. Click Digital Mockup -> DMU Space Analysis in the left-hand box 3. Click the DMU Sectioning tab

The DMU Sectioning tab lets you customize: Section Planes: sets default section plane settings. Default color: sets the default color of the section plane. Normal X,Y,Z: specifies the absolute axis along which you want to orient the normal vector of the section plane (master plane in the case of slices and boxes). Origin: locates the center of the plane at absolute coordinates 0,0,0 or at the center of the bounding sphere around the products in the selection you defined. Hide the plane in the No Show space: transfers the plane to the No Show place on exiting the command. De-activate this option to keep the plane in the Show space. Automatic computation of the result: automatically updates sectioning results while manipulating the plane. De-activating this option means that results are computed when you release the mouse button. Section Grid: sets default grid options. Absolute mode: sets grid coordinates with respect to the absolute axis system of the document. Relative mode: places the center of the grid on the center of the section plane (master plane in the case of slices and boxes). Style: sets the grid representation to lines or crosses. Automatic filtering: if clicked, automatically adjusts the level of detail of the grid display when you zoom in and out. Steps: specifies the spacing between grid lines. The default value is 100. Units are current units set using Tools -> Options. Results Window: sets default results window settings. Automatically open: automatically displays a results window when in the Sectioning command. Always 2D view: always displays the 2D view in the results window. Automatically reframe: automatically fits the results into the available space in both the results and preview windows when manipulating the section plane in the document window. Section fill: fills in the section to make a surface for measurement and display. 4. Click OK in the dialog box when done

DMU Distance
This task explains how to customize results window and publish settings of the Distance and Band Analysis command. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Digital Mockup -> DMU Space Analysis in the left-hand box. 3. Click the DMU Distance tab.

The DMU Distance tab lets you customize Distance and Band Analysis command settings. Results Window / Automatically open: automatically displays the results window when you run a distance command computation. XML Publish Default Directory (Band analysis only): Default path: sets the default location in which to save the XML file. Style sheet: lets you select and apply your customized style sheet. Browser automatically opened: automatically opens a browser displaying results when distance results are exported. 4. Click OK in the dialog box when done

DMU Fitting
DMU Fitting DMU Manipulators

Customizing DMU Fitting Settings

This task explains how to customize DMU Fitting settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Digital Mockup in the left-hand box. 3. Click the DMU Fitting item The DMU Fitting tab is active.

Shuttle Angular Validation lets you set the angular shuttle validation option in the Edit Shuttle dialog box. This option lets you specify a maximum rotation angle for the shuttle. Please see "Defining a Shuttle" in the DMU Fitting Users Guide. Path Finder Automatic Smooth: if checked, the smooth is performed within the Pathfinder command clicking OK.

Track Automatic track update: if checked, the track is automatically updated after modification. The manual update is set by default (see track contextual menu) Default speed: is 0.001m_s, you can modify this value at any time for the to be created tracks. Note: Use the Properties dialog box to modify speed on existing tracks Default Clash Detection When activating the default clash detection, the clash computation can take several minutes before the simulation dialog boxes are displayed. Sometimes it is more convenient not to compute this clash detection for the first step. This step can already be validated by a static clash analysis. Activated only while moving: if checked, no calculation will be performed when the default clash detection is activated (ON, STOP). When running tracks, sequences... simulations, clashes are still calculated with respect to the default clash detection state (OFF, ON, STOP) By default this option is not checked 3. Click OK in the dialog box when done.

Customizing DMU Manipulators

This task explains how to customize DMU Fitting settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Digital Mockup in the left-hand box.

The DMU Manipulation tab lets you customize Fitting Simulator commands settings: Clash Beep Click Clash beep checkbox to activate the Beep during interference analyses, simulation recordings, etc. By default, the clash Beep option is unchecked. Automatic Insert Configurations On mouse release: lets you record positions on mouse release (this is the default mode) While mouse moving: Distance: specifies the minimum distance step during simulation recording Angle: specifies the maximum rotation angle step during simulation recording Check the "while mouse release" record mode The "Distance" and "Angle" fields are no longer grayed out, enter the appropriate values to record the the motion.

Manipulation Modes for Shuttle Simulation Lets you validate the shuttle simulation detecting clashes. This setting is linked to the Automatic Clash Detection toolbar the icon changes automatically with respect to the option checked. No clash detection simulation context : default detection mode in

Clash detection on : activates the clash detection mode (the product in clash is highlighted in the geometry area while recording the simulation ) Stop on collision : activates the stop mode, it means the simulation is stopped at the first clash, the products are highlighted in the geometry area

Snap Sensitivity lets you customize the snap functionality parameters: The snap works within a sphere and a cylinder Position value: specifies the sphere radius (first area) where the shuttle is snapped onto the object. Orientation value: specifies the cylinder height (second area) where the shuttle is snapped onto the object. Fast Clash Detection

use voxelisation for collision detection: sets the quick voxelisation mode (known as VPS technology- Vox Map Point Shell) for automatic clash detection. The sag corresponds to voxel units It is very useful when handling a large number of data as the automatic clash detection takes advantage this quick mode (performance gain) but the accuracy is diminished The accuracy is linked to the loading capacity of your machine (memory size) view collisions feedback: sets the visualization feedback (voxel centers, in other words, points). It can be useful to deactivate this option to gain in visualization performances (in this case, use another feedback: the stop on collision option mode for automatic detection) 3. Click OK in the dialog box when done.

DMU Immersive Review

This task will show you how to manage representations as alternate shapes automatically. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears 2. Expand the Digital Mockup category from the left-hand tree 3. Click the DMU Immersive item The DMU Immersive Review is active

The DMU Immersive Review tab lets you customize the following starting options (as entering the DMU Immersive Review Workbench) Viewpoint tracking: if set, the viewpoint changes as your head turns if you use a head tracker device. This option is linked to Stereoscopic option which enables or disables 3D visualization of your session. You need to launch the device driver. Please refer to Customizing Devices Settings Stereoscopic: Enables or disables stereoscopic visualization of graphical data with a perception of realistic, three-dimensional images. P3 grid: lets you display the P3 grid when you enter the DMU Immersive Workbench Action Triggers activated by default: if checked, this option launches a "demo mode" which means each time you select an object which has been assigned an action trigger, the operation is automatically launched (the CATScript macro is triggered). in this case, only the standard toolbar is available, the action triggers command is activated. if this option is not checked, you need to click the Action Triggers icon first and then select the object. All immersive review toolbars are available. Default toolbar position: lets you choose the toolbars location. The default location is at the bottom left (lower left option), but is can be useful to check the upper left option depending on the display configuration you need (one or several screens) 4. Click OK in the dialog box when done.

Managing an Alternate Shape

This task will show you how to manage representations as alternate shapes automatically. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears 2. Expand the Digital Mockup category from the left-hand tree 3. Click the DMU Optimizer item to display the corresponding tab

4. Select the required representation, for example Offset. 5. Customize the representation settings as required: Manage as alternate shape: if set the resulting offset shape is managed as the offset component alternate shape (i.e. input component) Activate Shape: if activated the Offset representation is the one visualized in the session. Default Shape: if activated the offset representation will be the default shape, the one loaded when opening the product. 6. Click Ok to confirm your operation After a new offset calculation, if you right-click the product and select Manage representations, the Manage representation dialog box is automatically updated with the offset representation.

In DMU Optimizer, it is impossible to generate various alternate shapes with the same name. Only the last generated alternate shape is taken into account.

DMU Tolerancing
This task shows you customize DMU Tolerancing settings.

1.

Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Digital Mockup then DMU Tolerancing Review. The DMU Tolerancing tab that appears displays two options:

Related Surface 3. You can set the color of highlights for related surfaces. The colors you define are visible when using the Related Surfaces capability. Click the combo box to select the color of your choice.

4.

Otherwise, to define a personal color, select More Colors... The Color dialog box appears, allowing you to define the colors of your choice.

A list appears containing: a list of default colors from the color palette, ready for use a blank color field the Define Custom Colors>> option. In the Basic Colors area, the first sixteen colors (in the top two rows) are the same as those at the top of the previous list. The remaining four rows contain extra colors. The empty boxes below are reserved for your own custom colors.

6.

Click Define Custom Colors to expand the Color dialog box. The full color palette and color customization tools are displayed. The colored area with the cross represents a color spectrum.

7.

To define a new color, click anywhere in the colored area or drag the cross inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below the spectrum.

8.

Use the slider to adjust your color. This makes the brightness of the custom color vary. The HSL (Hue, Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red, Green and Blue) values vary according to where the cross is located. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields provided to suit your exact color specifications.

9.

Once you are happy with the color, click the Add to Custom Colors option to add the custom color. Click Apply to return to the original color palette.

10.

11.

Click on the custom color to apply it to related surfaces.

Design Mode 12. Check Automatic if you wish to access technological data in your session, otherwise remember that models are loaded in Visualization Mode, i.e. without associated technological data (only visualization data is loaded).

Equipment and Systems

Understanding Project Resource Management Electrical Assembly Design Electrical Wire Routing Electrical Harness Installation Electrical Cableway Routing Electrical Connectivity Diagrams Diagrams Settings Line Lists Settings Circuit Board Design Equipment Support Structures Structure Preliminary Layout Structure Functional Design

Understanding Project Resource Management

This task shows you how to manage project resources like catalogs and dictionaries. These changes can only be made at system administrator level. Beginning with Release 8 users need to manage their resources in a way that is different from what they have been used to. Previously, system administrators could click Tools - Options in the menu bar, navigate to a tab and field, and enter information. Information such as directory paths for various resources without which the application cannot function - line list catalogs, user dictionaries, catalogs, etc. The same information is still needed, but the way of entering it is different. Administrators can no longer enter it using the Tools - Options dialog boxes. Instead, they need to enter the information in one file, which is in XML format. What they enter will be visible in the Options dialog boxes, but it cannot be changed there. Moreover, the resources are arranged in a certain structure. What the structure is, and the reasons for it, are explained below. A sample file is provided with this application, and it is best to make a copy of it and edit it. The default location is ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAnd Systems\ProjectData and the file is named Project.xml. The application will function even if the user does not enter information particular to his site, but nothing can be saved. Therefore, the first task an administrator needs to do is enter information relevant to his site or project. 1. If there is more than one project at your site then make a project resource management file for each project. You can name the file anything you want to and change its location (see below) too. However, you must set the variable in the Environment Editor. You do this by opening the Environment Editor dialog box and entering against the line CATDisciplinePath the directory in which your project resource management files are:

If you have more than one project resource management file then by default the application will start with the file named Project.xml, if there is such a file, or the last file used. If you wish to select another resource management file then you must open it by clicking Tools - Project Management, going to the Select tab, and selecting the file and discipline you need.

2. The resource management file is organized into several sections to make it easier to manage and utilize resources. The image below shows its hierarchical structure. You can add more disciplines and applications as needed.

Any resources you place under Project Resources can be used by all applications. In the sample file you will see items like zones, user dictionary and application-generated object names in this section. The applications are further organized into disciplines, which are the second level of resource management. All

resources placed under a discipline, such as Piping, can be used by all the applications which belong to it. The third level is the application itself. Any resource referred to at this level can only be used by the application. Equipment Design has been placed under several disciplines. That is because when you are working in these applications you may need Equipment Design resources. However, in different applications you may not use the same resources from Equipment Design and structuring it this way allows you to place different different resources under each discipline. For instance, under the Piping Discipline, Equipment Design may have a different catalog than under the HVAC Discipline.

3. A resource entry looks like this: <Resource Name="PipingIDSchema" Description="Piping ID Schema Directory"> <ID Type="Path" Driver="File" Location="\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\DataDictionary"/> You should not change the Resource Name, even if you replace a resource with a different one. You can change the Description if you want to. The Type field refers to file type. If the Type field says Catia, then it refers to a file type unique to Catia, such as .catalog. The type Misc is used for resources which are of a type not unique to Catia and must be opened in another way. The type Path is similar, except that in the Location field only the directory in which the resource is located is named. If your resources do not reside in Enovia then enter File in the Driver field. Define the Location field as follows: As shown in the resource example above, the location entry is relative - it is relative to the entry you made in the Environment Editor as shown in Step 1. The entry in the location field will be added to the entry you had in the Environment Editor and it is in that location that the application will look for the resource. Which is why it is preferable to enter absolute paths - including the drive letter - in the location field. If your resources are Enovia-based then enter EnoviaV5 in the Driver field. For Enovia-based resources, all you need to enter in the Location field is the file name of the resource without the file extension. For instance, the catalog PipingParts.catalog would be entered as PipingParts.

4. The Project Resources listed in the sample Project.xml file are described in following sections, beginning with the resources referred to under Project Resources: ID schema resources: The "location" lists the directory where the rules for naming objects are stored. Use the default location provided in the sample file. You need to have this for every application you use. In addition, there is an entry for "MultiDisciplineIDSchema." This location is used for objects -such as zones - that are used by all disciplines. User dictionary resources: In the location field enter the name of the CATfct file for each application. You do not need to enter the location. The CATfct file is used to store all the classes and attributes created by you. The default names for CATfct files in each application are included in the sample project.xml file and you should use these names unless you have created a different CATfct file, or changed the default name. Zones catalog: The zones that you create need to be stored in a catalog accessible to all users, because they are shared. The default location is CATMldZone.catalog. Even though zones are only created in schematic applications, other applications may use them when documents are moved from schematic to 3D. Enter a different name or location if you change them. Discrete values: Many attributes have discrete values and this directory is used to store them. Schematic driven flag: This is a flag that needs to be set for schematic driven routing and parts placement. If the value of "Location" is set to 0 then individual users can check or uncheck an option that allows schematic driven 3D design. If the value is set to 1 then the option "schematic driven" is always selected and users cannot uncheck it.

Graphic representations: When you create graphic representations for a part you need a file in which to store the categories (single, double, etc.). That file is created within an application, as you will see later. There is also a file under Project Resources because the categories must be available to all applications. If you add a new category you must include it in this file too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them. For detailed information about graphic representations, refer to Version 5 Piping Design User`s Guide Defining Queries for a Specifications Catalog. Penetration openings catalog: The profiles of the holes you may want to make through walls and partitions to pass pipes and ducts are noted in this catalog. If you make a new profile you must enter it here too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them. Penetration cutout catalog: This contains the rules for how much clearance to allow for the pipes and ducts you want to put through walls. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them. ID Sequence Number directory: The IDSequenceNumbers directory contains the last sequence number that was generated for an object. You should specify a location for it. 5. Resources placed under the Piping Discipline category are explained below. As explained above, resources placed under Piping Discipline will be used by all the applications placed within this discipline. The sample project.xml file places the following resources under Piping Discipline, pointing to the default location and files. If you intend to use different resources, which is likely, then you must enter the new file name and location, as appropriate. The following resources are referenced: Specifications catalog(s) Standard Design rules: You need to use the default location and file name. Parts catalog name and location The file where shared piping lines are located. Sample data directory: This is the location where the reports you run will be stored. Under the individual applications the following resources are included: Piping Design: Graphic representations file: When you create graphic representations for a part you need a file in which to store the categories (single, double, etc.). If you add a new category you must include it in this file too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them. Connector attributes file: This file lists the attributes that will be inherited (from the part) by a connector when you are placing it on a part. If you want to make changes to the attributes you want a connector to inherit you must do it in this file. Do not change the name or location of this file. For detailed information about connector attributes, refer to Version 5 Piping Design User`s Guide - Associate Specifications to a Connector. Resolved parts: When you place a parametric part in a document it assumes specific dimensions. Once a part has specific dimensions it is placed in the Resolved Parts catalog. The location of the default Resolved Parts catalog is listed here. Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams PID_ANSI catalog PID_DIN catalog PID_ISO catalog Shared instrument lines catalog Annotation catalog Sample data directory: When you create graphic representations for a part you need a file in which to store the categories (open, closed, etc.). If you add a new category you must include it in this file too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them. Design rules for Equipment Arrangement: This is used when assigning a part type to a 2D part. The parts catalog for Equipment Arrangement: This is used when assigning a part type to a 2D part. Equipment Arrangement Design rules: You need to use the default location and file name. Parts catalog name and location Graphic representations file: See Piping Design for explanation. Connector Attributes: See Piping Design for explanation. Sample data: See Piping Design for explanation. Resolved parts: See Piping Design for explanation.

6. HVAC Discipline and Tubing Discipline refer to the same type of resources explained above, with the difference of course that they point to resources related to their own discipline. If you need an explanation you can refer to that given above. 7. The AEC Migration Discipline refers to a product that enables you to migrate V4 models to V5. It has some Piping Design, Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams and Equipment Arrangement resources under it. Resources that are at the Discipline level should be familiar to you and need no further explanation. Enter the location and file names if they are different from those in the sample Project.xml file. Under the individual applications the following resources are included: AEC V4 V5 Migration There are several options that you need to set to True or False. The first three are about migrating data from Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams, Piping Design and Equipment Arrangement. If a V4 model has data of all three types, but you have set two of them to False, then you will only receive in V5 data relating to the application set to True. If you want data of all three types to be migrated then you must set all three options to True. Other options are self-explanatory. For instance, if you set to True the option "Migrate objects even if some V4 attributes are not migrated" then you will be able to migrate an object even if some of the V4 attributes do not exist in V5. There are a few that need further explanation: Create runs without parts: If set to True a run will be migrated without the parts. Import piping line: If set to True a line will be created in the V5 Piping Line catalog if it does not exist. When set to False, the migration process will stop if the line does not exist in V5. Mapping Table: You need to enter the location and name of the mapping table if you change the default name or location. Piping Design, Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams and Equipment Arrangement The resources under these applications should be familiar to you. If you wish to use a resource other than the default, then enter the name and location.

8. Make sure to save your changes.

Electrical Library
Electrical Library Electrical Library Access

Electrical Library
In order to valuate the keywords automatically when the devices are stored in the catalog with their properties, you need to define a mapping between keywords of each family and the attributes of the component type. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Click Equipments & Systems in the left-hand box. 3. Click the Electrical Assembly Design workbench. 4. Click the Electrical Library tab.

The tab lets you: define the current catalog using the Browse... button customize the mapping between the catalog and the electrical objects define the keyword attributes. 5. Associate an electrical type to the currently selected Family.

Use the combo list to select the corresponding type.

6. Define for each keyword the corresponding reference attribute. The result looks like this: Use the combo list to select the corresponding attribute.

7. Click OK to validate the options.

The mapping definition can be set by the administrator. In this case it can also be locked. To get more information about the Administration Mode in CATIA, refer to CATIA - Infrastructure User's Guide

Electrical Library Access

Electrical System Functional Definition takes advantage of Electrical Library for the mapping between functional equipments and connectors to V4 library parts. It consists in the definition of the corresponding physical components for functional equipments or connectors. This is done in EFD. The V4 libraries access is defined in the Tools -> Options menu. Moreover, a compatibility can be established between functional and physical components in order to reduce the list of physical components available for a functional component. The compatibility sets a relation between the External Reference attribute of the functional component and the Part Number attribute of the physical component. These relations are stored in a compatibility table, in csv format. 1. Select the Tools -> Options menu. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Click Equipments & Systems in the left-hand box. 3. Click the Electrical Assembly Design workbench. 4. Click the Electrical Library Access tab.

It lets you define: the library names and their location in the upper frame the location of the compatibility table if it exists (for example: c:\Temp)

5. To add a library in the list, click the corresponding button. The dialog box opens:

6. Enter the library name and path then click OK to validate. 7. You can delete or modify the library access, using respectively the Remove or Edit button. 8. To gain access to the compatibility table, enter its path in the Compatibility Storage Path field. Let's see its structure:

In this sample, the functional equipment which External Reference is ExtRefEqt is compatible with three physical equipments which PartNumber are PN1, PN2, PN3. For more information about the interoperability with CATIA - Electrical System Functional Definition, refer to Mapping Functional Components to Physical Parts The Electrical Library Access can be set by the administrator. In this case it can also be locked. To get more information about the Administration Mode in CATIA, refer to CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide

Electrical Wire Routing

Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits. This is done using Tools -> Options from the menu bar. This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files. Settings will not be lost if you exit your session. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Expand the Equipments & Systems in the left-hand box. 3. Click the Electrical Wire Routing workbench. The General tab is displayed:

This tab lets you customize: the wire extremities management the property naming to be displayed as a column title the separation code file access the extremity color. 4. Click OK in the dialog box when done.

Wire Extremities Management The Favorites list contains the properties displayed in the Interconnection frame of the Wire Extremities Management dialog box. To add properties to the list, select the property in the Available list and click the ---> arrow. To remove properties, do the reverse: select the property from the Favorites list and click the <--- arrow. Property Naming Select a property in the Favorites list and enter a name in the Favorite column Title field. It is displayed in the Wire Connection Management dialog box:

Separation Code File The Separation Code File area is used to define Separation Code rules to optimize the routing. Those Separation Codes may be File Based. In that case, define the path to access the compatibility table by clicking the Browse button to choose the separation code file. This file is used during the Automatic Routing and the Routing Simulation. Two options are now available: Signal-Signal manages compatibility between signals, Signal-Arc manages compatibility between signal and pathways. The Separation Codes may also be Rule Based, using CATIA Knowledgeware. Only one rule can be implemented at a time, but this rule may combine several conditions. Push the Edit button to enter a new rule. The Routing Rule Editor is displayed.

The line above the input field is a reminder of the knowledgeware syntax. The Eraser icon is used to clean the input field. Extremity Color

The Extremity Color field is used to change the color of the extremities boxes. Select a color from the color combo box.

or

Electrical Harness Installation

Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits. This is done using Tools -> Options from the menu bar. This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files. Settings will not be lost if you exit your session. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Choose the Equipments & Systems in the left-hand box. 3. Click the Electrical Harness Installation workbench. The Harness Management tab is looks like this:

This tab lets you define: the bundle segment creation options: Mandatory geometrical bundle: you need to create a geometrical bundle prior to define a bundle segment. By default, this option is activated. Use the color chooser. when the selection is completed, the bundle segment is extended to the second point selected (which is either a bundle segment extremity or a bundle connection point). the electrical connection is created at the same time as the bundle segment.

Bundle segment color on creation the bundle segment connection options: Geometrical link:

Automatic link on new bundle segment: By default, these options are activated.

The other two tabs refer to Part Design options: General Make sure the following option is checked to take advantage of the associativity between the construction points or part body and the bundle segment: in the External References frame of the General tab, check the Keep link with selected object option.

Display To display the External References in the specification tree, check the External References option.

4. Click OK when done.

Electrical Cableway Routing

Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits. This is done using Tools -> Options from the menu bar. This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: your settings will not be lost if you exit your session. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Expand the Equipments & Systems category in the left-hand box. 3. Click the Electrical Cableway Routing workbench. The Electrical Cableway Routing tab is displayed:

By default, the option is unchecked: the link is done at the same time as the placement. 4. Check the box if you only want to place the component. You can link it later using the Link Schematic button 5. Click OK when you are done. .

Feature Dictionary Settings

This file explains the settings specific to Electrical Connectivity Diagrams workbench. 1. Click Tools -> Options -> Equipment & Systems -> Electrical Diagrams.

This dialog box offers two frames: User Dictionary User Schema ID 2. Fill up the fields according to the information given below. 3. Click OK when you are done.

User Dictionary
The dictionary contains object basic classes such as: equipments, sockets, plugs, switches, cables, etc. These objects have standard properties: type, part number, etc. According to you needs, you may want to define more properties such as subtype classes, and other specific attributes: In this example, four subtype classes have been defined for the Schematic Equipment class.

This is done using the Feature Dictionary Editor

, available in the Start -> Equipment & Systems menu.

The classes, subclasses and their properties are saved in a document with a CATfct extension. This file must be stored in the following directory according to your operating system: on NT: .../intel_a/resources/graphic/ on Solaris: .../solaris_a/resources/graphic/ on Irix: .../irix_a/resources/graphic/ on Aix: .../aix_a/resources/graphic/ on Hpux: .../hpux_a/resources/graphic/ In the User Dictionary File Name field, only enter the file name and extension.

You can have more than one .CATfct file, but you will reference only one at a time.

Client ID
The Client ID is defined in the Feature Dictionary Editor as a protection on the CATfct file, before creating the user dictionary and the subclasses.

In the ID field, enter the same three characters:

User Schema ID

Within a project, it is possible to define naming rules for the schematic objects. They are used to set automatically the Reference Designator attribute on electrical components. These rules (Schema ID) are saved in xml files and stored together in specific directory. It is the path to this directory that you indicate in the first field (Schema) of the frame below. The Sequence Number is assign automatically provided that the file server is stored in a directory shared between all the users working on the project. Enter the path to this directory in the second field (Sequence Number) of the frame below

You can decide then to use the naming rules you have defined or not. In the first case, check the Automatic instances ID generation.

To enter manually the Reference Designator, uncheck this box.

Diagrams Settings
This task explains the diagrams settings. The Diagrams tab is one of three tabs under the Options -> Equipment & Systems menu that is specific to P&ID, HVAC and Electrical Diagrams. 1. Click Tools -> Options, Equipment & Systems and select the Diagrams tab. The Options window displays:

2. Make your selections from the options. Most of them are self explanatory. In the Connector Display frame, two options allow you to show or not the connectors in the drawing sheet: By default, Show connected connectors is unchecked to lighten the display Show unconnected connectors is checked to emphasize the display. In the Reference Components Display frame, the option allows you to show or not the reference components in the specification tree: by default, the option is checked.

If you uncheck the option, the specification tree looks like this:

3. Click OK to validate.

Line Lists Settings

Working with Electrical Connectivity Diagrams allows you to create zones. You need to indicate in the Line Lists tab where you want to have them stored. 1. Click Tools -> Options, Equipment & Systems and select the Line Lists tab.

2. Enter the name (and full path) of the directory where you want to store the zone ID files. Each zone ID that you create has a file associated with it, and will be stored in this directory. 3. Click OK when you are done.

Circuit Board Design Settings

This task shows you how to change the user settings. These are permanent settings. 1. Select the Tools -> Options menu. The Options dialog box opens. 2. Click Equipments & Systems in the left-hand box. 3. Click the Circuit Board Design workbench: The Circuit Board tab is displayed.

You can set the color of your choice to the different areas. If you check the Update documents in session box, your change will be applied to the current document. You can also browse to specify the default catalog. You can set a default height for the component used when importing data: the .lib file contains the component footprint. If its height is null, the Default height will be used as the component pad height. 4. Click OK to validate.

Equipment Support Structures Settings

This first task shows you how to customize Equipment Support Structures settings. Select Tools -> Options... from the menu bar. 1. The Options dialog box appears. Click Equipment & Systems -> Equipment Support Structures in the left-hand 2. box. 3. Click the Equipment Support Structures tab.

The Equipment Support Structures tab lets you customize default colors and materials, user types and enter paths to sample catalogs and the list of available sections.

Color and Material Member color: select the default color for members in the box list. Plate color: select the default color for plates in the box list. Member material: select the default material for members in the box list. Plate material: select the default material for plates in the box list. User types Add: enter the name of the member or plate type then click Add to add user types. Remove: select the member or plate type in the list then click Remove to remove user types. Catalog storage: identifies the path of the folder containing sample standard catalog sections supplied with the product: downloaddirectory/OS/startup/components/structuralcatalogs where OS is the operating system, for example intel_a (Windows NT). Section storage: identifies the full path of the folder that will contain the list of available sections, for example e:\Section. This folder will contain resolved user-defined sections stored here directly and any sample standard or user-defined catalog sections accessed via the Section command or the Other section... option. It is recommended that an empty directory be identified. Thickness table: identifies the path of the thickness table. A sample table, ThicknessListSample.txt, is supplied with the product. downloaddirectory/OS/startup/components/StructuralCatalogs/Thickness Tables/ThicknessListSample.txt where OS is the operating system, for example intel_a (Windows NT). 4. Click OK in the dialog box when done.

Structure Preliminary Layout

Catalog Design

Catalog Settings
This task explains how to define structure preliminary layout catalog settings. 1.Select Tools -> Options command, then in the Equipment & Systems category, click the Structure Preliminary Layout sub-category. The Catalogs tab appears by default. This tab lets you identify paths to the openings catalog.

Openings Catalog storage Identifies the full path of the sample openings catalog. By default this path is: downloaddirectory/OS/startup/components/PenetrationCatalog/Openings.catalog where OS is the operating system, for example intel_a (Windows NT). The path to the sample feature dictionary is identified in the Structure preliminary field of the User Dictionary tab under the Equipment & Systems category. By default, this path is: downloaddirectory/OS/resources/graphic/CATStrPreliminaryLayoutSample.CATfct The path to the sample product ID Schema file is identified in the Structure preliminary field of the ID Naming Rules tab under the Equipment & Systems category. By default, this path is: downloaddirectory/OS/reffiles/disciplines/CATSPL.xml

Design Settings
This task explains how to define structure preliminary layout design settings. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command, then in the Equipment & Systems category, click the Structure Preliminary Layout sub-category. The Catalogs tab appears by default. Click the Design tab.

2.

Color This area lets you define the default color for molded forms, bounded zones and boundaries.

Structure Functional Design

Catalog Design

Catalog Settings
This tasks shows how to define Structure Functional Design catalog settings. 1.Select the Tools->Options... command then in the Equipment & Systems category, click the Structure Functional Design sub-category. The Catalogs tab appears by default. This tab contains a number of fields letting you identify paths to various catalogs and tables.

Standard Section Catalog Identifies the path of the folder containing standard section catalogs supplied with the product. By default, this path is: downloaddirectory/OS/startup/components/structuralcatalogs where OS is the operating system, for example intel_a (Windows NT). Resolved Sections Folder Identifies the path of the folder in which the list of available sections will be stored, for example e:\Section. This directory contains resolved user-defined sections which are stored here directly as well as any standard or user-defined catalog sections selected via the Section icon or the Other section... option. It is recommended that you enter an empty directory. Thickness Table Identifies the path of the sample thickness table. By default, this path is:

Opening Catalog Identifies the full path of the sample opening catalog. By default, this path is: downloaddirectory/OS/startup/components/PenetrationCatalog/Openings.catalog where OS is the operating system, for example intel_a (Windows NT). Use [...] to locate the folder or catalog of interest. The path to the sample feature dictionary is identified in the Structure functional field of the User Dictionary tab under the Equipment & Systems category. By default, this path is: downloaddirectory/OS/resources/graphic/CATStructureFunctionalDesignSample.CATfct The path to the sample product ID Schema file is identified in the Structure functional field of the ID Naming Rules tab under the Equipment & Systems category. By default, this path is: downloaddirectory/OS/reffiles/disciplines/CATSFD.xml

Design Settings
This tasks shows how to define functional design settings. 1.Select the Tools->Options... command then in the Equipment & Systems category, click the Structure Functional Design sub-category. The Catalogs tab appears by default. 2.Click the Design tab. This tab lets you customize default colors, materials and mid-ship symmetry.

Color This area lets you define the default color for functional stiffeners, functional plates, functional pillars and the selected support surface. Material This area lets you define the default material for functional stiffeners, functional plates and functional pillars.

Inversion Plane This area lets you define: The default direction for the material thickness of functional stiffeners (defined with respect to decks) On which side of longitudinal bulkheads, functional plates are placed by default. To do so, check Mid-Ship Symmetry and select the appropriate options.

Glossary A
access key active end The key that corresponds to an underlines letter on a menu or control (also referred to as a mnemonic access key). The ending point for a selected range of objects. It is usually established at the object logically nearest the hot spot of the pointer when a user releases a mouse button. Compare anchor point. Object currently being edited. The window in which a user is currently working or directing input. An active window is typically at the top of the Z order and is distinguished by the color of its title bar. Compare inactive window. Collection of images you generate with the Tools -> Capture command. The starting point for a selected range of objects. An anchor point is usually established at the object logically nearest the hot spot of the pointer when a user presses a mouse button. Compare active end. Window containing the Version 5 application. To commit a set of changes or pending transactions made in a secondary window, typically without closing that window. An event or interaction that is automatically repeated. Auto-repeat events usually occur when a user holds down a keyboard key or presses and holds a special control (for example, scroll bar buttons).

active object active window

album anchor point

application window apply auto-repeat

B
background box edit Area in document windows to which you can apply a background color. A standard Microsoft Windows interface control that provides a discrete area for entering each character. A user can also edit text within the control.

C
cancel cascading menu To halt an operation or process and return to the state before it was invoked. Compare stop. A menu that is a submenu of a menu item (also referred to as a hierarchical menu, child menu, or submenu).

A standard Windows control that displays a setting, either checked (set) or unchecked (not set). Compare option button. child menu See cascading menu. child window A document window used within an MDI window. See also multiple document interface. click (v.) To position the pointer over an object and then press and release a mouse button. See also press. (n.) The act of clicking. clipboard The area of storage for objects, data or their references after a user carries out a Cut or Copy command. clipping Depth effect for viewing parts or all of a 3D object between two planes. character set A character is any symbol used for the organization, control, or representation of data. A group of such symbols used to describe a particular language. Each language (or group of languages) has its character set combo box A standard Windows control that combines a text box and interdependent list box. command button A standard Windows control that initiates a command or sets an option (also referred to as a push button). context-sensitive Help Information about an object and its current condition. It answers the questions "What is this" and "Why would I want to use it?" Compare reference Help and task-oriented Help. contextual menu A menu that is displayed at the location of a selected object (also referred to as a shortcut menu). The menu contains the commands that are contextually relevant to the selection, and the most frequently used. You display the contextual menu by right-clicking. contiguous selection A selection that consists of a set of objects that are logically sequential or adjacent to each other (also referred to as range selection). Compare disjoint selection. current State of an object when selected. cursor A generic term for the visible indication of where a user's interaction will occur. See also input focus, insertion point, and pointer.

check box

D
default An operation or value that the system or application assumes, unless a user makes an explicit choice.

desktop

dialog box

document

document window double-click

duplicate

The visual work area that fills the display. The desktop is also a container and can be used as a convenient location to place objects stored in the file system. A secondary window that gathers additional information from a user. A dialog box usually contains one or more controls, such as buttons, list boxes, combo boxes, and edit boxes, with which the user enters text, chooses options, or directs the action of the command. Compare message box, palette window, and property sheet. A common unit of data (typically a file) used in user tasks and exchanged between users. When saved on disk, a document is given a unique filename by which it can be retrieved. A window that provides a primary view of a document (typically its content). (v.) To press an release a mouse button twice in rapid succession. (n.) The act of double-clicking. Performs mirroring or pattern operations on an active object.

E
edit field Edit menu See text box. A common drop-down menu that includes general purpose commands for editing the current object, such as Cut, Copy, and Paste. The "..." suffix added to a menu item or button label to indicate that the command requires additional information to be completed. When a user chooses the command, a dialog box is usually displayed for the user input of this additional information. See OLE embedded object. (v.) To type a character from the keyboard. (n.) A classification of an object based on its characteristics, behavior, and attributes. A section technique that is optimized for the selection of a single object or single range using contiguous selection techniques (that is, canceling any existing selection when a new selection is made). However, it also supports modifying an existing selection using disjoint selection techniques. See also disjoint selection.

ellipsis

embedded object enter

extended selection

F
filter File menu font font size Tool for organizing elements of V4 model document into layers. A common drop-down menu that includes commands for file operations, such as Open, Save, and Print. A set of attributes for text characters. The size of a font, typically represented in points.

G
geometry area glyph Area of a document window in which application data are displayed and edited. A generic term used to refer to any graphic or pictorial image that can be used on a button or in a message box. Compare icon.

H
handle Help menu An interface element added to an object that provides a control point for moving, sizing, reshaping, or other operations pertaining to that object. A common drop-down menu that includes commands that provide access to Help information or other forms of user assistance. See also context-sensitive Help, and task-oriented Help. See cascading menu. To continue pressing a keyboard key, or mouse button. The specific portion of the pointer (or pointing device) that defines the exact location, or object, to which a user is pointing.

hierarchical menu hold down hot spot

I
icon inactive window A pictorial representation of an object. Compare glyph. A window in which a user's input is not currently being directed. An inactive window is typically distinguished by the color of its title bar. Compare active window. The ability to edit an OLE embedded object in place, without opening it into its own window. The location where text or graphics will be inserted (also referred to as the caret). Also used for text box controls to indicate input focus.

in-place activation insertion point

interoperability

Ability to exchange data between CATIA Version 4 and Version 5. Ability to exchange Version 5 data between Version 5 workshops Ability to exchange data between Version 5 and OLE-compliant applications.

J
jump A special form of a link that navigates to another location (also referred to as a hyperlink).

L
label landscape link The text (or graphic) that identifies a control (also referred to as a caption). An orientation where the long dimension of a rectangular area (for example, screen or paper) is horizontal. (v.) To form a connection between two objects. (n)) A reference to an object that is linked to another object. See also OLE linked object. The descriptive form of referring to the location of a link source (also referred to as a moniker). A standard Windows control that displays a list of choices. See also extended selection list box.

link path list box

M
marquee maximize MDI menu menu bar menu button menu item menu title See region selection and bounding outline. To make a window its largest size. See also minimize. See multiple document interface. A list of textual or graphical choices from which a user can choose. See also contextual menu. A horizontal bar at the top of a window, below the title bar, that contains menus. A command button that displays a menu. A choice on a menu. A text or graphic label that designates a particular menu. For drop-down menus, the titles is the entry in the menu bar; for cascading menus the menu title is the name of its parent menu item. A secondary window that is displayed to inform a user about a particular condition. Compare dialog box, palette window, and property sheet.

message box

minimize mirror model model document most recently used mouse

multiple document interface (MDI)

To minimize the size of a window: in some cases, this means to hide the window. See also maximize. An operation creating a 3D object by duplicating an initial object. The duplication is defined by symmetry. CATIA Version 4 model. Document containing a CATIA Version 4 model. List of most recently used files (MRU) located in the File menu for easy access. A commonly used input device that has one or more buttons used to interact with a computer. It is also used as a generic term to include other pointing devices that operate similarly (for example, trackballs and head pointers). A technique for managing a set of windows whereby documents are opened into windows (sometimes called child windows) that are constrained to a single primary (parent) window. See child window, and parent window.

O
object OLE An entity or component identifiable by a user that can be distinguished by its properties, operations, and relationships. Object Linking and Embedding. The name that describes the technology and interface for implementing support for object interaction. A data object that retains the original editing and operating functionality of the application that created it, while physically residing in another document. An object that represents or provides an access point to another object that resides at another location in the same container or a different, separate container. See also link. A generic term that refers to the actions that can be done to or with an object. A standard Windows control that allows a user to select from a fixed set of mutually exclusive choices (also referred to as a radio button). Compare check box.

OLE embedded object OLE linked object

operation option button

P
package parent window An OLE encapsulation of a file so that it can be embedded in an OLE container. A primary window that provides window management for a set of child windows. See also child window and multiple document interface.

point

pointer portrait press preview progress indicator property push button

(v.) To position the pointer over a particular object an location. (n.) A unit of measurement for type (1 point equals approximately 1/72 inch). A graphic image displayed on the screen that indicates the location of a pointing devices (also referred to as a cursor). An orientation where the long dimension of a rectangular area (for example, screen or paper) is vertical. To press and release a keyboard key. See also click. Tool allowing you to view a document or album image prior to printing. Any form of feedback that provides the user with information about the state of a process. Attribute or characteristic of an object that define its state, appearance, or value. See command button.

R
radio button range selection redo reference Help See option button. See contiguous selection. Repeat the last operation. A form of online Help information that can contain conceptual and explanatory information. Compare task-oriented Help and context-sensitive Help. A selection technique that involves dragging out a bounding outline (also referred to as a marquee) to define the selected objects. Click using the right mouse button (to display contextual menu).

region selection

right-click

S
scale scroll scroll arrow button Operation that resizes the contents of document prior to printing or previewing. To move the view of an object or information to make a different portion visible. A component of a scroll bar that allows the information to be scrolled by defined increments when the user clicks it. The direction of the arrow indicates the direction in which the information scrolls. A standard Windows control that supports scrolling.

scroll bar

scroll box

section view select selection selection handle

selection set Send To separator settings shell shortcut

shortcut icon shortcut key shortcut menu slider

specification tree

spin box

split standard view status bar

A component of a scroll bar that indicates the relative position (and optionally the proportion) of the visible information relative to the entire amount of information. The user can drag the scroll box to view areas of information not currently visible. See also scroll bar shaft. 3D view of a cross-section generated using a plane. To identify one or more objects upon which an operation can be performed. An object or set of objects hat have been selected. A graphical control point of an object that provides direct manipulation support for operations of that object, such as moving, sizing, or scaling. A group of selected objects that you can store and retrieve. Tool used for sharing document files with other users. An entry in a menu used to group menu items together. Set of setup parameters and user preferences stored in non-editable files. A generic term that refers to the interface that allows the user control over the system. A generic term that refers to an action or technique that invokes a particular command or performs an operation with less interaction than its usual method. A link presented as an icon that provides a user with access to another object. A keyboard key or key combination that invokes a particular command (also referred to as an accelerator key). See contextual menu. A standard Windows control that displays and sets a value from a continuous range of possible values, such as brightness or volume. Area of the document window reserved for viewing the design specifications of a part, presented in the form of a tree structure. A control composed of a text box and increment and decrement buttons that allow a user to adjust a values from a limited range of possible values. An operation allowing splitting 3D objects using a plane. Typical view available in 3D workshops: top, bottom, front, back, left, right, isometric. An area that allows the display of state information of the information being viewed in the window, typically places at the bottom of a window.

To halt a process or actions, typically without restoring the state before the process began. Compare cancel. STRIM/STYLER models Model files generated by STRIM or STYLER. These files have the same ".tdg" extensions. They are read and converted to Version 5 documents for further processing. submenu See cascading menu.

stop

T
taskbar task-oriented Help A special toolbar that docks on an edge of the desktop supplied by the system. The taskbar includes the Start button, buttons for each open primary window, and a status bar. Information about the steps involved in carrying out a particular task. Compare context-sensitive Help and reference Help. An object that automates the creation of new objects of a particular type. A standard Windows control in which a user can enter an edit text (also referred to as the edit field). A frame or special area that contains a set of other controls. A standard Windows control that provides a small pop-up window that provides descriptive text such as a label, for a control or graphic object.

template text box toolbar tooltip

U
unavailable undo user-defined view The state of a control or data whose normal functionality is not presently available to a user (also referred to as dimmed). To reverse one operation performed on an object. 3D view an end user can generate by customizing view parameters. The view can be named. Also referred to as named view.

V
View toolbar viewing tools Toolbar containing viewing tools. Tools for viewing contents of current document in different ways.

VRML

Virtual Reality Markup Language. A vector-based language for modeling three-dimensional environments. It sends ASCII text files over the Internet, which are translated by the VRML viewing engine at the other end. VRML complements HTML. This format is useful for viewing Version 5 data using a Web browser.

W
window A standard Windows object that displays information. A window is a separately controllable area of the screen that typically has a rectangular border. See also primary window and secondary window. Set of tools for completing specific tasks. Each type of document can be edited with a document-specific set of tools. A window or task management technique that consists of a container holding a set of objects, where the windows of the contained objects are constrained to a parent window. Similar to the multiple document interface, except that the window displayed within the parent window are of objects that are also contained in the workspace.

workbench

workspace

Index
Symbols & Numerics A B G H O P U V C I Q W D L R Z E M S F N T

Index

Numerics
3D compass free rotation angle locking current orientation manipulation manipulation bounding box manipulation handle privileged plane snapping to selected objects viewpoint manipulation

Index

A
Accelerate command actions redoing repeating undoing activating viewing tools Add to favorites command adding PostScript fonts printer Advanced mode search album deleting images previewing images printing images renaming images saving images to other formats album Album icon Album... command

Apply Customized View command applying colors attribute search automatic saving

Index

B
back standard views banner options printing bitstream fonts bottom standard views bounding outline brightness light source

Index

C
Calibration settings customizing capture options Capture toolbar Capture... command capturing images selected areas of images simple images Cascade command Catalog Editor settings customizing Catalog Editor toolbars CATOptionsMgt command catsite.DEFAULT_DS_CODE_PAGE CGM formats changing view client ID customizing Close command closing documents

code page standard Collapse All command collapsing specification tree collision detection Walk Mode color light source color options printing colors applying customizing combination of search criteria search command list viewing Command List command command properties customizing commands Accelerate Add to favorites... Album... Apply Customized View Capture... Cascade CATOptionsMgt

Close Collapse All Command List Control Points Copy Customize Cut Decelerate Delete... Depth Effect... Desk Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD) Edit... (contextual) Examine mode Expand First Level Expand Second Level Fit All In Fly Full Screen Geometry Geometry Overview Graphic Properties Ground Hide/Show Intersecting Trap Lighting... Links...

Lock Current Orientation Lock Privileged Plane Orientation Parallel to Screen Look At Magnifier Make Privileged Plane Most Visible Make YZ the Privileged Plane command Named Views... Neon Light New Font New from... New Window Next View No Light No Show Normal View Open... options Other Layers... Other Selection... Paint Stroke Pan Parallel Paste Paste Special... Perspective Polygonal Trap Preview View

Print Print Setup Printer Setup... Propagate directory Properties Quick Print Redo Repeat Reset Compass Rotate Save Save All Save As... Save Management... Scale Planes Screen mode Search Search... Select Selection Sets... Selection Trap Send To Directory Send To Mail Settings Management Shading (SHD) Shading with Edges (SHD+E) Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges

Single Light Snap automatically to selected object Specifications Specifications Overview Swap Hide/Show Text Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Toolbars Tools-Options Turn Head Two Lights Undo Video... Viewer mode Visualization Filters... Walk Wireframe (NHR) Zoom Area Zoom In Zoom Out compatibility table compressing images compression-decompression parameters configuring printer

contrast light source Control Points command Copy command Copy icon copying data to directory or diskette images to the clipboard objects creating new document from existing one Ctrl-clicking Customize command customizing Calibration settings Catalog Editor settings client ID colors command properties Devices Document settings Font settings fonts for displaying geometry area texts fonts for displaying texts fonts on UNIX fonts on Windows icon size Licensing settings

Linetype Linetype settings Macro settings Material Library settings Navigation settings Performance (display) settings Performances print settings Rendering settings Statistics Thickness settings toolbars tooltips Tree options user dictionary user schema ID view mode Visualization settings Cut command cutomizing General settings cutting objects

Index

D
data copying to directory or diskette sending in the mail Decelerate command declaring parameters in V4 Delete... command deleting images from the album objects Depth Effect... command depth effects Desk command Devices customizing diagrams settings Display the preselection navigator after...seconds option displaying document links graphic properties preselection navigator displaying hidden objects

DLNames document environment document links displaying editing Document settings customizing documents closing creating new from existing one managing save opening recently used saving all saving existing documents saving for the first time or under another name saving in other formats window layout windows dragging and dropping icons objects Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD) command

Index

E
Edges graphic properties edges highlighting Edit... contextual command editing document links graphic properties Enable independent saves option entering data power input mode Erase icon Examine Mode navigating Examine mode command Expand First Level command Expand Second Level command expanding specification tree

Index

F
favorites search language Favorites mode search file printing to FileDesk Fill graphic properties filter option search Fit All In command Fit in Page option Fit to option fitting all in geometry area Fly command Fly Mode font formats Font settings customizing fonts display and printed output

fonts fonts (Version 4) fonts (version 5) fonts for displaying geometry area texts customizing fonts for displaying texts customizing fonts on UNIX customizing fonts on Windows customizing free rotation angle 3D compass front standard views full screen Full Screen command

Index

G
General mode search General settings cutomizing geometry overview geometry area fitting all in geometry area Geometry command Geometry Overview command graphic properties displaying Edges editing Fill Layers Lines and Curves Pick Points Show Transparency

Graphic Properties command Graphic Properties toolbar Ground command

Index

H
hand tracking virtual reality head tracking virtual reality Hide/Show command hiding objects toolbars highlighting edges

Index

I
Icon Browser icon size customizing icons dragging and dropping image orientation printing image position and size printing images capturing compressing printing Intersecting Trap command iso standard views

Index

L
layer box Layers graphic properties layers adding and naming assigning objects left standard views Licensing settings customizing light source brightness color contrast specular intensity light source lighting effects Lighting... command line lists settings Lines and Curves graphic properties Linetype customizing

Linetype settings customizing linked document localization Links... command Lock Current Orientation command Lock Privileged Plane Orientation Parallel to Screen command locking current compass orientation privileged plane Look At command looking at objects

Index

M
Macro settings customizing Magnifier... command magnifying Make Privileged Plane Most Visible command Make YZ the Privileged Plane command managing document save manipulating objects using Edit... command objects using mouse and compass viewpoints using mouse and compass manipulation 3D compass manipulation bounding box 3D compass manipulation handle 3D compass mapping Material Library settings customizing measuring objects

Menu bar More... option search mouse viewing tools mouse speed movie replay parameters multi-documents printing multipiped session virtual reality

Index

N
Named Views... command navigating Advanced Fly Mode Advanced Walk Mode Beginner`s Fly Mode Beginner`s Walk Mode Examine Mode Walk Mode Navigation settings customizing Neon Light command New Font command New from... command New Window command Next View command No Fitting option No Light command No Show command Normal View command

Index

O
objects copying cutting deleting dragging and dropping hiding measuring pasting OLE-compliant documents on UNIX printing Open... command opening recently used documents operating signs search search language operators search language options commands Options icon Options settings

Other Layers... command Other Selection... command overview geometry specification tree

Index

P
page orientation printing Paint Stroke command Pan command panning paper format printing paper margins printing Parallel command parameters compression-decompression movie replay Paste command Paste Special... command pasting objects pausing recording Performance (display) settings customizing Performances customizing

perspective and parallel view Perspective command Pick graphic properties pixel image formats Points graphic properties Polygonal Trap command PostScript fonts adding power input mode entering data running commands power input mode Preselect in geometry view option preselecting using pointer preselection navigator displaying using Preview icon previewing printing Previous View command print area Print command Print Preview print settings customizing

Print Setup command printer adding configuring removing setting up on UNIX testing printer configuration file printer properties Printer Setup... command printing banner options color options image orientation image position and size images images from the album multi-documents on UNIX page orientation paper format paper margins previewing quickly sheets test print job to file various options

privileged plane 3D compass locking swapping visible project resource management Propagate directory command properties search Properties command

Index

Q
Quick Print command quick search quickly printing

Index

R
recording interactions in video format pausing stopping video Redo command redoing actions removing printer renaming images in the album Rendering settings customizing Repeat command repeating actions Reset Compass command right standard views Rotate command rotating Routing Simulation

running commands power input mode

Index

S
Save All command Save as new option Save As... command Save command Save icon Save Management... command saving all documents automatic documents for the first time or under another name documents in other formats existing documents images to other formats Scale Planes command Screen mode command search Advanced mode attribute combination of search criteria Favorites mode filter option General mode

More... option operating signs properties search filters search language search language favorites operating signs operators search filters special characters syntax search language Search Order command Search... command searching by color by name by product properties by type lines by thickness or type objects belonging to a selection set visible or hidden elements Select command selected areas of images capturing selecting using Other Selection... command

using pointer using preselection navigator using selection sets using selection traps using the Search command (General Mode) Selection Sets... command Selection Trap command selection traps Send To Directory command Send To Mail command sending data in the mail separation code settings diagram how to specify without running a session line lists user dictionary Settings Management command Shading (SHD) command Shading with Edges (SHD+E) command Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges command sheets printing Shift-clicking Show graphic properties simple images

capturing Single Light command Snap automatically to selected object command snapping 3D compass to selected objects solid objects special characters search language specification tree specification tree collapsing expanding overview Specifications command Specifications Overview command specular intensity light source standard code page standard code page Standard toolbar standard views back bottom front iso left right top

standard views Statistics customizing stereoscopic viewing virtual reality stopping recording support virtual reality surfacic objects Swap Hide/Show command swapping privileged plane symbols syntax search language

Index

T
test print job printing testing printer Text command Thickness settings customizing Tile Horizontally command Tile Vertically command toolbars Capture Catalog Editor customizing Graphic Properties hiding Menu Standard View viewing Toolbars command Tools-Options command tooltips

customizing top standard views Transparency graphic properties Tree options customizing Turn Head command turning head Two Lights command

Index

U
Undo command undoing actions user dictionary customizing user dictionary settings user schema ID customizing user-defined toolbars user-defined views user-defined views settings user-defined workbenches using preselection navigator using selection sets selecting UUID

Index

V
various options printing Vector icon vector image formats video recording video format choosing recording interactions video properties Video... command view changing view mode customizing View toolbar Viewer mode command viewing along normal to plane command list objects against the ground toolbars viewing tools

activating keyboard mouse viewpoint manipulation 3D compass virtual reality hand tracking head tracking multipiped session stereoscopic viewing support VisionDome visible privileged plane VisionDome virtual reality Visual Basic Script (VBScript) visualization filter Visualization Filter Editor Visualization Filters... command Visualization settings customizing Visula Basic for applications (VBA)

Index

W
Walk command Walk Mode collision detection Wireframe (NHR) command workbench description

Index

Z
Zoom Area command Zoom In command Zoom Out command zooming in zooming in on area zooming out